Publish your SDG research in a Springer Nature journal or collection

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri May 22 2026

Your research relating to the Sustainable Development Goals contributes to academic knowledge that can impact the important work of policymakers, practitioners, and communities working to address urgent global challenges. In this post, we discuss how publishing your research as an article or as part of a collection at Springer Nature can give your work extended reach and impact. We also include a checklist to support you in getting started.   

Publishing your work as a journal article or in a journal collection makes it available to a broad audience of academics, practitioners, and policymakers. For research relating to the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), delivering timely, focused, and credible insights can contribute to shaping SDG policy. 

The article format: Why it works so well for SDG research 

The concise structure of an article gives the content clarity that allows policymakers, nongovernmental organisations, and researchers to understand and apply your findings. Journal articles are published and indexed rapidly, making their knowledge and insights discoverable and available.  

Those who work practically on evolving issues like climate resilience, poverty alleviation, gender equality, or sustainable cities, can get support from this knowledge and stay responsive. The peer review process that articles undergo lend the research rigour and authority that are important to influence decisions and shape interventions.  

And when your work is published with a publisher that actively supports and champions the SDGs, its reach and relevance become even more meaningful. Springer Nature is committed to amplifying SDG articles’ visibility, strengthening its credibility, and ensuring it contributes to the broader global effort toward a more sustainable and equitable future. 

Why publish your SDG research in a Springer Nature journal or collection? 

Springer Nature is committed to supporting SDG-related research and amplifying it across disciplines and sectors. We offer one of the world’s broadest portfolios for SDG-related research, spanning thousands of journals and specialist collections. Through the Springer Nature SDG Programme, we support SDG-related research and amplify it across disciplines and sectors.  

With more than one million SDG relevant articles and chapters published since the SDGs were introduced in 2015, and over 17 million citations for its SDG content, Springer Nature journals and collections offer a home for high quality research designed to create real world impact. Your work gains visibility among global research communities as well as the policymakers and practitioners who rely on evidence to drive the Goals forward. 

[pull out quote] Springer Nature data show that publishing in collections leads to 31% more citations, 30% more downloads, and 63% higher Altmetrics scores than articles published outside of a collection. 

Making impact with your SDG research, in academia and policy 

A special report from 2025, titled ‘From publication to policy,’ examined the influence of published research on policies linked to the SDGs, as a signal of real-world impact on internationally agreed priorities. It showed that SDG research is not only growing in volume but also demonstrates higher academic impact.

Fig2 - Average research impact © Springernature 2026
  

SDG articles received higher average citations, Altmetric scores (indicating attention), and full-text downloads than non-SDG articles. But for the SDGs, impact beyond academia is central. The report shows that academic research is cited in SDG-related policy more often than in wider policy. Research is being used in policy and practice to support evidence, justify recommendations, or shape policy directions.  

Our report shows that SDG research is being used well beyond academia, actively informing policy and realworld decisionmaking.” 
Nicola Jones, Director, Springer Nature SDG Programme 

For maximum reach for your SDG research, publish open access  

The report also explored the influence of different publishing models, and found that publishing open access significantly enhances the societal impact of SDG-aligned research. By removing barriers to readership, your work becomes instantly accessible to policymakers, educators, nongovernmental organisations, and communities.  

Springer Nature supports the broadest possible dissemination of research central to sustainable development. Much of the SDG-related research published in Springer Nature is openly available for anyone to read. In 2025, 62% of Springer Nature’s SDG-related articles were published open access.  

How publishing in a collection can amplify your SDG research  

A collection is a curated group of journal articles that focus on a specific theme or emerging topic, sometimes also known as a special issue. Springer Nature collections create a dynamic platform for authors working on similar research to share insights and discoveries. This affinity makes research more discoverable and relevant for related and interdisciplinary audiences. 

Many of these collections have an SDG-focus and engage with broad audiences that share an interest in the relevant SDGs. In 2025 alone, Springer Nature launched 2,180 SDG-related collections. 

Publishing in a collection is an effective way to increase the reach and relevance of your work, and to transform promising research into real-world impact. Curated by expert guest editors, SDG-focused collections bring together related research and make it easier for readers to discover and contextualise your article. The various Springer Nature collections that advance the SDGs highlight impactful research and attract readership. 

Just as importantly, publishing in a collection places your work within a carefully curated and trustworthy research environment, supported by expert editorial oversight and integrity safeguards that help uphold the quality, credibility, and relevance of the research it contains. That focus on quality is also reflected in author feedback: last year, 87% of authors were happy with their collections publishing experience

“Publishing in a collection has given this research much greater visibility, specifically because it showcases the real-world application in Malawi. This has acted as a powerful proof of concept. [...] Collections offer an excellent opportunity to ensure one’s research contributes directly to a specific, impactful conversation, reaching the very people who can act on it. It’s about getting the work in front of the right audience, not just the biggest one.” 
Megha Rao, Research Fellow for the Thanzi Labwino (Better Health) project 

Checklist: How to get started and publish your SDG article  

  • Identify which SDG(s) your work addresses.  
  1. Use Springer Nature’s SDG Programme page and its hubs dedicated to each of the SDGs to explore and identify topics.  
  • Select journals or collections aligned with your discipline and SDG topic
  1. Explore with the Journal Finder and consider SDG badges on journals that support the SDGs. 
  2. On Springer Nature Link, use the SDG filter to refine your search and identify journals or calls for papers for relevant collections. 
  • Review the aims, scope, editorial policies, and submission requirements of relevant journals
  1. Check the collections and updates pages of journals of interest to explore calls for papers open to submissions.  
  2. If you can’t find a call for papers relevant to your work, consider proposing an SDG-related collection to the journal’s editor-in-chief.  
  1. Learn more about open access journals, and explore the glossary of terms to help you navigate the world of open access science. 
  2. Find out about funding availability for publishing open access.  
  • Highlight the SDG relevance of your article.  
  1. Alongside the usual priorities when preparing your manuscript, such as clarity and methodological rigour, make the connection to the relevant SDG(s) explicit, and where appropriate include policy analyses and practical recommendations. 
  • Extend visibility post publication.  
  1. After publishing in a Springer Nature journal or collection, consider writing a ‘Behind the Paper’ post on Springer Nature’s Research Communities. This special glimpse behind the research is tagged with relevant SDGs on the Research Communities, further amplifying the reach of your work and the potential for building new connections.  

Springer Nature is committed to advancing progress on the SDGs by publishing high quality, impactful research and ensuring it reaches the audiences who can use it to drive change. Publish your SDG research in a Springer Nature journal or collection to support these efforts, and get our support to making your research count.  

Learn more about publishing in a Springer Nature journal or collection, including a step-by-step guide to walk you through the publication journey and information on open access publishing.  

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs,sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

Building trust at scale: using AI to strengthen the scientific record

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Thu May 21 2026

Each year, more than three million scholarly articles are added to the global scientific record, shaping decisions across medicine, public policy, climate action, economics and technology. As research volumes grow and AI becomes embedded across writing, discovery and evaluation, a central question emerges: how can science scale without losing credibility while meeting the challenges of our time?  

For science, scale without trust is not progress. At Springer Nature, trust is not assumed — it is the outcome of deliberate technical and editorial choices about where automation belongs and where responsibility must remain human. 

Quality and integrity are design choices 

Scientific publishing is fundamentally a validation process. From millions of annual submissions, only a proportion becomes part of the permanent scholarly record. In 2025, we received 3.1 million submissions and published 539,000 primary research articles, showing increased selectivity compared with the previous year and a deliberate focus on rigour and quality, supported by improved systems – not automation. 

At Springer Nature, we are using AI to augment human judgement, not replace it. Editorial responsibility remains with people, while technology operates within defined and auditable boundaries. This is because we believe, used well, AI improves consistency and sharpens focus. It allows editors and reviewers to direct their expertise where it matters most, without compromising quality, relevance or ethics. Publishing, at its best, makes responsibility explicit through shared standards, transparent decisions and consistent expectations across the whole research cycle. 

This approach depends on coherence. Today, more than half of our 3,000 journals run on a single end-to-end publishing platform, helping integrity and accountability scale with output.  

AI that sharpens focus, not noise 

Applied consistently, AI helps direct attention where expertise matters most. In 2025 alone, our AI‑assists enabled 586,000 journal transfer recommendations, 427,000 reviewer suggestions, and 1.58 million uses of journal‑finding tools. 

The impact is practical: better matching of work, reduced reviewer burden and faster time to decision. Faster outcomes do not mean weaker standards — they mean less wasted effort across a growing system. For researchers, this delivers clarity and confidence rather than complexity, reduces friction across the process, and ultimately frees up time and capacity for what matters most: discovery. 

Creating AI‑ready knowledge responsibly 

We are focusing on this because high‑quality research does more than inform today’s debates. It shapes the data foundations on which future discovery — more and more AI‑enabled — will depend.  

As search and discovery increasingly rely on summarized and synthesized outputs, trust depends on traceability: clear links back to primary sources, evidence, and editorial context. High‑quality metadata, attribution, and structured content are therefore essential to preserve the distinction between evidence and inference. 

This is why investment matters. Since 2021, Springer Nature has invested €188 million in technology and talent, including in research integrity, supporting resilient infrastructure and the long‑term stewardship of the scientific record. 

Designing the future of trusted discovery 

We believe technology can accelerate research and strengthen trust at the same time. Doing so requires focus, system‑level coherence and a whole‑cycle view of how scientific knowledge is created, assessed and shared. 

For researchers, this reduces friction and frees time for new discoveries. For society, it means confidence in the evidence underpinning critical decisions. And for the future of science, it means progress built on dependable foundations. 

At Springer Nature, this is why we invest in people and systems, not shortcuts, and apply AI deliberately, with human judgement at the core. Trust at scale is not a constraint on innovation — it is what makes innovation meaningful. 

We will explore these themes further at TECH by Handelsblatt Europe 2026, examining how AI can speed up discovery while safeguarding trust and credibility in science. 


Related Tags:

Inclusion is in the details

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Wed May 20 2026

This Global Accessibility Awareness Day, UX Researcher and Generation Valuable mentee Gonzalo Gonzales shares his experience of the Valuable 500 initiative and the importance of small details when it comes to inclusion.

In December 2025, 500 organisations came together in Tokyo for the world’s first accountability summit on disability inclusion in business: SYNC25. As a mentee in Springer Nature’s Generation Valuable programme, I attended to share experiences with peers from across the Valuable 500: a global partnership that brings together companies to support disability inclusion. Generation Valuable is its reciprocal mentoring programme, pairing senior executives with disabled leaders.

Safety makes disclosure possible

My disclosure came a few months into my journey at Springer Nature. I had only received my diagnosis not long before joining, so I was still learning how to talk about it. I was also learning how to accept myself with this new part of me. The only reason I could be open that early was that the environment felt safe, and my manager was supportive.

Disability inclusion, by design

At the event, leaders spoke about disability inclusion as a strategy, by design, and about inclusion as something that shapes innovation and builds engagement. I went to SYNC25 to learn from different disabled and neurodivergent perspectives and share my experience as a neurodivergent mentee. I spoke about how my mentor at SN, Marc Spenlé, COO, helped me shape how I try to lead by putting authenticity at the centre of our relationship.

For me, mentorship is not magic. It is built on trust, listening, and clear objectives. It is also built around safety, which matters a lot to me as an autistic person.

From mentee to microphone

The day before I spoke at SYNC25, I barely enjoyed the beauty of Tokyo. I was too nervous about speaking in front of strangers on a very large, unfamiliar stage. My mentor, Marc, gave me three reminders that shaped my entire participation:

Be yourself.
Treat it as a learning experience.
Have fun, enjoy what you’re doing.

This advice fit our mentorship perfectly. Our relationship revolves around authenticity, mutual learning, and enjoying what we were experiencing. So, I used it. I scrawled my quite structured notes into a little notepad and got to the stage.

I shared part of my life story as a neurodivergent immigrant. For a long time, I assumed I felt “different” mainly because of cultural differences, but not completely; it was more undiagnosed autism and ADHD.

I also talked about how “be yourself” made me react defensively the first time I heard it during mentoring, as if it were easy. In my life, being myself often came with risk. I could be judged or excluded because of my social differences. So, like many neurodivergent people, I tend to mask to protect myself.

I still mask sometimes. I understand the cost, and I know not everyone understands neurodiversity. In contrast, I have started speaking up more, initiating conversations, and showing up as a whole person. I think it is easier to build safety when you build trust from the start.

Inclusion shows up in the small things

Networking is not fun for me. Being AuDHD (autism + ADHD), I crave connection, but I process social cues differently and I need more time to respond. Fast-paced situations can feel overwhelming.

But something small happened after my talk. People started approaching me. They shared personal stories, dinner, and their big projects for the future. I had never talked so casually with a CEO of a global firm before. I expected distance and formality. Instead, it was just a very human conversation.

He seemed genuinely moved by what I said, partly because he was the uncle of a young autistic child. He was kind, authentic, and open. That moment felt like a reflection of what I had just spoken about, and it mirrored the same safety, kindness, and respect I have been shown by my manager and my mentor.

Bringing it back to my day-to-day work

My day-to-day role is UX research in an educational digital product. I am not an accessibility specialist, and I am not an inclusion specialist. What I do understand much better now is how inclusion shows up in everyday work.

It shows up in who gets invited into conversations, whose perspectives carry more weight, and whether barriers are brushed aside as exceptions or treated as a sign that the way we do research is unintentionally excluding people.   

What I asked leaders to do

I closed my participation at SYNC25 by urging leaders not to be afraid to invest in disabled and neurodivergent talent. Disability is not a deficit. My disability has helped me shape how I lead in certain ways, but it is not my defining factor. I am a whole person. That is why I have recently taken on a mentoring role focused on neuroinclusion, to support leaders who want to reflect on how their interactions can include or exclude neurodivergent colleagues.

Treating people with respect, making accommodations ordinary tools for performance, and not excluding people unintentionally are the details that decide whether people feel safe enough to contribute fully.

One line I heard stayed with me: “Disclosure happens only when respect is guaranteed.” I have felt that respect from my manager and from so many of my colleagues at Springer Nature. It has shaped what I believe inclusion can look like, especially through mentorship, safety, and the details that help people thrive.

Related Tags:

China’s oncology breakthroughs: Key takeaways

T
The Link
By: undefined, Wed May 20 2026

Among the regulatory reforms China made in 2015 and 2020 were provisions for priority review and breakthrough therapy designations. Anti-cancer therapeutics, especially for deadly and to date difficult-to-treat cancers like pancreatic cancer, would clearly fall into the first category. And attacking these diseases with new biologics (monoclonal antibodies and other new technologies) would fall into the second. And when you have these breakthrough technologies applied to treating these cancers, you get a flowering of promising (and already on-the-market) anti-cancer therapies flowing out of China.

Monoclonal antibody technology, as well as other advanced biologic and biotechnology approaches (including using AI for drug discovery, see Insilico, specifically), allow these companies to focus on specific disease states. For example, cancers that have, so far, been intractable (like pancreatic cancer or multiple myeloma) where there’s opportunity to not only save lives (the first priority, obviously) but also commercial opportunity.  

AdisInsights recent report, Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers and Shakers looks in depth at the portfolios and pipelines of ten of China’s most innovative biotech and pharmaceutical companies, including:

  • Akeso, Inc.    
  • 3SBio 
  • Innovent Biologics                          
  • Legend Biotech 
  • Duality Biologics  
  • Lepu Biopharma
  • Insilico Medicine
  • Sinopharm
  • WuXi Biologics
  • Sciwind Biosciences                     

Many of these companies have already-approved or late-stage therapies for a variety of cancers. Below you’ll find a brief summary of some of these, but you’ll find much more detail in the full report.

Company

Therapy 

Indication 

Mechanism 

Trial Stage 

Akeso

Ivonescimab 

PD-L1+ NSCLC

Bispecific PD‑1/VEGF antibody (ADCC)

Phase III (HARMONi‑2)

3SBio

SSGJ‑707

Advanced NSCLC & solid tumors

Bispecific antibody

Phase II → Phase III

Innovent Biologics

Sintilimab

Multiple cancers

PD‑1 inhibitor

Approved (China)

Innovent Biologics

IBI3009

SCLC & neuroendocrine tumors

ADC with topo I inhibitor

Clinical (Australia)

Legend Biotech

CAR‑T products

NHL, ALL

Autologous CAR‑T cell therapy

Clinical-stage

Duality Biologics

BNT323

HER2+ breast cancer

ADC

Phase III success

Lepu Biopharma

MRG003, 007

Solid tumors

ADCs

IND (China)

Lepu Biopharma

MRG003

Nasopharyngeal carcinoma 

ADC

Clinical development

Novel technologies

As you see above, these companies have focused on newer biotechnology to develop these therapies, monoclonal and bispecific antibodies, in particular. But these companies’ approaches aren’t limited to that.  

Antibody technologies give these companies the ability to identify tumour targets, and to develop monoclonal and bispecific antibodies to go after those targets. This opens up whole approaches to treating cancers, like pancreatic cancer, that have, to date, been extremely hard to treat.

Some companies, like Insilico Medicine, are adding generative artificial intelligence (AI) to that approach.  

Insilico Medicine, for example, focuses on using AI to help in drug development. Insilico uses AI to create novel molecules with custom properties, to optimise existing compounds, and to enhance R&D efficiency. By analysing vast chemical and biological datasets, Insilico’s AI can identify potential drug candidates faster and more accurately than traditional approaches, reducing both development time and costs.

Commercialisation and market access

However, even developing therapies with these advanced technologies, and even being able to shepherd them through clinical trials to local approval, these China-based companies face challenges in bringing them to market around the world.  

That’s where partnerships with global pharmaceutical firms come in. Companies like Pfizer and Merck already have licensing deals to bring some of these breakthroughs to the global market. This combination of potential blockbusters that are either already approved and licensed or in late-stage trials in China, combined with the need to commercialise them globally presents rich deal-making opportunities for global companies.

Insights for oncology R&D teams

An important part of the future of cancer treatment, maybe even the eventual end of cancer, is taking place in China. With robust pipelines in late clinical trials based on advanced techniques and technologies, the ten companies profiled in the report represent both examples and opportunities for global oncology R&D teams.

Find out more in AdisInsights’ report, Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers and Shakers. 

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Bioinformatician Johannes Koester on embodying the spirit of open science

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed May 20 2026

This is the third blog post in a new series in which researchers share their experiences with open science practices, and reflect on the impact that sharing open data, code, and protocols can have.   

Johannes Köster is Professor for Bioinformatics and Computational Oncology at the Institute for AI and Medicine, University of Duisburg-Essen, Germany. As author of the open-source workflow management system, Snakemake, and founder of the Bioconda project, Johannes Köster has extensive experience with open science practices and publishing, with Nature Portfolio articles including Applying the FAIR Principles to computational workflows (Scientific Data), Neoadjuvant nivolumab with or without relatlimab in resectable non-small-cell lung cancer: a randomized phase 2 trial (Nature Medicine), and Bioconda: sustainable and comprehensive software distribution for the life sciences (Nature Methods).  

We asked Professor Köster to share his perspective as an advocate of data sharing and embracing open science in every area of research practice.

How did you first become interested in open science practices? 

I think it was early during my PhD thesis when my group was approached by another that did research in reproducibility and workflow management. They asked, ‘How does this apply to Bioinformatics, actually?’ At that time, we were using a very old but relevant tool to ensure reproducibility of our data analysis. 

Upon this request, we sat together and drafted ideas on how we could make this more ergonomic and convenient for bioinformaticians, such as workflow management, reproducibility, and so on. This is, of course, only a part of open science, but it was the part that drove me to the topic. We brainstormed a bit; I came up with an idea for a syntax and the others did too. I then kind of converged those three ideas into a prototype. That was Snakemake. 

I implemented that over a couple of days and refined it for about one year. Suddenly, it was so useful for the entire group. When we published it, it was immediately very useful for many others. This became quite important for my thesis. In principle, this is exactly what brought me to open science: reproducibility and thinking, ‘How can we actually make our data analysis more accessible to others?’ It’s not only about automation but about making this accessible and understandable. That is, for me, what open science is or should be about. 

What open science practices do you use? 

Whatever I'm involved in, I ensure we publish all the code and data whenever possible. With data, it sometimes depends. When we can, we rely entirely on open data that is also accessible to everybody. Sometimes, like for example in the Nature Medicine paper we published last year, it's not possible because it's German patient data and we are not allowed to just disclose it for everybody, but at least it's uploaded to a repository where you can ask for access. It's a bit more cumbersome than just hitting a button and automatically downloading everything, but this is the best we can do in such a case.  

Protocols are, for me, inside the code. We try to write code in a way that’s human readable, not just dumping some stuff that we run quickly for publication but making sure that it's also reusable and readable by others. This is, I think, an important aspect that is often not fully recognised by reviewers or journal editors. It’s nice that journals sometimes try to get people to publish those things along with the paper, which is already an improvement compared to before, but the quality of what is published matters as well, I think. For me, this is particularly important and a mission. 

What motivated you to adopt these practices?  

“It’s very important that code is seen as a primary research output.” 

  Johannes Köster, Institute for AI and Medicine, University of Duisburg-Essen, Germany 

I think the true value, especially of the stuff that comes as auxiliary to the actual manuscript, lies in two things. First of all, I hope that it makes it easier for readers and reviewers to judge whether the work was valid, both from a methods perspective and a statistical perspective. Doing a data analysis is much more than what you usually read in the methods section of a manuscript, like ‘we applied a t-test’ [a statistical test that compares the means of two samples]. Often, it’s not even specified whether it was one-sided or two-sided, or what the exact thresholds were. For a t-test it’s easy, but there are much more complex methods, and all the parameters matter — how you filter the data matters, and so on. That level of detail you only see in the code. Therefore, I think it’s very important that code is seen as a primary research output. 

The other aspect is not about transparency or judgement, but I think people are reinventing the wheel all the time. Not so much in methods papers but in papers that analyse some big dataset. All the code is rewritten constantly because it wasn’t done in a way where you can actually reuse it and apply it to new datasets. I think this is the second big value of this approach: ideally, each publication is made of building blocks that can be used by others as well, at least in part. This is what we should all aim for because then people can concentrate on the actual big questions and don’t have to deal with all these technical difficulties every time. 

Have you ever faced any particular challenges or barriers in undertaking open science practices?  

There are quite a few barriers or challenges. One I mentioned already, especially as somebody who wants to use open data analyses by others, which is people don't take enough care in publishing and documenting those parts properly. In part, I think this is a matter of culture on the principal investigator (PI) level because they don't care so much how their postdocs or PhD students publish those parts, as long as they can ‘tick the box’. 

Another is for open access. The pricing is not always reasonable. It might be justified, but it's causing discrepancies or imbalances between countries and research groups. There are groups that have a lot of funding, and for them it's much easier to publish high impact because they can easily afford it. Also, there are countries where it's much easier to afford than other countries. That causes science to be a hierarchical system. That's a bad side effect of open access, I think, because everybody wants to publish open access nowadays or most people. It means some people need to choose a journal by just the price, and that is not good. 

Is there a particular success story or example you’re proud of that illustrates the benefits of open science?  

For me, personally, it's definitely the story about Snakemake and Bioconda because they enabled a lot of things for me. First of all, having these tools available, being able to use them, and show others how to use them in unrelated publications made me quite well known in the community. This enabled a lot of career steps for me. For example, one year before the end of my PhD thesis, I was asked to be a postdoc in the lab of Shirley Liu in Harvard. I would never have thought of applying for a postdoc in Harvard if I had not been contacted by her. She only contacted me because she knew about my open science stuff, so that was a huge opener for me. Of course, by just having something you maintain for a long time, you get regular users and they tend to collaborate more with you. That opens a lot of doors. 

How do you advise early career researchers on open science best practices? 

“When thinking about the code you publish along with your open science, make sure you use quality control tools.” 

                                              Johannes Köster, Institute for AI and Medicine, University of Duisburg-Essen, Germany 

When thinking about the code you publish along with your open science, make sure you use quality control tools. There are lots of them available for virtually every programming language. The benefit is, of course, that maintainability improves and you less frequently run into issues, such as having a shortfall in your analysis that you don’t see until publication. 

Speaking about tooling, AI is also a tool one needs to mention. It can be very useful in terms of, let’s say, reviewing your code, but you have to be super careful with that. I would not use it in a generative way, especially not for science. You need to be very sure about every single method and parameter, and AI is not about being sure. What I’m really worried about is paper writing with AI. To me, writing a paper is the process of getting your research idea into a natural language. This process is part of the actual research because you need to think about everything again, and sometimes while doing that, you get new ideas or spot a mistake that you wouldn’t if you just prompted AI to write this paragraph for you. 

This process can be painful, of course, especially if you’re a beginner, but if we start to skip that, we will have a huge problem with the quality of research. It also applies to writing code, such as writing the analysis or engaging in the cognitive process of solving a problem in a scientific way. If you just delegate things like that to AI, we are lost, I think. With this I don’t want to say that AI is not a useful addition and assistance, but we should not let ourselves be seduced to use it as a shortcut. 

Are there any gaps in support or resources about open science you’d like to see addressed? 

Open science gives you a lot, but it's very hard to get recognition for that (apart from personal relationships or career steps) in terms of, let's say, metrics, for how successful you are as a researcher. In terms of software, even if it's a small, niche project, you ideally still need to maintain it for a very long time. This is often not recognised in academia. People look at citations and probably download counts, but even for niche projects, it can still be a huge benefit for the scientific community if the person who developed it maintains it for a long time. I think we need to find metrics we can have for that as well, like continuous maintenance and proper user support, and so on. 

Another gap relates to how we handle peer review. So far, reviews are a service that researchers do for others and for the journals, of course, because it wouldn't work if everybody just published and nobody reviewed. It makes total sense, but it also means that it's often anonymous and the review is not open science, although there are exceptions to that. I like this idea of the review being a publication in and of itself because that's also science, and this is something that deserves recognition. Why not make this as open as a research artefact and let others read the review? 

Currently, we think once the paper is published, the review process is over, and then we have just the authors and the readers. There's usually no direct feedback mechanism. That's something journals could think about adopting as well, allowing reviews by readers. A platform that already explores this direction is Octopus,where peer reviews get their own DOI, becoming a citable and public entity. 

What advice would you give to researchers considering adopting open science practices?  

“There's nothing better in training you as a scientist or a computer scientist than participating in open source and getting in contact with others.” 

            Johannes Köster, Institute for AI and Medicine, University of Duisburg-Essen, Germany 

When I teach students, I tell them all the time, think about open-source projects you could contribute to or come up with your own. "There's nothing better in training you as a scientist or a computer scientist than participating in open source and getting in contact with others."  

Regarding taking care of open science and reproducibility in the publication process, I would say just do it, even if your PI doesn't care. They will tell you, ‘We have to publish this paper next Friday,’ and then, of course, every PhD student will think, ‘Oh, I just need to get this done.’ In the end, it goes into review, but the reviewers want some additional work to be done or criticise a certain step of the analysis. Now they need to go back to the work they did in a rush and basically repeat it because they didn’t do it in a properly documented and automated way the first time. 

What I want to say is that it usually pays off if you spend this extra time thinking about being reproducible and open, in the sense that later on you have less work to do and can build upon your previous work. By doing that, you get automatic citations because if others use your code for their analysis, they have to cite you. I can definitely see from my own practices that it nearly always pays off in the end. 

Learn more about open science and sharing research data, code and protocols & methods openly 


Johannes Koester © Springer Nature

Johannes Köster, PhD, Professor for Bioinformatics and Computational Oncology at the Institute for AI in Medicine, University of Duisburg-Essen, Germany

Johannes Köster is professor for Bioinformatics and Computational Oncology at the Institute for AI in Medicine, University of Duisburg-Essen, with a focus on algorithm engineering and data analysis. Johannes Köster studied computer science at the University of Dortmund, did his PhD at the TU Dortmund, and was a postdoc at the Dana Farber Cancer Institute, Harvard University and Centrum Wiskunde & Informatica (CWI). 

 Johannes Köster is the author of the workflow management system Snakemake and the founder of the Bioconda project for sustainably distributing bioinformatics software as easily installable packages. He is also the author of the Rust-Bio library, and works in the field of Bayesian statistics in order to provide algorithms for analysis of high-throughput data while capturing and quantifying all known sources of uncertainty, thereby providing more reproducible predictions.

Related content:

  • Open science conversations: 
  1. Building trust through transparency: An open science conversation with Geir Kjetil Sandve 
  2. Open science, altruism and impact: An interview with clinical geneticist Zornitza Stark
  •  Best practices for transparency and reuse: 
  1. How to share your research protocols and methods openly 

  2. How to share your research code openly 

  • Supporting open science practices: 
  1. Why share your research data? 

  2. Why sharing protocols matters 

  3. Why sharing your code matters 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

High standards, real support: peer review at Discover

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed May 20 2026

Peer review is a defining part of publishing: a chance to have your work stress tested by experts and strengthened before it reaches the wider community. After months of developing your paper and choosing a journal with care, that review period can feel like a pause, but it’s also where valuable, field-specific feedback can help move your research forward. Read on to hear how other researchers found the peer review process at Discover, so you know what to expect.

For many early career researchers (ECRs), the phrase “rigorous peer review” is meant to signal quality, and when the process is clear and constructive, it can do exactly that. But it’s not always easy to know what to expect: who will review your work, what kind of feedback will you receive, and how will the timeline unfold. The best experiences pair high standards with practical, actionable guidance and transparent communication, so you can improve your manuscript with confidence and keep moving.

Discover journals are built on a different premise: peer review should be a positive and constructive experience that significantly bolsters your research and professional growth. As part of Springer Nature's portfolio of over 600 fully open access (OA) journals, the 70+ Discover titles were created to improve how peer review works for authors, ensuring academic rigour and a supportive environment define our authors’ experience.   

What does rigour mean at Discover?

We address traditional publishing barriers such as opaque timelines and prestige bias by redefining rigour as follows: 

  • Subject-specific expertise: we aim to find reviewers as closely matched as possible to your specialism, ensuring you get useful feedback 
  • Actionable guidance: we routinely ask reviewers to provide feedback is structured to give authors clear, practical steps for improvement 
  • Transparency: you can track your manuscript from submission through to decision, with real-time updates available in your author dashboard 
  • Support: you will benefit from Springer Nature's established publishing systems, which ensure your work meets global ethical standards, receives expert editorial oversight, and is indexed upon publication. 

Rigour is one of four commitments, alongside representation, rapid publication, and wide-reaching impact, which ensure we provide an efficient path to publication for diverse researchers.

Want to hear what this looks like in practice? Watch the video below where our authors share real experiences of constructive, confidence-building peer review.

The Discover author experience

Our commitment to rigour is best reflected by the researchers around the world who have published with us. Here is how they describe their experience with us: 

Dr. Sara Causevic, a postdoctoral fellow at Stockholm University, published research in Discover Conservation on the use of AI and earth observation to protect forests. She describes the peer review process as rigorous but purposeful.

“The peer process was rigorous, but it was also very constructive. It pushed us to strengthen different sections of our paper, which were critical to ensure that our paper was still original and novel. Communication from the editorial team was clear throughout, and the paper moved from submission to publication in three to four months.” 


Sara Causevic, Discover Conservation 

Constructive feedback, delivered on time

Rigorous feedback is essential, but it lands much better within a transparent and supportive environment. Enoch Leung, a researcher in inclusive education at McGill University, Canada, describes what sets Discover Education apart. For Enoch, the value wasn’t just in the speed, but in the tone of the exchange.

“We felt like we were all contributing to the success of our article, really incorporating the feedback and elevating the manuscript to the next level.” 


Enoch Leung, Discover Education 

For Vicky Xu, a research associate at the University of Sydney, Australia, Discover Psychology’s visual timeline was central to making the review process less intimidating.  

Relevant feedback, professional standards 

Dr. Nasrin Sultana, of Hajee Mohammad Danesh Science and Technology University, Bangladesh, needed a journal that offered relevant, high-quality review. After previous experiences where feedback felt disconnected from her research, she was pleased to find the Discover Electronics review committee came back with the specificity she was looking for. She adds, “Their comments were actually related to the work; it really helped me to improve the quality of my paper.” 

While Dr Sultana found the exact guidance she needed, Paul Awoyera, an associate professor at Prince Mohammed bin Fahd University, Saudi Arabia, also had a positive experience with the Discover Sustainability team. He described it as professional and efficient, and the work as “a collaborative experience rather than just a transactional one.” 

Good is good enough: why you shouldn’t wait for perfection

The researchers featured here share a consistent message for ECRs approaching peer review for the first time: do not avoid it. 

Sara Causevic is direct: peer review can sound harsh, but she advises embracing it regardless. Some of the greatest improvements to her paper came directly from reviewer feedback. “Don't fear the peer review process. Embrace it. It will improve your paper — and don't take it personally.” 

Enoch Leung notes that waiting to produce a perfect manuscript will mean missing the opportunity for a critical external assessment. He thinks that feedback is part of the process, not a verdict on it. Atique Ishrak Anik, at Chittagong University of Engineering and Technology, Bangladesh, gives the best advice for anyone who might be feeling unsure about submitting: “peer review is not a criticism. It is a way to improve your work.”

Evaluating a journal: what to look for

Peer review is difficult to evaluate from the outside. When choosing a journal, ask: 

  • Are reviewers matched precisely to your specialism? 
  • Is feedback structured and actionable, or just generic? 
  • Does the editorial team communicate clearly throughout the process, with defined timelines? 

Every Discover title strives to ensure the answer to each of these questions is a definitive yes. Qualified reviewers, constructive feedback, and transparent communication are how we operate. 

You’ve done the hard work. Rigorous peer review ensures that your good work is scrutinised by experts, improved by specific feedback, and supported by a process that keeps you informed throughout. 

That is the experience the researchers featured here had with Discover journals. And it is exactly what the series was designed to provide. This year also marks a milestone for the series: Discover PsychologyDiscover Education, and Discover Sustainability, among several others, are turning five—and the stories shared above by authors from these title shows how we’re actively bringing that author experience to life across the series. 

If you want rigorous review without the guesswork, explore the Discover journal series, where defined timelines and clear editorial communication are part of the process. 

Featured research 

Sara Causevic, Discover Conservation  
  DOI: https://doi.org/10.1007/s44353-024-00002-2

Enoch Leung, Discover Education  
  DOI: https://doi.org/10.1007/s44217-022-00016-9 

Nasrin Sultana, Discover Electronics 
  DOI: https://10.1007/s44291-024-00002-5 

Vicky Xu, Discover Psychology  
  DOI: https://doi.org/10.1007/s44202-023-00111-4 

Paul Awoyera, Discover Sustainability  
  DOI: https://doi.org/10.1007/s43621-024-00655-y 

Atique Ishrak Anik, Discover Civil Engineering  
  DOI: https://doi.org/10.1007/s44290-024-00018-6

Related Content

A practical guide to your Scientific Reports publishing options

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon May 18 2026

Publishing open access (OA) means your research is immediately available to anyone, anywhere, without subscription barriers. If you’re considering Scientific Reports, you might be wondering: how do researchers cover the article processing charge (APC)? The good news is that funding is often available, you just need to know where to look. This guide walks you through the most common options, so you can plan early and publish with confidence.

Scientific Reports is fully open access, by design

Scientific Reports is part of the Nature Portfolio and is built to be a trusted, rigorous home for scientifically sound research from across disciplines—open and accessible to the global research community. As a fully OA journal, every article is published open access as soon as it’s ready, supporting broad discoverability and access across institutions, sectors, and regions. 

That means you don’t need to decide whether to publish OA in Scientific Reports, OA is built in. What you do need is a clear plan for funding the APC. 

Quick clarity: the APC, the timing, and why “early” matters

Scientific Reports charges an APC, which is determined from the date your article is accepted. You can find the current APC (plus any applicable VAT/ local taxes), along with helpful resources, on Scientific Reports dedicated Open Access Fees and Funding page

Because funding routes can depend on eligibility checks, institutional approvals, or grant conditions, it’s worth exploring your options before submission (or at least early in the process), so there are no surprises later.

Your OA funding routes: the most common options

Most authors cover APCs through one (or a combination) of these routes: 

  1. Institutional open access agreements (often the easiest route) 
  2. Funder or grant support 
  3. Institutional OA funds (via your library or research office) 
  4. Waivers or discounts (when available) 
  5. Self-funding (as a last resort, or when required) 

Let’s unpack each one.

Route 1 (start here): Institutional open access agreements

Many universities and institutions have open access agreements with Springer Nature that can cover APCs fully or partially for eligible authors and eligible journals. 

Depending on your institution’s agreement, this support may look like: 

  • Full APC coverage (your institution pays 100%) 
  • A percentage discount (e.g., a fixed % off the list price) 
  • A fixed contribution (e.g., up to a set amount) 

These agreements are designed to reduce both the financial and administrative burden, and they’re usually integrated into the publishing workflow for the corresponding author. 

Tip: Even if you’ve never used OA funding before, you may already be covered, especially if your institution has a library-led OA team or participates in national/consortium arrangements.

If you’re in the US

The US landscape is mixed. Policies, OA budgets, and institutional approaches vary widely. That’s exactly why OA agreements can be such a helpful first check: if your university participates, an agreement can remove much of the friction (and uncertainty) around APC payment.

Route 2: Your research funder or grant provider

Many funders allow APCs as eligible costs, either within an existing grant budget or through a dedicated OA publishing allowance. 

What to check: 

  • Is OA publishing an allowable cost for your grant? 
  • Are there rules about the licence type (e.g., CC BY)? 
  • Do you need to acknowledge funding in a specific way? 
  • Does your funder require immediate OA (which Scientific Reports already provides)? 

If you’re unsure, your institution’s grants office or library OA team can often confirm the best route quickly.

Route 3: Your library’s OA fund (or local institutional support)

Even if you’re not covered by an OA agreement, your institution may have: 

  • central OA fund 
  • departmental publishing budget 
  • support for early-career researchers 
  • guidance on applying for institutional or charitable publication funds 

Libraries are often the best starting point here. Many have dedicated OA specialists who can: 

  • tell you what funding exists locally 
  • explain eligibility rules 
  • help you avoid delays later in the process 

Route 4: Waivers and discounts (when available) 

Springer Nature offers APC waivers and discounts for articles in fully open access journals in certain circumstances. 

Two key points to know up front: 

  1. Some waivers/discounts apply automatically (for example, based on the corresponding author’s location in the world’s lowest income countries). 
  2. Other waiver/discount requests are assessed case-by-case, and typically need to be requested at the point of manuscript submission (not during review, and not after acceptance). 

If you think you may need a waiver or discount, plan for this early so you can apply at the right moment in the workflow.

Route 5: Self-funding (when other routes aren’t available) 

Sometimes researchers pay APCs directly, especially when: 

  • there’s no agreement coverage 
  • the grant doesn’t allow publication costs 
  • local institutional funds are unavailable 
  • a time-sensitive publication decision needs a fast route 

If this is your situation, it can still help to speak to your library or department first. They may be able to suggest partial support, discounts, or alternative internal funding streams. 

Find your best route in 60 seconds: a simple checklist 

If you do nothing else, do this: 

  1. Check whether your institution has a Springer Nature OA agreement (and whether Scientific Reports is included). 
  2. Confirm you’re the corresponding author (agreement eligibility typically runs through the corresponding author). 
  3. Check your affiliations (if you have multiple, test the most relevant ones). 
  4. Check your funder rules (especially licence/compliance requirements). 
  5. If needed, talk to your library/OA office early (they can often resolve uncertainties fast). 

A few FAQs researchers often ask 

“What if I have multiple affiliations, or international co-authors?” 

Funding eligibility is commonly tied to the corresponding author’s affiliation and the institution’s agreement terms. If you have multiple affiliations, it can be worth checking each one and confirming which affiliation should be used for funding purposes. 

“Does funding affect peer review?” 

No. Funding checks and APC payment processes are separate from editorial decisions and peer review. 

“What if I realise too late that I needed a waiver?” 

Because waiver/discount requests typically need to be made at the point of submission, it’s worth flagging financial constraints early—before your manuscript progresses. 

Publishing OA shouldn’t be the barrier 

Open access is about making scientifically sound research available to the widest possible community, globally and immediately. And in many cases, the funding is already there. 

If you’re considering Scientific Reports, take a few minutes to explore the routes above. A quick check now can remove delays later and help you focus on what matters most: sharing your work. 

Next step: Start by checking your institutional OA agreement eligibility, and if you’re unsure, contact your library or OA office for guidance. 

Check your eligibility in minutes. Head to the Scientific Reports website to explore funding options, agreements, and next steps for submitting your research.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest!


Making research policy-ready: how institutions can support think tanks and SDG impact

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon May 18 2026

Connecting research to real‑world policy outcomes is becoming a strategic priority for institutions that support and disseminate scholarly knowledge. Institutions are increasingly expected to demonstrate how the research they fund, publish, or manage contributes to national and global priorities, including the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). Yet much of that impact depends on what happens after research is produced: how easily it can be found, interpreted, and applied by policy actors.

In The publication‑to‑policy connection: Supporting the real‑world impact of research, we explored how evidence moves through policy ecosystems, highlighting the critical role played by intermediary organisations in translating research into use. More recently, What can institutions learn from a systems approach to sustainability transformation? examined how integrated data, collaboration, and aligned financing are needed to move beyond policy influence towards coordinated SDG action.

Our 2025 SDG Impact Report identified one key group that consistently sits at the centre of this translation process: think tanks. These organisations are among the most active users of scholarly literature in the policy ecosystem, synthesising research into insights that governments and international agencies rely on. Understanding how they work, and what they need from research, provides institutions with a powerful lens on how to boost visibility, usability, and policy influence.

This case study follows that process in practice through the work of a leading think tank, adelphi, showing how evidence moves from research to policy and what institutions can do to ensure their research is policy‑ready and positioned for maximum real‑world SDG impact.

How the SDGs shape policy priorities and funding

André Müller is Senior Advisor in Water and Biodiversity at adelphi, a German think tank and public policy consultancy focused on climate, environment, and development.

For André, “the SDGs are the overarching framework for almost everything we do in development cooperation.” This framework also shapes how national priorities are set and funded: “Since the SDGs are the overarching framework guiding Official Development Assistance (ODA), government aid that promotes the economic development and welfare of developing countries, the topics represented in them are those that receive funding and are mainstreamed into national policies,” he explains.

His work focuses on sustainable water management, freshwater ecosystem conservation, and climate adaptation, often in transboundary governance projects. “SDG 6 (Clean Water and Sanitation) is definitely the most central to my work, but because water is such a cross-cutting issue, I often deal with other SDGs too, especially those related to biodiversity (SDG 15: Life on Land) and climate (SDG 13: Climate Action). Our work frequently analyses how solutions can deliver co-benefits across several sectors, SDGs, and other global policy frameworks.”

How think tanks use research every day

Our 2025 report found that think tanks, international organisations, and NGOs are the policy actors most likely to cite scholarly research. They also produce and publish their own studies, synthesising evidence into policy recommendations that are frequently cited by other types of policymakers. This points to a distinct role for these organisations as knowledge brokers, translating research in ways that can influence policymaking across multiple arenas.

For André, this science-to-policy-practice is simply part of the job: “This process is really our everyday business,” he explains. “We use primary research, synthesise the results, and communicate them to different audiences in ways that suit their needs, this might mean simplifying the language, focusing on specific findings, or turning research into actionable recommendations.”

Research underpins almost every aspect of his work. “I use research every day, my job wouldn’t be possible without it. I write studies, policy papers, and briefs, and we develop technical assessments for the state of rivers or wetlands, as well as management plans for river basins or give trainings on financing wetland protection.”

For research institutions, this has important implications: how research is accessed, discovered, and presented can directly shape its ability to inform policy. “All these activities depend on solid evidence and research,” explains André. “I also conduct research myself, generating new knowledge as a social scientist, for example, through expert interviews or focus groups. This applied research is always closely linked to practical challenges in the field.”

This intermediary role is particularly visible in Germany, where Ministries typically fund implementing agencies, which then contract think tanks and NGOs to deliver evidence-based inputs: “These agencies rarely deliver projects directly,” says André; “They contract think tanks like adelphi, or other organisations, to write policy briefs, develop strategies, or deliver capacity-building trainings.”

How evidence moves from research to policy

A recent example is a project André led for Germany’s main development agency, Deutsche Gesellschaft für Internationale Zusammenarbeit (GIZ) GmbH, in preparation for the United Nations Biodiversity Conference (COP 15) in Montreal and the United Nations 2023 Water Conference in New York, focused on strengthening the role of freshwater ecosystems in German development cooperation.

“We developed four factsheets, each focused-on SDG 6 (Clean Water and Sanitation) and its subgoals related to freshwater ecosystems, demonstrating links to other SDGs. We analysed biophysical connections, policy links, and co-benefits, and provided recommendations for strengthening these ties. We also produced a comprehensive policy paper exploring how German development actors can lead global efforts to better protect and restore freshwater ecosystems.”

Rather than producing new academic research alone, the emphasis was on translation, integration, and timing, ensuring that evidence entered policy discussions at moments when it could shape agendas. Thanks to sustained efforts like these, the Kunming-Montreal Global Biodiversity Framework now includes explicit goals and indicators for freshwater ecosystems previously underrepresented in global biodiversity frameworks.

Why timing matters in policy influence

The SDGs have become a powerful lens for understanding and addressing society’s most urgent challenges, including access to clean water. While these issues were active areas of research long before the SDGs were introduced in 2015, André’s experience is that the Goals have helped align evidence, funding, and policy priorities.

“NGOs and think tanks have worked hard to build the evidence base needed to raise the profile of freshwater ecosystems in these policies and their associated indicators.”

This alignment increases the demand for timely access to credible, interdisciplinary research across multiple SDGs and subject areas, particularly in the context of global cuts to development budgets: “It’s more important than ever to implement solutions that pay off for multiple SDGs. Nature-based solutions are a great example here: restoring peatlands supports biodiversity, maintains healthy water cycles, helps with drought resilience, stores carbon, and benefits local livelihoods such as fishing and hunting. There are many other freshwater-related solutions with win-wins for multiple SDGs.”

Why research impact in policy is difficult to measure

Despite the emphasis on evidence-based policymaking, André is candid about how difficult impact can be in practice: “There’s a lot of discussion and activity around policymaking, but from my experience, actually influencing policy through research is quite challenging. If you want your research to have a real impact on policy, it takes a lot of experience and a strong network to know how to make that happen.”

This raises important questions about how impact is tracked, and how it could be strengthened: “We should get better at tracking whether our work actually makes a difference, and at improving our strategies for making that impact happen.”

For institutions, this highlights that impact is not only about availability, but about usability and reach across different audiences. This echoes the UN’s call for science to contribute to sustainable development through action, not just theory. The UNESCO’s 2016 Science for Sustainable Development policy brief emphasised closer alignment between science and policy through partnerships across government, business, and civil society.

Where institutions can strengthen research-to-policy pathways

Our report identifies several ways that institutions can strengthen this research-to-policy pathway by supporting think tanks in their intermediary role:

Institutional repositories should consider:

  • Improving the accessibility of research through open access, making it easier for think tanks to engage with evidence, particularly in fast-moving policy contexts
  • Using SDG-aligned tagging, metadata, and thematic curation to help surface relevant research more effectively

Librarians and knowledge managers can support think tanks by:

  • Supporting research synthesis and review content, which is disproportionately cited in policy
  • Helping users navigate bodies of evidence that cut across disciplines and SDGs

Research offices and funders can improve policy relevance by:

  • Supporting outputs that are usable beyond academia, including synthesis and applied research
  • Encouraging research that is closely linked to practical challenges in the field

Across all institutions, creating opportunities for closer dialogue between researchers, think tanks, and policymakers is essential, for example through institutional partnerships, events, and programmes such as Science for a Sustainable Future.

What’s next for research impact in policy?

As the 2030 target for the Sustainable Development Goals approaches, the need for evidence-informed policymaking will only intensify. Governments, funders, and international organisations are under increasing pressure to demonstrate progress, making the effective use of research more important than ever.

This case study highlights how that process works in practice. Research does not move directly from publication to policy. Instead, it is interpreted, synthesised, and applied by intermediary organisations such as think tanks, which play a critical role in shaping how evidence is used in decision-making.

Think tanks will continue to play a central role in this ecosystem, but they cannot operate in isolation. Stronger collaboration between research institutions, think tanks, and policymakers will be essential to ensure that evidence is not only produced, but actively used to shape decisions.

For institutions, this highlights the importance of moving beyond access alone to ensure research is positioned, discovered, and applied to strengthen its contribution to evidence-informed SDG policy. Explore the full findings in our SDG Impact Report: From publications to policy.

About André Müller
P_André Müller_140x140

André Müller works as a Senior Advisor at adelphi, specialising in sustainable water resources management and biodiversity conservation. He sees an urgent need to drastically lower the growing pressures from human actions and a warming climate on water resources and the ecosystems that provide them. Thus, he dedicates his work to projects that spearhead a sustainable, climate-resilient water management approach.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts! 

How to reach engaged research audiences and increase impact through collections

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri May 15 2026

Publishing your research is only part of the story. What matters just as much is who finds it, and whether they engage with it. Real impact comes from reaching the right readers: those who will apply your findings, cite your work, and build on your research.

Read on to learn how Springer Nature collections help make sure your research doesn’t just get seen but reaches communities actively looking for work like yours. That’s where meaningful engagement, and long-term impact, begins.

Why engaged readers matter

It’s not just about how many people see your research, it’s about who engages with it and how.

There’s a clear difference between: 

  • Reach: being visible to a broad audience 
  • Meaningful engagement: being read, cited, shared, and applied

When your work reaches the right audience, you’re more likely to see: 

  • Higher citation potential from researchers working in your field 
  • New collaborations across disciplines and institutions 
  • Real-world impact, from influencing policy to shaping practice

For early-career researchers, this is especially critical. Building visibility among the right audiences helps establish your reputation, grow your network, and position your research within ongoing academic conversations. 

As highlighted in author stories, researchers who publish in collections often benefit from more targeted visibility and stronger downstream engagement like tangible interest from health ministries looking to put research into practice, WHO policy citations, and collaborative opportunities, because their work reaches readers already invested in the topic.

The challenge: reaching the right audience

Even high-quality research can struggle to find the right readers. 

That’s because: 

  • Research is increasingly fragmented across disciplines and subfields 
  • Publishing in a general context doesn’t guarantee targeted readership 
  • Readers are looking for relevance, not volume 

You might publish strong work, but if it’s not positioned alongside related research, it risks being overlooked by the very audience most likely to use and cite it.

This is a common challenge highlighted across author case studies, for example, researchers working on global health and policy shared how context and placement were key to ensuring their work reached policymakers and practitioners, not just academics.

How Springer Nature collections drive engagement

Springer Nature collections are designed to help your research connect with engaged, relevant audiences. They do this by:

Curating research around specific topics

Your work is grouped with related articles, making it easier for readers to discover and explore connected research.

Reaching targeted research communities

Collections are promoted to audiences most likely to engage, helping your work reach readers actively interested in your field. 

Using audience insight and segmentation

Distribution is informed by reader behaviour and interests, increasing relevance and discoverability. 

Aligning with active research conversations

Editorial curation ensures your work sits within ongoing discussions, not in isolation.

In practice, this means your research is more discoverable, more contextualised, and more likely to be used. 

As explored in “Inside the author experience: what collection authors say and what to expect,” authors consistently highlight improved visibility and audience alignment as key benefits of publishing in a collection.

Want to see how you can get your work in front of the right readers? This short video shows how collections help connect your research with engaged audiences.

What engaged readership looks like in practice

Engaged readership isn’t just a metric, it’s reflected in how your research is used. 

For example:

  • Researchers publishing on global challenges have seen their work reach policymakers and inform decision-making 
  • Early-career authors report greater confidence in their visibility when publishing within a collection 
  • Authors working in interdisciplinary areas benefit from cross-field discovery, connecting with audiences they might not otherwise reach

In one featured case, research on malaria control reached policy audiences more effectively thanks to targeted placement within a relevant collection, helping bridge the gap between research and real-world application. 

These examples show that when your research reaches the right audience, its impact extends far beyond publication.

How you can increase engagement (author tips)

If you want your research to connect with the right readers, there are practical steps you can take, before and after publication. 

Choose the right collection

Publishing in a collection aligned with your topic helps ensure your work sits alongside relevant research and reaches the right audience from the outset.

Write for discoverability

Use clear, accessible titles and abstracts that reflect how readers search for content. Avoid overly complex phrasing, clarity improves both search visibility and reader engagement.

Focus on why your research matters

Make it easy for readers to understand the significance of your work. Highlight the problem you’re addressing and its real-world relevance. 

Use consistent, relevant keywords 

Think about how your audience searches for content. Using consistent terminology improves indexing and helps your research surface in search and recommendation systems. 

Plan for post-publication visibility 

Consider how your research will be shared, through collections, networks, and broader promotion. Visibility doesn’t stop at publication. 

As many collection authors note, thinking about your audience early, rather than after publishing, can significantly increase engagement and impact. 

Focus on your audience early on 

If you want your research to do more than exist. If you want it to connect, influence, and resonate, you need to think beyond publication. Consider who will read it, how they’ll find it, and why it matters to them. 

Springer Nature collections are designed to support exactly that: helping your research reach the audiences who are most likely to engage with it and amplify its impact.

Explore the Springer Nature collections hub and find the right home for your research.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs,sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

Trusted, readable, human: why researchers love Nature Briefing

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu May 14 2026

Most researchers don’t need another email. Between journal alerts, funding updates, institutional messages and general news, inboxes are already under pressure. Yet, for many readers around the world, Nature Briefing is a resource they deliberately make time to open. So, what makes it different?

Based on anonymised feedback from readers across disciplines, career stages and geographies, a clear picture emerges: Nature Briefing isn’t just another source of science news, it’s become a trusted daily ritual, helping researchers stay informed, curious and grounded in a fast‑moving and often overwhelming landscape. 

“Just wanted to drop a note to you saying that Nature Briefing is the only news I am opening these days. It’s a life saver. […] Even if the news isn’t great for science, it’s still a safe place to turn to. I always forward an article or two to family and friends.”

Anonymised reader 

Get Nature Briefing in your inbox

P_057RT_NATBRIEF_300x170 px © Springer Nature 2026

Join researchers worldwide who start their day with a trusted filter for the most important science stories, curated by Nature editors.

What you’ll get

  • A quick, readable daily roundup that saves you time 
  • Context and clarity, not just headlines 
  • Breadth across disciplines to spark new ideas

Free to sign upSign up here. 

Breadth that expands horizons, without overwhelming

Nature Briefing readers often work in highly specialised areas. But many say one of the newsletter’s strengths is helping them look beyond their own field. 

They value the range, from discoveries far outside their discipline to timely insights within it, and the sense of how science connects across topics, communities and real‑world events. Several readers mention using stories from the Briefing as conversation starters in lab meetings, teaching and everyday conversations. For them, the Briefing becomes a way to stay connected not just to science, but to how science fits into the world more broadly. 

For time‑constrained researchers, that balance is critical. As one long‑time reader put it, the Briefing offers “just enough to stay informed, without feeling overwhelmed”. 

“Like everyone, I receive Avogadro’s number of emails every day, many devoted to science news. Nature Briefing is my favorite, and I always look forward to reading it.”

Anonymous reader

Thoughtful summaries that respect the reader

Another recurring theme is respect for the reader’s intelligence. 

Many readers compare Nature Briefing favourably to newsletter formats that rely on headlines alone or links without explanation. They appreciate that the summaries are written with care, offering context, nuance and clarity, rather than oversimplification or hype. 

This approach builds trust. Reader’s mention feeling confident that what they are reading has been chosen and written thoughtfully, drawing from multiple sources and perspectives. Over time, that consistency becomes a reason to keep opening the email, even when everything else in the inbox remains unread.

A human tone that makes science more enjoyable

Content matters, but so does tone. 

Across the feedback, readers repeatedly mention the warmth and humanity of Nature Briefing. Gentle humour, personal sign‑offs and moments of delight stand out in a professional environment that can otherwise feel impersonal or relentless. 

For some readers, especially those later in their careers, this tone makes it “a little more fun to be an active scientist”. For others, it simply makes the reading experience more enjoyable, which is a reminder that science can inspire curiosity, wonder and joy. 

“It’s a great balance of insightful and entertaining, and gives me the info (and a fun break) that I’m looking for."

— Tyler Arbour, Biogeochemist, Center for Microbial Ecology and Technology, University of Ghent

A steady place in uncertain times

Several readers describe Nature Briefing as more than a source of information, it’s a steady presence. 

In times when science funding, public trust, or global events make the news feel heavy, readers value having a place to turn that feels calm, balanced and reliable. Even when the stories themselves are challenging, the Briefing is seen as a space that avoids unnecessary alarmism while still taking science seriously. 

For some, maintaining that connection to science has a deeply personal meaning, helping them stay engaged with a subject they’ve dedicated their lives to, or feel close to conversations they once shared with others. 

That sense of steadiness shows up in small habits: readers returning to the Briefing even when the news is difficult, because the framing feels calm, balanced and grounded in evidence, without switching off from the world. 

Shared, forwarded and talked about

Nature Briefing rarely stays in one inbox. 

Readers frequently mention forwarding articles to colleagues, students, friends and family. Some describe printing out quotes or screenshots, pinning them up in workspaces, or bringing stories into teaching and lab discussions. 

This pattern of sharing reflects something important: readers don’t just consume the Briefing, they use it to communicate science, spark curiosity and connect with others.

More than a newsletter

For many researchers, Nature Briefing has become: 

  • a trusted filter in a noisy information landscape 
  • a window into science beyond a single discipline  
  • a daily habit that fits into real working lives 
  • a small daily reminder of curiosity, discovery, and why the work matters

It’s not just about staying up to date. It’s about staying connected, to ideas, to science in the wider world, and to a community of people who care about understanding it. 

Get Nature Briefing in your inbox

Free, daily science news and perspectives curated by Nature editors. Sign up here.

Related Content

How to use social media to promote your book: a guide for authors

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed May 13 2026

Publishing a book is a major achievement — one that deserves visibility within and beyond your discipline. In today’s digital landscape, social media is one of the most effective ways to help your work reach an audience who will benefit from it most. With researchers increasingly active on platforms like LinkedIn, Facebook, and more. You have every reason to showcase your book there, too.

Our new guide: How to use social media to promote your Book, gets into the specifics of the most used platforms, and tips on choosing the right platform to engage with your research community. It's designed for all researchers, no matter what stage you are in your career. Whether you're just beginning to build your online presence or are already active on social platforms, this guide is for you. 

Why social media matters 

Social media was originally called social networking, and for research, that’s one of its superpowers. For research collaboration, it’s less about posting, re‑posting, and liking, and more about making connections that you can then take offline and into real life. But it makes finding connections — that you might not be able to make any other way — possible.  

You can find, follow, and join communities that share your research interests. You can also connect directly with readers and peers, including researchers in other countries. Which is why engaging regularly (even when you’re not discussing your book) makes it a uniquely powerful tool. 

Book Authors Social Media Guide Cover © Springer Nature

What’s inside the guide 

This new guide gives you quick, actionable steps and best practices for promoting your book, and instructions for each platform. 

Choosing the right platform 

One of the most useful sections of the guide walks through how to get started, offering tips on the primary social media platforms to help you decide which one(s) are right for promoting your book, including: 

  • LinkedIn for professional engagement and visual posts 
  • Platform X/Twitter for real‑time conversations and tagging researchers 
  • Instagram for visual content and guiding readers to book links directly through the stories feature 
  • WeChat Ideal for Chinese researchers, and is widely used for research‑related activities.  
  • Bluesky a newer platform where academic communities are beginning to grow 
  • Facebook for groups and institutional pages

It also offers practical instructions for posting on each platform, including how to add links, hashtags, and use images and visuals of your book.

Book promotion toolkit

When you publish your book with Springer Nature, you will receive a link to the toolkit to help you spread the word. So, you don’t need to design any promotional assets yourself.

In the guide, you’ll find details about the bespoke marketing assets provided in the toolkit. Including how to search for your book title, download the promotional flyer, social media images, and email signature banner. 

Ready to get started?

Promoting your book on social media isn’t only about reach — it’s about sparking interest, encouraging meaningful discussion, and helping the right readers discover your work. And the benefits don’t stop there. A strong online presence grows with you, boosting visibility for future projects and collaborations. 

Download the guide to explore platform-specific advice, best practices, and real examples to help you promote your book with confidence.

For more tips on using social media read these articles from our social media series. 

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs,sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

Putting impact first: how long-term charitable partnerships help strengthen science and learning

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Tue May 12 2026

“SDG 17 is about partnership for the goals. And sort of the core principle, the core intuition, is that collaboration is needed to deal with complexity.” – Dr Kate Roll, UCL Institute for Innovation and Public Purpose. 

The importance of partnership for sustainable development was covered in a recent Working Scientist podcast series from Nature Careers called ‘How to save humanity in 17 goals’. The sustainable development goals, or SDGs, are an important focus for us at Springer Nature, when we consider the positive impact we can have in disseminating research that can enable global progress.  

Our most important contribution is through our activity as a publisher. However, we go beyond that to support the communities we serve more directly. This includes a regular and carefully considered programme of charitable donations, giving over €3.5 million across multiple projects from 2022-2025. One principle has guided Springer Nature’s charitable support over the past three years: impact matters most when it is sustained, thoughtful and rooted in partnership. 

While there have been occasions that called for specific responses or one-off donations, such as our efforts to help colleagues and partners following the devastating Hurricane Melissa in Jamaica, or our focused support for researchers impacted by the war in Ukraine, our approach has focused on backing initiatives that strengthen the wider research and learning ecosystem over time. This means asking not only where help is needed, but how it can contribute to lasting outcomes for communities connected to science, education and advancing knowledge.

Strengthening science communication and trust 

Public trust in science depends not just on the quality of research, but on how well it is communicated and understood. For that reason, a core focus of our charitable activity has been supporting organisations that improve science communication and public understanding of research. This includes backing the global network of science media centres and the Springer Nature Fellowship for Advancing Science Journalism in Africa and the Middle East, offered in collaboration with the Knight Science Journalism (KSJ) Program at MIT, now in its third year. 

These initiatives play an important role in helping reliable evidence reach broader audiences, tackling misinformation, and supporting informed decision-making. In a world where scientific expertise is increasingly contested, strengthening these channels is a vital part of sustaining trust in research. 

Widening participation in research and learning 

Another priority has been widening participation in education and research. 

Through a mix of global programmes and locally led initiatives, our support has aimed to help people engage with learning, develop skills, and contribute to research. We’re proud to have supported over 70 students and early career researchers to take their first steps in research careers via programmes such as In2Research in the UK, the Deutschlandstipendium in Germany, and the Innovation in Cancer Research programme in the US.  

Looking to younger students, around 300 primary school aged children have attended the Civitas Saturday School in our London offices for extra support with maths and English since 2014. The school, which runs every weekend of term time, aims to help local children who have been identified as working below their expected level to make extra progress and thrive.   

Partnerships that strengthen research ecosystems in lower-income countries are also a focus. We are particularly proud of our association with Research4Life, which this year celebrates its 25th anniversary of enabling access to research for those in low-income countries, and which has evolved to build capability to support researchers around the global to contribute as authors, peer reviewers and editors.   

Access to knowledge remains uneven, but sustained investment in participation and capacity-building helps create the conditions for more inclusive and resilient research systems.

A partnership-led and principled approach

Since 2021, Springer Nature’s charitable giving has been guided by a clear framework and consistent governance. This helps ensure our support is strategic, transparent and aligned with our purpose of advancing discovery, learning and progress. 

Working with established and trusted partners allows us to contribute expertise as well as financial support, and to focus on outcomes rather than visibility.  It also helps ensure that our charitable activity complements, rather than substitutes for or hinders, the responsibilities and efforts of others across the research ecosystem or further afield.

Looking ahead

The challenges facing science, education and society are not short-term, and neither are the solutions. As Springer Nature looks ahead, our charitable support will continue to prioritise long-term impact, trusted partnerships and initiatives that help knowledge to be discovered, trusted and used. 

By keeping impact at the centre, we aim to contribute in ways that matter to research communities and learners, today and in the years to come.

Related Tags:

A decade of open data: Progress, challenges, and how institutions can support

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue May 12 2026

For research organisations working to strengthen open science practices, the tenth anniversary of the FAIR principles is a timely milestone to take stock of what has changed and where more efforts are needed. As open data policies evolve, AI adoption accelerates, and expectations for data quality intensify, understanding researcher attitudes has never been more important.

The 2025 State of Open Data webinar brought together leading experts to discuss a decade of findings on researchers’ experience of, and attitudes towards, data sharing. In this blog, I explore key themes and persistent challenges to open data and highlight insights that can help institutions more effectively support meaningful and sustainable data sharing.

Closing the gap between Open Data ambition and everyday practice

The State of Open Data 2025 © Springer Nature

Open data is no longer an emerging idea or an aspirational principle. The 2025 State of Open Data report, ‘A decade of progress and challenges,’ analyses ten years of tracking researcher experience and attitudes towards data sharing. It shows that open data has moved from the margins of scholarly practice into the mainstream.

Indeed, awareness is high, policies are widespread, and infrastructure exists. But data sharing is still not routine for many researchers, between mandate fatigue and a lack of recognition.

To examine the tensions between the progress and persistent obstacles, the webinar convened experts contributing to the 2025 report. Their perspectives provide a focused assessment of how far the community has come and what is required next to close the gap between intent and implementation, particularly for organisations aiming to support equitable and sustainable data‑sharing practices.

Webinar panel:

  • Mark Hahnel, Vice President Open Research, Digital Science
  • Graham Smith, Director Research Data Innovation, Springer Nature
  • Brian Nosek, Co-founder and Executive Director, Center for Open Science; Professor of Psychology, University of Virginia (USA)
  • Hilary Hanahoe, Secretary General, Research Data Alliance (RDA)
  • Joy Owango, Founding Director, Training Centre in Communication (TCC Africa) (Kenya)
  • Chair: Ana Van Gulick, Head of Customer Engagement, Digital Science

“Open data has gone from novelty to mainstream… now everyone recognises that this is something that they need to wrestle with.”

- Brian Nosek, Co-founder and Executive Director, Center for Open Science; Professor of Psychology, University of Virginia

From awareness to infrastructure: The decade’s biggest shift

The State of Open Data survey has been running since 2016, capturing researchers’ relationships with data sharing. A decade on, it has impressive scale and global reach. Since its launch, the survey has gathered insights from over 43,000 researchers across 212 countries and territories, making it the longest-running longitudinal study on this topic. It also covers a wide range of institutional contexts, including universities, hospitals, industry, and government.

The webinar asked panellists how researchers’ perspectives on data sharing have evolved over this decade. One of the most significant changes is the steady rise in awareness of the FAIR principles of findability, accessibility, interoperability, and reusability. Mark Hahnel describes this as a genuine success story: “About 80% of researchers globally have heard of FAIR or are familiar with FAIR. ‘Never heard of FAIR’ has gone from around 60% to 20%.” Importantly, this shift cuts across most disciplines, even if adoption still varies.

The deeper shift, as identified by Joy Owango, is the move “from awareness to infrastructure”. Ten years ago, many researchers simply did not know what open data meant or where to share their data. Today, FAIR-aligned repositories, persistent identifiers, and institutional policies are far more common.

The conditions to move beyond counting datasets towards thinking about quality are already here, according to Hahnel. “No one can say, ‘I don’t know where to put my data’ anymore,” he says.

Researchers are often judged by publications and journal prestige, not by the accessibility or reusability of their data sets.”

- Joy Owango, Founding Director, Training Centre in Communication (TCC Africa)

Making data sharing routine: How organisations can support researchers

Awareness and infrastructure have improved so dramatically, but data sharing is still not routine. The problem is not principle, but practice, according to the webinar panel. What opportunities for organisations can we identify in the friction points researchers face that the panel discussed?

  1. Helping researchers start earlier can make all the difference: Brian Nosek describes a familiar scenario: Researchers confront data-sharing requirements at the point of publication, long after data collection has concluded. At that point, preparing data for sharing becomes a burden. The well-intentioned policies turn into bureaucratic obstacles rather than good research practice. Organisations can certainly support researchers in prioritising data sharing from the start and guiding them throughout the research process. This support can make sharing an essential part of communicating research rather than an afterthought.
  2. Supporting recognition for data sharing in research assessment: Deeper structural issues, particularly around incentives, also play a part. Researchers, Joy Owango notes, are still evaluated on publication and journal prestige, not on the accessibility or reusability of their data. Because of this lack of recognition in funding or promotion, data sharing remains a low priority even where infrastructure exists. Organisations can support the move towards broader recognition of data quality and openness in their own contexts, as well as more broadly in coordinated action and alignment across funders, publishers, and policy frameworks. By providing clear guidance, infrastructure, and training, they can help ensure data contributions are recognised as important research outputs.
  3. Capacity differences show where targeted support can have real impac: Hilary Hanahoe highlights the cost of implementing FAIR properly and the disparities this creates: “Some institutions can afford specialised staff to support researchers; others cannot.” Indeed, institutional capacity is uneven, and these gaps are often amplified by regional and regulatory constraints. Where limited capacities are identified, institutions can attempt to address this collaboratively, for instance using joint training programmes or shared guidance as pooled capacity across institutions in a consortium or a region. These adjustments could produce meaningful gains and create more equitable conditions across the research ecosystem. 

AI and open data: Accelerating discovery, amplifying risk

The webinar speakers are in agreement that AI will redefine both the value and the risks associated with open data, and I couldn’t agree more. Adoption of AI tools by researchers is accelerating rapidly, Mark Hahnel notes, and at this pace, AI-assisted research will soon be near-universal. This creates new opportunities to enhance discovery and efficiency, while also highlighting areas where data practices can continue to strengthen.

Because AI systems are based on the input they are given, Joy Owango warns of poor metadata, biases, and mislabelling that can be amplified at scale. Continued investment in robust data stewardship is therefore increasingly valuable, to ensure that data sets are well-documented, clearly structured, and accurately labelled.

AI can also unintentionally narrow the landscape of research by privileging data that is already machine-readable and well documented, according to Graham Smith. That bias risks marginalising disciplines, regions, and forms of knowledge that are harder to standardise. This raises important questions for research organisations about how AI may shape what is visible in global research, and how existing support mechanisms might be adapted over time to avoid further marginalising less structured forms of knowledge.

Looking ahead, Hilary Hanahoe declares that the open data community has a duty, not just an opportunity, to shape the governance of AI use in research. In this important role, the open data community can contribute frameworks that prioritise transparency, inclusivity, and responsible use, and ensure that AI strengthens the research ecosystem.

“Policy on its own isn’t going to do the job. We’re talking about behavioural change, cultural change.”

- Graham Smith, Director Research Data Innovation, Springer Nature

From sharing data to doing it well: How institutions can support better data sharing

The challenge for the next decade is the shift from compliance to quality, from volume to value. And policies and mandates along cannot drive sustainable, meaningful data sharing practices. To support continued and better adoption of data sharing, institutions must increasingly be involved in shaping how research itself is produced, shared, and reused in the age of AI. Not just through their policies, but the actual experience of their researchers and how usable their data is.

As we’ve seen, awareness of data sharing is at an all-time high. This allows institutions to move beyond advocacy to operationalisation. To encourage the necessary cultural change, enabling good practice and making it easier than bad practice is key. Institutions can promote this, where possible, through practical support for data sharing, encouragement of data sharing research practices and discourses, and formal or informal recognition.

In this transitional timepoint, institutional infrastructure, services, and training should aim to support researchers in producing data that is usable and trustworthy. Discipline-specific guidance could round your offerings for holistic data sharing support. This support would ideally be offered early in the research lifecycle as well as throughout, and paired with practical tools such as templates, storage, curation time, and technical support. With this institutional leadership and support, the academic community will continue moving into a future in which data is reusable and reproducible, and the ecosystem is inclusive and trustworthy.

Understanding the state of open data can empower institutions to support data sharing proactively and appropriately. Watch the full webinar for more details and in-depth exchanges.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Inside the author experience: what collection authors say and what to expect

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue May 12 2026

If you’re new to publishing in a collection, you shouldn’t have to guess what happens next, or where to go for help. In this post, we dig into the collections author journey and share what authors tell us in satisfaction feedback, alongside real author experiences, to show what outstanding support looks like in practice and what you can expect when you publish in a Springer Nature collection.

“Collections are really important for us because it's a way to offer researchers a home for their research, where we currently don't have the perfect journal for it. And oftentimes those are trending topics where it's just too soon to have a journal available on such a current or emerging topic.” 

Daniel Korany, EVP Journals, Full Open Access Brands

Prefer the highlights? Watch the short video below for a quick summary of how experts working on Springer Nature collections keep your submission moving so you can focus on your research, not admin.

Supporting you from start to finish 

Publishing can sometimes feel overwhelming. That is why we built the CMA team, a dedicated group of experts from academia, publishing, and research. This team oversees each collection from proposal through publication and beyond, fostering collaboration and ensuring every project is meaningful and impactful. This specialised team is a defining hallmark of Springer Nature. 

From the initial idea to the final publication, our collections authors receive ongoing support to navigate peer review, production, and post-publication engagement with confidence. Our experts are here to guide you through the entire process and provide resources to support you at every stage.  

Think of your collection article as a chapter in a growing book, with each contribution adding something new. Our goal is to make your publishing journey as smooth and rewarding as possible. 

“At the end of the day, we're more than just a publishing team. We're partners in supporting the research community. Because we come from research, academia, and publishing ourselves, we understand what really matters: visibility, quality, and impact.”

— Petia Apostolova, Head of Collections

Author satisfaction: what collections authors tell us

Your trust drives everything we do. We measure our success by your satisfaction, and your feedback helps us continue improving.  

Farah Aldabbagh, Research Analyst from Springer Nature’s Market Intelligence team, explains: “To track and monitor author satisfaction, we send all corresponding authors a survey after online publication of their article, asking them about the general overall satisfaction with the journal they published with, and then satisfaction with specific aspects of the publishing experience.”  

Our latest survey data shows that 83% of collection authors are happy with their experience; a strong result that reflects our ongoing commitment to delivering an exceptional author experience at every stage—from clear guidance and thoughtful editorial input to responsive communication and transparent updates throughout the publishing journey. 

That overall satisfaction is reflected in the detail, too. When we look at specific stages of the journey, authors consistently tell us what’s working. In 2025, more than 90% of authors rated the peer review process, editorial collaboration, communication, and production workflow highly, confirming that our dedicated teams deliver an outstanding author experience.  

So far this year, the results are tracking similarly: over 90% of authors felt peer review was useful in improving their manuscript, editor advice and comments were helpful, and their manuscript underwent an appropriate number of rounds, with reviewers that had a good understanding of their topic.

Authors also report a consistently strong service experience, including: 

  • enquiries being answered promptly 

  • helpful depth of information in responses 

  • and clear updates on your manuscript status throughout the process

You should be able to publish with complete confidence, knowing you’ll be supported to help your manuscript reach its highest potential. This feedback from collection authors shows that our commitment is real and reinforced through continuous feedback and improvement.

Collections author experiences: visibility, impact and outcomes

Publishing in a Springer Nature collection enhances the reach and real-world impact of an article, and Dr Alfred Eboh from Kogi State University can testify to this. When he published his study on addressing malaria through healthcare expenditures in a Springer Nature collection, his work was academically recognised and referenced in the WHO’s World malaria report 2024. In this Q&A blog, Dr Eboh shares his experience publishing in the collection and the gratification of seeing it inform global policy.

“Publishing in a dedicated Springer Nature Collection has increased my work’s visibility among health systems researchers and donors. It's also strengthened my CV by demonstrating engagement with a focused, high-impact journal early in my career.” 

— Dr Alfred Eboh, Department of Sociology, Kogi State University, Nigeria

Megha Rao and her co-authors wanted to publish their research on health resource allocation in Malawi where it will reach the very people who could implement their findings and suggestions. Learn more about Rao’s experience publishing in the collection, and subsequent inquiries from policy makers about adapting and implementing her work across Africa

“Publishing in the Collection has given this research much greater visibility, specifically because it showcases the real-world application in Malawi. This has acted as a powerful proof-of-concept.[…] Collections offer an excellent opportunity to ensure one’s research contributes directly to a specific, impactful conversation, reaching the very people who can act on it. It’s about getting the work in front of the right audience, not just the biggest one.” 

- Megha Rao, Research Fellow for the Thanzi Labwino (Better Health) project

For Dr. Federico Virga, publishing his work in a Springer Nature collection not only enhanced the visibility of his research but also propelled his career to new heights. He adds, “I’ve already had two citations. I was also contacted by a student from outside Europe who asked me if I have a PhD position, and some companies have also been in touch to suggest we might collaborate. I can’t go into details yet, but some want feedback or to see if I can help them to develop specific tools related to my field.” 

“Publishing to the collection really was a great opportunity for me; I was extremely surprised and happy about the visibility I could get in a short time.” 

— Dr. Federico Virga developed his research in Italy (University of Turin), Belgium (VIB-KU Leuven) and Spain (CNIO and CNIC)  

Why authors choose Springer Nature collections

When you choose a Springer Nature collection, you gain:

  • Expert guidance and dedicated support: We help you navigate publishing challenges with a dedicated team ready to support you. 

  • Faster publishing for timely impact: We launch collections quickly to help your work reach the right audience sooner. 

  • Research integrity and credibility: We uphold rigorous peer review standards, so your work is trusted and respected. 

  • Global connections: Collections connect you to a thriving community of researchers and guest editors in your field. 

  • Increased visibility: Articles published in collections receive more citations, downloads, and online attention, helping you build your academic reputation. 

  • Continuous improvement: We listen to your feedback and develop our author services, so your experience only gets better. 

Benefits of publishing in a Springer Nature collection

When an article is part of a collection, it is easier to discover, attracts more attention, and reaches a broader audience. The data proves it: authors publishing in Springer Nature Collections enjoy 31% more citations, 30% more downloads, and 62% higher Altmetric scores than articles outside collections.

For researchers, publishing in Springer Nature collections means greater visibility, stronger influence, and deeper connections within their field.

P_Safeguarding_Blog Teaser Image © Springer Nature 2026

Your publishing partner: support beyond submission

We see ourselves as more than just a publisher; we are your partners. Your research deserves a home where it is prioritised, cherished, and amplified; and that is exactly what we offer. Petia sums it up well: “We care deeply about your research and your success. Our team is dedicated to ensuring that your work reaches its full potential.”

If you’re interested in publishing your work in a Springer Nature collection, check out our dedicated Springer Nature collections website, where you can find interviews with guest editors, impact case studies, author success stories, and much more.

Related Content

Building research visibility: Practical skills to help early-career researchers get started

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon May 11 2026

As an early-career researcher, you are producing work that matters. You are contributing new perspectives, asking new questions, and pushing knowledge forward. But once your work is written, submitted, or published, a familiar challenge often appears. How do you make sure the right people see it?

The visibility gap

Many early-career researchers describe a clear visibility gap. They want their research to be read, understood, and shared, but they are unsure how or where to begin. Publishing alone no longer guarantees attention, and yet the skills needed to communicate research effectively are rarely taught in a structured way.

Researchers frequently express uncertainty around communicating their findings beyond immediate field. Questions such as how to talk about research clearly, how to adapt messaging for different audiences, or which digital channels are worth using often go unanswered. At the same time, early career researchers are navigating publishing pressures, funding expectations, short‑term contracts, and heavy workloads. With so much to manage, research visibility can feel overwhelming or even optional.

This uncertainty does not reflect a lack of ambition or ability. It reflects a lack of practical guidance. Visibility is increasingly expected of researchers, but many are left to figure it out alone.

Research visibility and what it unlocks

When research visibility is approached thoughtfully, it can unlock far more than increased readership. Strong communication helps your work travel beyond traditional boundaries, opening up new professional and personal opportunities.

Clear and effective research communication can expand your reach by helping others grasp why your work matters. It can increase influence by making your ideas more accessible to researchers outside your immediate specialism, as well as to practitioners, policymakers, educators, and the wider public. Over time, this reach helps build recognition and establishes your expertise within your field.

Visibility also plays an important role in confidence. Seeing how your work is read, shared, and discussed helps you understand its real‑world relevance. This feedback can be motivating, especially at an early career stage when self‑doubt is common and progress can feel slow.

Professional opportunities often follow. Researchers who communicate their work clearly are better positioned when applying for funding, jobs, or fellowships. Visibility can lead to new collaborations by making your interests and expertise easier to find. It can also support teaching, outreach, and engagement activities that strengthen your academic profile.

Importantly, visibility does not mean self‑promotion for its own sake. It means helping your research reach the audiences it was always meant for.

Building researcher confidence through skills focused webinar

Recognising these challenges, a dedicated webinar titled “How to Promote Your Research” was designed with early career researchers in mind. The session was built as a researcher-first resource, focused on practical skills.

The webinar responds directly to the uncertainty many researchers feel about visibility and communication. Instead of abstract theory, it focuses on what research visibility actually looks like in practice today and which approaches can be applied immediately without adding unnecessary pressure.

The strong response to the session highlighted just how relevant this topic is. More than 560 researchers attended our last session live, demonstrating widespread interest in building confidence and capability around research communication. Throughout the session, participants asked thoughtful, practical questions that reflected real challenges they face in promoting their work.

One participant, postdoctoral researcher Maria Babakhanyan Stone, joined the webinar out of curiosity and a desire to build on her existing interest in science communication.

During her PhD, Maria invested significant effort in making astronomy accessible. She created YouTube explainer videos, developed visuals from her thesis figures, and ran workshops for learners of all ages. Communication had always been important to her, but the webinar introduced her to new ways of understanding how that work resonated.

When altmetrics were discussed, she decided to explore the publicly available download data for her PhD thesis at the University of Turku. What she found surprised her. Her astronomy thesis had been downloaded more frequently than others in the same topic area, topping usage rankings over a seven‑year period and ranking among the most downloaded astronomy theses of the past decade.

For Maria, this discovery revealed a hidden dimension of impact. It showed that her efforts to make science welcoming and engaging were reaching real readers. The numbers mattered, but what mattered more was the confirmation that her work was making a difference.

Her experience highlights how understanding visibility can strengthen confidence and reshape how researchers think about their contribution.

Join the next session

Building research visibility is not about changing who you are as a researcher. It is about learning how to help your work be seen, understood, and valued for what it already contributes.

If you are an early-career researcher who feels unsure about where to start with communication and visibility, the “How to Promote Your Research” webinar offers a practical and supportive next step. It is designed to help you develop skills that build confidence, expand reach, and open up new opportunities over time.

You can explore upcoming sessions and related resources here.

Related content

AI and Sustainability: the promise and peril of AI

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri May 8 2026

As the adoption of AI spreads, its potential to accelerate discovery and address global challenges is being tempered by mounting concerns over sustainability and equity. These questions took centre stage in early 2026, when The University of Tokyo and Springer Nature co-hosted the seventh SDG Symposium on AI and Sustainability—Opportunities and Challenges for a Sustainable Future

Artificial intelligence (AI) is now deeply entrenched within research and is widely anticipated to accelerate scientific discovery and help tackle global challenges. Yet there is another side to AI that cannot be ignored—immense consumption of electricity and water, dependence on scarce materials, and the reproduction, or even amplification, of existing inequalities. 

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019

At the SDG Symposium, leaders from academia, publishing, industry and international organisations looked at both AI’s costs and benefits from a variety of perspectives. They were joined by about 500 global participants.  

Emerging from the symposium was a clear recognition that ‘sustainable AI’ is far more than a matter of technical and logistical optimisation; rather, it is a broader challenge that compels us to reconsider ethics, social structures, institutions, and patterns of resource distribution. 

In his opening remarks, Teruo Fujii, President of The University of Tokyo, stressed that this challenge demands collaboration among diverse actors, including leaders in the spheres of technology, industry, academia and policy. 

Physical constraints on the digital realm 

When interacting with AI through smartphones and laptops, it is easy to imagine that its computations occur somewhere nebulous in ‘the cloud’. In reality, AI is profoundly physical. 

Magdalena Skipper, Editor-in-Chief of Nature and Chief Editorial Adviser for Nature Portfolio, presented stark data on the direct environmental burdens of AI’s rapid uptake. Searches using generative AI consume four to five times more energy than conventional web searches. Large data centres also require vast quantities of cooling water. In one reported case, a regional cluster of data centres consumed about 6% of the area’s monthly water supply. 

What may appear modest in global aggregate terms could pose a major threat to local communities. Skipper stressed the importance of making these hidden burdens visible, suggesting that just as light bulbs carry energy information such as wattage, AI chatbots might also display a comparable indicator. 

A further warning came from Tshilidzi Marwala, Rector of the United Nations University and an under-secretary-general of the United Nations. Manufacturing AI hardware requires rare earth elements, whose extraction imposes substantial environmental and social costs. Marwala challenged prevailing growth models that seek to maximise shareholder returns. He also cautioned that infinite growth cannot be achieved with finite resources. 

The recycling rate for rare earths is currently below 1%. Unless sustainability is embedded from the earliest stages of hardware design—as a third core metric alongside cost and performance—AI development may run up against the limits of the planetary environment. 

The semiconductor industry’s responsibility 

Positioned at the leading edge of the physical infrastructure underpinning AI, the semiconductor industry is not insulated from these concerns. Yuji Ogino, global head of sustainability at the semiconductor production equipment manufacturer Tokyo Electron, pointed to projections suggesting that surging demand for AI devices could drive the semiconductor market to US$1 trillion by 2030. 

AI’s progress has been propelled by the miniaturisation and increasing integration density of semiconductors, but this entails a steep rise in electricity consumption of data centres, along with a corresponding rise in carbon-dioxide emissions. Technological advances must come with a transition in data-centre energy sources from fossil fuels to low-carbon alternatives, Ogino argued. 

In his view, ‘systemic governance’ requires simultaneous, integrated engagement with energy management and the environment, alongside ethics and human rights. In other words, governance cannot lag behind technological innovation. 

Elite capture or inclusive transformation? 

Another central theme? Fairness and equity, specifically, inclusion. Marwala noted that 80% of AI investment is concentrated in the United States and China. Left unchecked, such concentration risks expanding the gap between the advantaged and disadvantaged. 

Ayyoob Sharifi, Professor in sustainability at Hiroshima University, explored both the promise and the peril of AI in smart-city development. Sharifi urged society to move beyond a narrowly technical imagination. The essential question, he argued, is not simply whether something can improve efficiency, but whether it advances justice and sustainability. 

Interlocking SDG targets 

The 17 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) of the United Nations are interdependent. Xin Zhou, Director of the AI and New Frontier Group at the Institute for Global Environmental Strategies, highlighted the synergies and trade-offs involved. For example, progress in decarbonization (Goal 13) can yield spillover benefits for clean energy (Goal 7) and health (Goal 3); however, expansion of renewable energy may also compete with food systems or land use. 

Zhou expressed concern that policymaking too often remains siloed and argued that this is precisely where AI’s deeper value may lie. It could help visualise the complex interdependencies among water, energy and food systems, update risk maps in real time and support integrated policy decisions. 

But AI will not automatically repair fragmentation; it could just as easily deepen it. Whether AI accelerates sustainability or entrenches inequality and division, Zhou argued, will ultimately depend on governance. 

Physical AI and dialogue with society 

The symposium also considered the challenges posed by physical AI—AI moving beyond digital systems and into real-world space. Hironobu Takagi, Executive Director of the science museum Miraikan and senior researcher at IBM Research–Tokyo, highlighted the social dimensions of such a transition. 

Here, science communication is crucial. Social implementation depends on how sighted participants interact with the robot in demonstration trials and help co-create social rules needed for its use. 

From carbon reduction to social design 

The panel discussion broadened the debate. The moderator, Hiromi Yokoyama, Professor at the Kavli Institute for the Physics and Mathematics of the Universe at The University of Tokyo, reframed the scale of the problem. Sustainable AI, she argued, is not merely about reducing carbon footprints; more fundamentally, it concerns how societies design the social, economic and governance systems in which AI is embedded. 

In practice, the primary beneficiaries of AI often differ from those who bear its costs—whether in the form of depleted water and electricity supplies, or the broader social burdens of intensified surveillance. These asymmetries are unevenly distributed across both geography and generations. 

Regulation cannot rest with a single actor, the panel agreed. Rather, it requires a multilayered approach spanning the international community, nation states and industry. Yet it also acknowledged sobering realities: regulatory evasion through loopholes, and unavoidable disparities in AI performance for languages and populations that remain poorly represented in data. Future AI systems, the discussion suggested, should disclose such limitations as explicitly as the side effects of drugs are disclosed. 

A future built on inclusive participation 

Perhaps the clearest message was that AI development suffers from a profound lack of transparency, accountability and cross-border, multilevel cooperation. Marwala argued that the overwhelming underrepresentation of Global South languages and cultures in AI training data was an ethical failure. 

Addressing this challenge from the perspective of scholarly publishing, Antoine Bocquet, Managing Director of Springer Nature Japan, pointed to another structural imbalance: the unequal distribution of knowledge that informs policymaking. Springer Nature’s analysis, he noted, found that 78% of the research cited in policy documents originates from authors in the Global North, revealing a persistent geographical asymmetry in whose knowledge counts. 

Kensuke Fukushi, Director of the Institute for Future Initiatives at The University of Tokyo, closed the symposium by emphasizing the value of academic collaboration as the foundation for dialogue and shared rule-making in an increasingly fragmented world. In a divided world, he suggested, scholarly collaboration is essential. 

The road to sustainable AI will not be smooth. A system in which the benefits of AI are monopolized by the powerful and by a limited number of advanced, affluent countries, while environmental and social burdens are displaced onto future generations and vulnerable regions, demands correction. 

The central question is whether AI can be transformed from something that intensifies environmental strain and inequality into an infrastructure that supports a sustainable society. The answer lies not within algorithms alone, but in the wisdom and governance of the people who design, use, regulate and learn to live alongside them. 

Discover more from our SDG programme — featuring events, blogs and publications on sustainability and research.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs,sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

How authors found the right fit with Discover: a publishing home for every researcher

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu May 7 2026

As a researcher, you’ve probably wondered whether your work is the right fit for a particular journal, or whether the journal is the right fit for you. Maybe your topic is niche. Maybe your institution doesn’t carry the kind of prestige that opens doors, or your methods or topic come from different disciplines. These doubts are understandable. Many journals favour research from well-funded settings, established institutions, and a narrow band of topics. That leaves a lot of unpublished research.

With more than 70 titles, the Discover journal series was created in response to this. The series is an open access (OA) imprint within Springer Nature’s portfolio of over 600 fully OA journals, one of the largest OA portfolios in the world.

What does representation mean at Discover?

For Discover journals, representation means one thing: all good research deserves to be published, on its merits alone. In practice, this means your paper won’t be screened out because of your research area, a regional focus, or if your approach crosses subject boundaries.

For early career researchers (ECRs), this is reassuring. Many researchers will recognise that sense of doubt when submitting work: Is my article relevant or novel enough? Discover journals embed representation through:

  • broad aims and scope that welcome interdisciplinary research and non-traditional article types
  • a commitment to publishing valid work, not on its perceived novelty or impact but solely on its own merits
  • OA publishing under a Creative Commons licence, free to read, share and reuse
  • financial support through institutional agreements and article processing charge (APC) waivers, so that who can publish isn’t determined by who can afford to

Our mission at Springer Nature is to facilitate inclusion. We believe that “research progress depends on the inclusion of diverse perspectives, and the best research emerges when researchers from all backgrounds are empowered to contribute fully.” Discover journals are designed to deliver on this policy.

Watch this author interview compilation video to hear researchers from different disciplines, locations, and career stages share how publishing in Discover journals helped them reach the right audience for their interdisciplinary and emerging research.


OA and community reach

For Atique Ishrak Anik and Dr. Vicky Xu, OA wasn’t a publishing preference. It was the point of publishing. Both chose Discover journals because their research was written for specific communities, and those communities needed to be able to read it.

Atique Ishrak Anik is a civil engineer and researcher at Chittagong University of Engineering and Technology, Bangladesh. He leads a multi-disciplinary team that covers structural engineering, environmental research, and social science. His focus is on developing sustainable alternatives to high-emission building materials and practical housing solutions for people living in low- and middle-income country contexts.

Anik chose Discover Civil Engineering because its OA model ensures his work reaches the researchers and practitioners who need it most. For him, publishing OA isn't a secondary consideration but the foundation of his work; without it, essential findings would be locked behind expensive subscription barriers.

“We want to publish our study to a wide global area, without any subscription barriers. That's why we think Discover Civil Engineering is a good home for our work.”

— Atique Ishrak Anik, Discover Civil Engineering

Dr. Vicky Xu is a clinical psychology registrar at the University of Sydney, Australia. She co-designed a research project on emotion regulation involving target communities from the outset. When it came to publishing their findings, her team chose Discover Psychology—now celebrating its 5th anniversary—for its OA model and broad scope, spanning clinical, cognitive, organisational, and social psychology. Their paper attracted media interest, and a plain-language version was subsequently published, bringing the findings directly to the young people affected, their families, and the people working with them.

“It was really important to us that our findings would have the biggest reach.”

— Dr. Vicky Xu, Discover Psychology

Diverse teams, disciplines, and geographies

Representation is evident in who is producing research and where it originates. Discover journals publish a varied mix of researchers representing different disciplines, countries, and career stages, including the four researchers featured below.

Ayesha Nehvi published her first research paper, analysing why psychology students avoid certain specialisms, while studying at the University of Limerick, Ireland. Discover Psychology provided an APC waiver that allowed the student-focused study to become OA, ensuring the target community could access the research.

Dr. Sara Causevic, a postdoctoral fellow at Stockholm University, Sweden, is a public health researcher. A paper she co-authored on AI and forest protection took her outside her usual field and brought together colleagues from climate finance and remote sensing technology. The paper was published in Discover Conservation.

Dr. Paul Awoyera, an associate professor of civil engineering at Prince Mohammed bin Fahd University, Saudi Arabia, is developing alternative construction materials that reduce energy consumption and carbon emissions in buildings. Dr Awoyera chose Discover Sustainability because its OA model ensures the findings reach not only researchers but the engineers who can act on them.

Enoch Leung, a student and course instructor at McGill University, Canada, leads an interdisciplinary team researching inclusive education and support for LGBTQ+ youth in schools. The team chose Discover Education (also celebrating its fifth anniversary this year) for its commitment to equity and its reach across education and psychology. For Leung, open access was essential; the findings had to reach the educators and counsellors working with students, as well as academics.

“Research done for the community, by the community.”

— Dr. Vicky Xu, Discover Psychology

Choosing a journal: why representation matters

Choosing where to publish is an important task. To get it right, ask yourself the following questions:

  • Does the journal welcome research across disciplines and subjects, including interdisciplinary and applied work?
  • Are the editorial board and published author lists geographically and demographically diverse?
  • Is the journal fully OA, with potential APC coverage or funding options available, if required?

Discover journals can answer yes to all three. To see how this fits into Springer Nature’s broader commitment to global inclusion, visit our Global Inclusion in Research Publishing web page for practical tools and resources.

Being representative isn’t an afterthought at Springer Nature. It affects careers and knowledge alike, and prioritising inclusion helps ensure good work doesn’t go unpublished or unread because of where it came from or who could afford to access it.

Whatever your field, your background, or your career stage, we think your work deserves a trusted home. Explore the Discovery journal series and consider us for your next submission.

Featured research

Related Content

Research4Life turns 25

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Wed May 6 2026

In celebration of Research4life's 25th anniversary, partners from across the scholarly communications ecosystem are reflecting on the partnership’s impact and future direction. This interview originally appeared on the Research4Life website and has been republished here with permission.

This year marks 25 years since the launch of Research4Life, an initiative that has reshaped access to scholarly knowledge for researchers, clinicians and policymakers in low and lower-middle income countries. As a member of the Executive Council of Research4Life representing Springer Nature, this anniversary offers a moment to reflect on what’s been achieved over more than two decades and what lies ahead.

Research4Life emerged at a time when digital access to journals was still in its infancy. The idea that competing publishers could collectively make peer reviewed literature freely available in lower income countries was unprecedented. For Nature Publishing Group and Springer – who would later come together to form Springer Nature – the collective motivation was clear. If research is to deliver global benefit, it must be accessible and inclusive.

At Springer Nature, we commit our full journal portfolio to the initiative. Through Research4Life, institutions in eligible countries can access journal content across all disciplines, from health and agriculture to environmental science, engineering and the social sciences. There is a close alignment, for us, with our broader support for the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), where access to high-quality research evidence can underpin progress across areas such as health, climate action, food systems and sustainable development more broadly.

Since 2000, global research output – and the modes of publishing – have grown dramatically. Around the turn of the millennium, when Research4Life was founded, fewer than two million scholarly articles were published each year worldwide, according to data from the US National Science Foundation (NSF). Today, that figure exceeds five million. Open access (OA) has transformed how research is shared and Springer Nature is proud that more than half of our primary research articles are today published fully OA. However, Research4Life helps ensure the widest research community can engage with the full breadth of the scholarly record as global research output continues to rise.

Over time, Research4Life has evolved far beyond its original access programmes. While access to subscription content continues to form the backbone, the partnership now places increasing emphasis on training and supporting researchers to become active contributors to the global research ecosystem. This shift, from access alone towards participation and contribution, has been one of the most significant developments of the past decade and is especially important to us at Springer Nature. That’s why we’ve continued to provide financial support to Research4Life to enable improvements in process and infrastructure, including supporting the Country Connector project, which has deepened research productivity and visibility within participating countries. The Country Connectors bring their direct personal experiences of some of the structural barriers, from reliable internet access to unstable electricity supply. That knowledge feeds directly into how Research4Life develops and delivers its support. 

More recently, thanks to member funding and insights like these, Research4Life is launching a new training platform -Tools and Skills for Accessing & Supporting Research –  so that researchers can access the full breadth of available resources and contribute their own work. 

At Springer Nature we also invest in training and skills development, by making all Nature Masterclasses content freely available to Research4Life Group A countries, giving researchers access to practical courses on writing, publishing and research skills. We also provide premium access to protocols.io, which helps researchers share, adapt and build on robust, reproducible research methods. 

This sits alongside our other work on the SDGs and global inclusion and equity initiatives. For example, we provide article processing charge discounts, of up to 100%, for researchers in eligible territories, enabling those without sufficient funding to publish their work open access to be read, shared and reused freely by others. Within our wider programme to enable greater geographic representation in research output, we work to amplify research voices from underrepresented regions through outlets such as Nature Africa and other editorial programmes designed to broaden authorship and peer review participation.

And capacity is growing. Data from the NSF shows that research output from lower and lower-middle income countries has grown steadily over the past two decades, and in relative terms has increased faster than output from high income economies. While these countries still account for a smaller share of global publications, the trend is clear: more research is being produced, across a wider range of disciplines, and by a more geographically diverse set of authors and institutions. 

Research4Life today supports c.12 thousand institutions worldwide, with over 6 million platform views from 2021-2023 (from its recent Impact Report), helping to underpin research that informs public health, environmental protection, food security and sustainable development. This impact is significant, and we think that as a scholarly communications industry, we can build on the progress made in the first 25 years, to maximise the benefits for  researchers everywhere and for the research ecosystem as a whole. 

Looking ahead, Research4Life remains highly relevant. It helps us listen to a wider set of community needs and gives publishers, institutions and international organisations a way to achieve together what no single partner could deliver alone. Ensuring that researchers in low‑ and lower‑middle‑income countries can contribute to, and shape research agenda is also essential if the evidence base informing progress towards the SDGs is to reflect diverse contexts and priorities.

As we celebrate 25 years of Research4Life, I am proud of the role Springer Nature has played and of the spirit of cooperation that continues to define this initiative. When publishers, institutions and international organisations work together with a shared sense of purpose, we can make research more inclusive, more equitable and more impactful for the communities we serve.

Related Tags:

What can institutions learn from a systems approach to sustainability transformation?

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon May 4 2026

Demonstrating how research contributes to real-world change is an increasing priority for institutions working towards the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).  As explored in The publication-to-policy connection: Supporting the real-world impact of research, impact depends not only on producing high-quality evidence, but on how effectively it is translated, shared, and applied in policy and practice. This case study builds on that perspective by examining the work of AE4RIA (the Alliance of Excellence for Research and Innovation on Aephoria), showing how a systems-based approach, combining integrated data, stakeholder collaboration and aligned financing, can help move research beyond policy influence into coordinated, implementable action.

Springer Nature’s recent report, From publications to policy: the impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals, shows that evidence is already shaping national and international policymaking when it comes to the SDGs. But ensuring that research is not only accessed, but also acted upon, requires more than visibility. It requires the capacity to translate knowledge into coordinated, implementable action.

For institutions committed to strengthening research impact, supporting multi-stakeholder collaboration, or contributing to national sustainability agendas, AE4RIA (the Alliance of Excellence for Research and Innovation on Aephoria) offers a practical and replicable framework. Working at the intersection of economics, earth systems science, and policy, their systems-driven approach is grounded in integrated data, stakeholder co-design, and aligned financing to help move the SDGs from ambition into action.

Through the work of AE4RIA, Director and co-chair of the 2027 United Nations Sustainable Development Goals Report, Professor Phoebe Koundouri and colleagues explain how a systems‑based approach can help institutions move research beyond policy influence into tangible, funded outcomes.

The implementation gap: from framework to delivery

For AE4RIA, the SDGs provide a powerful framework for addressing what Professor Koundouri describes as a “permanent multi-crisis” across environmental, economic and social systems. “The SDGs for us are a brilliant science-based structure that can allow us to move away from the permanent multi-crisis of natural, social, and economic systems into a sustainable pathway,” she explains.

However, while global progress has been significant (196 countries signing the SDGs and 20% implementation in just ten years), translating this framework into delivery remains complex. The challenge is not only political or financial, but structural. “Even the most developed countries lack the capacity to organize the necessary data, modelling, stakeholders, or funding approaches, and very few people work on this kind of large-scale integration,” Professor Koundouri adds. “Those who do are mainly scientists, and they don’t have continuous interaction with policymakers, governments, and all the other stakeholders needed to implement change.”

For institutions, this highlights that producing high-quality research is not enough to impact the SDGs. Success depends on the ability to connect evidence across disciplines, stakeholders, and systems in ways that support implementation.

A systems approach to research impact

AE4RIA’s methodology is designed to address this gap by translating the SDGs into actionable, financed transition pathways. At its core is a systems-based approach that integrates four interconnected domains, nature, infrastructure, economy and society, recognising that progress in one depends on coordinated change across all.

Professor Koundouri outlined the methodology’s three structured steps:

  1. Measure and understand where you are 
    Using integrated data frameworks, AE4RIA helps define where a country, region, or sector currently stands in relation to SDG targets. “We have continuous monitoring and assessment of the scale we want to work on. We have co-developed with other institutions an extensive framework of matrices that allow you to quantify where you are.” 

  2. Develop pathways that cross silos and sectors
    Next, stakeholders work together to map out how to move from the current state to SDG-aligned outcomes. “We make explicit where we are, where we want to go, and then we design systems-based pathways that allow the transition for each sector of the economy to a sustainable interaction between the four main systems: nature, infrastructure, economy, and society.” The process is iterative and co-designed with stakeholders at each stage. 

    Underpinning this step is an integrated modelling system – a “digital twin” of the economy and environment – which allows stakeholders to test transition pathways before implementation. By simulating different scenarios, stakeholders can identify trade-offs, understand cross-sector impacts, and prioritise the most effective interventions.

  3. Align financing with the transition
    “The third step is to secure the money and instruments needed to deliver the plan described in step two.” This involves identifying funding sources, designing blended finance strategies, and structuring portfolios of projects that can realistically be delivered. For institutions, this reinforces a critical point: research impact depends not only on generating evidence, but on connecting that evidence to real-world funding and delivery mechanisms.

Putting systems thinking into practice: Living Labs

AE4RIA implements this approach through structured “living labs”: collaborative environments where research, policy, and practice come together to design and test real-world solutions.

For institutions, living labs offer a practical model for embedding research within decision-making processes, bringing together policymakers, industry, researchers, financiers, and civil society to co-develop solutions grounded in both evidence and local context. “We have developed different case studies across Europe, bringing together stakeholders to co-design the problem, the capacity on the ground, and potential solutions”, Phoebe Koundouri explains. 

One example focused on improving the climate resilience of Mediterranean ports (and by extension SDG13 and SDG14). Stakeholders included port authorities, ministries, businesses, financial institutions, regulators, NGOs, and researchers. These groups first agreed on the current state using shared data and modelling insights. They then co-designed a future vision and year-by-year transition actions to reach SDG targets. A digital innovation platform, BRIGAID, supported knowledge sharing and the integration of market-ready climate adaptation solutions.

Enabling collaboration: Engagement and digital infrastructure

Co-development of solutions like this relies heavily on participation from a wide range of stakeholders, which can be a challenge. “It’s a volunteering process, but it’s costly,” explains Eleni Toli, Senior Researcher, AE4RIA. Maintaining participation relies on transparency and accountability, as well as financial support for key contributors.

“Sometimes you start with high ambitions and engagement, but after some time, people tend to be less involved. It’s also a burden for the organisers. It’s important that key stakeholders are reimbursed for their work and also supported in doing [it].” - Eleni Toli, Senior Researcher, AE4RIA

These challenges directly informed AE4RIA’s development of digital tools to support its Living Labs. These tools function as shared knowledge infrastructure, providing democratic access to information, a record of actions, and continuous collaboration across stakeholders.

Crucially, the platform connects participants to the underlying modelling system, enabling stakeholders to move beyond discussion to evidence-based decision-making. Different policy options, investment choices, or technological interventions can be explored and tested within the model, helping participants understand trade-offs, identify synergies across sectors, and anticipate economic and social impacts before implementation.

Ensuring knowledge transfer and scalability

AE4RIA’s approach is designed to scale learnings from one setting can be applied in others, without having to start again from scratch. “The systems thinking and modelling approach aims to cover all countries in the world”, explains Professor Koundouri.

Using a taxonomy of similarity (economic, political, policy or socioeconomic similarity), elements of a case study can be transferred and replicated to others across the region. While transferred pathways may not have the same level of detail as a full case study, they provide a strong foundation for integration into national plans. For institutions, this demonstrates how research impact can extend beyond individual projects, contributing to broader, transferable solutions.

Springer Nature’s SDG report highlights the growing connection between research and policy. AE4RIA’s work demonstrates what it takes to extend that connection into implementation.  For institutions, the opportunity now lies in moving beyond knowledge production and dissemination to actively supporting the systems that enable research to be used, connecting data, stakeholders and funding in ways that translate research into delivery.

Take a closer look at the report: From publications to policy: The impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals.

About Professor Dr. Phoebe Koundouri

P_Dr. Phoeba

Professor Dr. Phoebe Koundouri is a globally renowned mathematical economist who has pioneered human-centred, interdisciplinary modelling systems for the sustainable interaction between nature, society, and the economy. She brings nearly 30 years of academic leadership and research excellence at leading institutions, including the University of Cambridge, University College London (UCL), the London School of Economics (LSE), the University of Reading, and the Technical University of Denmark. She is consistently ranked among the top 2% of world scientists in multiple prestigious international listings, with an academic record that includes 21 books, more than 800 published papers, over 100 large-scale research projects, and measurable impact in more than 120 countries.

She is currently Professor at the School of Economics, Athens University of Economics and Business (AUEB); Visiting Professor at the Department of Earth Sciences, University of Cambridge; and Senior Research Fellow at Peterhouse, University of Cambridge, her alma mater. She is the Founder of the Alliance of Excellence for Research and Innovation on Aeiphoria (AE4RIA), a global research and innovation network bringing together more than 200 researchers. AE4RIA is anchored in ReSEES.AE4RIA at AUEB and SDU.AE4RIA at the ATHENA Information Technology Research Center, both research centres directed by Professor Koundouri.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts! 

Open science, altruism and impact: An interview with clinical geneticist Zornitza Stark

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Apr 30 2026

This post is the second in a blog series focused on researchers’ experiences with open science practices, highlighting the impact of sharing data, code and protocols openly.   

Professor Zornitza Stark is a clinical geneticist at the Victorian Clinical Genetics Services in Melbourne, Australia. She works in the field of translational genomics, specialising in rare diseases. As a senior researcher, Zornitza Stark has wide publishing experience, with recent articles published in Nature Portfolio journals, such as this Call to action to scale up research and clinical genomic data sharing and Feasibility, acceptability and clinical outcomes of the BabyScreen+ genomic newborn screening study. She is also Associate Editor for NPJ Genomic Medicine and has frequently published in the European Journal of Human Genetics.  

We asked Professor Stark to share her experiences of open science practices and the impact that open data sharing has on patients and their families.

Can you briefly introduce yourself and your research area?  

I'm a clinician researcher, so my time is split between clinical work and research. My research tends to be very translational; it's closely related to the type of clinical work that I do, which is primarily with families affected by rare disease. There are several projects that we're currently working on, including genomic newborn screening. We are also exploring how to leverage machine learning and artificial intelligence approaches to scale up the analysis or reanalysis of genomic data. I'm heavily involved in novel gene discovery for rare conditions and research into how to speed up the implementation of genomic testing into clinical practice, in particular how to generate the evidence that governments and policymakers need to fund it as part of healthcare. A big portion of my work involves working out the health economics for specific clinical applications of genomics. 

How did you first become interested in open science practices?  

Translational genomics is a relatively new field, which involves the application of new technologies. Working out how to do it is heavily dependent on sharing knowledge, but genomics also depends on the sharing of data; we need data for as many individuals as possible to work out what is rare and significant.  

As a community, we share data using specific genetics platforms, such as Gene Matcher, ClinVar, and Shariant (an Australian genomics-led variant sharing initiative). I also lead PanelApp Australia, a platform for sharing information on gene–disease associations for diagnostic use. Through this platform , we contribute to the Gene Curation Coalition, which is an international aggregation database of gene-disease relationships. 

In addition to data sharing, what open science practices do you use? 

From the sharing of code right through to how to conduct an economic evaluation as a protocol, or publishing a paper open access, we’re sharing knowledge on how to do relatively new tasks, because we're all new to this field.  

What motivated you to adopt these practices?  

“Open science ensures we share knowledge as quickly as possible, because that's what impacts both research and clinical outcomes” 

                              Zornitza Stark, Victorian Clinical Genetics Services, Melbourne, Australia  

I think most people are in medicine and research for altruistic reasons. I believe in the underlying premise of open science. We are also generally funded by public funds, and work in a public healthcare system. I strongly feel that public funds should be used to create public goods. 

Open science also ensures we share knowledge as quickly as possible, because that's what impacts both research and clinical outcomes. And those two are very closely intertwined in my type of work. 

Have you ever faced any particular challenges or barriers in undertaking open science practices?  

For the area that I work in, there is a lot of dependence on infrastructure. We know there is willingness from patients and research participants to share their data — that’s generally not a barrier — and most researchers also feel the same way. When we have been held back, it has been through a lack of political will to resolve potential legal issues and the lack of investment in large-scale infrastructure that would enable much more data sharing to occur. 

As an example, as a federated country, Australia has not been able to create a centralised Australian genomic dataset that could aggregate genomic data from across the country. This is due to a lack of investment in infrastructure and agreement between all the parties that we can share across borders. Contrast that to the National Genomic Research Library set up in England, which has managed to aggregate hundreds of thousands of datasets into a single infrastructure that can be queried by researchers. 

Is there a particular success story or example you're proud of that illustrates the benefits of open science?

“Sharing data openly has also had an impact on citations: being recognised by the international community as a contributor increases the visibility of our work.” 

                                                                                                      Zornitza Stark, Victorian Clinical Genetics Services, Melbourne, Australia  

We have been better at organising data sharing for other types of data, including data at gene variant level, which is crucially important in terms of facilitating the accurate interpretation of genomic data. Because it is considered to be more de-identified, there has been less objection, and we have been able to build the necessary infrastructure to share this data type. As a country, this infrastructure has enabled us to participate in international databases such as ClinVar, massively accelerating our submission to this open international resource. 

Having our own data accessible in both national and international databases actually alerts us when we have potentially misinterpreted something. It allows researchers to get in touch with us if they disagree with our assessment, which is often very helpful because it can have an impact on patient diagnosis. From a research perspective, it has enabled us to participate in the assembly of international cohorts of patients with rare diseases because it has alerted other researchers that there are patients in Australia with those conditions and provided a means to get in touch with the clinicians and the families to participate in that international effort. This has helped us to understand the natural history of rare conditions better and to link families with emerging therapies for rare diseases.  

Another area to highlight that is almost entirely dependent on open data sharing is the discovery of new gene–disease associations; data sharing massively accelerates gene discovery. For example, the discovery of the RNU4-2 gene a couple of years ago was made possible through large-scale data sharing; a cohort of over 100 patients was assembled within a matter of weeks. It was a groundbreaking discovery, because we think this one gene accounts for nearly 1% of all cases of intellectual disability. 

Sharing data openly has also had an impact on citations; being recognised by the international community as a contributor increases the visibility of our work. 

How do you advise early career researchers on open science best practices? 

For us, open science is the accepted way of working. Occasionally, I guess people may feel reluctant to share their work because they feel anxious about competition. My role as a senior researcher is to deal with those anxieties and instead emphasise all the benefits of being part of the international community and large-scale collaboration. Working this way just massively increases our capacity to produce world-class research. 

Are there any gaps in support or resources about open science you’d like to see addressed?  

The principal issue is infrastructure as an enabling factor. We need much more strategic planning and high-level support that extends beyond individual projects or groups, backed with investment and the enabling infrastructure to magnify the benefits of open access to data. For example, several of the datasets that we've generated over the past decade are no longer available or accessible because the funding for a particular project finished. Although the participants consented to data sharing, with the lack of infrastructure for data deposition, these data have now been lost, which has been heartbreaking to watch. 

What advice would you give to researchers considering adopting open science practices?  

"My advice is always to embrace open science and to be an active participant in the international community; that will enrich your research and also your life.” 

                                                                                                          Zornitza Stark, Victorian Clinical Genetics Services, Melbourne, Australia  

I think my advice is always to embrace open science and to be an active participant in the international community, and that will only enrich your research and also your life.  

There is much greater recognition of the importance of open science, and there is momentum: we have seen investment in large-scale projects in several countries, including the US and UK. They have created the opportunity to build some of the enabling infrastructure to create trusted research environments and develop and implement the standards that will enable data sharing. The demonstration that something is possible, and how to do it, is really important to move people forward in creating similar investments and participating together in these endeavours, and I hope will accelerate open science practices further. 

Learn more about open science and sharing research data, code and protocols & methods openly

Related content:

  • Open science conversations:
  1. Building trust through transparency: An open science conversation with Geir Kjetil Sandve
  2. Bioinformatician Johannes Koester on embodying the spirit of open science
  •  Best practices for transparency and reuse: 
  1. How to share your research protocols and methods openly 

  2. How to share your research code openly 

  • Supporting open science practices: 
  1. Why share your research data? 

  2. Why sharing protocols matters 

  3. Why sharing your code matters 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

From open data to meaningful impact: Data sharing impact stories

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Apr 28 2026

The 2025 State of Open Data report looks back at a decade of survey responses from researchers to see how attitudes, behaviours, and policies around open data have evolved. In this blog, we explore the impact of data sharing more personally, through individual experiences of shared data. What happens when the barriers to data sharing are overcome, and how can shared data make an impact beyond one’s own work?  

By opening and sharing their data, researchers gain more visibility and credibility for their work. When data is open, individual studies can more effectively support long-term scientific progress. Results can be verified and contribute to creating new knowledge across disciplines. 

The State of Open Data 2025 © Springer Nature

In the 2025 State of Open Data report, we learned that researchers recognise the benefits of sharing open data, and that familiarity with FAIR principles (findability, accessibility, interoperability, and reusability) has risen sharply. The report also highlights that researchers still face challenges around reuse, recognition, and infrastructure.  

But what does data sharing and its benefits and challenges look like in practice? While writing the 2025 report, we spoke with researchers, librarians, and data experts about open data. For this blog, we collected their real-world examples of how data sharing has shaped research and collaboration. 

From data sharing to enabling reuse at scale 

When data is openly shared, it can become a reusable resource far beyond its original purpose. Brian Nosek, Co-Founder and Executive Director of the Center for Open Science and Psychology Professor at the University of Virginia in the United States, saw this happen with his data on bias.  

Nosek developed Project Implicit in 1998 with Mazarin Bonaji and Tony Greenwald. Project Implicit was a popular website that allowed people to measure their own implicit biases, and for twenty years, more than a million people a year contributed to the project.  

“It generated enormous amounts of data that could be used for all kinds of social and behavioural research,” Nosek explains. In 2013, when he opened the Center for Open Science, the Project Implicit team suggested to add its data: “No one else has such a data source, it's totally unique.”  

Project Implicit data is shared systematically every year, and it has generated enormous numbers of cross-disciplinary research applications in epidemiology, political science, sociology, and behavioural medicine. “These things are way beyond the work that we did with implicit bias and it just wouldn't have happened without making the data available. It’s been very exciting and gratifying to see it get reused that way,” Nosek says. 

This example shows how unexpected and rich the contribution of open data can be, and why sustained availability and documentation can mean long-lasting impact.   

Connecting data to unlock new insights 

Combining datasets can create knowledge that no single dataset could deliver. Melissa Haendel PhD, FACMI, is Sarah Graham Kenan Distinguished Professor, Director of Precision Health and Translational Informatics, Deputy Director of Computational Sciences – NC Tracs, The University of North Carolina (UNC) School of Medicine in the United States. She shares from her experience of linking and interpreting information to improve outcomes. 

Together with Chris Mungall at the Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory and with support of international collaborators, Haendel leads the Monarch Initiative. This initiative brings a variety of different open data sources together from humans and model organisms. “Once we've integrated the data, we can use it to improve the diagnosis of patients with rare diseases, really bringing those open data resources to the point of care, and using the data to help improve the lives of patients with rare diseases,” Haendel explains.  

In another project, the All of Us Research Program aims to recruit a million participants from across the United States, from diverse races, demographics, social structures, and religion. The study collects survey data, wearable data, genomic data, and electronic health record data. At the Center for Linkage and Acquisition of Data, Haendel and colleagues link that data to a variety of other data sources.  

“Participants have agreed to share, but not all of them are able to get their data into the program,” she explains. “We've partnered with a national health information network, eHealth Exchange, to go retrieve their electronic health record, and bring it back into the system. This is the first time anybody's ever done this, and it is so exciting because we finally actually have representation of their actual data from the place where they're receiving care.” 

Haendel’s work shows that interoperability and linkage can lead to meaningful impact. When data is available to be combined, value emerges, from research to healthcare and beyond.  

From open data to real-world and societal outcomes 

An example like Haendel’s Monarch Initiative also exhibits how data sharing can directly support cultural, health, or societal outcomes. Joy Owango, Founding Director of Training Centre in Communication (TCC Africa) in Kenya, illustrates how data sharing can have societal impact by supporting communities in preserving, managing, and sharing knowledge. 

The National Museum of Nigeria contacted TCC Africa because they are digitising and launching their digital library. This is a first step in data management; collect, curate, store, and share. But many questions arise: “How do you store it? Where do you store it? Now they are thinking about what kind of technology they can use to share our indigenous knowledge and protect our sovereignty. Something that acknowledges our ownership and contribution to research,” Owango explains. 

Impact is not only about citations and publications. Considerations of ethics, ownership, and trust are essential, as this experience shows.  

Catalysing collaboration and paradigm shifts 

Data sharing can lead to new collaborations and broader networks. Dawei Zhang is Deputy Director of the National Materials Corrosion and Protection Data Centre, and Professor at the School of Advanced Materials Innovation, University of Science and Technology Beijing in China. His shared data led to new and exciting collaborations that opened new research directions in the field. 

Zhang’s group was the first in the world to use AI models to process data obtained by a corrosion sensor in a typical atmospheric environment in China. The results showed that the combination of high-throughput corrosion data and AI models could help understand and even predict how materials can degrade.  

“A leading Croatian scientist in Belgium asked if we could share the data,” Zhang shares. “At that time only a minority of people wanted to believe that this data-driven machine learning model, which we often call black boxes, could lead to something that is really transformative. By using the data we shared, they not only published several very important works, but also helped us broaden our impact and extend the collaboration to many other countries,” Zhang explains.  

These collaborators from different countries are now driving the transformation of the entire corrosion research paradigm. Zhang’s experience exemplifies how sharing data can lead to collaboration, which can accelerate new insights, paradigm shifts, and scientific development.  

From data shared to data reused: What your data needs to create impact 

The 2025 State of Open Data report shows that the foundations for open data are in place. They should be strengthened and supported to make data sharing the standard across the research community. The impact stories above are just a few examples from across disciplines around the globe, that illustrate how meaningful intentional sharing can be providing data are curated, documented, and well-governed. As we’ve seen in the 2025 State of Open Data report, and as amplified in these stories, openness alone is not enough.  

Making shared data count is not only about making it available, but ensuring it can be reused in meaningful ways. Infrastructures, standards, and services are required to enable data to travel across geographical locations and scientific disciplines to deliver more impact.  

These impact stories illustrate what is possible when openness is combined with intention and purpose. If your work generates high-quality data, share it to create your own impact story. Turn your work into a resource that can drive reuse, collaboration, and long-term impact.  

Get resources and support to share your data openly in Springer Nature’s Open Science hub, and explore the 2025 State of Open Data report to learn more about global attitudes towards open data.  

Related content

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

Springer: A legacy shaped with research communities

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Apr 28 2026

You know Springer as a trusted name, trust that is nearly two decades in the making. Springer’s reputation is rooted in a habit of adaptation to an ever-evolving research landscape, to support its research communities to do their best work. When this work is shared and communicated effectively, it inspires change, fosters collaboration, and drives action.


Here’s a glimpse into how Springer’s legacy took shape, and how its adaptive, forward-looking approach reflected in its response to major shifts in scholarly communication, like digitalisation and open access. And most importantly, how this legacy continues to guide our work today.


“Within the Springer Nature family, each member serves researchers in its distinct way, always underpinned by trusted scholarship. With its long publishing heritage, Springer brings a particularly strong combination of global reach and discoverability, rigorous editorial and integrity standards, and guidance and support throughout the publication journey.”


Nearly two centuries of scholarly communication have passed since Julius Springer founded a small publishing house in Berlin in 1842. Springer has been growing alongside the development of modern research, adapting to its evolution, and responding to the changing needs to its research communities.

Your work is shaped by your research community and field, and by the methods, standards, practices, and tools that you use. As these evolve, so do expectations around how research is produced, validated, and shared. To best support researchers, Springer evolves and adapts as well. Working closely with research communities, it innovates to accommodate the evolving landscape, while always remaining grounded in integrity and rigour.

“Working with Springer has enlarged my own visibility, because Springer is a renowned publisher and has a wide readership in those areas in which I publish, which increases my own visibility.” 

- Dr. Bernice Bovenkerk, author of Beyond Natural, Normal, Necessary, Nice: Introducing ‘Neglectable’ as a Distinct Coping Strategy for the Dairy Paradox (2026)


Springer today: A legacy of trust for your research

To publish your best work and reach a broad audience, you need a publisher you can trust. Springer’s long legacy of excellence is what makes it the trusted publisher you know today.

Springer has a broad disciplinary reach, spanning science, technology, medicine, humanities, and social sciences. You’ll find cutting-edge science as well as foundational work, in formats ranging from journals and books to reference works and more, designed to serve the various needs of the research community. With its portfolio of over 2,700 journals and over 220,000 books, Springer publishes the trusted content that serves as the foundation for research and development. And it empowers authors to share impactful research.

Over time, books and articles can do more than record results. They help define fields, connect within and between communities, and support the development of your work and of research beyond your field. Springer supports this long-term value by adapting alongside authors and editors to the evolving landscape of scholarly publishing. Springer’s adaptive, forward-looking approach is reflected in how it responded to two major shifts in scholarly communication over recent decades: digitalisation and open access.


“A benefit for the authors, in the first place, is the reputation of Springer. It’s attractive to have an article in a Springer journal, because Springer is a good publisher, obviously.”     

- Marc de Vries, author of Storybook driven design for enhancing spatial ability in early childhood: a lesson study approach (2026)



Forward-looking innovation: At the forefront of globalisation and digitalisation

The modest Springer publishing house grew alongside the internationalisation of science. Knowledge advances fast when researchers engage across borders, and Springer was there to support the global circulation of ideas, which required trusted editorial processes in an international scale. Research needed more than just wider distribution, but also meaningful connections.

Digitalisation expanded this process of connecting and delivering research. Springer’s early embrace of digital publishing was a natural extension of its legacy of excellence and rigour, combined with an innovative spirit.

Digital publishing makes it easier for your work to be discovered, accessed, and connected to related research. Springer’s early investment in digital infrastructure made more than a century and a half of scholarly publications available to study and explore. This digitalisation underscored Springer’s commitment to supporting researchers as they navigate an increasingly digital, networked environment.


“At the Springer publication European Journal for Philosophy of Science, we try to give space for non-mainstream voices. We also try to make the refereeing process as fair and transparent as possible, especially to younger researchers who may be less acquainted with what happens behind the scenes.”

- Federica Russo, Co-Editor-in-Chief of the European Journal for Philosophy of Science


Open access: Making research more accessible than ever

Springer has always played a significant role in shaping new publishing models, particularly open access. The same adaptive mindset that has always guided Springer also shaped its proactive and leading response to the advent of open access.

As expectations around access, funding, and transparency in research began to change, Springer expanded new publishing models that supported wider dissemination while maintaining established editorial standards. The development of open access journals and books reflected an understanding that research communities differ in their needs, and that sustainable routes to openness require flexibility rather than uniform solutions.

Open access is another chapter in Springer’s robust legacy, which continues its longstanding mission to support research communities navigate the publishing and research landscapes, and ensure research can reach the audiences who can make it meaningful by building on it or putting it into practice.

Research now moves faster, crosses disciplines more readily, and is expected to address increasingly complex global challenges. Springer evolves alongside it, always helping experts publish their work and helping others find it. While tools, platforms, and publishing models may change, Springer’s underlying commitment remains the same as it was in 1842: to support research communities in turning knowledge into insight and action.

Explore the benefits of publishing your next journal article or book with Springer. Get practical tools, expert insights, and tailored resources to help you navigate the process with confidence and clarity.

Related Content

Open access at scale: why it continues to deliver for authors, research and society

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Wed Apr 22 2026

For more than 25 years, we have stood behind a simple principle: research has greater impact when it is open, trusted and usable. Researchers want their work to be read, cited and built on. Funders and policymakers want the research they support to be openly available — immediately, and in its final, citable form. And society depends on the integrity of the version of record to inform decisions and tackle urgent global challenges.

At a time when the costs associated with OA are being questioned, it is worth looking at the value it delivers in enabling scalable and sustainable openness. 

  • For researchers, immediate openness drives visibility, use and impact. As our latest Annual Report shows, last year saw a 9% increase in average citations per published OA article.
  • For institutions and libraries, OA delivers stronger engagement. Research published openly is downloaded and reused far more widely, helping maximise the value of institutional research investment.
  • For society, OA ensures timely access to evidence that matters. In 2025, we published 1.4 million research articles and book chapters related to the SDGs – 62% were OA supporting policy and public debate.

By ensuring immediate access to trusted high-quality content at the point of publication, supporting authors through waivers and sustained reinvestment, OA helps ensure that both access to research and participation in publishing are equitable at global scale.


Delivering OA at global scale

As Frank has said before me, OA agreements remain a key driver of this progress. They help institutions manage costs, simplify publishing for authors, and support participation across disciplines. In 2025, we reached 85 agreements worldwide, supporting researchers at more than 4,400 institutions and enabling the publication of more than 63,000 open access articles — up 12% on 2024.

We also waived more than €22 million in APCs, ensuring researchers in underfunded disciplines and in LIC and LMIC countries can benefit fully from the reach and engagement that OA delivers. At the same time, the average cost per download has fallen by around 54% since 2019, and we continue to reinvest more than 10% of profits back into the research community. Today, more than 53% of the primary research we publish is open access — a clear signal of uptake and confidence from researchers.


Transparency and reproducibility - foundations of trust

This growth has not come at the expense of quality or impact.  In 2024, our average acceptance rate for full OA article was 21.1%, down from 29.5% in 2019. – reflecting sustained selective and a continued focus on publishing high quality research. That rigor underpins trust in the scientific record.

Making research immediately available in its final, peer‑reviewed form is fundamental to that trust. OA ensures work can be scrutinised, reused and built upon from day one, whilst remaining connected to the academic record in perpetuity. Through our advocacy for reproducibility, transparent peer review and open standards — including data availability statements and the open sharing of data, code and protocols — we are working with the community to ensure that every stage of the research process is visible and accountable.


Scaling responsibly with AI

Partnership will continue to be central to progress. The future of open access is multi‑funded, with collaboration across publishers, institutions, funders and infrastructure providers essential to enabling scale while managing cost and maintaining quality.

Innovation is key. To accelerate the next phase of the transition, we are investing strongly in technology and AI, focused on making publishing easier for authors while protecting the integrity and trust of research. Since 2021, Springer Nature has invested €188 million in technology, including AI‑enabled tools that strengthen research integrity, support editorial decision‑making and improve the publishing experience.

Finally - industry collaboration, supporting more open ways of sharing research and removing barriers to participation. We will continue to play an active role in discussions around shared protocols, data availability and open code policies, listening closely to our community to help build shared standards that benefit the research ecosystem.

The transition to OA is ongoing and complex. Progress depends on partnership, shared standards and sustained investment. Our responsibility is clear: to ensure OA is accessible to all, sustainable at scale, and uncompromising on quality and trust.

Researchers embrace AI. The disclosure gap is the challenge.

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Tue Apr 21 2026

As AI becomes more embedded in day‑to‑day research practice, the question for the scholarly community is no longer whether it will be used, but how it should be governed. To better understand how researchers are navigating this shift, last year, Springer Nature and TBI Communications surveyed over 1,000 researchers. The results offered useful insights into where confidence in AI use is growing, where it is lacking, and what role publishers can play in supporting responsible use.   


Cureus TBI survey © Springer Nature


AI has moved from a topic of debate to a tool of daily practice for most researchers. Our survey found that 69% of respondents already use AI tools frequently or occasionally in their research or publishing workflow.  

Only a small minority now expect to not use AI at all in the future, with researchers in mathematics more likely than those in other fields to say they do not plan to use AI. 

Usage also varies by career stage. Early-career researchers are the most engaged. PhD students (87%) and early-career academics (82%) are the most likely to follow, recommend, or submit to an AI-integrated journal. Senior academics remain more cautious in their adoption and use. 

New Content Item © Springer Nature


Fig. 1: How often researchers use AI in their research or publishing process (n = 1,017) 

The primary use case for AI was typically translation and summarisation, followed closely by manuscript writing and editing along with data analysis and modelling. What is interesting is that AI is no longer limited to administrative tasks. It now extends across most core research activities, from study design to data analysis.  

 

Fig 2 cureus © Springer Nature

Fig. 2: Ways researchers have previously used AI in research or publishing (n = 825) 


Researchers also see potential for AI in peer review. In our survey, 59% said AI could speed up feedback, and 41% expected it to improve the clarity of reviewer comments.  

Comfort with AI in early-stage tasks, for example reviewer matching and initial manuscript screening, is notably high. There is less support, however, for AI generating substantive analytical content without human oversight. 

There is also a notable pattern: Humanities and social science researchers showed higher enthusiasm for AI-assisted publishing than many STEM fields, a finding that may reflect different disciplinary needs and workflows. 

AI adoption is increasing but transparency over use is lagging 

Despite growing adoption, one third of respondents told us that they have never disclosed their AI use when submitting or publishing. Patterns again vary by career stage and discipline: 

  • Senior academics were more likely to always disclose their use of AI compared to other career stages (47% vs. 39% average). 

  • Respondents in STEM are less concerned with disclosing their use of AI (37% sometimes and 34% always).   

  • Respondents in Medicine are particularly strict on disclosure (only 9% never disclose, and 70% always do) 

With other surveys showing one of the largest barriers around AI use being the lack of transparency, this data points to a shared gap in expectations and guidance that needs to be addressed collaboratively with the research community.  

Fig 3 cureus © Springer Nature


Where we are now 

These findings reflect a wider sector challenge. AI adoption is scaling faster than the frameworks designed to govern it. Across publishing, the response has been gathering pace. Publishers have responded through a combination of tools, policies, and shared standards. Alongside investments in detection technologies and updated author guidelines, industry bodies are also stepping up. In September 2025, STM introduced recommendations for classifying and labelling AI use in research outputs. This work has since expanded into a broader consultation on the responsible use of scholarly content in generative AI (March 2026), opening dialogue across publishers, researchers, and technology providers. In parallel, the World Conference on Research Integrity in Vancouver (May 2026) has established a dedicated track to advance a global standard for AI disclosure in research. 

At Springer Nature, we have been working to build that infrastructure across our portfolio. We have introduced AI-assisted tools at multiple stages of the publishing process, from manuscript preparation and peer review administration through to author support services, with a clear principle: AI should augment human editorial judgement, not replace it. This work is underpinned by our five AI principles covering dignity, fairness, transparency, accountability and privacy, which inform our author guidance and AI policies across the portfolio. 

Our full approach is set out on our AI hub. 

We know this is work in progress. The survey data are useful precisely because they tell us where the gaps remain, and where researchers need publishers to do more. 


What comes next 

One practical response to these findings is the new Cureus Journal of AI-Augmented Research. When surveyed, 61% of researchers said they would consider submitting to an AI-integrated journal, and 75% would follow it for updates. Researchers were also clear about what makes a venue credible: indexation in major databases (58%), a recognised editorial board, transparent AI policies, and human oversight of peer review (29%). These expectations are widely shared. They reflect a consistent message: AI is welcome in scholarly publishing, but only under conditions of transparency, human control, and clear accountability. These signals have a direct bearing on how publishers design journal offerings going forward. 

 

Fig 4 Cureus © Springer Nature

Fig. 4: What would give researchers confidence in a credible, high-quality journal (n = 714) 

This new publishing venue is designed to offer a ‘sandbox’ approach to AI research and a space for researchers to explore models of AI-supported peer review, reproducibility, and open science, alongside publishing AI-augmented peer reviewed research, with human editorial oversight at every stage. 

Researchers are actively shaping how AI fits into their work. At Springer Nature, we see our role as working alongside the research community, offering clear standards, practical author guidance, and processes that are transparent about where AI is used and how.  

The aim of this journal is not to provide a definitive model, but to test and refine approaches collaboratively in the open. We’re excited about this journey and plan to share what we learn along the way. 

Related Tags:

Demystifying the publishing process: What value do open access book publishers add? Part 2

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Apr 17 2026

This article was originally published in 2021 and was last updated in April 2026.

This is the second part in our blog series looking at the value that publishers add for open access book authors (find part 1 here, which looks at quality assurance, the editorial process and publisher prestige).

How publishers help your open access book go further

If you publish an open access book through an academic publisher or press, you will have access to more services, distribution channels and marketing support than if you were to self-publish.

At Springer Nature, our open access books all have their own International Standard Book Number (ISBN) for both the eBook and the print copy enabling readers to buy the book, as well as a Digital Object Identifier (DOI) on a book and chapter level. DOIs are persistent interoperable identifiers used on digital networks, which support the discovery, sale and analysis of your book and chapters.

In addition to print, our open access books are available online as HTML, PDF and ePub from our publishing platform Springer Nature Link, and through other platforms and indexers we partner with such as Google Books. MOBI is also available through Amazon. This variety of formats removes barriers by allowing readers to read your work on any device.

Dissemination, discoverability and preservation

We know that open access book authors want to reach a wider and broader audience, so dissemination and discoverability are crucial in getting your work out there and making it easier to find.

Some publishers host publications on their own platforms. Springer Nature’s publishing platform, Springer Nature Link, receives 24 million readers per month, guaranteeing a wide audience for your work.

In addition to Springer Nature Link, we work with partners such as Web of Science, Scopus and the OAPEN Library, plus all of our open access books are listed in the Directory of Open Access Books (DOAB) and, where appropriate, PubMed’s NCBI Bookshelf. Inclusion on these sites enhances the visibility and discoverability of your open access book.

Our open access books are also automatically included in our eBook Collections at no additional charge to ensure maximum distribution. Our existing relationship with libraries and booksellers means that your open access book will reach our millions of customers around the world. By assigning a Creative Commons (CC) licence, this gives readers a clear indication of how they can use your book.

We endeavour to ensure that all content remains accessible and usable to our readers, regardless of media failure and technological change. As such, we work with digital preservation organisations such as CLOCKSS and Portico to ensure the long-term survival of web-based scholarly publications for the benefit of the global research community.

Marketing and activities

Perhaps one of the most highly valued services that a publisher can provide is the marketing and promotion of your work. However, not all open access book publishers include marketing support in the services that they provide to authors. If self-publishing, the absence of this service can be a major disadvantage alongside the extra labour involved on the author’s side to get the book created.

At Springer Nature, our open access books are marketed in the same way as our non-open access books, to make sure that they reach the greatest number and widest range of readers. Our global and expert marketing teams employ an effective mix of marketing activities.


  1. Search engine optimisation
    Each book has its own homepage on our website with its own downloadable promotional flyer. To ensure that relevant content appears at the top of the results list of an appropriate keyword search, we constantly optimise our product pages. 
  2. Newsletters and alerts
    To stay up-to-date, many of our readers and library customers have registered for subject-specific email newsletters and new book alerts for customised information such as highlighted books.
  3. Social media
    Our social media accounts are subject-specific and interest group focused, allowing us to connect with new and existing audiences. To keep them informed and engaged, we promote conferences and run special campaigns.
  4. Conferences
    We present a selection of recent books at scientific conferences and we promote more books in our conference-specific catalogues, newsletters and on dedicated web pages.
  5. Highlight campaigns
    Thematic collections are curated to further increase the discoverability of our publications and help surface some of the most pressing topics. Examples include the Sustainable Development Goals (SDG), and open access books publishing. These campaigns are promoted across multiple channels, targeting readers interested in their content.

Of course, your own network and connections are invaluable too, so we encourage you to reach out to them directly. We have some tips and tools to help you spread the word about your book.

The impact of our open access books is tracked through usage statistics which you can find on Springer Nature Link, showing the number of chapter downloads, citations and Altmetric mentions. Our open access books receive on average 10 times more downloads, 2.4 times more citations and 10 times more online mentions than our non-open access books, and reach 61% more countries  increasing the global diversity of your readership.

Have maximum confidence in, and visibility for, your open access book

The OAPEN Open Access Books toolkit, an independent free author resource, suggests that if your goal is to publish sound science or reputable research, you should choose a publisher that will give your readers the confidence that your research is academically sound. Self-publishing does not always offer this.

An open access book means more than just “free to read” - it needs a proper licence, quality assurance and effective distribution and marketing methods to ensure it reaches your intended audience.

By offering an open access option to book authors, we are giving you the freedom to choose the right publishing method most suited to your needs.

Interested in experiencing the benefits of open access publishing? Visit our open access books hub to learn more about how it all works, or get in touch with a Springer, Palgrave, or Apress publishing editor with your idea.

Related content

Perceptions of fairness and bias in the scholarly publishing ecosystem: Insights from a new report

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Apr 16 2026

How do researchers perceive fairness and bias across the scholarly publishing landscape? And how do these perceptions impact their publishing behaviour? 

Our recent report analyses responses from over 8,000 researchers globally to better understand their views across the scholarly publishing landscape as a whole. In this blog, we discuss the report’s key findings, and explore some of the strategies we use to address perceived bias and encourage fairness in the publishing process at Springer

Perception of fairness © Springernature 2026

Nature.

Science and research are often seen as domains governed by impartial standards, where methods, execution, and evaluation are grounded in established research standards. As a key stage in the research lifecycle, scholarly publishing is likewise expected to assess research primarily on its quality.  

Yet researchers’ experiences suggest a more complex reality. Bias is widely perceived to be present globally across scholarly publishing. It remains underdiscussed but widely felt, and shapes researchers’ trust, behaviour, and decisions about where and how to publish. 

Our survey asked researchers about their perceptions of fairness and bias in scholarly publishing, so that we can better understand and address them. We received responses from researchers worldwide representing various regions, disciplines, career stages, and publishing experiences across the scholarly publishing landscape. 

The findings from the survey were recently published in the report titled Perceptions of fairness and bias in the scholarly publishing ecosystem: a global survey' They highlight both structural challenges and practical expectations researchers have of publishers, editors, and reviewers. 

Understanding perceptions of bias in scholarly publishing  

Bias is widely perceived to exist across scholarly publishing, according to the report. 91% of surveyed researchers believe there is some degree of bias in academic publishing. And 84% of respondents say they have experienced bias in some way during the publishing process. 

Country-related bias is the most prevalent type of bias researchers believe to exist in publishing (62%), followed by institutional affiliation bias (56%) and professional network bias (55%). Common experiences of bias include rejection followed by similar papers being published (42%), lack of appreciation for regional significance of research (29%), and reviewer comments focusing on language skills rather than on the research itself (25%). 


Fig1 © Springernature 2026

Figure 2 from the report: Types of perceived bias


Fig4 - Indicators of individual experience of bias © Springernature 2026

Figure 4 from the report: Indicators of individual experiences of bias

How bias influences researchers’ publishing decisions  

The report finds that 72% of researchers consider the possibility of bias when deciding where to submit their work for publication. 45% say the possibility of bias significantly influences their decisions, and 30% say they’ve decided to not submit to a journal again after having experienced perceived bias.  

This means that researchers’ perceptions of bias influence where they choose to publish. They evaluate various indicators to assess a journal’s potential bias before submitting their manuscript. Beyond their own bias experience with a specific journal and that of their colleagues, many authors will also consider the types of articles published, the diversity of authors and editorial boards, and the the acceptance rates for authors from their region.  

Researchers also report actively using strategies to reduce potential bias against their manuscript. These range from collaboration with senior researchers, researchers from prestigious institutions or countries likely to be accepted, or utilising writing or language services.  

Addressing bias: What researchers expect publishers to do 

The survey shows strong consensus that publishers have both the responsibility and agency to address bias in the publication process. 91% of researchers expect clear policies and systems to address bias, and 62% expect procedures to investigate instances of bias. 

Researchers’ perceptions of the stages in the publication process when bias occurs explains their expectations from publishers to address bias. Respondents identify the initial editorial assessment and decision about whether to send a manuscript out for peer review (71%) and the peer review process itself (64%) as stages where bias primarily occurs. 

Editors indeed have a key role in the publication process, and most respondents want more training for editors, to support them in recognising, managing, and mitigating bias. Over half of respondents want greater visibility into editorial decision processes, as well as more prioritisation of scientific content over language. 

A little over half of researchers feel that reviewers should be provided with guidelines on how to minimise bias in peer review. Respondents consider transparency and anonymisation as ways to potentially reduce bias due to affiliation, gender, or region. And of course, targeted training on delivering constructive, bias-free feedback is considered essential. 

Addressing bias: Springer Nature’s efforts to minimise bias  

To tackle the problem of bias and support fairness in the publication process, publishers across academic publishing need to understand how researchers perceive bias and address their concerns. Indeed, 91% of survey respondents expect publishers to have clear policies and systems to address bias.  

Addressing bias requires more than intent; our efforts concentrate on practical mechanisms that shape decision-making. Because publishing decisions are made by people, training has a critical role in addressing bias. It helps individuals recognise unconscious assumptions, reflect on their decision-making, and avoid practices that may unintentionally reinforce bias. This is essential given what our survey shows us about the impact of perceived bias on researchers’ trust and publishing choices.  

In addition to training, practical mechanisms influence decisions at scale. They can help reduce bias by shaping how decisions are made using clear criteria, transparency, and structured workflows that reduce the reliance on individual judgement.  

Our efforts to reduce bias and encourage fairness in the publishing process at Springer Nature include:  

  • Training We’ve been offering implicit bias training for book and journal editors since 2024. The training examines how implicit bias can surface across the publication journey, including content acquisition, peer reviewer selection, editorial appointments, and portfolio management, and offers practical suggestions for countering bias. Additional trainings include Nature Masterclasses on peer review, research integrity training for editors and authors, and more.  
  • Increase transparency To support increased transparency, which may help to counter perceptions of bias, we expanded our use of transparent peer review to provide greater insight into the decision-making process. Transparent peer review is now available across all Nature family journals and the BMC Series journals. 
  • Diversifying editorial teams We are working to increase the regional diversity of our external academic editors to better reflect the global diversity of the research landscape. 
  • Language support We support authors with language-focused services. 

Towards a more robust research ecosystem 

Bias is challenging to prove empirically, but researchers’ perceptions of it have consequences, and they impact their publishing choices.  

Fairness, transparency, and inclusion are not abstract principles for us. We work to achieve and strengthen them throughout the publishing process at Springer Nature. The survey and report on researchers’ perceptions of fairness and bias help us in our efforts to contribute to a more robust and inclusive global research ecosystem for all.  

Explore the full report to learn more about how researchers like you perceive fairness in scholarly publishing, and how Springer Nature is acting on those insights.  

Related content: 

Report: Perceptions of fairness and bias in the scholarly publishing ecosystem: a global survey 

Blog: How we work to promote inclusive practices in book publishing 

Report: Inclusive book publishing at Springer Nature 

Blog: The benefits of inclusive publishing and why we need more inclusive journals 

Blog: How do you determine the value of a journal? Journal value beyond rankings 

White paper: Demonstrating journal value beyond rankings 

Blog: The value of null results: How Discover champions inclusive science 

White paper: The state of null results: Insights from 11,000 researchers on negative or inconclusive results 

Resources & Tools: Global Inclusion in Research Publishing 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs,sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

How to publish open access with BMC: Funding options explained

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Apr 16 2026

If you’re an early-career researcher (ECR), publishing open access can sometimes feel daunting, especially when it comes to understanding fees, funding, and the different open access models used across the publishing landscape. In fact, many ECRs are simply unaware that their institution may already have support in place to help cover open access publishing costs. In this guide, we’ll explain the essentials and show you how to quickly check whether your open access fees could be covered.

Last year, we celebrated 25 years of publishing high-quality, widely accessible research through BMC (formerly known as BioMed Central). Since we launched, our mission has remained the same: to pioneer openly available research and support authors at every career stage through every step of the publishing journey. This blog article explores how publishing in our fully open access (OA) journals shares your work with BMC’s 6 million monthly readers, as well as exploring your funding options.

Pioneering OA publishing

In 2000, BMC (then BioMed Central) made high quality research open to every reader – and in making the open access model sustainable, we changed the world of academic publishing.  

Since then, we’ve anticipated many open science trends that are now industry standards; we’ve introduced transparent peer-review processes across a wide range of titles; and we’ve encouraged authors to publish a variety of article types, including datasets and methodologies, to support the reproducibility of their research.  

Funders, research institutes, and governments are increasingly calling for OA publishing, and we continue to fully support the mission to make knowledge sharing more equitable. OA articles have no paywalls, allowing anyone, anywhere to access, read, and cite the latest scientific advances. We believe that OA has a crucial role in addressing current and future global challenges by ensuring that peer-reviewed knowledge reaches the widest possible audience.  

BMC’s portfolio now spans more than 300 fully OA journals across 16 disciplines. Explore the full portfolio of BMC journals

Watch the video to explore how we are advancing open, trusted, and community-led science for the future. 

Why publish OA with BMC?

Our publishing model is guided by four key tenets:

  • Trust: Our monthly readership of 6 million demonstrates that the research community trusts our publications. We care about quality research, and we were one of the first publishers to have a dedicated scientific integrity team. All our editors are carefully selected and trained.  

  • Community: Our diverse community of more than 20,000 editorial board members will guide your research through the peer-review process. They play an essential role in helping shape the vision of the journals in our portfolio and representing researchers globally.  

  • Support: We’ll be with you at every step of the publishing journey. We’ll help you find the right home for your research. And once you’ve chosen a journal and submitted your article, we’ll provide personal feedback and ensure that the peer-review process is both rigorous and constructive.  

  • Inclusivity: We offer a home to all robust research. By including datasets and null results, we help researchers avoid collecting the same data twice or repeating experiments that have already been done and led to negative results.

Together, these principles are designed to make publishing open access feel more transparent and supportive, especially for researchers early in their careers who are navigating the process for the first time.  

Learn more about the benefits of publishing open access, including increased citation and usage. 

"The whole process was researcher-centred and there was high cooperation between the editorial team and the authors.” 

– Author, BMC Medical Education

BMC open access funding options

Navigating different OA models can be tiring, so we ensure that our process is as smooth and transparent as possible for researchers at all career stages.  

Our article processing charge (APC) covers all the work involved in getting your manuscript into top shape before publication; managing the peer-review process; proofreading and lay-outing your article; and ensuring that it reaches a wide audience.  

A full list of the APCs for all our journals is easily accessible on our dedicated BMC website. Once your manuscript is accepted, the APC can be paid by your funder, your institution, your employer, or yourself.  

If your institution has a funding agreement in place with Springer Nature, part or all of the APC could already be covered. This is a key point for ECRs: in many cases, your university or institution may already have an open access agreement that covers your fees, but you won’t know until you check.

"The manuscript handling process was very careful yet also very swift. The reviewers' comments were precise and valuable.” 

– Author, Stem Cell Research & Therapy

How to find out whether your APC is covered by an OA agreement

Step 1: Go to the homepage of your journal of choice and click on ‘Explore open access funding’ underneath the ‘Submit your manuscript’ button.  

Step 2: Institutions are pre-filled based on your IP address, but you can update this to reflect your best fit or that of your co-authors.  

Step 3: If your university or institution has an agreement with Springer Nature, the eligibility checker will let you know your funding options.  

Tip: If you’re unsure which institution to select (for example, if you have multiple affiliations or international co-authors), try checking each relevant affiliation to see what funding options apply.

Our four-step process for publishing your research with BMC

  • Submission: Once you’ve chosen the right BMC journal for your work, you can submit your manuscript online. The first step is to navigate to the journal’s website, click ‘Submission guidelines’, and check whether your article meets the formatting and content requirements. When it’s ready to go, click the ‘Submit manuscript’ button.  

  • Peer review: Once your manuscript has been received, if appropriate for the journal, peer reviewers will rigorously evaluate it, assessing the validity of the work, and for our selective journals, the significance of the research. You may be required to make revisions based on their feedback.  

  • Acceptance and publication: Once accepted, your manuscript will be prepared for publication. This is the time when you’ll be charged the APC fee, unless it is already covered through an institutional agreement. We will also add relevant metadata to make sure your article can be discovered easily by those it could benefit. The final article will then be published online and made freely accessible.  

  • Post-publication: After publication, you can track the impact of your work through metrics such as downloads, citations, and social-media mentions. We will provide tools and support to help you maximize the visibility of your research.

Building an equitable future

We remain committed to being a trusted partner for our authors and readers; providing a platform that reaches millions of readers; championing inclusive publishing; and building a diverse community of contributors who feel supported.  

For early-career researchers, this means not only having a rigorous publishing home for your work, but also clearer routes to open access — including funding support through open access agreements where available.

If you’re interested in joining us to advance openness, transparency, and quality in community-led research, you can find out more about open access funding options with BMC.

Related Content:

Working in partnership to make research open, trusted and valuable

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Wed Apr 15 2026

For Springer Nature, 2025 was a year defined by growth, innovation, and a focus on advancing research and learning for the benefit of society.  

Our Annual Report provides an opportunity to reflect on our progress, recognise what working in close partnership with our communities helped us to achieve, and to be clear about where we are headed.   

With global research outputs continuing to increase, the report shows how we are ensuring we continue to meet community expectations around openness, speed and integrity so that science can be trusted and how our responsibility as a publisher remains steadfast - to help research be used more and travel further, to protect the integrity of the scholarly record, and to invest for the long term in ways that benefit the research community.  


Partnering to open up research, at scale  

 Open access (OA) remains central to how we support researchers and funders, and sustainable progress at scale has only been possible through partnership. Working with libraries, funders and institutions worldwide allows us to expand OA in ways that reflect regional needs.    

In 2025, more than 53% of the primary research articles we published were OA, reflecting continued momentum towards a more open scholarly record. This progress is happening at significant scale. Submissions grew by more than 30% to 3.1 million, with 539,000 primary research articles published across disciplines. Managing that growth while maintaining quality matters more than ever.  

The impact of openness is clear in how research is used. Last year, our articles and book chapters were downloaded 5.6 billion times, an increase of over 50% on 2024. This included more than 860 million downloads of content related to the UN Sustainable Development Goals.  

Looking ahead, our focus remains on expanding OA in ways that are sustainable and inclusive. This includes growing our global network of TAs, supporting librarians through the transition to OA, continuing to provide funding support where needed, and working with partners to enable access across regions and institutions.  

  

Partnering to support quality at scale  

We continue to take a researcher‑led approach to technology, investing in AI‑assisted tools developed in partnership with the research community to deliver value at the point of need.  

Central to this is Snapp, our proprietary article processing platform. With more than half our journals now using Snapp, it is provding a more consistent, transparent and efficient publishing experience, while allowing us to embed AI‑enabled tools across screening and editorial workflows. Since launch, it has supported 7 million authors, processed 3.7 million submissions and published over 600,000 articles.  

We apply the same approach beyond research publishing. In education, Macmillan Education Everywhere now supports 3.2 million active users, while in health our Medbee app is used by more than 40,000 doctors – with technology designed to deliver practical value where it is needed most.  

Used responsibly, AI helps us operate at scale and, combined with editorial expertise, ensures quality, accountability and rigour. 

  

Partnering to embed trust  

However, the value of publishing is measured not only in volume or usage, but in trust. I am proud that in 2025, authors, editors and peer reviewers continued to rate their experience with Springer Nature as excellent or good, reflecting the importance of reliable processes and collaboration in a changing ecosystem.  

Trust also depends on people. That is why we increased our dedicated global research integrity team to 75 specialists and continue to apply our “human in the loop” principle across publishing.  

That trust is also reflected in impact. The average number of citations per article rose by 14% compared with 2023, underlining how greater visibility and reach translate into meaningful engagement with research.  

We continue to work with the community to deliver free training in best practice, provide skills development through Nature Masterclasses, and support young doctors via Springer Medizin digital training programmes.  

  

Looking ahead: responsible growth, shared ambition  

While our Annual Report reflects a strong year, our focus is firmly on the future.  

We will continue to invest in OA, in technologies that improve the publishing experience, and in systems that protect the integrity of the scholarly record. We will also continue to act as a responsible business – building on progress in reducing carbon emissions by 50% since 2019, supporting charitable partnerships, and fostering a culture where colleagues can thrive.  

Most importantly, we will keep listening to the communities we serve. The challenges facing research will not be solved by any one organisation alone. Progress depends on partnership – and on a shared commitment to openness, rigour and trust. 


A new wave of women redefining biopharma

T
The Link
By: undefined, Wed Apr 15 2026

Pharmaceutical organisations increasingly recognise that inclusion is essential for innovation, workforce resilience, and robust scientific decision-making. Information professionals play a pivotal role in this, operating at the intersection of people, knowledge and systems. Through their work, they influence how scientific communities connect, how information is shared, and how equitable practices take root.

Our conversation with Dr. Shae Taylor offers a clear view of the challenges women encounter in biopharma and highlights how thoughtful information practices can strengthen participation and visibility across the sector. 

P_Dr.Shae_Taylor © Springer Nature 2026

Introducing Dr. Shae Taylor 

Dr. Shae Taylor’s career reflects a rare combination of scientific depth, technical expertise, and sustained advocacy for women in STEM. With dual degrees in biology and chemistry, she began her career as an analytical chemist before moving into engineering roles and, later, marketing. 

In 2000, she joined Agilent Technologies as a field service engineer specialising in liquid chromatography at a time when only 3 per cent of Agilent’s US field service engineers were women. Alongside her technical work, Taylor became an active leader in the Society of Women Engineers (SWE), heading the SWE@Agilent Employee Network Group, the organisation’s first employee network and for many years its only women‑focused group. 

Today, as North American Marketing Program Manager at Agilent, Taylor draws on a broad perspective shaped by scientific practice, engineering, advocacy, and customer engagement. Her book, Women in Biopharma, part of the Women in Engineering and Science series, documents the professional journeys of women across the global biopharmaceutical industry. 

The spark behind Women in Biopharma 
9783031803482

The idea for the book emerged at a Society of Women Engineers conference, where series editor Jill S. Tietjen led a session on the overlooked contributions of women in STEM. The discussion highlighted how many foundational scientific achievements were made by women whose work has not been widely recognised.

The session struck a chord with Taylor, who saw a clear gap in the Women in Engineering and Science series. Even as biopharma expanded and diversified, there was no volume highlighting the women shaping the field. Given her close work with biopharma customers, Taylor knew she was in a strong position to address this.

What women in biopharma are experiencing today

Across interviews with contributors from around the world, several themes emerged.

  • Persistent hurdles: Women face challenges at each career stage, from early‑career isolation to mid-career caregiving responsibilities and late‑career support for ageing parents. These experiences reflect broader patterns observed across the sciences, where belonging and representation strongly influence retention.
  • Perseverance and adaptability: Despite varied paths, each woman spoke about the need to adapt and persevere in a rapidly changing industry.
  • Structural instability: Volatility caused by mergers, acquisitions, and the dynamics of early‑stage biopharma makes adaptability essential.

“Everyone…encountered hurdles and difficult situations… but none of them let them stop them.”

One story that stayed with Taylor was Isadora’s. She immigrated from Brazil at 17 and faced deep loneliness as she tried to build a life without a community around her. Instead of accepting isolation, she created the support network she wished she had, only to discover how many others were searching for the same thing. She met countless people, men and women alike, who were struggling in similar ways. By bringing them together, she built a space where people could support and encourage one another. As Taylor put it, “She created her own group… and quickly found out she wasn’t the only one.”

Digital transformation: opportunity and risk

With AI and automation reshaping drug discovery, workflow optimisation, and scientific analysis, Taylor emphasises that inclusion must be embedded early in digital transformation.

Her team demonstrated this through an experiment using AI‑generated headshots produced from identical prompts. Results varied dramatically, demonstrating inconsistencies in how people from different demographic groups were represented. As Taylor observes, individuals from underrepresented groups are often the least accurately depicted.

These observations highlight key responsibilities for information managers:

  • AI-driven tools must be evaluated for representational fairness.
  • Metadata, training sets, and algorithmic outputs require scrutiny.
  • Diverse contributors must be involved in system design and governance.

This mirrors broader discussions on how institutions can build more equitable research environments by making it safer to report discrimination, improving support for underrepresented groups and taking deliberate action to improve workplace culture.

Underrepresentation in biopharma

Many girls grow up loving science, mixing things, building things, experimenting and asking questions. But as they reach their preteen years, the cultural messages around them often change. STEM stops being seen as something for everyone and starts being coded as something “for boys.” Taylor says this early loss of belonging is one of the first barriers we need to tackle. Keeping girls engaged means showing, clearly and consistently, that science and technology are not limited to one gender. It also means helping them understand the full range of STEM careers. As she points out, areas like law, policy and regulatory affairs, featured in Women in Biopharma, are essential to the biopharma sector, yet young women rarely recognise them as STEM pathways. Sharing this broader view early can help more girls imagine themselves in the field.

Why women leave and what organisations can do

One of Taylor’s most striking findings is that more than one‑third of women leave STEM roles within five years of graduating. The reasons are complex, but several themes recur:

  • Lack of flexibility, especially for those balancing childcare and eldercare.
  • Pay inequity, which undermines long-term career confidence.
  • Limited visibility of women in senior leadership, with only around 13% of STEM sector CEOs being women.
  • Insufficient support systems, particularly for mid-career and late-career caregiving responsibilities. “We need to switch from parental leave to family leave… across your entire career.”

How information professionals can advance equity

Taylor identifies librarians and information professionals as important enablers of progress. They can:

  • Provide flexible access to digital resources to support flexible working.
  • Use knowledge‑sharing platforms to highlight and amplify women’s contributions.
  • Model inclusive practice through equitable curation, presentation and promotion of content.
  • Curate resources that showcase women’s achievements in science and biopharma.
  • Ensure access to books, case studies and development materials, including the Women in Engineering and Science series.
  • Create safe physical or virtual spaces for networking, mentoring and community building, helping women form supportive communities.

Together, these actions help build a stronger sense of representation and belonging, especially for early‑career researchers who are just beginning their journey in science and often depend on inclusive, supportive environments to grow.

Women in biopharma: A new era of leadership

Taylor’s reflections, and the stories captured in Women in Biopharma, show a sector full of potential, shaped by challenges but also by a new wave of confidence. Young women today are entering STEM ready to break ceilings and define success on their own terms. As Taylor notes:

“Young women today have so much confidence. I'm blown away by it. They want to buck tradition. They want to break that ceiling and achieve success on their own terms, both at work and in their personal lives. And they're rewriting the narrative of what it looks like to be a woman in biopharma.”

For organisations, especially those managing information ecosystems, this creates a clear opportunity. Equitable access to knowledge, inclusive digital transformation, and the amplification of diverse voices directly influence who feels seen, supported, and able to thrive. Information professionals play a pivotal role here: making women’s contributions visible, curating resources that broaden representation, and creating spaces where community and mentorship can grow.

This is exactly what Women in Biopharma, part of the Women in Engineering and Science series, aims to reinforce. By highlighting the experiences and leadership of women across the sector, it not only documents progress but inspires the next generation to see themselves in biopharma’s future. With intentional information practices, that future becomes one where women don’t just enter the field, they help define its direction.

To explore more resources that inform, inspire, and drive new thinking across the research community, visit our Trusted Research hub. It’s a great place to dive deeper into the books, journals and tools that support equitable access to knowledge and shape the future of scientific discovery.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Perceptions of fairness and bias in the scholarly publishing ecosystem: a global survey

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Mon Apr 13 2026

Published today, Perceptions of fairness and bias in the scholarly publishing ecosystem: a global survey, is a new report from Springer Nature, sharing insights from a global survey of over 8,000 researchers on how they perceive bias and where they believe it shows up in the publication process. 

The global research landscape has diversified dramatically in the past decade. Researchers from emerging regions now represent an ever-greater share of research output, yet benchmarking shows that some of the most active countries producing research – especially China and India – remain underrepresented among academic external editors who are usually also practicing researchers in universities, editorial boards, and peer reviewers. This disparity risks reinforcing country-related bias in publishing outcomes.   

These disparities are not unique to any single publisher, and for that reason, this research engaged a broad international community of researchers. The sheer number of responses from researchers is an indication of the strength of feeling on this topic. The findings are clear: most researchers perceive bias in the publishing process, and that this is especially strongly felt in relation to the region and location of the researcher(s), followed by affiliation and network bias. Experience or perceptions of bias affect researchers’ trust and their decisions about where to publish. Encouragingly, researchers also believe that publishers have both the responsibility and the means to act.   

At Springer Nature, we are committed to supporting our editors and reviewers in recognising and reducing bias, to ensure a fair peer review process as well as a more complete and representative global knowledge base. We continue to advance our efforts across key areas identified by researchers in this survey: increasing the regional diversity of our external academic editors to better reflect the global diversity of the research landscape, expanding bias awareness training for editors, increasing transparency through initiatives such as transparent peer review (now available across all Nature family journals and the BMC Series journals) and supporting authors with language-focused services.  

We hope these findings stimulate discussion, reflection and collective action to broaden participation and create greater inclusion and fairness in research publishing. 

Related Tags:

Building trust through transparency: An open science conversation with Geir Kjetil Sandve

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon Apr 13 2026

Welcome to a new series of blog posts, where researchers share their experiences of open science practices and the impact that sharing open data, code or protocols can have. 

Geir Kjetil Sandve is Professor of Scientific Computing and Machine Learning at the University of Oslo in Oslo, Norway. He develops machine learning methods for life sciences and public health, with recent work focusing on climate-sensitive disease prediction. As a senior researcher, Professor Sandve has extensive publishing, teaching, and supervision experience, with articles in journals such as Nature Machine Intelligence, including Improving generalization of machine learning-identified biomarkers using causal modelling with examples from immune receptor diagnostics and The immuneML ecosystem for machine learning analysis of adaptive immune receptor repertoires.  

We asked Professor Sandve to share his experiences of open science practices and the impact that sharing open code can have on public health and research in the age of deep learning. 

Can you briefly introduce yourself and your research area?  

I do research within machine learning, and often I do methodological research which is very tightly inspired by real-use cases. I try to always base my new methodological projects on some concrete need. I have worked in life sciences for 20 years in machine learning; I first worked in genomics, then pharmacoepidemiology, and, for some years, quite intensely with immune receptors, like adaptive immune cells and how they recognise foreign threats. Most recently, I'm spending most of my time on how climate change is affecting health, such as machine learning for malaria and dengue fever, and predicting outbreaks ahead of time. 

How did you first become interested in open science practices?  

I think it was during my PhD, where we published quite a bit in the BMC series, including BMC Bioinformatics and Genome Biology, which published open access articles. I liked that for two reasons. As a computer science researcher, it’s not just about whether you can find a paper in the end but how quickly you can browse and navigate papers. Even though we had access to most of the papers we needed in my PhD, the open access ones were more convenient. That was my entry point. 

For open software, that was more on transparency. I could see that when anything was open science, it was much easier to double-check if things had been done correctly and feel reassured that I could trust the paper in detail. Also, it's much easier to build further on. In my PhD, I spent most of my time on preparation and boilerplate aspects. When I went in a more open software direction, where I tried to create open science projects that were built on open software, I could focus more on new ideas using the context of existing work. 

What motivated you to adopt open science practices?  

I went into research a bit of an idealist. I think it's quite a tough sector to be in, so I feel we have to find motivation in some ideals of science. One is that if I do something, I want it to be as helpful to others as possible. I want others to be able to build on what I've done. The second is trust. In science, we shouldn't be forced to trust people. We should instead always be open to check each other’s work. 

You’re never 100% proud of your research code. You always know that if you had unlimited time, you would make it even better. Allowing yourself to share it and say, ‘Okay, this is what I had time for,’ and being able to trust that you’ve made the right prioritisations is important. If you have done something wrong, there is a big chance that somebody will catch it. 

Have you ever faced any particular challenges or barriers in undertaking open science practices? 

Data sensitivity is one challenge, but another big challenge is the computational cost of ensuring reproducibility, especially when analyses are run frequently. We have practises to ensure transparency, reproducibility, and unbiasedness of results, but if you want to go into deep learning, you simply cannot do them realistically based on computational budgets. I think we are entering a phase where sometimes computation is so intense and demanding that we have to sacrifice a bit of this transparency and reproducibility in order save computational time.  

Also, it’s one thing to share code, but for it to be valuable, people need to be able to run it. That is becoming harder, as it may depend on particular GPUs or system setups. It may also sometimes rely on closed models from large commercial companies or require access to computing centres that are not openly available. I think they are the main challenges we face in the machine learning community specifically. 

Is there a particular success story or example you’re proud of that illustrates the benefits of open science?  

“For researchers from smaller institutions, open science is crucial for being part of a broad international community beyond their own office.”


Geir Kjetil Sandve, Professor of Scientific Computing and Machine Learning, University of Oslo, Norway 

We have one ongoing project that is not yet academically published, but it has already had an impact. I’m collaborating with the HISP Centre to develop DHIS2, which is the world’s largest open-source health information system. It is used as the national health information system in around 70 countries, where vaccination data, medicine stocks, tuberculosis outbreaks, and other health indicators are tracked.  

I’ve worked with them for three years to develop machine learning methodologies to predict climate-sensitive disease outbreaks. While there are many open-source models for early warning systems, we are trying to build a platform that enables such models to be used operationally, as that can be quite challenging in practice. We are building an open community where everything is open source and where we share our ambitions and ideas transparently. The goal is to bring the community together so countries can retain control over the models and how they are used, make informed decisions, build local capacity, and communicate effectively with governments to ensure real-world impact. 

It has been fascinating to me because it goes beyond publishing open access papers or open-source code. It requires an open development cycle, where we contribute core software platform technologies to a shared community and develop them collaboratively. 

Another point is that open science is also a way of contributing to capacity building. For researchers from smaller institutions, open science (its processes, networks, software, and publications) is crucial for being part of a broad international community beyond their own office. 

Have open science practices influenced your career progression? 

Yes, I think so. When I was hired for my permanent position, they wanted someone who could interact with existing research. I was able to say that I bring with me a lot of open and still actively developing code that others can contribute to. This is better for students as they can contribute to open-source code, which facilitates collaboration and interaction with the research environment. Open science practices have also increased the impact of my work. Several people have been inspired by the code I've made, and I have gotten collaborations both nationally and internationally based on it. 

What advice would you give to researchers considering adopting open science practices? 

“Open science is a way of thinking about science and work that makes it feel meaningful and easier to stay motivated in the long run.” 


Geir Kjetil Sandve, Professor of Scientific Computing and Machine Learning, University of Oslo, Norway 

It is completely worth it. I think you gain so much by going in this direction. If you see it as a community and become conscious of your strengths and weaknesses, it will open so many collaboration and learning opportunities. Open science is a way of thinking about science and work that makes it feel meaningful and easier to stay motivated in the long run. 

I feel the point of open science is that work should be possible to reproduce or reuse in practice. To me, open science is not about whether it’s theoretically possible with unlimited time to build on something but about ensuring it’s open in a way that actually invites reuse, transparency, and reproducibility. Sharing code without putting yourself in others’ shoes and considering how it might realistically be reused is not truly in the spirit of open science. It's not about checking a box; it's about actually contributing.

Learn more about open science and sharing research data, code and protocols & methods openly 


Geir Kjetil Sandve, PhD, Professor of Scientific Computing and Machine Learning, University of Oslo, Norway 

Geir Kjetil Sandve © Springer Nature

Geir Kjetil Sandve studied computer science at the Norwegian University of Science and Technology (NTNU). During his PhD, he surveyed, benchmarked and developed machine learning methodology for motif discovery in biosequences. For his postdoctoral studies at the University of Oslo, Norway, he broadened his understanding of statistics, collaborating with biologists and statisticians to pioneer statistical analysis of genomic co-localization. Currently, his main focus is on doing his part to help make our research environment fun but productive, brutally honest but supportive, and visionary while delivering on our promise.


Related content:

  • Open science conversations:

  1. Open science, altruism and impact: An interview with clinical geneticist Zornitza Stark

  2. Bioinformatician Johannes Koester on embodying the spirit of open science

  • Best practices for transparency and reuse: 

  1. How to share your research protocols and methods openly 
  2. How to share your research code openly 

  • Supporting open science practices:
  1. Why share your research data

  2. Why sharing protocols matters 

  3. Why sharing your code matters 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

Climate hope in a changing world

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Fri Apr 10 2026

The topic of climate is not often associated with good news. As discussed in a recent Nature Climate Change editorial; data, reporting and people’s lived experiences indicate that climate change is here, and it’s having a real and dangerous effect on global citizens.  

Since the first issue of Nature Climate Change in 2011, an anniversary we are celebrating this April, the world looks very different. The global mean surface air temperature has increased by more than half a degree, 60,323,400 km² of vegetated area has burned (roughly 11 times the area of the Amazon rainforest) and the global average sea level has risen by 52.7mm. Amid this context, it’s understandable that the public mood tips towards anxiety, with around 60% of the 16-25 year olds surveyed saying they felt ‘very’ or ‘extremely’ worried about the future of the planet.  

But in my role as Chief Editor of a global journal, I’m fortunate to see firsthand the breadth of work being done across disciplines and regions. I see risks sharpening, but I also see the response strengthening. This serves as a reminder for those of us working in climate research as much as it does for anyone watching from the outside: if we tell ourselves it’s only bad news, we make it harder to sustain the pace, creativity and collaboration that progress depends on. 

So, let’s look to the successes of the last 15 years: a much broader research community involved in understanding climate change, a clearer sense of how science can inform decisions in the real world, and a far stronger evidence base, to name a few. We’ve seen major milestones in global climate governance, including the Paris Agreement, successive climate COPs and IPCC reports. Over 135 countries have adopted net-zero emissions targets with around 40% of electricity now produced from clean and low-carbon sources. And as we reported earlier this year, there are safeguards in place that prevent a reversal on climate action so far. What’s more, the worst-case climate scenarios, set out in early COPs, are now exceptionally unlikely due to these policy shifts.  

Closer to home, at Nature Climate Change we’ve developed new ways of highlighting success and speeding up action with our Solutions in Practice and Policy Brief features. Research from our pages repeatedly makes the top 10 most talked-about climate-related papers in Carbon Brief’s yearly analysis. And in 2025 alone, Springer Nature published over 114,000 climate-related articles and book chapters.  

Throughout my decade-long tenure at Nature Climate Change, there’s been many moments, people and papers to be proud of (see our 10th anniversary issue for one of my memorable papers at that time.) But one thing in particular stands out. Nature Climate Change was created as the first thematic journal in the Nature Portfolio, designed to bring natural and social sciences together around a shared challenge. It’s wonderful to see that this interdisciplinary approach has become ever more important. Climate change is no longer discussed as a niche interest, but a cross-sector issue. The papers and proposals arriving on our desks now span mitigation, adaptation, impacts, equity, governance, behaviour, finance and technology, often all at once. Today, our pages reflect a wider range of topics, methods and perspectives than anyone could have predicted in 2011. 

Crucially, climate action is also a knowledge challenge. Solutions do not appear fully formed. They are discovered, tested, improved, and scaled. That process relies on research and on the systems that allow knowledge to move from one research group to another, from one discipline to another, and from evidence to decisions. This is where publishing plays an important role, helping to qualify research, so that policymakers and practitioners can trust what they are using. It helps to connect findings, so that we are not solving the same problems in isolation. And it helps to accelerate learning, by making results discoverable, comparable, and ready to be built upon. For addressing climate change, that matters at every step: understanding the physical system, assessing risks and impacts, designing and evaluating interventions, and learning what works in different contexts. 

I am under no illusion about the scale of what lies ahead. Ambition still needs to rise, and implementation needs to catch up. But we have a stronger scientific foundation, better tools, and broader awareness than we did 15 years ago. Most importantly, there is a global community of people who care deeply; researchers, reviewers, practitioners and readers. Nature Climate Change exists because of that community, and for it.  

Related Tags:

Safeguarding Springer Nature collections: the integrity checks you should know about

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Apr 10 2026

Join us for a look behind the scenes of Springer Nature collections in a special blog series. In today’s blog, Kun Yu, Director of Collections Management and Acquisition, explains how Springer Nature collections safeguard integrity, and why this is so important for the researchers who publish in them. From rigorous guest editor vetting to data-driven topic-picks align, when you publish in a Springer Nature collection, both your work and your reputation benefit, and you also get networking opportunities.

In 2022, Springer Nature launched its Collections Management and Acquisition (CMA) team to drive the growth of high-quality articles via topical collections. Since then, I've been leading this team through the creation of high-quality collections through Springer Nature’s journals, from BMC and Nature to Discover and Springer. These collections are developed based on trusted relationships we’ve built with the global research community. 

Our CMA team oversees collections published across Springer Nature journals, from BMC and Nature to Discover and Springer. By building trusted relationships with researchers worldwide, the team curates’ high quality, topical collections that showcase impactful work.

Delivering trustworthy collection content is our top priority

Collections provide an excellent home for your research because they bring your findings to highly engaged audiences, increase visibility within your field, and place your work alongside other rigorously selected articles. Maintaining the integrity of every collection is therefore essential. It ensures that your research gains the maximum benefit.

Prefer the highlights? Watch the short video below for a quick summary of how we safeguard integrity in our collections.

The difference between collections and journals

Collections are an effective way to group research papers focused on a specific topic and attract relevant and engaged readership interested in the themes or methods covered by the collection. Unlike a journal, a collection is not a standalone publication with its own aims-and-scope and editorial board; instead, it is a curated grouping of articles published within an existing journal (or across multiple journals), brought together under a shared theme to make it easier for readers to discover connected work in one place. 

P_Safeguarding_Blog Teaser Image © Springer Nature 2026

The benefits of publishing to a Springer Nature collection 

When researchers publish in a Springer Nature collection, their work can enjoy greater visibility and a broader audience because it is surfaced to readers actively following that topic area. And because these collections uphold strong integrity standards, your article is presented alongside accurate, relevant, and properly curated content, reinforcing  credibility for readers and strengthening the overall visibility and impact of your research. 

Springer Nature data show that publishing in collections leads to 31% more citations, 30% more downloads, and 63% higher Altmetrics scores than articles published outside of a collection.   

Sustaining these benefits for our authors requires not only great content, but for the content to uphold integrity and be trustworthy to the reader. How do we achieve this and create impactful Springer Nature collections?

Working with guest editors to safeguard collections 

Our efforts to maintain and protecting research integrity in Springer Nature collections are multi-layered. The content itself must uphold integrity standards. As such, all manuscripts submitted to our collections undergo the same rigorous checks as regular submissions. As collections are guest-edited, we use shared editorial oversight between the collection’s guest editor and the editor-in-chief of the journal in which the collection is published.

Selecting and onboarding collection guest editors 

Here’s how our guest editor selection process works.  

  1. Before a collection is launched, the CMA team conducts thorough research-integrity checks of proposed guest editors. These research-integrity checks include verifying email authenticity, background screening using both internal and external platforms, validating  credentials and expertise, and assessing editorial qualifications. 
  2. The editors-in-chief and publishers of the journals in which the collection will be launched then review the suitability of proposed guest editors and reach a decision.   
  3. Once the guest editor for the collection is selected. the commissioning editors clearly communicate the guest editor’s main responsibilities as well as the journal’s ethical standards.  
  4. After signing Springer Nature’s general data protection regulation (GDPR)-compliant agreement, guest editors are granted temporary and restricted access to the Springer Nature manuscript-handling system.  
  5. The CMA team collaborates with the journal team to provide on-boarding support for the guest editors through tutorials and targeted training on editorial responsibilities, journal policies, research integrity, and the validation checks required during peer review.

Collaborative editorial oversight and responsible editorial practice for integrity  

While guest editors can submit to their own collections, their own research cannot exceed 25% of the total content. All submissions from guest editors are handled by other independent editors to avoid any conflict of interest.   

We also have rules to limit editorial influence over content. For example, guest editors recommend manuscripts to be included in their collection, but the final decision is in the hands of the journal’s editor-in-chief always makes the final decision.   

For each paper submitted to a collection, the journal publishing team is responsible for conducting author conflict-of-interest checks, initial evaluations, scope checking, plagiarism  screening, and peer-review monitoring. If any issues arise, the journal  publishing team speaks with the in-house research integrity group to thoroughly investigate and resolve the case. 

Leading the way on integrity: Adhering to gold-standard guidelines  

The recently published Committee on Publication Ethics (COPE) guidelines on best practices for guest-edited collections have solved a long-standing challenge. In the early days, each academic publishing house developed different editorial models and associated policies based on their own strategies and requirements. This lack of standardisation created inconsistencies in the handling of content in collections. 

The recent COPE guidelines, which arrived at a critical moment, both acknowledge the value of the guest-edited model and help remedy these issues. And I’m proud to say that all our Springer Nature collections have been applying similar principles since well before the formal release of the guidelines in July 2025.

Using data and AI insights to enhance collection article’s impact  

We’re fortunate enough to be witnessing a digitally transformative age in the history of scholarly publishing, with scientific discovery expanding rapidly.   

One way we are embracing this is our data-driven approach to topic selection. Each collection theme is carefully proposed based on the CMA team’s analysis or suggestions from experts in the field. Topics are then approved by the editors-in-chief and in-house editorial teams. Commissioning editors evaluate various metrics to identify the most promising themes.  or suggestions from experts in the field. Topics are then approved by the editors-in-chief and in-house editorial teams. Commissioning editors evaluate various metrics to identify the most promising themes.

Moreover, artificial intelligence (AI) also plays a key role in enhancing the CMA team’s daily operations, especially in topic selection and author outreach. We use AI to map collections to relevant United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), streamline workflows, and improve strategic alignment. Our AI editor tool, launched earlier this year, is used to explore topics, scope collections, and create marketing text.

This approach, paired with a focus on openness and transparency, gives us confidence that the publishing environment is becoming more diverse, honest, and ethically sound. 

 In summary 

The high quality of Springer Nature collections relies on our thorough checks for guest editors; collaborations with the journal publishing and research integrity teams; and meeting the COPE standards to ensure we continue delivering trustworthy collections.   

If you’re interested in publishing your work in a Springer Nature collection, check out our dedicated Springer Nature collections website, where you can find interviews with guest editors, impact case studies, author success stories, and much more.

Related content

Demystifying the publishing process: What value do open access book publishers add? Part 1

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Apr 8 2026

This article was originally published in 2021 and was last updated in April 2026.

Academic publishers provide a range of services to authors who are looking to publish a book, whether for sharing their results with the research community, for career advancement, to cement their legacy, to fulfil funder requirements or another reason. But why involve a publisher if book authors want to publish their work online? Why not just self-publish?

This two-part blog looks at the value that publishers add for open access book authors, focusing on Springer Nature’s imprints, Palgrave Macmillan, Springer and Apress, all of which offer open access options for books. Find part 2 here.

How do authors choose a publisher?

As a book author, you might carefully choose your publisher based on a range of criteria including reputation of the publisher and their prestigious author list, recommendations from peers, whether there is a suitable book series, and the reach of that publisher to connect your work to relevant communities. If you are publishing an open access (OA) book, these criteria might change, as you might need to find funding for an open access fee, also called a book processing charge, leading to questions such as “what will the publisher be doing for me and my research?”

How do open access books work?

An open access book is a peer-reviewed eBook that can be read or downloaded by anyone, anywhere, immediately upon publication without needing to pay or log in. Authors must be acknowledged, and a Creative Commons (CC) licence indicates how the research can be shared, reused and built upon. Our authors retain copyright and we also provide a print copy of the eBook for purchase.

At Springer Nature there is a book processing charge (BPC) for open access books, which covers all the costs of commissioning, arranging peer review, copyediting and proofreading, production, dissemination and promotion of our authors’ work, including online hosting and indexing. The BPC is typically funded by the author’s funder or institution. This model allows for the permanent and unrestricted distribution of research in a sustainable way.

Quality assurance

If you need just one reason to publish your open access (OA) book through a reputable publisher rather than self-publish, then quality assurance is your answer.

Readers need a guarantee that the scientific developments and research theories presented are sound science and high-quality content. Our open access books are therefore rigorously peer-reviewed as an integral part of the submission and evaluation process. The peer review system ensures that published research is authoritative and meets the international standards set by each discipline. We engage in a collaborative refereeing process for all of our books including open access titles

Abstracting and indexing services also boost quality assurance; the Directory of Open Access Books (a discovery service that indexes open access books) requires that all listed academic open access books are subjected to independent and external peer review prior to publication.

Our authors also have the opportunity to publish in book series that are indexed in reputed databases like Scopus.

A world-class editorial experience

Our experienced and dedicated editorial team provides an attentive and personal editorial experience to authors with guidance and support throughout the writing process, from the proposal to the final product.


“I was very impressed by how quickly it was all done, from making decisions in the earlier stages to the actual production of the book. The production was done well, and I am very happy with the finished product.”

- Springer Nature book author survey response (2024)


Editors help shape the book's content for the market from the outset, providing invaluable advice. You will work closely with an editor in your field to refine your proposal, both before and after the peer review feedback. You might be interested in publishing in one of our book series; your editor can advise on the best fit and will pitch your book to the series editor on your behalf. Editors also work closely with our dedicated open access support teams, helping to identify funding opportunities and navigate institutional requirements.


“Whether you’re looking to publish your first book or you’re a seasoned author, your editor is here to support you from proposal to publication. I love working with authors to develop their books from the germ of an idea to an expertly researched work that will advance their field and even change the world."

- Molly Beck, Executive Editor at Palgrave Macmillan

Publisher prestige

We are proud of our publishing heritage and reputation, and both authors and readers can feel confident in the high quality of our books. Indeed, prestige is important in the world of open access publishing, as there has been an unfortunate rise in ‘predatory publishers’ who charge fees without delivering the promised services. Reputable publishers are well-known and recognised by online indexers as well as the online checklist Think. Check. Submit.

In this interview, open access book author Dr Sven Teske shares why he chose to publish with Springer:

“I have been a scientist and engineer for more than 25 years, and for all of that time I have referred to numerous high-quality technical Springer published books. So given Springer’s reputation and reach, it was an easy choice. In this era of fake news and multiple online sources, it is now more important than ever to provide quality information from established reliable sources.

- Dr Sven Teske, lead editor of Achieving the Paris Climate Agreement Goals


Therefore, choosing a prestigious open access book publisher is not just a matter of pride for the author, but it also carries a signal of quality, increases dissemination of the work as readers trust the publisher, and it can help an author’s career.

Springer Nature is a pioneer in open access book publishing, with over 4,500 open access books and more than 670 million chapter downloads. Our list includes award-winning authors and Nobel winners. We are experienced in providing our authors with the best services they need such as open access options for a range of book types, a free Open Access Funding and Policy Support Service, usage statistics via our platform Springer Nature Link, as well as established dissemination routes. We also participate in community projects such as the OAPEN Open Access Books Toolkit, and we work with funding partners such as Max Planck Society and the University of California, Berkeley Library.

Interested in experiencing the benefits of open access publishing? Visit our open access books hub to learn more about how it all works, or get in touch with a Springer, Palgrave, or Apress publishing editor with your idea.

Related Content:

The publication-to-policy connection: Supporting the real-world impact of research

T
The Link
By: undefined, Wed Apr 8 2026

As public expectations for accountability and transparency continue to rise, institutions and their researchers are increasingly being asked to demonstrate how their work contributes to meaningful change beyond academia, addressing large societal challenges such as the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). This means that showcasing the real-world impact of research has never been more important.

Amongst others, one of the most powerful measurements of real-world impact is policy influence – when research informs decisions that guide societies. Last year, Springer Nature partnered with Overton, the world’s largest policy document database, to explore how SDG research is cited in policy. These findings were published in the report, From Publications to Policy: The Impact of Research Towards Achieving the Sustainable Development Goals.

In this blog post, we look at these learnings through an institutional lens, to consider how institutions can support their researchers in achieving greater policy impact.

The impact of SDG research in academia and policy

SDG-related work represents a significant and growing share of global research, accounting for approximately 24% of all research published. The importance of these publications in an academic context is well understood. Topics such as climate, health and social development continue to be of great global relevance and urgency, and on average, Springer Nature’s SDG research receives higher average downloads, citations and Altmetric scores than non-SDG research.

When it comes to the impact of SDG research beyond academia, less is known. However, the report’s findings were encouraging: Academic research is cited in SDG-related policy more often than in wider policy – suggesting a greater connection between policy and research within the SDGs.

So how do researchers and their institutions make the most of this connection, and help their research find its way into policy?

How can institutions support the policy impact of research?

The report identified several factors that contribute to the impact of SDG research in policy, highlighting practical levers that institutions can use to help research reach decision makers:

  1. Encourage open access (OA) publishing
    Using a sample of 11 Springer hybrid journals, the report compared OA and non-OA citations in SDG-related policy from 2015 to 2024. The analysis found that OA publications were more likely to have at least one policy citation (32% compared to 18%) and a faster median turnaround time from publication to policy mention (501 days compared to 817 days). By advocating for and facilitating OA publishing, institutions can help their research reach policy faster and more frequently.
  2. Connect researchers with intermediaries
    Not all policy documents cite research directly. The report found that think tanks, IGOs and NGOs are up to 20% more likely to use scholarly research in their SDG documents than government bodies – suggesting there might be a role for these types of organisations as knowledge brokers between research and policy. Strengthening dissemination of research to these actors, and building partnerships, can provide a powerful route to amplify research impact.
  3. Support researchers with science communication
    When studying the policy impact of different types of content within Nature Portfolio journals, the study found that reviews, news, commentaries and editorials are disproportionately cited in policy – 27% of review articles from the sample were cited at least once in SDG policy, followed by 15% of letters and 9% of original papers. This suggests that short form commentary and accessible summaries are valued by policymakers, and assisting and training researchers in translating their findings into more digestible “policy-ready” formats can help them reach a broader audience.
  4. Facilitate collaboration across regions
    The SDGs are inherently global in their nature, with SDG-related research being conducted all over the world. However, the study found that this is not shown in SDG policy, with research from the Global North having a disproportionately high impact – 78% of research cited in SDG policy includes authors based solely in the Global North. This imbalance reflects wider structural barriers within the research ecosystem, but institutions supporting research collaboration can help to amplify research from the Global South and facilitate knowledge exchange between countries facing similar societal challenges.

Reflecting real-world impact within research assessment

All of the recommendations above are inherently tied into the ways researchers are evaluated. Another Springer Nature white paper, The State of Research Assessment, found that a majority of researchers would like their contributions to the “public good” to be weighted more heavily in the assessment of their work. However, current practice falls short, with publication metrics continuing to dominate assessment processes. Only 18% of researchers are assessed on their influence on policy, 23% on whether their outputs are published OA, and 43% on developing international collaborations.

Incentivising these kinds of practices on both an institutional and a wider level is key to maximising their uptake and effectiveness. However, as we have discussed in previous blogs, achieving research assessment reform on a large scale requires buy-in and action from all stakeholders within the research community.

How can publishers support the policy impact of research?

The report also outlined some key recommendations and next steps for publishers. Many of these are similar to those already discussed, including building partnerships with think tanks and IGOs, investing in OA models, increasing efforts to widen geographic representation, and supporting research assessment reform initiatives.

This presents a key opportunity for collaboration between publishers and academic institutions, working together to strengthen the research-to-policy connection, making research more visible and impactful, and drive progress towards the SDGs.

Read the full report, From Publications to Policy: The Impact of Research Towards Achieving the Sustainable Development Goals here.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts! 

Emerging librarian roles in supporting ethical and rigorous scholarship

T
The Link
By: undefined, Wed Apr 1 2026

As research institutions worldwide face a confluence of major financial, policy, and technology pressures, the current moment presents new challenges, and opportunities, for those dedicated to upholding the standards of integrity and transparency in research. With the World Conference on Research Integrity (WCRI 2026) convening in Vancouver this May, it’s the perfect time to reflect on the pivotal, yet often understated, role that librarians play in supporting researchers and fostering a culture of ethical publishing.

This blog post serves as a companion to the poster presentation I prepared for the WCRI in collaboration with Denis LaCroix of University of Alberta Libraries, delving deeply into how librarians have become the “hidden thread of trust” in the quest for research excellence.

How librarian roles are evolving in research support

Traditionally, librarians have been primarily seen as custodians of knowledge and facilitators of access to information. However, with the rise of open access publishing and open science practices more generally, their responsibilities have expanded far beyond shelving books and managing databases. The seeds of these changes were already visible in the early 2000s, with the Council on Library and Information Resources’ No Brief Candle report in 2008 an early and important call for a fundamental rethinking of academic libraries for the digital age. Research Libraries United Kingdom’s subsequent Re-Skilling for Research report (Auckland 2014, based on survey data from 2012) offered an even more granular template highlighting the skills librarians would need to acquire to adapt to the changing needs of the researchers they serve.

Today, the library foreseen in those visionary documents is a reality at many research institutions, with librarians actively engaged in guiding researchers through the complexities of the scholarly communication process, including Copyright and intellectual property considerations, data management, and compliance with institutional and funder requirements.

Librarians as advocates for research integrity

For all their foresight, the authors of those seminal CLIR and RLUK reports did not focus their attention on issues of research integrity. Yet a number of recent articles, most notably Matthew Goddard and Zachariah Motts’ Publishing Integrity series in Katina (2025), have highlighted how deeply entwined librarian’s research support activities are with broader efforts to ensure research integrity and broader public trust in scientific research.

With the rise of open access publishing, predatory journals, and increasing pressure to publish for professional advancement, researchers face a labyrinth of ethical considerations. Librarians are perhaps uniquely positioned to offer impartial guidance, helping academics navigate these challenges by providing guided access to trustworthy sources of information. Through workshops, one-on-one consultations, and the development of online resources, librarians educate researchers about issues such as plagiarism, proper citation practices, data sharing, and reproducibility. And as Goddard and Motts observe, the rapid uptake of open access agreements has given librarians an important point of entry to engage in promoting ethical research practices, particularly as advocates for the interests of readers of scholarly publications.

This engagement is timely, as publishers are also playing an increasingly visible role in reinforcing research integrity, creating important opportunities for collaboration with librarians. For example, here at Springer Nature, we have made research integrity a core pillar of our publishing mission, investing in dedicated integrity teams, editorial training, and transparent reporting on retractions and corrections. Through our Research Integrity Group, Springer Nature advises editors, reviewers, and authors on ethical best practices, investigates suspected misconduct, and aligns its policies with international standards and guidelines such as those shared by the Committee on Publication Ethics (COPE). These publisher-level efforts complement librarians’ local guidance, enabling more consistent, communitywide support for responsible research conduct.

Supporting best practices for ethical publishing

In recent years, publishers have increased transparency around how integrity checks are embedded throughout the submission and peer review process. Springer Nature publicly shares data on editorial screening, investigations, and retractions, underscoring a commitment to accountability and trust in the scholarly record. Integrity checks are supported by a combination of human expertise and technological tools, including AI-assisted screening designed to detect issues such as convoluted or nonsense text, problematic images, and irrelevant or suspicious references. By documenting these efforts, Springer Nature provides librarians with authoritative examples they can reference when advising researchers on journal selection and responsible publishing practices.

This is critical because of librarians increasing involvement in the publication process itself, working with faculty, and, in some cases, journal editors, to promote transparency and ethical publishing. This includes supporting the use of tools for plagiarism detection, advising on fair and responsible authorship, and helping researchers choose reputable journals for their work. In many institutions, librarians also lead or participate in committees that review cases of suspected misconduct and provide recommendations for corrective action.

Furthermore, librarians are advocates for open science practices, helping researchers comply with mandates for open data and open access publishing. They assist with the creation and maintenance of institutional repositories, and the placement of research outputs such as protocols, computer code, and datasets in specialized repositories, contributing to the verifiability of research studies and ensuring those outputs are discoverable and preserved for future generations.

Collaboration at the heart of research integrity

The most successful efforts in research and publishing integrity are collaborative. Librarians work closely with researchers, administrators, IT professionals, and legal counsel to build robust systems and policies that foster ethical scholarship. By participating in multidisciplinary teams, librarians help bridge gaps in knowledge and understanding, ensuring that integrity is woven into every stage of the research lifecycle.

These initiatives also highlight the shared responsibility across the research ecosystem. Springer Nature emphasizes collaboration among authors, editors, reviewers, publishers, and the broader research community to safeguard integrity at every stage of publication. Librarians, positioned at the intersection of researchers, institutional policy, and external publishers, are key partners in translating these global integrity frameworks into practical, local support. By engaging with publisher guidance, training resources, and openly available integrity data, librarians help ensure that ethical standards are not only upheld but clearly understood by the research communities they serve. 

Preparing for the next chapter in research integrity

As the field of research integrity continues to evolve, the role of librarians will only become more vital. Their expertise, adaptability, and commitment to ethical scholarship make them indispensable allies in the pursuit of trustworthy and impactful research. The World Conference on Research Integrity highlights the need for ongoing dialogue and innovation, and librarians are ready to add their thread to the fabric of research integrity.

We invite conference attendees and the broader research community to engage with librarians as partners in research excellence. Together, we can safeguard the values that underpin scientific progress and ensure that scholarly publishing remains a beacon of truth and credibility in uncertain times.

Related content

Get the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts

Can open access help SDG research achieve greater impact?

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Apr 1 2026

For researchers working on the UN’s 17 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), progress depends on research reaching beyond academia – policymakers, businesses, educators, and the public – to translate findings into action.

recent Springer Nature report, From publications to policy, explored how SDG-aligned research is cited in policy documents worldwide, analysing who uses it, where, and how publication choices – such as access model or journal selectivity –influence its uptake. In this blog, we explore one key finding: how open access (OA) can expand the visibility, reach, and policy engagement of your work. 

Open access and the SDGs 

When you publish open access, your research is available to anyone, anywhere. Where your work is aligned with global development priorities, that reach matters even more. 

Open access continues to grow across Springer Nature’s portfolio. In 2024, over 50% of our primary research – 240k articles – was open access, expanding the global pool of knowledge for everyone.  

SDG-related publications are even more likely to be open access: 58% of all Springer Nature’s SDG-related articles were published OA in 2024. This reflects a strong alignment between open dissemination and global development priorities: removing barriers supports the UN’s 2030 agenda by ensuring that knowledge essential to sustainable development is accessible, reusable, and actionable.  

What impact does open access have on SDG research for policymaking? 

The impact of making more SDG-related research OA has been explored in previous research, finding that it can achieve higher usage and attention, compared with non-OA research, and that it attracts more non-academic attention, helping to boost real-world impact. In our new SDG impact report, we explored this from a policy perspective – how does OA publication influence the way SDG research is used in policymaking? 

1. Open access widens availability for policymaking 

The report mapped the access status of scholarly research cited by SDG-related policy documents. Although patterns vary by country, in several – including Argentina, Brazil, Kenya, Nigeria and South Africa – OA research accounts for more than 55-60% of SDG research policy citations.  

This trend is consistent with OA usage patterns across our journals, where OA enables greater access to knowledge in countries where availability can be limited. In 2024, downloads of OA content from Low- and Middle-Income Countries increased by 21%. Open dissemination can broaden the potential audience for research relevant to global challenges. 

Open access also broadens dissemination to readers outside well-resourced academic systems. The report identified the key role think tanks, NGOs, and IGOs play as users of academic research in policy documents. Publishing OA facilitates their ability to engage with and translate research into policy recommendations. 

2. Policymakers often use open access research faster 

With the SDGs addressing fast-moving challenges, speed of access matters. We found evidence that open access reaches policy faster, with a shorter median time to first citation (501 days), compared to 817 days for non-OA articles.  

3. Open access is more frequently cited in policy 

The report also showed that open access articles were more likely to receive at least one policy citation and, on average, a higher number of citations per article compared with non-OA articles. It’s worth noting that the distribution is highly skewed, and there is a long-tail pattern of policy influence. 

Publishing your SDG-related work open access 

Together, these findings indicate that when your research supports the SDGs, considering how it is shared may be as important as where it is published.

Open access can deliver a multiplier effect, increasing discoverability, broadening readership, and speeding up transfer into policymaking. It becomes immediately accessible to a broader range of readers geographically and reaches wider non-academic audiences who can translate evidence into policy.

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019

If you are working on SDG-related research, OA can help increase the likelihood it is discovered, read, and cited beyond academia. 

Springer Nature supports many routes for you to publish OA, across over 3k journals and a growing OA books portfolio. We work with institutions

worldwide to establish centralised funding for OA, such as our transformative agreements which now support researchers at over 3,700 institutions worldwide. Choosing an inclusive journal – which often emphasise open practices and multidisciplinary collaboration – can also help facilitate the transfer of your research into policy. Our report found that inclusive journals, such as the Discover series, receive slightly more SDG policy citations than comparative selective journal articles.  

Our journal editors are keen to make sure that SDG relevant research reaches those best placed to implement it. 

“Most of the content we publish in BMC Public Health aligns with SDG 3, but also with SDG 4, SDG 2, SDG 16, SDG 5 and SDG 10, often providing interdisciplinary insights. We really value these studies, as they address urgent global challenges and aim to improve health, reduce inequality and shape public health policy and practice.


We are proud to publish SDG‑related research open access, as this means that anyone, anywhere, can access it, increasing the likelihood of collaboration across countries and communities. As Editors, we are always keen to see the research we publish making a difference in real life, beyond the academic setting.”


Lorena Verduci, PhD, Senior Editor, BMC Public Health

To explore more findings on how research informs policymaking, read the full SDG impact report  

Related content: 

Don'tmiss the latest news and blogs,sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

Empowering researchers through communication, mentorship and collaboration

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Mar 31 2026

Research today moves faster, collaborates more widely, and reaches further beyond traditional boundaries than ever before. New technologies, new partnerships, and new expectations are shaping how scientific ideas gain attention and create impact. In this environment, visibility and communication sit alongside excellence as powerful drivers of momentum.

Few people understand this evolving landscape better than Olga Bubnova, Chief Editor of the newly launched Nature Sensors. With broad experience evaluating high‑quality research across sensing, materials, robotics, and biomedical innovation, she has a panoramic view of where science is heading, and the skills that help researchers thrive.

In our conversation, Bubnova shares how researchers can elevate their work through confident communication and intentional visibility, and how organisations can create the structures that support this.

Visibility and communication as research catalysts

As the research landscape continues to broaden and accelerate, visibility has become a powerful source of momentum for researchers and the organisations that support them. Bubnova sees researchers embracing communication as an integral part of their work: a way to share ideas with clarity, participate in their communities, and create opportunities for collaboration.

She describes this as a form of “showmanship in science,” expressed through thoughtful presentations, confident public speaking, meaningful conference engagement, and purposeful use of online platforms. For organisations, this creates exciting opportunities to equip researchers with communication training, presentation support, and structured visibility programmes that elevate both individual talent and organisational reputation.

Indeed, visibility is most impactful when guided with intention. With supportive institutional frameworks, such as advisory guidance for online engagement and best practices for professional storytelling, organisations can help researchers step forward with confidence while reinforcing a strong, consistent presence in the wider research community.

“How people present their ideas and being able to communicate science clearly is extremely important.” - Olga Bubnova, Chief Editor, Nature Sensors

Reputation flourishes in environments that champion growth and celebrate progress. Bubnova highlights how mentorship, recognition, and encouragement shape researcher confidence and help create teams that thrive. These elements underscore the influence organisations have in nurturing positive, vibrant research cultures where talent can flourish.

Strengthening STEM pipeline for women through early engagement

Bubnova offers a clear and pragmatic view on the importance of supporting women in science, particularly in fields where representation remains limited. She observes that the pathways into research begin long before university, shaped by the moments when young learners see what science can be and who it is for. When girls encounter real scientific role models and engaging examples of discovery early on, they form strong, positive connections to STEM that stay with them as they grow.

As Bubnova explains, this journey “starts much, much earlier… from school, almost elementary school,” where curiosity first becomes confidence. Early visibility helps broaden the pipeline by showing young women that their ideas and perspectives have a place in scientific discovery.

Research organisations can play a meaningful role in this. Outreach programmes, collaborations with schools, and initiatives that celebrate diverse researchers help young learners recognise their potential. Partnerships between organisations, funders, industry, and publishers also create valuable opportunities to bring inspiring scientific role models directly into classrooms and community spaces. These shared efforts support a more inclusive future for science by opening doors early and often.

Recognition programmes amplify this further. Through her involvement with the Sony Women in Technology Award, Bubnova has seen how visibility can shape a researcher’s trajectory. Awardees gain recognition, build new networks, and access opportunities that strengthen both their work and their confidence. This demonstrates the impact of platforms that highlight exceptional women in STEM and empower them to grow, contribute, and lead.

The expanding world of sensing and the power of interdisciplinarity

Just as visibility is essential to broadening participation in science, so too is it key to bringing emerging fields into focus within a research community. From people to ideas, Bubnova sees visibility as a catalyst.

The launch of Nature Sensors comes at a moment of remarkable creativity across sensing technologies, with innovations emerging across healthcare, robotics, environmental monitoring, materials engineering, and beyond. Bubnova highlights several areas shaping this momentum, each opening new opportunities for collaboration and real‑world impact.

One area of rapid development is intelligent sensing, systems that do far more than detect signals. These platforms interpret data, feed it back into the system, and continually refine how information is sensed, processed, and applied. This creates responsive technologies that adapt to their environments and support smarter decisions.

Alongside this, multimodal sensing is gaining traction. Inspired by the way our own bodies gather information through sight, sound, smell, and touch, these platforms combine multiple sensing modes into one system. This blended approach produces richer, more nuanced data and expands what sensing technologies can achieve across practical applications.

Bubnova also points to the momentum behind miniaturisation and edge sensing. As devices become smaller and more portable, advanced capabilities once limited to controlled environments such as ultrasound or MRI‑style insights can now support medical, industrial, and consumer use cases in entirely new ways. These innovations bring sensing technology directly into real‑world contexts where it can make an immediate difference.

Across all these areas, societal impact plays a central role. Bubnova emphasises the value of research tested in everyday environments, where sensing systems demonstrate how they support people, communities, and industries. This focus aligns closely with the journal’s vision: Championing work that is scalable, deployable, and purposeful.

What unites these developments is their inherently interdisciplinary nature. Modern sensing research sits at the intersection of engineering, biology, materials science, clinical insight, data science, AI, and embedded systems. Each discipline contributes depth and perspective, creating solutions that are both innovative and deeply aligned with user needs.

“When teams begin with a real‑world problem, everything becomes naturally interdisciplinary.” - Olga Bubnova, Chief Editor, Nature Sensors

Supporting interdisciplinary teams helps strengthen internal research ecosystems, spark new ideas, and encourage collaborative thinking across traditional boundaries. It also opens pathways for partnerships in sectors where sensing technologies are evolving quickly, giving organisations a clearer view of emerging trends, and helping them stay ahead of new possibilities. This is a field full of energy and one where collaborative, cross‑functional thinking continues to shape what comes next.

Supporting researchers in a changing landscape

Supporting researchers today means recognising that their needs are evolving and that the environment around them is evolving even faster. When organisations invest in communication skills, mentorship, and meaningful opportunities for collaboration, they create the conditions where ideas can grow with confidence. These foundations help teams step into new opportunities with confidence and lead the way in their fields.

This is also the intention behind Nature Sensors. The journal aims to bring forward‑looking research into view while celebrating the people who drive that progress, expanding visibility, strengthening connections across disciplines, and spotlighting innovations with real‑world impact. It reflects a research culture that is increasingly dynamic, interconnected and shaped by how well we support the individuals at its heart.

To explore journals and tools that align with your own organisational focus areas, and to find additional resources that help enhance researcher visibility, communication and collaboration, visit the Nature Portfolio resources hub for librarians.

Related content

Don’t miss out on the latest news and blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts.

CINCEL libraries explore the opportunities and risks of AI in research support

T
The Link
By: undefined, Thu Mar 26 2026

AI is quickly reshaping how research is done, and what researchers expect from their libraries. In September/2025 a webinar hosted by Chile’s Consorcio para el Acceso a la Información Electrónica (CINCEL) and Springer Nature, librarians explored the concepts, trends, and practical use cases that matter most to academic library services today.

CINCEL is Chile’s national consortium for scientific information. Since 2003, it has helped universities and public institutions expand access to international journals, books, and digital resources, supporting more equitable access to research across the country. To continue empowering its librarian community, CINCEL partnered with Springer Nature to host a webinar focused on AI in practice. The session encouraged consortium librarians to explore how AI can support their daily activities, while supporting the research community.

The webinar began with a quick pulse check to see if the librarians were using AI in their tasks. The pull result showed that 41% had experimented but didn’t use them regularly, 39% used AI for specific tasks, and a smaller group had not used AI yet, or weren’t sure what “counts” as AI.

Building on this context, the webinar introduced core AI terminology and the technologies most relevant to academic libraries today. This foundation allowed for a broader conversation about what AI can offer, from enhancing services to supporting researchers more efficiently, while also addressing the questions and ethical considerations that come with adopting new tools.

Here’s a look at the central points raised during the webinar, providing a straightforward overview of emerging AI trends that can inform your library’s next steps.

From AI foundations to the idea of superintelligence

To raise the audience's knowledge level, the webinar began providing simple definitions of AI concepts. At its simplest, Artificial Intelligence (AI) is the ability of a system to perform tasks we associate with human intelligence, such as understanding language, recognising patterns, making predictions, or generating content. In the library context, it could be translated as faster drafting, summarisation, cataloguing, translation, and support for discovery workflows.

  • Large Language Models (LLMs): LLMs are AI models trained on massive collections of text to understand natural language prompts and generate humanlike responses. Well-known LLMs include ChatGPT, Copilot, Gemini, and Claude. They perform tasks such as drafting, summarizing, translating, and answering questions.
  • Machine Learning (ML) Techniques: LLMs are built using ML techniques that enable them to learn from large datasets and predict relevant outputs. The session covered four key ML approaches:
    • Supervised learning: Learns from labelled examples (e.g., correct/incorrect) and uses this knowledge to make predictions, for example, usage predictions.
    • Unsupervised learning: Finds patterns or clusters in data without labels; useful for uncovering trends such as usage behaviour.
    • Reinforcement learning: Improves through trial-and-error feedback, optimising decisions over time.
    • Deep learning: A subset of ML that uses multi‑layer neural networks to process unstructured data such as long text, images, and audio.

The webinar also highlighted a practical distinction: Generative AI creates content, while retrieval-augmented generation (RAG) combines generation with search, returning answers grounded in specific documents (often with citations). For research support, grounding and traceability are essential.

Finally, the session briefly defined two long-term concepts that often appear in AI conversations: artificial general intelligence (AGI), a hypothetical AI that could perform any intellectual task a human can, and superintelligence, which would exceed human capability across domains. These ideas remain speculative, but they continue to shape debates about AI governance and safety.

How libraries are putting AI to work

As libraries continue to navigate rapid developments in AI, the webinar highlighted several trends that are likely to be felt most directly in 2025. These include the emergence of AI agents and increased automation, the growing availability of smaller language models (SLMs), expanded data‑centre infrastructure, and rising attention to environmental impact and workforce change.

Rather than discussing these shifts in isolation, the session connected them to the practical opportunities already available to libraries. Many of these trends are influencing day‑to‑day work in small but meaningful ways, creating new options for streamlining tasks, enhancing services, and supporting decision‑making. This set the stage for a series of concrete examples showing how libraries are beginning to apply AI today.

  • Content creation/revision, Translation, Data analysis (user behavior, collection usage, predictions): Draft emails, instructional materials, workshop outlines, or guides, tasks that often take librarians considerable time to refine. Tools: AI Platforms (Chat-GPT, Gemini, Copilot, Claude, Perplexity, Grok, Deep Seek).
  • Synthetic Videos: Product and service demos, tutorials, educational videos on specific topics, and short videos for social media. Tools example: Prezi, Colossyan, Synthesia, HeyGen, StoryKit.
  • AI Agents and Chatbots: Process automation (cataloguing, classification, metadata), virtual assistants and chatbots: 24/7 user support. Example of tools: Copilot Studio, Chatbase, Botsonic, QuickChat.  Real-world example: bot use at Hong Kong Polytechnic University Library.
  • More advanced tools for Data Analytics and Design/Prototyping: Lovable (Create interactive forms, Design thematic microsites, Develop internal tools, Prototype innovation ideas) and Google Colab (Bibliographic data analysis, Information visualization, Task automation).

The takeaway: AI is already useful in small, concrete ways, especially when it reduces routine work and frees time for higher-value research support.

Ethical, responsible and transparent AI use

The webinar stressed that AI outputs can reflect bias in training data (including gaps in language and cultural coverage). The recommendation is to treat AI results as drafts and always check for: validation, contextualisation, and uneven performance across user groups.

Another essential theme: Data privacy is a key concern. Many free AI tools use submitted information to train or improve their models, which means anything entered may not stay confidential. Librarians should be cautious and ensure they do not share sensitive or restricted content when using such tools.

Throughout the discussion, one message remained consistent: Keeping a human in the loop is critical. AI systems can produce plausible but incorrect information, and expert review is essential to maintain accuracy, trust, and integrity.

SN AI capabilities supporting the research community

The webinar also shared examples of Springer Nature editorial AI tools to support researchers, improve workflows, and strengthen research integrity.

Nature Research Assistant (currently in beta) is designed to help researchers work through growing volumes of literature by supporting discovery, summarising evidence, and helping with early drafting.

For research integrity, Springer Nature has developed AI tools such as our irrelevant reference checker tool and our AI-generated nonsense-text-checking tool, previously known as Geppetto. After internal use, Springer Nature donated Geppettoto the STM Integrity Hub to support wider adoption across the community.

Springer Nature also supports global collaboration through free AI-powered translation services for book authors, and through protocols.io, which can convert existing documents into interactive, publishable protocols (with careful review of imported content).

Preparing libraries for an AI‑driven research future

The session wrapped up by looking ahead at what growing AI adoption could mean for academic libraries. Rather than diving into big projects straight away, librarians were encouraged to start small, try out simple tools, set clear goals, and gradually build confidence. Even testing an AI assistant for common questions or using a tool to summarise a long document can help teams get a feel for where AI genuinely adds value.

Collaboration came through as another key theme. Creating communities of practice, teaming up with colleagues from other departments, or joining hackathons can make it easier to learn, swap ideas, and experiment together. These kinds of shared efforts have already sparked creative solutions in other settings, including prototypes developed within Springer Nature.

Besides introducing practical ways to begin using AI in libraries, responsible adoption is key. The webinar emphasized the importance of using AI ethically and responsibly, guided by Springer Nature’s AI Principles: Dignity, Respect, and Minimizing Harm; Fairness and Inclusivity; Transparency; Accountability; Privacy and Data Governance.

Looking ahead, building AI literacy will help everyone navigate changes in research workflows. Springer Nature’s publication Perspectives on AI in Scholarly Communications brings together voices from across the ecosystem and offers helpful context on how AI is influencing the way research is produced, shared , and evaluated. These insights can support libraries as they consider how AI might fit into their own services and future planning.

Related content

Get the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Starting your career? Here’s how Springer can help you publish open access

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Mar 25 2026

As an early career researcher (ECR), you’re likely to be seeking funding, building a reputation, establishing your profile, and trying to make your work stand out — all at once. Publishing open access (OA) can help you do exactly that. It puts your research in front of the people who need it — fellow researchers, policy makers, practitioners, and students around the world — immediately and forever, without a paywall standing in the way.

At Springer, we believe knowledge should travel as far as possible, and we’ve been helping researchers achieve that for more than 180 years. Today, OA is central to that mission. 

This blog post is part of a series on OA funding options. Here, we focus on what’s available to you as an ECR publishing with Springer, whether you’re working on a journal article, an individual book chapter, or a whole book.

Why make your research publications open access? 

OA research is freely available online from the moment it’s published. This means more readers, more citations, and more opportunities to make a real difference with your work — which really matters when you’re at the start of your career. 
 
Publishing OA can help you: 

  • Increase the visibility and discoverability of your research. 

  • Reach a broader audience and attract more citations. 

  • Share findings faster across disciplines and regions. 

  • Comply with funder or institutional OA mandates. 

  • Build your profile at a critical stage of your academic career. 

We know that the cost of OA publishing can feel like a barrier, especially early on, when budgets are tight and institutional support may seem lacking. That’s why we offer a range of funding routes to help make it happen.

Publishing open access articles 

Springer publishes both fully OA journals (where every article in the journal is freely available) and hybrid journals that allow you to make your article OA within a subscription journal — giving you flexibility to publish your research in the right journal. The evidence is striking: OA articles in Springer hybrid journals are accessed 4 times more often and cited 1.6 times more often on average.

Article processing charges: how to cover them 

Unlike traditional subscription journals, where publishing is free to authors, OA publishing typically involves an article processing charge (APC) to cover the costs at every stage of the publication process, from administering peer reviews to copy-editing and hosting the final article on dedicated servers. But there are several ways these can be covered or reduced — and you may already have access to funding you don’t know about. 

Open access agreements 

Publishing your article through an OA agreement is the easiest route to OA for eligible authors. Many institutions provide financial support for researchers to cover APCs, often through OA agreements with publishers — either independently or through a consortium across multiple institutions. To find out what’s available at your institution, browse Springer Nature’s OA agreement pages, which shows details of the agreements in each region or country. Your university library is also a great resource — and you may find your APC is already fully covered. 

Research grant funding 

Your grant funding may cover OA publication costs. Many funders now actively encourage or even require OA publishing, so it’s worth checking your grant terms first. 

Waivers and discounts 

Springer offers APC waivers and discounts for authors based in eligible low- and middle-income countries and considers requests from authors facing financial hardship on a case-by-case basis. You can find the list of eligible countries in our APC waivers and discounts

Publishing open access books 

For many researchers, particularly in the humanities, social sciences, and interdisciplinary, a book is more than a publication. It’s a statement of expertise and an important milestone. Springer offers OA publishing for single-author books, contributed volumes, and edited books, all instantly freely available online upon publication. 

OA books are widely downloaded — Springer’s OA portfolio has achieved over 200 million chapter downloads since 2013.

“We are moving faster as a society — we need things at the end of a click for immediate access. If it isn’t, then it won’t be used or cited as much.” 

Dr. Roseli Pellens, co-editor of Biodiversity Conservation and Phylogenetic Systematics (SpringerOpen, 2016)


Individual chapters can also be published OA via a chapter processing charge (CPC), making it a realistic option if you’re contributing to an edited volume rather than authoring a whole book. For an ECR, that kind of visibility can open doors to collaborations, speaking invitations, and career opportunities you might not have expected. 

Book processing charges: your options 

Publishing an OA book involves a book processing charge (BPC) — but, like articles, there are several options to cover it. 

Institutional support

A growing number of universities maintain dedicated OA book funds, and many of these are increasingly accessible to ECRs. Check with your institution’s library or research office. 

Research funders  

Some funding bodies allow grants to cover OA book costs, particularly where the publication is a direct output of funded research. If you are applying for a grant, it is worth checking with your funder early, ideally before you finalise your application. 

Collaborative funding 

For edited books or collaborative projects, BPCs can often be shared across contributing institutions, departments, or co-editors, making what might seem like a high cost more manageable. 

Tools and support to help you find funding 

Not sure where to start? You’re not alone. OA funding can feel daunting to navigate for the first time, but we’ve built tools and services to make the process easier. 

Our journal and funding finder is a quick way of matching your research to the correct Springer journal, as well as exploring the OA funding options available to you. It’s a practical first step if you’re not sure which journal to target or what funding might apply to you. 

We also offer a free OA support service. Our team can help you identify funding available through your institution or funder, connect you with your institution’s OA coordinator, guide you through the application process, and even help you demonstrate the benefits of OA to support your application. With more than 350 APC funds available worldwide — across over 170 funders, 130 institutions, and a further 170 institutions distributing OA block grants — you are sure to find the right support. 

Getting to grips with your funding options early is a good approach and will help you avoid any unwelcome surprises later. 

Where knowledge transforms into action 

At Springer, we are more than a publisher — we are a partner to the global research community, genuinely invested in your success. OA is how we make sure your work reaches the audience it deserves: the researchers who will build on it, the practitioners who will use it, and the decision-makers who need it.

Want to find out more? Explore your OA funding options here and find out what support is already available to you.

Related Content:

How Chinese research is shaping global SDG policy

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Mar 24 2026

As the world pushes harder to meet the United Nations’ Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) by 2030, research has become more important than ever. Whether it’s tackling climate change or improving global health, real progress depends on strong evidence and a research community that’s collaborative and globally connected. 

According to recent findings in Springer Nature’s SDG Impact ReportFrom publications to policy - The impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals, one trend stands out: China has emerged as one of the most influential players in global SDG research and policy. Not only is China now producing the largest volume of SDG-related research, but that research is also generating significant academic impact and shaping sustainability policy far beyond its borders. 

This blog explores three key dimensions of this upward trajectory: 

  1. China’s rapid growth as a contributor of SDG-related research 
  2. The increasing academic citation impact of China’s SDG research output 
  3. How Chinese research is influencing global policy aligned with the SDGs 

China: Now the largest contributor of SDG‑related research 

Over the past two decades, worldwide academic engagement with the SDGs has grown substantially. Yet few countries have expanded their research output as rapidly, or as consistently, as China. According to the report, China is now the single largest contributor of SDG‑related research articles globally. 

Long-term growth outpacing global averages 

A comparison of compound annual growth rates (CAGR) across regions highlights just how significant China’s contribution has become. The SDGs were adopted in 2015. Since then, China's SDG‑related research output has grown by an average of 21% annually. For context, this compares to 5% in the United States, around 9% in Europe, 13% in Africa, 17% in India and 13% elsewhere in Asia. 

This growth trend extends back before the Goals themselves, with SDG‑related research from China expanding at 20% in the period 2000 - 2015, once again the highest among major global regions – and showing China’s longstanding commitment to research on sustainability. 

SDG research growing faster than non-SDG output 

Importantly, the growth of SDG-linked research in China significantly outpaces the growth of its overall research output. While the CAGR for all Chinese research between 2016 and 2024 stands at 12%, SDG-related publications grew at nearly double that rate. 

This indicates not only a broad expansion of national research capabilities, but also a deliberate and increasing prioritisation of sustainability-focused inquiry. 

Rising academic influence: China’s SDG research impact 

Volume alone does not capture the full story. The impact of research, reflected through citations and academic uptake, is an equally important indicator of its influence. 

China’s citation impact: from lowest to highest 

In 2000, China had one of the lowest average citation impacts among major research nations. But by 2022, that landscape had changed dramatically. According to the report, China now holds the highest average citation impact for SDG‑related articles, highlighting a major shift in the global distribution of sustainability research leadership.

China SDG Research-mean citation_600x340 © Springernature 2026

Several factors have seemingly contributed to this rise: 

  • Greater international collaboration 
  • Strengthening of national research infrastructure 
  • Increased openness and visibility of Chinese research outputs 
  • Growing expertise in fields central to the SDGs, including climate science, health, and engineering 

SDG articles outperform non-SDG in citation impact 

Across different regions, research related to the SDGs tends to receive more citations than non‑SDG work, a sign that sustainability-focused studies are increasingly seen as impactful and relevant for addressing societal challenges. China is a clear example of this pattern: Chinese SDG publications consistently attract more citations, on average, than its non‑SDG research output, respectively 28%, 58% and 46% higher in mean citations in 2000, 2025 and 2022. 

This indicates that China is not only producing more sustainability research, but it is producing research that is resonating strongly within the global academic community. 

Impact outside academia: Chinese research in global SDG policy 

Perhaps the most compelling aspect of China’s growing role in SDG research is its influence beyond academia. Research that shapes policy has the potential to drive tangible societal outcomes, from improving public health systems to guiding environmental regulation. 

The report shows that research from China is now widely cited in SDG-related policy documents across the world*, placing China firmly within the top 15 most cited countries for SDG policy influence. 

* The data on Chinese policy are comparatively limited, due to access constraint. As a result, the project focused on tracking the international use of Chinese-authored research rather than how Chinese policy cites research. 

Where Chinese research is being cited 

A breakdown of citations reveals a diverse and international policymaking audience engaging with Chinese research: 

  • Intergovernmental organisations (IGOs), including the UN, UNESCO, WHO, IMF, and OECD, cite Chinese research more frequently than any other individual nation in their SDG-related policy. 
  • Outside IGOs, the largest share of Chinese research citations in SDG policy comes from the United States (22%), followed by the United Kingdom (8%), the European Union (7%), and Germany (6%). 

This reflects both the global reach of China-authored research and its relevance to international policymakers addressing sustainability challenges. 

 It's worth noting that the analysis distinguishes between citations from global organisations (counted as “IGO” or “EU”) versus national governments to avoid distorting country-level influence. This ensures a clearer picture of how widely China’s research is used across different governance levels. 

A strong role in global health and climate policy 

Chinese research has a particularly significant impact in two SDGs: 

  • SDG 3: Good Health and Well-being – representing 38% of policy citations 
  • SDG 13: Climate Action – accounting for 13% 

These findings highlight China’s deep engagement in areas fundamental to global well-being and sustainability. Whether in pandemic preparedness, public health interventions, climate mitigation, or environmental monitoring, Chinese research is increasingly shaping international responses. 

Conclusion: The growing real-world impact of Chinese research 

The findings from the Springer Nature SDG Impact ReportFrom publications to policy, offer an insightful narrative of China’s role in the global sustainability research landscape and the international recognition of its contributions to solving global challenges. Over the past two decades, China has: 

  • Become the largest source of SDG-related research articles worldwide 
  • Achieved the highest average academic citation impact in SDG research 
  • Emerged as a major contributor to SDG-related policy across IGOs and countries 

As the world approaches the 2030 SDG deadline, the influence of Chinese research, across academia, international policy, and multilateral decision-making, will continue to shape pathways toward a more sustainable future. 

With strong engagement from Chinese scholars and institutions, and with increasing uptake by policymakers worldwide, China’s role in advancing the SDGs has become both vital and increasingly impactful. 

Read the full report: From publications to policy: The impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals 

Related content: 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source!

Empowering early career researchers through skills‑focused visibility training

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon Mar 23 2026

Early career researchers bring valuable new perspectives to the research community, along with a curiosity that helps push knowledge forward. As they start publishing, apply for funding, share their first results and find their voice within their communities, having the right support can make a huge difference at this early stage. Therefore, understanding open access, visibility and the tools that support effective research communication can help researchers lay the foundations for their careers.

Recognising this, Springer Nature’s Account Development (AD) team created a dedicated webinar series for institutions across Europe. These sessions introduce researchers to open access agreements and practical strategies for promoting their work. The response from participants has been overwhelmingly positive, and one researcher’s story stands out as testament to the impact of these sessions.

Building researcher confidence through skills‑focused webinars

As researchers begin shaping their publishing journey, many tell us they are eager to understand how to make their work more visible and how to communicate their findings with confidence. It’s not always obvious where to start, especially when juggling publishing pressures, funding expectations and the realities of early‑career life. That’s why we designed these webinars with the researcher’s needs in mind, to give them practical skills that can be applied immediately to strengthen both their research communication and professional profile.

During our session “How to Promote Your Research,” we explored what research visibility really means for researchers today. We looked at how strong communication can support funding applications, inspire collaboration, increase readership and contribute positively to the institution’s reputation. The response was extraordinary, with 560 researchers joining live, an incredible indication of how important this topic is across the research community.

What I appreciated most were the thoughtful questions that were asked about adapting their communication for different audiences and using digital platforms more effectively. These are challenges many early‑career researchers face, and they’re exactly the areas were small, practical adjustments can make a significant difference.

In the session, we introduced several techniques to start using right away, including:

  • Using storytelling to bring clarity and meaning to findings
  • Creating visual abstracts and multimedia summaries
  • Engaging with audiences through social media, blogs, podcasts and webinars
  • Using altmetrics to understand how their work is being shared and discussed

Each of these approaches helps build a wider understanding of how research is received beyond traditional academic metrics. More importantly, they empower researchers to take an active role in shaping how your work travels within your field and beyond it.

Our goal in these webinars is simple: To provide the tools, confidence and insight to communicate research in ways that feel authentic, accessible and impactful. And from the energy and engagement researchers bring to every session, it’s clear how committed they are to amplifying their work and sharing it with the world.

How one researcher discovered the hidden impact of her work

Among the attendees was Maria Babakhanyan Stone, a postdoctoral researcher who joined the session out of personal curiosity and a desire to discover new ways to share her work. During her PhD, she had put enormous effort into her dissertation and often looked for creative ways to make astronomy more accessible, recording YouTube explainer videos, developing visuals from her thesis figures and running workshops for learners of all ages. Communicating science clearly had always been important to her, and the webinar offered a chance to build on that passion. This opportunity was made possible through the support and resources of INAF (the Italian National Institute for Astrophysics), where she now works as a postdoc.

When we introduced Altmetrics, the concept was completely new to her. Hearing how online engagement can reveal interest in research beyond citations caught her attention, and she decided to take a look at the publicly available download data for her thesis at the University of Turku.

What she found truly made her day. A quick look at the university’s archived metrics showed that her astronomy thesis had been downloaded more often than others in the same topic area and topped several usage rankings. Her thesis stood out over a seven‑year period and even ranked among the most‑downloaded astronomy theses of the past decade. For Maria, this uncovered a new and unexpected dimension of impact.

She captured the moment beautifully in her blog: “I am thrilled to celebrate a small achievement which I discovered unexpectedly. I found out through happenstance that my PhD Thesis in Astronomy has been downloaded impactfully more times than others in the topic of astronomy from the University of Turku… what it means is that my PhD Thesis is making a difference with its social impact.”

For her, the discovery was meaningful not just because of the numbers, but because it showed that her effort to make astronomy welcoming and engaging was reaching real readers. Her thesis had found an audience genuinely interested in her work and her creative outreach was helping her research travel further than she realised.

Maria’s story is a powerful reminder of how empowering it can be for early‑career researchers to see the broader life of their work. A single idea introduced during the webinar sparked a deeper understanding of how her research resonates and strengthened her confidence in the contribution she is making to her field.

Understanding the full reach of research

Maria’s experience reflects something we see more and more among early‑career researchers: a growing desire to understand the full influence of their work beyond traditional measures. Citations will always matter, but they don’t tell the whole story. Downloads, online mentions, media attention and social sharing can offer a much more immediate sense of how the research is being discovered, discussed and used across global networks.

These kinds of engagement can spark new collaborations, strengthen funding or job applications and help researchers recognise the real‑world impact their work is already having. For institutions, supporting this broader understanding means giving researchers the confidence to communicate their work effectively and take proactive steps to increase visibility. These approaches enable researchers to pursue new opportunities, engage broader communities and advance steadily through each stage of their publishing process.

Working together to support the research community

Looking ahead, institutions continue to play a vital role in helping early‑career researchers thrive. Through the Author Journey series, we remain committed to offering workshops and webinars that provide practical, skills‑focused guidance on understanding open access policies, promoting research effectively, navigating both traditional and alternative metrics, building a strong digital presence and approaching the publishing process with clarity and confidence. These sessions are designed to help researchers find their voice, understand the reach of their work and grow their confidence as they contribute to the global research community. Every researcher’s story is unique, and for many, a single webinar can spark new insight that reshapes how they think about visibility, communication and impact.

To continue strengthening support for early‑career researchers, we invite institutions to explore our open access resources, including guidance on managing article processing charges, insights into how open access is transforming research and global stories of open access in action. Institutions can also register for upcoming webinars in the Author Journey series to offer their research communities practical, inspiring and actionable support. If your institution is looking for ways to deepen its engagement or enhance the support available to researchers, these resources and sessions are an easy way to get started and we would be delighted to welcome you along.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

A decade of change: How the IMISCOE–Springer Nature partnership is shaping migration research

T
The Link
By: undefined, Fri Mar 20 2026

Migration is transforming communities across the globe and the research surrounding it must evolve just as rapidly. Since 2015, the IMISCOE–Springer Nature partnership has played a crucial role in meeting that need, providing a trusted platform for interdisciplinary analysis of one of today’s most complex challenges. As part of our long-standing commitment to supporting research and education, the IMISCOE Research Series has become a foundational resource for scholars, librarians, and policymakers alike.

Anna Triandafyllidou © Springernature 2025

Professor Anna Triandafyllidou, an internationally recognised sociologist and leading global expert on migration governance, shares her perspective on how migration research has shifted over the past decade and how digital publishing is shaping its future. As Chair of the IMISCOE Editorial Committee and Editor‑in‑Chief of the Journal of Immigrant and Refugee Studies, she plays a central role in guiding scholarly conversations across the field. With more than 160 peer‑reviewed publications and decades of leadership in international research collaborations, Professor Triandafyllidou brings a uniquely global and interdisciplinary perspective to the evolving landscape of migration studies.

How the 2015 migration crisis changed research and publishing 

The year 2015 marked a turning point in European migration history, but also in the evolution of academic publishing. As millions fled conflict in Syria and across West Asia, migration became a defining feature across multiple regions of the world. "Certainly, 2015 is an important year, the repercussions of which we still see today. 2015 was the year of the 'Wir schaffen das' ('We can do this'), and of significant solidarity towards people fleeing Syria," recalls Professor Anna Triandafyllidou. 

That same year, IMISCOE partnered with Springer Nature, aiming to make scientific knowledge on migration as globally accessible as possible. In times of crisis, access to knowledge matters most. The IMISCOE Research Series has helped overcome barriers and respond to urgent migration challenges by fostering collaboration and timely interdisciplinary research. 

Migration research underwent profound transformations after the 2015 crisis. As Professor Triandafyllidou explains, "Initially, it was a foundational moment for Europe becoming a land of refuge. It very quickly backfired. In 2016, we had the EU-Turkey statement and the closure of the borders through the Balkans, and after that, we see an increase in securitization, not just of migration but also of asylum".  

The shifting socio-political landscape and the new challenges demanded research that could capture the complexities of migration. What was needed was a publishing model that could keep pace with the rapidly evolving realities of people on the move while capturing the human dimensions of migration. 

Making migration research more accessible and impactful  

The partnership between IMISCOE and Springer represented a shift in how migration research would be produced, disseminated, and accessed. Four key innovations stand out: 

1.  Open access is expanding the reach of migration research 

"The series is Open Access. Now it's going to be 100% Open Access, but it was always the aim, I think on both the IMISCOE and Springer side at the time when it wasn't that common that books would be Open Access," Professor Triandafyllidou emphasizes. 

Before Open Access became widely embraced, this decision marked a notably progressive step. Springer Nature began piloting open-access book publishing in 2011, reflecting our strong commitment to making trustworthy, high-quality knowledge accessible to everyone. This commitment to open knowledge ensures that vital research can reach policymakers, NGOs, and researchers in the regions most affected by migration without barriers. By removing access limitations, Open Access helps close knowledge gaps and supports informed, evidence-based research and decision-making on a global scale. "The strategy of the series is to expand the knowledge base and to really offer a service to the student and research community in immigration studies," notes Professor Triandafyllidou. 

2. Digital publishing is enabling timely responses to global challenges 

The digital format of the series enables researchers to respond quickly to emerging issues. As Professor Triandafyllidou mentioned, "We had a volume in 2021 already on migration and pandemics that was trying to seize the moment." This flexibility ensures that scholarship remains timely and responsive, narrowing the distance between research and implementation. 

According to Professor Triandafyllidou, the series publishes around 10 books per year - almost one per month. This rapid pace, made possible by the digital publishing model, facilitates efficiency and a broader distribution, allowing important research to reach a global audience without delay. 

3. Global perspectives are strengthening migration scholarship  

Perhaps most importantly, the digital format has been instrumental in expanding the global scope of migration research. "Our series has become more global by design," explains Professor Triandafyllidou. "We have made a concerted effort to have editors and authors from the regions. So, when we write about West Africa, South and Southeast Asia, the Asia Pacific, Latin America, and so on, we have people from those regions." 

This commitment to diverse voices challenges the traditional dominance of destination-country perspectives in migration studies. "I also find that in the research that we do, there's very much a bias from the country of destination, and we need to change that," she adds. 

4. Peer review is ensuring quality and academic integrity  

Professor Triandafyllidou proves that accessibility and quality can go hand in hand, emphasizing that the IMISCOE Research Series stands out for its full-manuscript peer review process, ensuring scholarly excellence. "The series is fully peer-reviewed. We ask for and review the full manuscript, not only the book proposal. It has also happened that we've rejected manuscripts or that they must go through revisions with detailed feedback."  

Advancing migration research for a changing world 

Migration continues to intersect with global challenges, and the IMISCOE Research Series is evolving to reflect these emerging realities. Digital technologies, from AI to broader tools, are reshaping politics and mobility. As Professor Triandafyllidou notes, migrants today navigate vast amounts of information, which highlights the importance of trusted sources and digital infrastructures that support informed decisions.  

Geopolitical shifts are also influencing migration in powerful ways. The growing role of mobility in political discourse calls for thoughtful, inclusive research. As Professor Triandafyllidou suggests, migration studies benefit from broadening their scope, moving beyond Eurocentric frameworks and recognising migration as a central force in societal transformation.

s13502 © Springernature 2025
 

The IMISCOE Research Series highlights the power of eBooks in advancing migration research by combining accessibility with academic rigour. It delivers timely, diverse and socially relevant scholarship to communities worldwide. Explore the series and connect with a global network of researchers shaping the future of migration studies, because what we publish and how we shape it helps build a more informed and connected world.  

When the shelf went digital 

2026 marks twenty years since we launched our eBook collections. Much has changed in that time across science, technology, and society. Can you remember a time before social media, when Obama took office, or when the Higgs Boson was discovered? Explore our timeline of 20 major scientific milestones that have shaped our lives and the books we publish. Visit When the shelf went digital

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Partnership promise in the East: China’s pharma sector and opportunities for global partnerships

T
The Link
By: undefined, Wed Mar 18 2026

What if you could find rich portfolios of advanced therapeutics for treating cancer, autoimmune disorders, metabolic disorders, and more, that had already proven efficacy and safety in advanced clinical trials. But also, that the companies developing them, while biological powerhouses, lack the global marketing footprint to bring them to the wider world. That’s the situation today with 10 of China’s most advanced biotech and pharmaceutical companies. To look at this closely, AdisInsight recently published a report, Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers and Shakers, which explores this in detail.

Driven in part by the regulatory reforms China made in 2015 and 2020, as well as investments in basic and advanced biomedical research, these China-based companies (including names like Innovent Biologics, Akeso, Sinopharm, Insilico Medicine, and others) have deep portfolios of therapeutics that are either already approved in China, or in late-stage clinical trials that have already demonstrated their efficacy, ready for global partnerships. You will find a wealth of detail about these 10 companies in Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers & Shakers; but I wanted to pick out a few highlights, including some examples of existing, highly successful China-global partnerships.

China’s therapeutic and innovative strengths

Common threads connecting these 10 companies include focusing on both life-threatening and chronic disease states like cancer and autoimmune disorders, and also an emphasis on biologics, including monoclonal and bispecific antibodies, chimeric antigen T-cell (CAR-T) technology, antibody-drug conjugates (ADCs), vaccines, immunotherapy, and other advanced and biologic modalities.

For example, Legend Biotech’s CAR-T cell therapy, which is an advanced immunotherapy approach that involves genetically reprogramming the patient’s own T-cells so that they’re able to identify and destroy cancer cells. These T-cells are laboratory-modified to express chimeric antigen receptors (CARs), specialised proteins that can identify cancer-specific markers, and then re-transfused into the patient’s cancerous tissue. Indicated mainly for blood cancers like specific types of leukaemia, lymphoma, and multiple myeloma, this CAR-T treatment’s revenue is forecast to reach $47.28 billion by 2030.

3SBIo’s deal with Pfizer for its SSGJ-707 is another example. This is a bispecific antibody that works on programmed cell death-1 ligand-1 inhibitors, indicated for non-small cell cancer and other solid tumours. Based on its strong Phase II objective response rates (72-100% among patients completing at least two treatment evaluations), 3SBio was able to make a global licensing deal with Pfizer, and Pfizer is advancing this treatment to global Phase III trials for non-small cell lung cancer and other solid tumours.

Akeso, Inc. has a monoclonal antibody for non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC) that, in clinical trials, outperformed Merck’s Keytruda (the market leader). This monoclonal antibody, called Ivonescimab, gave patients progression-free survival of more than 11 months before tumours began growing again, which is almost double Keytruda’s 5.8 months. But despite this superiour clinical performance, Ivonescimab’s market share lags Keytruda, because while Akeso has the stronger therapeutic, Merck has the stronger global footprint (in addition Keytruda’s first-mover advantage).

Innovent Biologics has monoclonal antibody candidates IB 3009 and IBI 343, the latter of which is fast-tracked for treating advanced pancreatic ductal adenocarcinoma (PDAC). It’s also in Phase II trials for gastric cancer and completed Phase I/II for pancreatic cancer. Based on this potential, Takeda has agreed to fully develop and commercialise IBI 343 outside of Greater China. IBI 3009 is a monoclonal antibody indicated for neuroendocrine carcinoma and small cell lung cancer. It is a cutting-edge approach in anticancer therapy combining the specificity of antibody-directed conjugation with the potent inhibitory effects on a critical enzyme involved in DNA replication and tumour progression.

Strengthening international biopharma alliances

A quick summary of some of the other active partnerships already concluded or in process include: 

  • Innovent Biologics has expanded globally through strategic alliances:   
    • Partnered with Roche to launch the ADC candidate IBI3009 internationally.   
    • Collaborates with Mankind Pharma to bring its PD-1 inhibitor, sintilimab, to the Indian market.   
    • Entered a $1.2 billion deal with Takeda, granting global rights to late-stage assets IBI363 and IBI343, plus an option on a bispecific ADC, signaling major East–West co-development momentum.   
  • Sciwind Biosciences signed a $70 million upfront licensing deal with Verdiva Bio (exChina & Korea) for its metabolic-disease candidate ecnoglutide, with up to $2.4 billion in milestones, marking a major move into global markets. 
  • Duality Biologics secured global licensing of DB1418 from Avenzo Therapeutics following its Phase III success of BNT323, demonstrating healthy cross-border biotech licensing activity. 
  • WuXi Biologics has advanced its Global Dual Sourcing Strategy, delivering on its global CDMO model—including EMA approval of its Dundalk site and further expansion in Europe and Singapore, enhancing its positioning as a global-scale biologics manufacturing partner.

Companies such as Innovent, Sciwind, and Duality illustrate China’s growing capacity in complex biologics and AI-driven platforms, bringing the right people together with novel technology to develop powerful new therapeutics.

Growing opportunities for China-global partnerships

China’s regulatory reforms has streamlined the approval process, especially for breakthrough technologies and for critical diseases. This has both attracted local and global investment, and spurred innovation. As a consequence, China’s pharmaceutical companies have been able to develop these therapeutics and quickly shepherd them through trials, despite these companies often lack global infrastructures or marketing footprints.

So, for global pharmaceutical companies that do have that global infrastructure and the ability to globalise new therapies, but whose pipelines might be moving more slowly, partnering with Chinese firms is an obvious choice. Global firms get access to strong candidates that are either already locally licensed, or in successful late-stage trials (which reduces risk), and the Chinese firms get access to the global market. And patients get access to new, life-saving medicine. It’s a win-win-win scenario.

Find out more: You’ll find a wealth of detailed insights in AdisInsight’s report, Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers & Shakers, that will help global R&D managers identify partners and evaluate their real potential.   

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

How to share your research protocols and methods openly: Best practices for transparency and reuse

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Mar 17 2026

Whatever your research topic, the step-by-step methods behind your study are key to understanding your results. 

These protocols may be detailed instructions for a specific experiment or synthesis, day-to day lab / field instructions, computational workflows, or the broader methodological framework used to answer a research question. Sharing them openly helps others understand what you did and what they would need to do to reproduce, verify, or build on your work. It also helps you meet the open science expectations of funders and publishers. 

Building on our previous introduction to sharing protocols, this guide covers how to prepare, publish, license and cite your protocols so they’re easy to find, use, and receive credit for.

Why best practices matter

Sharing detailed protocols openly enables clarity, usability, and reproducibility, so that others can follow your methods without guesswork. Recording your complete methods in an accessible format addresses many common pain points:

  • Reduce guesswork by replacing vague or missing steps with precise instructions.  
  • Enhance reproducibility by surfacing dependencies (such as reagents, equipment, or software and their versions, where relevant). 
  • Provide clarity by stating exact conditions (e.g. timings, temperatures, or acceptance ranges when those matter). 
  • Ensure readability by avoiding jargon and using plain, defined terms. 
  • Prevent dead ends by including expected outcomes and simple troubleshooting. 

By clearly recording your methods, you make it easier for anyone trying to replicate or build on your work, including your future self. Sharing protocols also helps to contextualise results so that others may accurately interpret and reuse your data. 

Benefits of sharing your detailed protocols openly:

  • Reproducible results: complete steps, conditions, and materials let others (and your future self) repeat your work. 
  • Faster peer review: clear methods reduce back-and-forth with editors and reviewers. 
  • Compliance: many funders, institutions, and journals encourage or require accessible, reusable methods. 
  • Reuse & recognition: modular, self-contained, and citable protocols can be discovered, reused, and properly credited. 
  • Future proofing for your own work: versioned, well-documented methods save you time later and remove uncertainty as your protocol is adapted. 
  • Community benefits: sharing methods for others to build on advances science for all. 

Step one: prepare your protocol for open sharing

- Write in clear language: keep instructions in active voice (e.g. instead of “a 25 µl reaction was set up containing” write: “set up a 25 µl reaction containing”), define all acronyms, and write each step as plainly as you can. 

- Make it complete: it should be possible to follow each step you took, using the same resources that you used. 

  • Cover the essentials: list all materials, equipment, and resources you used (e.g. reagents/instruments, datasets/archives, analytical tools) with supplier, model, lot/batch numbers, and RRIDs, where relevant. Include recipes and detailed parameters (e.g., buffer recipes; corpus selection rules) and software versions.  
  • Write the steps in chronological order: for each step, include the conditions that matter for your field (e.g. time, temperature, voltage, sampling rate, thresholds) and the expected output or critical points, if relevant.  
  • Provide guidance: note any expertise required, safety information, ethics notes, limitations, and references (see also PRO-MaP’s protocol reporting checklist). 

- Add context:  

  • Write for discoverability: give your protocol a precise and searchable name and include a 3-4 sentence abstract that explains what it does, when to use it, and the expected outcome. Be sure to add relevant keywords. 
  • Provide tips: consider additional points that would help someone repeat the method; for example, troubleshooting tips and visuals, such as short instructional videos or images for critical steps. 

- Give credit: ensure all authors involved in developing the protocol are properly credited, apply similar criteria as you would to determining authors on a research manuscript. Authorship order on a protocol often differs from an associated manuscript, ensuring appropriate credit for specific outputs. 

- Seek feedback: ask others from your group, department, or  chosen collaborators to review the complete protocol. 

Step two: choose the right platform  

We encourage authors to share protocols on a dynamic protocol platform of their choice, such as protocols.io. Unlike a static word or PDF file, these platforms may: 

  • Allow you to structure your method in a step-by-step format that’s easy to follow. 
  • Provide a DOI so your protocol is citable and findable. 
  • Enable version control. 
  • Integrate with tools you already use, such as Electronic Lab Notebooks (ELNs), cloud storage servers, and some journal submission systems. 

Read Nature’s policy on protocols sharing. 

Step three: ensure long-term accessibility  

Think of a protocol as a brief, modular, and self-contained scientific publication. With a DOI-minting repository like protocols.io, readers can retrieve the exact version of your method years later, while still enabling you to update the protocol with separate versions as your method evolves over time.  

  • Label your version, to keep a clear log of what has changed over time and why. Ensure that each version has its own DOI. 
  • Cite your protocol: add the protocol DOI to the Methods section and include a citation in the References list to ensure accessibility. 

Step four: copyright licence and permissions  

A licence tells others exactly what they may do with your protocol, and under what conditions.   

  • Select a Creative Commons licence for maximum reuse potential (this is the default when publishing on protocols.io). 
  • Determine if your protocol repository of choice has licensing terms  
  • Check if your funder mandates the use of a specific licence.  
  • If your protocol uses any third-party content, check whether you have permission to include them under your chosen licence and ensure the content is properly credited. 
  • Ensure that the licence information is included in the protocol record. 

Step five: ethical and legal considerations  

Like with other research outputs, it’s important to share protocols responsibly. 

  • Protect participants and IP: remove confidential or identifying information (e.g. patient IDs, GPS coordinates to sensitive sites, proprietary formulas, trade secrets, security keys, or identifiable photos of people). 
  • If removing details affects a step, say so briefly and explain how readers can proceed (e.g. use of synthetic data, or controlled access). 
  • Check compliance with funder, institutional, and journal policies: some studies must follow specific reporting standards (e.g. MDAR, ARRIVE, CONSORT, PRISMA, field-specific checklists). Link to these in your protocol record where relevant. 

Quick checklist for authors

If you keep these checks in mind as you work through your research project, you’ll be ready to share your protocols openly and be fully aligned with best practices and Springer Nature’s policy expectations. 

  1. Protocol is complete and clear  
  2. Context (title, abstract, keywords) and troubleshooting included 
  3. All authors are properly credited 
  4. Dynamic protocols repository chosen and DOI assigned 
  5. Creative Commons licence added 
  6. Versioning and change log started  
  7. Protocol DOI cited in any associated manuscript (in both Methods and References) 
  8. Funders acknowledged and references used to develop the protocol cited, if applicable. 

If you’re interested in learning more about sharing your protocols, protocols.io hosts regular webinars on why and how to share detailed protocols. And read more about why sharing protocols and methods matters. 

Additional resources

A short history of messenger RNA vaccines’ long road

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon Mar 16 2026

When the Athenian courier Philippides ran to Athens from Marathon with news of victory in battle, his story inspired the modern marathon. In their book, The Marathon of the Messenger — A History of Messenger RNA Vaccines, cousins Jérôme and Nicolas Lemonnier used this image of a long-distance messenger to frame their exploration of mRNA vaccine development. It’s a tale of how institutions, researchers, and knowledge networks, together, support essential research. They bring together scientific history, personal exploration, and ideas’ evolutions, including their family’s meaningful connection to an early mRNA patent. This blog post takes a look at the 20-year scientific path and impact of mRNA vaccine technologies, the myths and misconceptions surrounding the topic, and the potential for a new era of personalised medicine.

For institutions across the research ecosystem, this story shows how important foundational research, interdisciplinary collaboration, and effective knowledge stewardship are. The book brings to life the value of clear scientific communication, long-term investment in scientific inquiry, and the integrated role institutions play in supporting discoveries that shape public health. As mRNA technologies make new, personalised approaches to medicine possible, this story celebrates the institutional environments that help scientific ideas become concrete solutions.

While neither Lemonnier cousin is strictly a biologist or immunologist (Jérôme Lemonnier is a biological engineer and Nicolas Lemonnier has a background in computer science and finance), discovering Nicolas’ father (and Jérôme’s uncle) listed on an underlying patent inspired the cousins to want to find out more. This book grew out of what they uncovered about how their family was part of the broader story of mRNA vaccine development, and the scientific communities that brought it to life.

A marathon, not a sprint: 20 years in development
9783031393006

The book’s title draws on the ancient Greek legend of Philippides, a soldier messenger who ran extraordinary distances to seek military support before the Battle of Marathon. After fighting in the battle, he ran back to Athens to announce the victory, only to collapse and die immediately upon delivering the message.

The authors said, “This is a metaphor for what medical research is, but also about the ways mRNA delivers genetic instructions before being quickly degraded. It also reflects the long and often challenging journey of scientific research, much like in the development of mRNA vaccines.”

When we deployed mRNA vaccines during the Covid-19 pandemic, it looked to most of the world like a sprint; that this technology appeared suddenly. But, in reality, developing Covid-19 vaccines was the final kilometre of a 20-year development marathon. Research on mRNA vaccine technology, initially designed for cancer treatments, was already two decades old when the pandemic hit.

“I believed there was something important to write about. People now think the Covid-19 vaccines were developed in just one year, but we found a 20-year-old patent that already described immunogenic preparations related to mRNA vaccines. Discoveries made by French and other European researchers deserve to be known by the world,” said Jérôme Lemonnier.

This patent mentions Nicolas Lemonier’s father (who is also Jérôme’s uncle), a former research professor in immunology at the Institut Pasteur in Paris. Dr Steve Pascolo, the elder Lemonnier’s former student and now a researcher in his own right and the patent’s holder, cited his former professor in his patent. Finding this inspired Nicolas to reach out to Pascolo to ask about his father’s contribution, and this grew into a broader mission.

“We believed that people had the right to accessible scientific information about the history of mRNA vaccines, the right to ask questions and explore if Europe could benefit from its early innovations. This was the beginning of our story,” - Nicolas Lemonnier, co-author

Dispelling mRNA vaccine myths and misconceptions

Until the pandemic, mRNA vaccine development hadn’t been the type of research to make headlines. The fact that most people were unaware of this work has led to misconceptions about it, including that it appeared suddenly, but also about how mRNA vaccines work. “Our book has now become a tool in the fight against disinformation, but this was not necessarily its original aim,” Jérôme Lemonnier explains. “I think now, years after the pandemic, there is even more noise around the vaccine misconceptions than it used to be back when we wrote it.”

Nicolas Lemonnier explains how mRNA simply delivers a message to produce a protein, much like how traditional vaccines, including those for measles, mumps, and rubella, work. The difference lies in the purification and safety of the delivered protein. “Some people still describe the vaccine as a form of gene therapy, and I believe this is tackled in our book by discussing with experts and explaining how the vaccine works.”

The authors acknowledge that there are valid concerns about new technologies; and the book aims to provide clear, accessible explanations. “We wanted to provide rational answers and not answers inspired by fear,” Jérôme Lemonnier said. Rather than pushing people to accept vaccination through pressure, they believe in giving information that encourages informed decisions. Their book shares the same message, helping readers understand the long, often start-and-stop journey behind the science.

Explaining science with cartoons 

Cartoons which combine illustrations with humour can help explain sometimes complex scientific concepts. So, the Lemonniers collaborated with cartoonist Gilles Charrot, whose cartoons help break down scientific concepts into digestible bits, sparking readers’ curiosity. And while translating the humour from French to English was a challenge, the authors saw it as essential for keeping the book engaging to a wider audience. Whether you’re flipping through for fun or diving deep into the science, the cartoons add a unique and accessible layer to the story of mRNA vaccines.

Trust and promise of mRNA in cancer and genetic medicine 

Public discourse, and even politics, around mRNA vaccines has gotten worse since the pandemic. As an example: In February 2026, the US FDA initially refused to consider Moderna’s mRNA flu vaccine (it eventually reversed this decision). When asked about this, the Lemonniers were pessimistic. Societal debates have created uncertainty, even among scientists, turning the topic into a battle between beliefs and evidence.

“With time, I think people eventually validate what is good, but we’re going through a period where a lot of people are doubting science and politics” Nicolas Lemonnier said. He compared Covid-19 vaccines with other medical breakthroughs that were once controversial but later became widely accepted.

Originally developed for cancer therapies, mRNA technology now shows even greater potential. Jérôme Lemonnier, who is working on a follow-up book with Chantal Pichon, sees the field as just the beginning. “It is something truly fascinating and we see progress before our eyes in genetic diseases, regenerative and personalized medicine. Covid-19 accelerated these advances, but costs remain a challenge. One dose to treat cancer can cost $100,000,” he explained.

Even so, he remains optimistic “I do think that we are entering the era of personalised medicine. As Nicolas mentioned, informatics and computer engineering will play an even greater role in the development of mRNA therapies, especially in treating cancer.” He describes this moment as the start of a medical revolution, comparable in importance to Pasteur’s discoveries, with interest growing worldwide.

Remaining challenges for global mRNA adoption

MRNA vaccines face additional logistical challenges, like the need for built-out cold storage infrastructure. Also, some diseases that researchers hope mRNA vaccines can treat are especially difficult. Cancer, for example, comes from the body’s own tissues and therefore evades most immune responses. HIV specifically attacks the immune system, making any vaccine approach, including mRNA vaccines, extraordinarily difficult.

Ultimately, trust is the decisive challenge while public confidence in medical technologies and in the institutions delivering them remains fragile. As Nicolas Lemonnier reminds readers, “Don’t be afraid of biology research.”

As years go by, new breakthroughs and crises strike the world, as the need for trusted resources becomes more important than ever. Stories like this recall the importance of research and its history to address misinformation and bring to light the stories behind medical breakthroughs. 

Learn more about the development of mRNA vaccines at When the Shelf went Digital - 20 Years of Springer Nature eBooks highlighting key moments of two decades of breakthroughs in science, medicine, technology, and beyond.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Book collections: Charting 20 years of innovation and evolution

T
The Link
By: undefined, Fri Mar 13 2026

To mark the 20th anniversary of Springer Nature’s eBook collections, we’re taking a closer look at the transition from print to digital and the people who helped shape it. They are behind every workflow change, metadata breakthrough, and new access model, and they’ve experimented, adapted, and built the foundations of the digital library experience we know today.

Today we speak with Springer Nature’s Wouter van der Velde, Global Director Books Solutions Portfolio, and Itsco van der Linden, Head of Test Engineering. They were there from the beginning and saw firsthand how technology, teamwork, and library partnerships transformed the way books are created and discovered.

When eBooks first emerged in scholarly communication, van der Velde was worked in epublishing and van der Linden managed ereference content. At that stage, their work focused on converting print books into digital versions. The major shift came later, when eBooks were born digital rather than simply converted from print.

Their stories offer an insightful look into digital transformation, highlighting a journey of experimentation, problem-solving, and a commitment to improving discovery and access worldwide.

From print shelves to online platforms: The beginning of Springer Nature eBooks

When eBooks first appeared around the 1990s, they looked very different from today’s digital resources. Only select titles were digitalised, and reference works, often spanning ten or more volumes, were converted into HTML or XML-based online encyclopaedias rather than full eBooks in a PDF format. As van der Linden recalls, “They weren’t really eBooks yet. You browsed them online, almost like a website. That was the starting point.”  

Meanwhile, usage data was still a mystery, COUNTER standards for books didn’t yet exist, and the technology to track digital engagement was still emerging. For van der Velde, who worked on early usage statistics, those first years were about learning how readers interacted with digital content and identifying the patterns we are now accustomed to.

The shift to digital-first publishing

Around the early 2000s, the newly merged Kluwer-Springer publisher decided to prioritise digital access for book publishing, as was already the case for journals.   

The decision to digitise all books, publishing them electronically by default, expanded the reach of books, paving the way for today’s globally accessible eBook collections. It flipped traditional workflows, shifting from print-first to digital-first production. Rethinking old formats also meant that PDF-only workflows gave way to XML-based production, enabling EPUB formats and multi-device reading that libraries and users rely on today. 

Technology challenges and breakthroughs in digitising books 

The early days of publishing digital books posed significant challenges, as technology struggled to keep pace with the demands of publishing full-book PDFs. Two decades ago, bandwidth limitations meant that a 20‑MB file could slow or even crash servers. To keep platforms stable, full book downloads had to be removed, offering chapter-based access instead.   

Many reference works were built in XML with style sheets to enable browsing and keyword search, rather than static PDFs. “Little did we know that, 20 years later, users would still ask, ‘Where is the PDF?’ because they want to see page numbers,” van der Linden remarks.  

Metadata also required development in the beginning, as MARC records were extracted manually and stored in local databases. Packages and subject classifications were sometimes transferred unexpectedly, causing confusion for libraries. Over time, processes were streamlined and standardised, laying the foundation for a reliable metadata ecosystem.

Early experiments and innovation  

One of the earliest digital experiments meant to challenge traditional editorial standards was a “custom book” tool that allowed users to select chapters from various books and compile them into a single printed volume. Innovative at the time, it didn’t gain adoption due to the limited content pool, making the initiative impractical.   

Although ahead of its time, this early concept anticipated what, more than two decades later, would become highly adopted, thanks to algorithms. “With AI, we’re doing something very similar now, creating topic‑based literature reviews using content across books and journals. The difference today is scale and technology,” van der Velde explains.  

“Back then, we built things that people weren’t ready for or didn’t need yet,” van der Linden adds. “Today we have a better sense of what users find useful, and the technology to support it properly.”  

New skills for a digital future

The rise of eBooks brought to life the e-publishing department. This new department focused on innovation across disciplines and teams, similar to van der Linden’s current role in production technology. It encompassed technical skills, metadata expertise, product development, and working in close collaboration with editorial and production teams.   

This multidisciplinary approach was still emerging two decades ago, opening doors for new possibilities. Authors and editors progressively embraced the new standards and workflows, and the growing reality that digital access would soon become essential for both researchers and libraries. 

Scaling up: Orchestrating the publication of over 12,000 eBooks a year  

Today, Springer Nature publishes over 12,000 eBooks per year, nearly two books every hour. They are available on Springer Nature Link, where libraries have uninterrupted access to reliable content, even at such a large scale.  

But high‑quality digital publishing is more than hosting files. It requires consistent metadata, format quality control, integrity screening, and more. Van der Velde notes: “People think hosting eBooks is easy. But when you publish this much content, every process, from metadata to rights delivery, must work perfectly.”

The future of eBooks: Trends and predictions  

Looking ahead, both van der Velde and van der Linden agree that AI will change how content is discovered, but not the value of books themselves. While the fundamentals of scholarly publishing are here to stay, the way content is accessed and consumed will continue to evolve. Van der Velde and van der Linden highlight three trends they foresee:  

  • Books will remain essential for deep, structured, authoritative knowledge  
  • PDFs may eventually decline, as flexible, multi-platform formats become standard  
  • DOI‑based citations will increasingly replace page numbers  

Two decades of eBooks evolution, shaped together with libraries  

For many academic libraries, the past two decades have been defined by the shift from print collections to digital ecosystems that support discovery, access, and long‑term preservation. Close collaboration between librarians and publishing teams shapes the continuous process of development.  

Springer Nature’s journey of eBooks development mirrors the evolution of library services themselves, from managing print collections to navigating complex digital ecosystems. The shift to digital‑first publishing, the maturation of metadata standards, and the rise of multi‑format reading have all been shaped not only by technological progress but by the needs and feedback of libraries working to support diverse research communities.  

The journey has been one of experimentation, infrastructure building, and continuous refinement. Every improvement in platform stability, every enhancement in discoverability, every refinement in research integrity workflows ultimately supports the mission librarians champion every day: enabling equitable, reliable access to knowledge.  

Continuing the partnership with libraries in the next era of eBooks

Looking ahead, the next phase of digital books will bring new opportunities and questions for libraries. AI‑driven discovery tools, evolving citation practices, and the gradual shift away from static PDFs will influence how collections are built, taught, and preserved. Yet the core value of books as structured, authoritative sources remains unchanged. And the partnership and collaboration between publishers and libraries will continue to shape how these resources are delivered, accessed, and sustained.  

As Springer Nature marks two decades of eBook collections, this milestone is as much a library story as a publishing one. The foundation built so far, through shared challenges, learning, and commitment, sets the stage for deeper collaboration in the years to come. And as the landscape evolves, librarians will remain essential voices in defining what meaningful, future‑ready digital access looks like.

What has it been like, working closely with librarians through the eBooks transition? In the companion blog we speak with Senior Licensing Manager Amber Farmer, who shares from her experience and how this evolving relationship shaped both her role and the fabric of the modern academic library. 

When the shelf went digital: Explore memorable moments and key milestones from two decades of eBooks. And stay tuned for more stories from early-adopter librarians who have been part of this journey, views of authors, and Springer Nature colleagues who are bringing these milestones to your screens.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Making open access work for you: Practical librarian insights

T
The Link
By: undefined, Thu Mar 12 2026

For librarians, research offices and institutional leaders, open access (OA) offers an opportunity to expand reach, strengthen impact, and deliver greater value to their communities. During the 2025 Charleston Conference, Springer Nature hosted a lunch and learn at the historic American Theater, where librarians shared practical strategies to achieve these goals. Get four insights from the discussion, with suggestions for actions you can implement today.

Open access (OA) continues to shape scholarly publishing, and success depends on aligning strategies with institutional priorities such as impact, compliance, affordability, and visibility. At the lunch and learn event, titled ‘Making OA work for you: TA experiences from the field,’ we heard inspiring presentations from librarians representing various institutions of different sizes, focus areas, and funding models:

  • Danielle Aloia, Assistant Director of Information Management at New York Medical College, Capozzi Library, part of the NERL-Springer TA
  • Mark Paris, Associate University Librarian for Scholarly Resources and Discovery at Brandeis University, part of the NERL-Springer TA
  • Peggy Kain, Associate Professor and Licensing and Scholarly Communication Librarian at The University of Alabama at Birmingham (UAB) Libraries, part of the Lyrasis-Springer TA

American Theater picture - marquee © Springer Nature 2026

The conversation highlighted actionable steps that enable progress today and in the years ahead. From building data-driven dashboards to implementing transformative agreements (TAs), the ideas presented empower libraries and research offices to move confidently toward sustainable OA.

“This has been the most useful session I’ve been to out of the entire conference.” 

Lunch and learn participant Willa Liburd Tavernier, Research Impact and Open Scholarship Librarian, Indiana University

What’s working: Four insights to take forward

The discussion at the lunch and learn was rich with practical ideas that libraries and research offices can apply today. The following key takeaways combine strategic thinking with real-world examples from institutions already making progress. Each one offers a way to strengthen OA implementation, improve visibility, and demonstrate value to stakeholders. 

(1) Transformative agreements: When collaboration lowers barriers

TAs can be powerful levers for growing the adoption of OA while stabilizing costs. In her presentation, Danielle Aloia, from the Capozzi Library at New York Medical College, explored the advantages and disadvantages of various approaches, from consortia and fellowships to TAs, for gaining an OA advantage. She shared how her institution decided on a TA through a consortia, which enabled them to cover their researchers’ article processing charges (APCs) for publishing OA.

Indeed, speakers emphasized that joining a consortium often makes these agreements more feasible than negotiating solo, spreading administrative load, and unlocking better terms. If your institution is mid-sized or has limited negotiation capacity, a consortium route may be the most pragmatic way to build momentum (and internal support).

Action to consider: Map your local priorities (publishing output, author disciplines, compliance needs) to consortium options already operating in your region. Engage peers to benchmark terms and workflows, especially reporting and author support.

(2) Data-driven advocacy: Make value visible 

The University of Alabama at Birmingham Libraries’ approach shows how granular tracking transforms perceptions of library value. This institution focused on transformative agreements (also referred to as Read and Publish agreements), and uses rigorous tracking and targeted communication, calculating savings per researcher and per college to demonstrate tangible benefits. According to Peggy Kain, “Giving back to the university and showing the value of the library has been key.”

Kain explained how the library tracks and records data for every APC funded through their TAs: approval dates, publishers, APC costs, journal types, faculty ranks, and departmental affiliations. By rolling that up into dashboards, the team has demonstrated over $2 million in institutional savings. This level of detail enables targeted conversations with departments and senior leadership, connecting OA spend to academic outcomes.

Action to consider: Start a minimally viable dataset: fields you can reliably capture each month without new systems. Build from there and publish periodic internal “OA impact briefs” for deans and research leadership.

(3) Repositories: Cornerstone, not afterthought

Brandeis University underscored the role of the institutional repository as the cornerstone of OA strategy supporting compliance, preserving outputs and amplifying visibility. Mark Paris explained how repositories are also an engagement platform: They give departments and research offices a lens on where outputs sit and what could be improved.

Action to consider: Audit repository metadata quality, deposit workflows, and outreach. Prioritize researcher experience (fast deposit, clear rights guidance) and surface analytics that matter locally (downloads by department, open vs. closed proportions).

(4) Funders’ shifting priorities: Impact over inventory 

Participants in the lunch and learn noted that traditional collection narratives resonate less with funders; impact evidence resonates more. OA initiatives aligned to institutional goals, research visibility, collaboration, and societal benefit are easier to champion when supported by data and clear stories about researcher outcomes.

Action to consider: Build a simple “funders’ view” dashboard: outputs by funder with OA status, compliance, and usage. Pair it with practitioner stories that connect OA to research impact in the field.

“OA is a journey that thrives on collaboration, data-driven decisions, and a willingness to innovate.”

Librarians leading with communication in the OA transition

Throughout the discussion, speakers emphasized the importance of partnerships and reframing OA within the broader context of scholarly communication. In her presentation, Danielle Aloia stated, “Pursuing OA work and forming partnerships is essential work.” She further explained that while this work is sometimes perceived as extra and time-consuming, it is in fact essential.

As the role of librarians shifts and transforms in the age of OA, collaborations across various departments in your institutions become vital. Librarians are pivotal to getting both the buy-in and the funding to support and promote OA from various stakeholders in their institution. They advocate for OA with these stakeholders to ensure support and educate and inform colleagues on the value of OA publishing for the researchers, the institutions, and science more broadly.

Communication is therefore fundamental to the broader goals of librarians, especially in the OA transition. Through clear, consistent dialogue and proactive engagement, librarians build trust, foster collaboration, and create momentum for change.

OA is a journey that thrives on collaboration, data-driven decisions, and a willingness to innovate. The thoughtful insights and open discussions at this lunch and learn underscore the power of partnerships and practical strategies that help institutions achieve impact and sustainability.

Whichever route you and your institution are on, we are here to support you. Learn more about TAs and how you can benefit from them. 

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Research integrity in the age of open access and AI: The view from France

T
The Link
By: undefined, Wed Mar 11 2026

AI introduces new integrity challenges in research publishing, while open access (OA) can amplify the exposure to AI-generated or manipulated content. How can the research ecosystem safeguard trust in science in this era of OA and AI? To explore this question, a roundtable discussion brought together voices from an academic institution, a library, and a publisher. In this blog we share insights from the discussion, which underscored the need for robust guidelines and strong collaboration among all stakeholders to maintain trust in research.

Research integrity is the adherence to ethical principles and academic rigour in conducting and reporting scientific research, in order to maintain trust in science. With the increasing adoption of OA publishing and the growing use of AI, maintaining research integrity is becoming more critical and increasingly complex. OA increases the reach of research, making trust more important than ever. And while AI holds substantial benefits for research, it also raises questions about authorship, reproducibility, and ethics.

A roundtable discussion concluding the webinar ‘Open access and research integrity’ examined how integrity can be maintained in this evolving landscape, from a distinctly French perspective.

The discussion offered a holistic view on navigating the challenges of this era, with insights from an academic institution, a library, and a publisher:

  • Alexandrine Cheronet, Publishing Director for Earth Sciences, Environmental Sciences, and Chemistry, Springer Nature
  • Michel Dubois, Research Director at CNRS and Head of the French Office for Scientific Integrity (OFIS), as well as Director of the Group for Sociological Method Analysis at Sorbonne
  • Sébastien Perrin, Director of the Library at École des Mines de Paris (PSL)
  • Moderator: Chérifa Boukacem-Zeghmouri, Professor of Information and Communication Sciences at Claude Bernard University Lyon

The panellists explored what integrity means today and how policies, training, and technologies must adapt. By representing key stakeholders across the research ecosystem, they underscored why collaboration among publishers, institutions, and libraries is essential to maintaining research integrity in an era shaped by OA and AI.

Defining research integrity amid evolving practices

The roundtable discussion opened with Michel Dubois presenting the French legal definition of research integrity: Integrity is the set of rules and values that must govern research activities to guarantee honesty and rigour.

While this definition provides a foundation, its application varies across disciplines. This flexibility, Dubois noted, demands collaboration between all stakeholders (researchers, institutions, publishers and libraries), to ensure consistency and trust.

Strengthening Dubois’ perspective, Alexandrine Cheronet emphasised that publishers work closely with the scientific community to define and update codes of conduct. These codes guide authors, editors, and reviewers through ethical practices, from submission to publication. Integrity is dynamic, she explained, and Springer Nature’s standards therefore evolve alongside technology and global research practices.

Building trust in AI for research workflows

Generative AI is reshaping research workflows, from literature reviews to manuscript preparation. While these tools offer speed and efficiency, they raise critical questions about authorship, reproducibility, and ethical use. Cheronet explained how Springer Nature integrates AI into editorial workflows under strict governance, using it for tasks like quality checks and metadata management. However, she stressed that human oversight remains essential: AI can assist, but it cannot replace the judgment and expertise of editors and reviewers.

Advocating for transparency in algorithms and data sources, Perrin called for “trusted AI tools” that go beyond the black box. He warned that without clear standards, the research ecosystem risks introducing bias and undermining confidence in scholarly outputs.

Strengthening peer review through transparency

Peer review remains the cornerstone of quality assurance. The panel discussed various approaches such as open peer review and post-publication commentary, which aim to increase transparency. Despite these innovations, Dubois observed that peer review, while imperfect, continues to be perceived as providing a critical layer of scrutiny. 

Cheronet added that vigilance is essential to detect anomalies, such as AI-generated reviews or unusually rapid turnaround times. Libraries also play a role here in supporting researchers, for instance by clarifying evolving evaluation practices.

Driving cultural change through integrity training

Training emerged as a recurring theme throughout the discussion. While doctoral programs increasingly include mandatory integrity training, Dubois warned that senior researchers and supervisors often lack awareness of these principles. The trainers must also be trained, he explained, noting that cultural change requires engagement at all career stages.

Perrin described how libraries deliver training on citation ethics, plagiarism prevention, and data management. However, he acknowledged challenges in formal recognition of these trainings within academic structures.

Cheronet emphasised the need for global harmonisation, as publishers operate across diverse regulatory environments. The goal, she said, is to provide clear, accessible resources that support ethical research practices everywhere.

Building trust through ethical correction practices

Retractions often come to mind when research integrity is discussed. Dubois argued that retractions should be viewed not as punitive measures but as part of a virtuous cycle of scientific self-correction. Similarly, Springer Nature's Head of Research Integrity, Resolutions, Tim Kersjes, has argued that retractions are an effective corrective to the scholarly record, and should not carry a negative stigma.

The Springer Nature Research Integrity Group investigates every integrity concern thoroughly, and takes action once the investigation has concluded. Cheronet noted that Springer Nature has improved transparency in retraction notices.  It is investing efforts to make unethical practices unattractive and impractical, while supporting researchers in doing the right thing.

Practical steps to supporting research integrity

Research integrity continues to advance alongside the evolution of research. The rise of open science and AI brings exciting opportunities to refine policies, technologies, and practices. Collaboration among publishers, institutions, and libraries will strengthen trust and transparency across the global research ecosystem.

The roundtable discussion highlighted practical steps that empower every stakeholder to play a role in strengthening trust and transparency:

  • Researchers: Embrace best practices for citation, data sharing, and responsible AI use.
  • Libraries: Position themselves as leaders in integrity education and data governance.
  • Institutions: Extend integrity training beyond doctoral students to include supervisors and senior staff.
  • Publishers: Enhance transparency in workflows, corrections, and AI-assisted processes.

As each stakeholder contributes in their own way, these combined efforts move us toward a research ecosystem built on trust, transparency, and genuine partnership. When everyone takes part, it becomes easier to navigate new technologies, adapt to evolving expectations, and support ethical research practices across the board. Little by little, these shared commitments help strengthen a culture that is both resilient and forward‑looking.

If you’re interested in exploring these topics further, you can find more insights on how Springer Nature approaches research integrity and the responsible use of artificial intelligence. It’s a great way to see how these principles are being put into practice and how they continue to evolve in step with the global research community.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

How to share your research code openly: Best practices for transparency and reuse

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Mar 11 2026

Openly sharing the code that underpins your research makes your results transparent, improves reproducibility and replicability of your findings, can increase citations and visibility, and helps you meet funder, institution, and publisher requirements. Building on our previous introduction to open code sharing, this practical guide shows you how to do it responsibly for maximum reward.

Step one: preparing your code for sharing publicly

Review your content: you should review your code to check that it includes only what you intend to share. Make a simple list of: 

  • The new or custom code you wrote which is important for your results. 
  • Any external packages your code needs (e.g. Python libraries). 
  • Any runnable examples or demo datasets so users can test your code.  
  • Any data or parts you can't share (because of privacy, legal, or commercial reasons). If something can't be shared, note why, and how someone could request access. 

Clean and organise your project

  • Delete clutter: remove old drafts, temporary folders, and anything that requires passwords or keys to access. 
  • Use a clear folder layout so someone new can find things quickly: directories should have meaningful names that describe their contents (e.g. ‘my-project-name-version’ vs ‘code’). 

Document your code: write down exactly what is needed to use your code. This includes: 

  • A README in the top folder that explains what the code does, how to set it up, how to run it, how to reproduce the results, and who to contact with any questions.  
  • Environment dependencies: What exactly does a user need to install to use your code? Provide a list of packages and versions (e.g. requirements.txt or environment.yml) for reproducibility.  
  • Container: It can also be helpful to include a container/capsule (e.g. Dockerfile or a Code Ocean capsule) so others can run your code in a ready-made environment. These platforms make it easy for readers to immediately run the code, and in some cases offer verification that the code conforms to best practices and that it works. 
  • Consider adding comments to the code files to make it easier for others to understand the rationale behind the code and to re-use the resource. 

Ask a colleague to test it: we strongly recommend that you ask colleagues who are not familiar with the code to test it.

Step two: choosing a repository

While version control with Git is a popular way to ensure a backup of your code and documentation of its development over time, a stable, permanent version of your code is also essential to ensure that future readers can find the exact version of the code you used. To help others repeat your results, put your code in a repository that gives it a permanent identifier (DOI/PID), such as Zenodo or Code Ocean. This offers long-term preservation for your code and makes it easier to find and cite, giving you greater credit for your work.

Step three: licensing your code

A licence tells others exactly what they’re allowed to do with your code, and under what conditions. Without a licence, your code is “all rights reserved” by default, which means others can’t legally use it, modify it, or share it. We recommend using a licence approved by the open source initiative to support reuse, reproducibility, and compliance. Common open source licences include MIT, Apache 2.0, and GPL. Find out more at Choose a Licence

Repository Dos & Don’ts

Do

Don’t

  • Choose trusted PID platforms like Zenodo, Code Ocean, or institutional repositories. 
  • Consider using a container platform (e.g. Code Ocean).  
  • Include your README for clear documentation. 
  • Add an open source licence.  
  • Include environment files (e.g. requirements.txt or environment.yml). 
  • Upload tests: Provide a runnable example such as a small demo dataset, or ‘smoke test’, that users can quickly use to test your code. 
  • Add metadata to make your data discoverable.
  • Don’t rely on a GitHub URL only (without a PID/DOI, there is a risk your data won’t be accessible in the future). 
  • Don’t skip documentation (readers won’t know how to run your code). 
  • Don’t omit the licence.

Step four: writing a code availability statement

All Springer Nature journals require a code availability statement in original research articles that have developed new code as part of the work (we’ve included an example below). The following information must be provided in this statement: 

  • What: name of the code/tool and a one-line description. 
  • Where: repository URL and persistent identifier (DOI/PID), including a citation to the code in the reference list. 
  • Which version: tag/release number (e.g. v1.0.0) that matches the analysis in the paper. 
  • Licence: e.g. MIT, Apache-2.0, GPL-3.0. 
  • How to run: point to README/environment files or capsule (e.g. Code Ocean). 
  • Any restrictions, and reasons for this: Where there are restrictions, such as privacy, legal, or commercial limitations, it should be clear how to request access or link to a controlled access version. 

Example of a code availability statement, supporting best practices for code sharing - original publication in Nature Machine Intelligence © Springer Nature 2026

Example of a code availability statement, supporting best practices for code sharing - original publication in Nature Machine Intelligence.

Step five: citing your code

Treat code like a research output: it should be cited as a reference and in the article text (similar to data citations). The reference for the code should include the PID/DOI. This ensures credit for the team and individuals who worked on the code, makes your software findable, and lets readers retrieve the exact version you used. 

Example of a code citation, supporting best practices for code sharing - original publication in Nature Machine Intelligence. © Springernature 2026

Example of a code citation, supporting best practices for code sharing - original publication in Nature Machine Intelligence.

Why best practices matter

Taken together, these best practices make open code sharing simpler, more effective, and more rewarding – for you and other researchers. Well-prepared, clearly documented, and properly archived code ensures:

  • Results are reproducible and replicable: others can run the same code, under the same conditions, and verify or build on your findings with confidence. 
  • Peer review is smoother: clear documentation and accessible code reduce back-and-forth queries with editors and reviewers. 
  • Compliance: best practice supports alignment with institutional, funder, and journal expectations, including Springer Nature’s unified code policy.  
  • Visibility and impact: code that is archived with a DOI/PID is easier to discover, reuse, and cite. 
  • Future-proofing: versioned, well-described code is also easier for you to revisit as projects evolve. 
  • Community benefits: open, reusable code advances science for all, reducing duplication of effort, and strengthening trust in research. 

Quick checklist for authors

If you keep the following eight checks in mind as you work through your research project, you’ll be ready to share your code openly, fully aligned with best practice and Springer Nature policy expectations, to help others understand and reproduce your code.

  1. Code is clean, organised, and descriptively named. 
  2. Any sensitive data that can’t be shared has been removed. 
  3. README properly explains what my code does, how to install and run it (including dependencies and environment), expected outcomes, and how to contact you. 
  4. Code has been tested by another colleague on a different machine. 
  5. A versioned release is created on Git. 
  6. Code is archived in a PID-minting repository, including README, helpful metadata, and OSI-approved licence applied. 
  7. Code availability statement included in my manuscript submission. 
  8. Code is cited (in-text and in the references). 

See our research code policy

Related content

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest!

How to create a truly impactful collection: Insights from an editor-in-chief

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Mar 10 2026

A collection is a curated, evolving body of knowledge focused on a timely research theme or interdisciplinary topic. Collections boost research visibility and impact, while fostering collaboration and supporting emerging or interdisciplinary topics. But what does it take to launch an impactful collection? To find out, we spoke with Ravinder Dahiya, Professor of Electrical and Computer Engineering at Northeastern University and Editor in Chief of npj Flexible Electronics. Professor Dahiya has launched numerous article collections. Based on his extensive experience, he shares his insights into what makes a collection impactful.

Professor Dahiya leads the Bendable Electronics and Sustainable Technologies group, with research spanning flexible printed electronics, touch sensing, robotics, and wearable systems. His multidisciplinary background mirrors the expertise Springer Nature seeks in appointing guest editors: researchers with deep subject knowledge, strong community standing, and a clear editorial vision.

Editorial leadership researchers can trust

In the video, Professor Dahiya emphasises that impactful collections built around well-chosen, timely topics are shaped by experts who can bring together authoritative voices from across a field. This approach ensures that collections do more than aggregate papers. They tell a coherent story that advances understanding and supports future research.

For researchers and authors, this means confidence that collections are curated by leaders who understand both the science and the standards required to publish it responsibly

Publishing timely research that matters

Relevance and timing are critical to research impact. Professor Dahiya highlights a recent collection, Sustainable Flexible Electronics, as an example. The collection brought together work on semiconductor manufacturing and climate-focused technologies, two areas of growing urgency and global attention.

By exploring how flexible and printed electronics could help reduce carbon footprints while enabling continued innovation, the collection resonated widely across the research community.

Rigorous peer review as the foundation of quality

For authors and editors, the credibility of a journal or collection rests heavily on the strength of its peer review process. As Professor Dahiya makes clear, rigorous peer review is central to high quality publishing.

Guest editors are expected to select reviewers carefully. These should be researchers active in the field who can provide thoughtful, constructive, and expert feedback. Choosing the right reviewers for a collection not only safeguards standards but also helps authors strengthen their work.

The quality of the papers we publish is highly dependent on the quality of reviews we get from the community,” Professor Dahiya notes. At Springer Nature, peer review is treated as a collaborative effort that benefits authors, readers, and the field as a whole.

Active editorial engagement at every stage

Beyond review quality, trust is built through editorial engagement and responsiveness. For authors, timely communication and clear guidance can define their publishing experience. For editors and guest editors, active involvement is essential to maintaining standards and momentum.

In the video, Professor Dahiya advises guest editors to stay engaged throughout the entire publication process, from initial submission and reviewer selection to evaluating feedback and guiding revisions. Adding editorial insight alongside reviewer comments helps ensure authors receive the best possible feedback and that final papers meet the expectations of the journal and its readership.

This level of care and oversight is a hallmark of Springer Nature collections.

A shared commitment to research integrity

What unites researchers, authors, guest editors, and editors is a shared commitment to advancing knowledge with integrity. Springer Nature’s role is to support that mission by providing a publishing environment built on trust, transparency, and rigour.

For researchers and authors, this means publishing in respected, widely read collections. For guest editors and editors, it means working with a publisher that values their expertise and supports them in delivering high quality outcomes. For readers, it means access to research they can rely on.

Watch the full conversation

Watch the full video to hear Ravinder Dahiya share from his experience on what makes a collection impactful.

If you are interested in becoming a guest editor or publishing your research in a Springer Nature collection, visit Springer Natures’ collections hub  to find out more.

Related Content

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source!

From evangelist to essential: A librarian’s eBook journey

T
The Link
By: undefined, Fri Mar 6 2026

In the early 2000s, for most librarians, eBooks were a hassle. There were, and still are for most, issues like digital rights management (DRM) that limited what patrons could do with the books. There were hard access limits, limiting the number of people who could have a copy of the book at the same time. And all this, for a bunch of PDFs? But: What if things were different? What were librarians’ real, practical concerns? How could a publisher like Springer address them? Asking these questions began an open, frank, and ongoing dialogue with librarians, who described what they needed from a publisher for eBooks to deliver real value at scale.

Taking this feedback onboard, in 2005, Springer launched a new eBook approach built around these core needs: No DRM; access for multiple users and no limits on concurrent users; flexible use permissions and no limits on what readers could do with the eBook files. This new approach meant that eBooks’ power, to be shared and read and used with limits, was finally available, and it reflected how libraries already work with their academic communities. The result is that researchers and students can widely share Springer Nature eBooks and can easily use them in courses and in collaborations. This supports ongoing collaborations, discovery and learning across disciplines.  

Wendy Allen Shelburne, librarian at the University of Illinois, saw this model’s potential early on, and was among the first to sign up for this new way of doing eBooks. Her experience shows how librarians took an active role in shaping eBook evolution. On the occasion of looking back on the past 20 years of Springer Nature eBooks, I sat down with her to talk about her experience as an early eBook adopter. Keeping with the “book theme,” we looked at this like chapters: The rise of eBooks, the pandemic’s role as a catalyst, integrating eBooks into library services, shifting attitudes, and finally, a glimpse of the future.

Chapter 1:
The rise of eBooks in academic libraries

In 2006, it wasn’t obvious to everyone that eBooks were worth it, that they weren’t more work than they were worth, compared with traditional print books. “But nobody needs convincing anymore that eBooks are great, I get asked for them all the time now”, Shelburne points out.  

This shift in perception came gradually, as both librarians and users recognised the benefits and flexibility of digital resources. Especially when those eBooks don’t come with use restrictions or DRM. When buying one eBook license means everyone with library rights can get any book, at any time, and keep it forever. And, this includes textbooks. That means that if an assigned text is a Springer Nature eBook, students don’t have to pay out of pocket for it, and can keep the eBook file forever.  

Despite the internal adjustments required to make eBook acquisition work, Shelburne recalls the benefits of smoother access for students. “The joy of no longer getting printed lecture notes in computer science was...amazing and wonderful. It just became smooth sailing after a point in time”.   

Chapter 2:
The COVID-19 pandemic accelerated eBook adoption  

When the COVID-19 pandemic started, and libraries closed during lockdowns, librarians were faced with an unprecedented challenge. This moment marked a turning point in how libraries operated, as Shelburne shares her experiences at that time. “The pandemic, in my opinion, was the watershed moment in all of this. The only way you could operate was with eBooks, and that really just changed it completely. Were it not for eBooks, I don’t know what anybody would have done.” 

Shelburne remembers her institution going through a tough time when they had to migrate their integrated library system during the pandemic. “We had to close our fiscal year in May, which is early, and then we had no system until late June. So, that meant in the pandemic we couldn’t put anything in the catalogue.” 

Despite technical challenges, eBooks remained a reliable source for education and research, transforming even the most resistant disciplines: “It really changed. The last disciplines that weren’t eBook heavy…was really the humanities.” Now, she remarks, “linguistics people are always asking for e-books. The history people are always asking for e-books.” 

Chapter 3:
Enhancing library services through eBook integration 

In addition to cataloguing metadata like MARC records, eBook files are, themselves, completely searchable. This means an entirely new findability experience for users. Where researchers once had to navigate complex catalogue systems with specific subject headings, today’s digital resources offer faster, intuitive discovery. “Keyword searching is so much easier than subject headings,” Shelburne comments. "Nobody would have that problem now.”   

This transformation also reshaped how researchers use their library. While students still fill in the building, their behaviour reflects the digital approach to education. “There’s still a lot of bodies in the library, but I don’t think they’re doing the same stuff that they did 20 years ago,” Shelburne remarks. “You’d probably have to go to the rare book room or archives map library to see significant engagement with print. Probably what you’re going to see is a student sitting with a lot of snacks and a laptop.” 

Even the traditional library spaces have been adapted. “We have lots of group study spaces now, which we wouldn’t have had before. Very different. You never see anybody walking around with a backpack full of books anymore.” 

Chapter 4:
The changing attitudes toward eBooks over time 

Not everyone embraced digital resources right away. One of the most telling anecdotes Shelburne shared involves a self-described “curmudgeon”, a retired professor, once known for his resistance to anything electronic. Shelburne remembers him refusing to open email attachments, insisting that everything be pasted directly into the body of an email. But retirement brought new needs, and a surprising change of heart.  

He reached out to her for help accessing electronic resources remotely. “We had a long conversation where I went through easy proxy, VPN and all these things. Making sure he knew how to do everything. And the day I saw him in the curmudgeon T-shirt, he was like, ‘Thank you so much. That was so amazingly helpful. I am having such a great time using all the electronic things’ And I'm like, yeah, I remember when you wouldn't open an email attachment.” This story is far from unique. “I think his story could probably be applied to lots of people. I fought it. I was curmudgeonly about it. I refused to do it. Look at me now."

This transformation reflects a broader pattern, highlight how necessity often becomes a catalyst for change: “The pandemic definitely knocked out a long tail of ‘I need to print it, I need to do this. 'And then it’s like, ‘Oh, I guess I don’t.’” 

Chapter 5:
The future of eBooks and libraries in a digital age

Looking ahead, Shelburne reflects on digital resources’ evolving roles in academic libraries. While eBooks have become essential, she wonders if traditional publishing formats will stay the same. “I’m surprised that publishing container still hasn’t moved much,” Shelburne observes. She imagines a future where the boundaries between books, chapters, and articles may blur, and where the concept of a “journal” or even a “book” could be redefined. “What does the journal look like in 20 years? Are there even still books in 20 years?” Another rapidly transforming area? Artificial intelligence (AI). While she sees potential in AI for tasks like text mining and systematic reviews, she remains cautiously sceptical.  

Despite the uncertainties, eBooks have proven their value, and their story is far from over. Librarians like Wendy Shelburne, with their adaptability, curiosity, and a touch of humour, help shape the future of knowledge access.

As we look ahead to the next 20 years, Springer Nature’s mission to support learning and discovery remains unchanged. You’ll find an illustrated history of the last 20 years of Springer Nature eBooks at our “virtual museum”, When the Shelf Went Digital... 20 Years of Springer Nature eBook Collections, where you can explore key milestones, insights from authors, librarians and experts, as well as the events shaping the future of knowledge and global impact. Take a stroll through the stories that defined the eBook journey and see what’s next.  

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Nature Sensors supports sensing research across disciplines

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Mar 3 2026

For institutions and companies working with sensing technologies, the challenge is rarely a lack of research. Instead, it is keeping pace with developments in a field that evolves rapidly across disciplines, sectors and applications. Advances in sensing frequently move between foundational science and real‑world use, making it difficult to follow progress in a coherent way over time. The newest Nature Portfolio journal Nature Sensors is established to reflect this reality.  

The journal provides a dedicated forum for high‑quality research and industry‑relevant insight across sensing technologies, supporting organisations that need to track developments across use cases and over the long term. This approach is shaped by the perspective of Chief Editor Dr Olga Bubnova, whose background spans engineering physics, academic research and editorial leadership within the Nature Portfolio. As she notes, progress in sensing technologies often emerges where disciplines and sectors intersect. Bringing these perspectives together, she explains, helps clarify both where the field stands today and where it is heading next. 

Supporting organisations working across disciplines and sectors 

Research institutions and corporate R&D teams rarely operate within a single discipline. In sensing research, materials science, engineering, AI and data science are closely linked, and developments in one area often inform work in another. These connections can shape multiple research and development priorities at once.  

Nature Sensors reflects this way of working by publishing research from across the sensing landscape and emphasising work that remains relevant in more than one context. As Dr Bubnova puts it, “We look for research that people can return to and use in different ways, whether they’re approaching it from materials science, systems engineering or application development.” 

For universities, research institutes and companies, this joined‑up view supports longer‑term thinking about research directions, technology development and collaboration opportunities across sectors. 

Research across academic and industrial environments

Across sensing technologies, progress often depends on collaboration between academic and industrial research environments. Different teams contribute at different stages, from exploratory research through to system‑level development and applied use. From an editorial perspective, making these environments visible side by side reflects how the field advances. Many of the questions explored in sensing research are shared across sectors, and progress accelerates when these perspectives are connected rather than siloed. Bringing related work into conversation helps reveal how individual advances fit within a broader research picture.  

This approach is reflected in the range of topics represented in the journal, from sensing principles and AI‑enabled data analysis to applied systems in healthcare technologies, environmental monitoring, communications, robotics and autonomous systems. Together these contributions illustrate how sensing innovation develops through rich interaction between diverse research settings, following multiple interconnected pathways.

Connecting research, application and trust

Because sensing research often develops close to application, clarity and context are essential. Presenting academic and industrial perspectives together also helps place individual advances within the wider research landscape and shows how ideas move from concept to use. As Dr Bubnova observes, when research from different environments appears alongside one another, it becomes easier to understand how technologies progress through successive stages of development. 

Alongside this connection, trust in the research record remains critical. Across Springer Nature, AI tools support discovery, editorial processes and research integrity. Within Nature Sensors, these approaches contribute to clear and consistent review and publication practices. Consistency, Dr Bubnova notes, supports confidence in the literature, particularly for organisations that engage with research at scale. 

Publishing models aligned with institutional priorities

Publishing decisions across institutions and companies are shaped by the interplay of governance priorities, funding structures, and long‑term research strategy. Managing research outputs involves navigating access requirements, meeting compliance expectations and ensuring the ongoing integrity of the research record.

Within this context, Nature Sensors operates a hybrid publishing model that supports different organisational approaches under a single editorial framework. Subscription and open access options are treated as complementary routes, allowing institutions to align publication choices with policy and funding requirements while maintaining consistency in access and quality. 

From an editorial standpoint, this consistency is central. As Dr Bubnova explains, “Research may be published under different models, but it enters the literature with the same expectations around transparency, review and clarity. That’s important for organisations working across multiple policies and programmes.” For librarians and research managers, it supports informed decision‑making within a connected and accessible collection.  

A long‑term reference point for sensing research

Over time, Nature Sensors is intended to serve as a central resource for institutions and companies following developments across sensing technologies, including emerging areas such as quantum sensing, wearable innovations and data‑driven sensing systems. The journal draws research from diverse disciplines and sectors into a cohesive perspective on work relevant to healthcare, environmental monitoring and complex connected systems. As Dr Bubnova notes, when research is shared in ways that help organisations learn from each other and trace the links between ideas across the field, it strengthens understanding of the future direction of sensing technologies and their potential applications.

If you’d like to learn more about Nature Sensors or explore other journals in the Nature Portfolio that relate to your organisation’s work, our resources offer an overview of what each publication covers and how they connect to different areas of research.

Related content

Don’t miss out on the latest news and blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts.

AI in research and publishing: What institutions need to know from KRAF 2025

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Feb 24 2026

Artificial intelligence (AI) is now a central part of the research landscape, actively shaping how studies are written, reviewed and shared. For research institutions, this evolution opens up exciting opportunities to boost efficiency, advance discovery, and offer researchers powerful new forms of support. It also introduces important areas for consideration, including policy, ethics, integrity and training. With thoughtful planning, institutions can make the most of AI’s strengths, reinforce trust in science, and empower researchers to thrive.

If you’re shaping AI strategies for your institution, you’re facing both an enormous opportunity and a fast-moving set of challenges. That’s why global experts from academia, publishing and research policy came together at Springer Nature’s Korea Research Advisory Forum (KRAF) 2025, to share practical insights on how AI can be integrated into scholarly communication responsibly and effectively. This blog turns those insights into clear guidance for research institutions, helping you confidently shape AI strategies that support your researchers, strengthen trust and prepare your organisation for the future.

What AI means for institutional integrity

We all know AI is speeding up research workflows, from literature searches to drafting manuscripts, and that speed isn’t just a challenge; it’s a major opportunity. Opening the discussion at KRAF 2025, Nick Campbell, Springer Nature’s Vice President for Academic Affairs, reminded everyone that AI isn’t new to publishing, though we’ve never seen it at this scale or level of sophistication before. ‘We’ve been thinking about AI since the 1960s,’ he noted, pointing out that the company’s first experiment, a book generated by an early summarisation tool in 2019, predates today’s large language models. Now, those models can provide broader support, for example by helping researchers summarise literature, structure arguments, or polish text, although it's important to note that responsibility and final control must remain entirely with the author.

With AI advancing so quickly and the pros and cons becoming more prevalent, the rise in AI-generated submissions is prompting a wave of new editorial tools, policies and detection methods. Rather than overwhelming editors, this shift can empower them with better systems for identifying low-quality or fabricated work, ultimately raising the bar for what gets published. Campbell emphasised that the goal isn’t about limiting AI’s potential, but about using it responsibly. Springer Nature’s stance focuses on detecting misuse, reinforcing trust, and ensuring accountability throughout the research process. “AI is an assistant; humans make the decisions,” he said, where AI continues to enhance human expertise without replacing it, and where the industry can build more rigorous and efficient publishing workflows than ever before.

But what does this mean for institutions? It’s a chance for institutions to lead. As highlighted in our Perspectives on AI in scholarly communications report, providing researchers with clear, practical guidance on when and how to use AI responsibly helps strengthen research integrity, build confidence across your organisation, and support better collaboration with publishers. By setting thoughtful AI policies now, institutions can position themselves as proactive leaders shaping a more efficient, collaborative and trusted research future.

How editors are responding and what institutions can learn

Editors from Korean society journals have observed a noticeable rise in AI‑supported submissions, reflecting how quickly generative tools are being adopted across the research community. Many of these papers draw on readily available open datasets, creating new challenges for editorial teams as they assess quality and rigour. Institutions can help ease this pressure by updating internal review processes and giving researchers the training they need. It’s also worth exploring publisher tools, like AI‑powered integrity checks, to catch problems early and prevent poor‑quality submissions from slipping through the net.

The evolving needs of researchers in a changing landscape

Laura Schmid, Chief Editor at Nature Reviews Computing (previously Editor at Nature Communications), shared some revealing survey results that highlight just how quickly researcher behaviour is shifting. Almost every researcher who has experimented with AI reports finding it genuinely helpful, whether for speeding up literature searches, supporting coding tasks, or helping with early stage writing and structuring ideas. And even those who haven’t taken the leap yet recognise its growing relevance; many expect AI to become a routine part of research workflows in the near future. Enthusiasm for AI is accompanied by a growing awareness of key considerations, including bias in the data fed into AI models, bias that can become embedded in those models and reflected in their outputs, as well as concerns around data quality, accuracy, and environmental impact. These insights point to a research community that approaches AI with curiosity and optimism, embracing its potential while maintaining a strong commitment to responsible use.

“Researchers find AI useful, but integrity and sustainability must lead.” - Laura Schmid, Chief Editor at Nature Reviews Computing (previously Editor at Nature Communications)

Experts at KRAF highlighted that effective and responsible AI use is strengthened by context. As Prof. JK Seong, Seoul National University explained, biological and environmental variability adds important nuance to scientific findings, and when AI tools are designed to reflect this complexity, they can deepen insights and support strong reproducibility.

These perspectives show that as researchers become more aware of both the benefits and the complexities of AI, from embedded bias to the need for contextualised models, institutions have a key role in helping them use these tools responsibly and in ways that strengthen scientific integrity and open new avenues of discovery.

Envisioning interactive and open research

The forum concluded by highlighting Springer Nature’s vision for more open and interactive research, including the possibility for readers to dynamically interrogate research data, such as filtering results by specific conditions.

“AI can help us move toward more open, reproducible, and interactive research, but integrity must lead the way.” - Nick Campbell, Vice President, Academic Affairs at Springer Nature

Institutions have a meaningful opportunity to shape the future of open science by using publisher tools that bring transparency into everyday workflows. This dedication helps strengthen trust and supports research in advancing with clarity and momentum.

The bigger picture of building trust in a digital age

Researchers, publishers and institutions all share a commitment to maintaining strong confidence in scholarly communication, which calls for embedding human‑centred values such as fairness, accountability and transparency throughout the research process and throughout the implementation of AI. When institutions champion these principles, they strengthen research integrity and open the door to new possibilities for discovery, collaboration and innovation.

As institutions shape their AI strategies, they have a meaningful opportunity to guide the research community toward responsible and confident adoption. Springer Nature’s AI & Integrity hubs offer practical frameworks, tools and shared insights to support this work. The Link gives institutions access to peer insights that help refine and improve research workflows.

To support this evolution, institutions may wish to focus on the following areas:

  • Develop clear, institution-wide AI policies covering authorship, disclosure, peer review, and data governance.
  • Provide practical training and workshops to build researchers’ confidence in responsible AI use, transparent reporting, and critical evaluation.
  • Equip researchers with guidance on ethical standards, including quality, bias mitigation, reproducibility, and best practices for AI-assisted research.
  • Promote transparency by encouraging detailed reporting and clear disclosure of AI-assisted writing, analysis, and workflow steps.
  • Collaborate closely with publishers to stay informed about emerging integrity risks, expectations, and evolving AI policies.
  • Use the outputs from publisher screening and integrity checks, such as plagiarism reports or data‑availability assessments, to help strengthen internal review processes.
  • Champion context-aware, scientifically grounded AI tools that support robust research design and reflect real-world complexity.
  • Advance open science practices by embedding transparency and reproducibility into everyday research workflows.

For institutions looking to evolve their AI thinking with confidence, The Link and the AI & Integrity hubs provide supportive places to gather insights, hear from peers and deepen understanding at your own pace.

About the Korean Research Advisory Forum (KRAF)

Meeting the evolving expectations of the research community requires ongoing collaboration with institutional leaders. After launching the US Research Advisory Council in 2021, this collaborative model expanded in 2024 with the Korean Research Advisory Forum, uniting experts from across academia to share perspectives and shape future priorities. The forum members are listed below (in alphabetical order):

•    Changmo Sung, Director, Mission PM Center, Korea ARPA-H
•    Chulhong Kim, Professor, Pohang University of Science and Technology
•    Heisook Lee, President, GISTeR
•    Henry Hee-Seung Bom, Professor, Chonnam National University
•    Jae Sung Lee, Professor, Seoul National University
•    Je Kyung Seong, Professor, Seoul National University
•    Jooyoung Park, Associate Professor, Seoul National University
•    Ki Tae Nam, Professor, Seoul National University
•    Mijin Yun, Professor, Yonsei University College of Medicine
•    Sang Yup Lee, Professor, Korea Advanced Institute of Science and Technology
•    Sun Huh, Professor, Hallym University 
•    William Jo, Professor, Ewha Womans University
•    Woojung Jang, CEO, AI Star
•    Wooyoung Shim, Professor, Yonsei University
•    Yongsik Ok, Professor, Korea University

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts today!


The story of Springer’s first open access book

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Feb 17 2026

This article was originally published in 2019 and was last updated in November 2025.

Did you know that it has been 15 years since Springer published its first open access (OA) book? To commemorate this landmark, we feature the story of our first OA book and the benefits of publishing open access. 


A year before the official launch of its OA books programme in August 2012, Springer published its first OA book: Future Internet Assembly 2011: Achievements and Technological Promises. Alfred Hofmann, then editor and now retired since 2020, describes the challenges of creating the first OA book.
 

“The project was difficult to realize within Springer as nobody had experience regarding OA book publishing at that time.”


This was before many publishers had begun to offer OA for books. But there was a definite need to support OA publication: 

“The Future Internet Assembly series was a sequence of conferences sponsored by the European Community, which already at that time advocated OA publication of research results developed with EC-sponsored activities.“

Alfred Hofmann, Former VP at Springer in 2017
 

“Open access is a requirement for all projects funded by Horizon 2020 […] so it was imperative to use the open access model in order to obtain a sufficient large number and high quality contributions from authors.” 

- Anastasius Gavras, contributing editor of Future Internet Assembly 2011 



With this need in mind, Springer challenged the status quo, successfully changing internal workflows and establishing a pricing model through a book processing charge (BPC), as well as approving use of a Creative Commons license so that Gavras and co-editors could publish Future Internet Assembly 2011 in compliance with their funder’s OA policy. 

Experiencing the benefits of open access 


Compliance with funder requirements is just one of the many reasons for publishing a book open access. There are many benefits for an author choosing to publish their research as an OA book, from increased discoverability and visibility, immediate online access, widened readership outside of their traditional research community, increased potential for collaboration, or career progression. Gavras confirmed that in the case of Future Internet Assembly 2011

“Open access contributed to increased visibility of the published works, and to the level of citations per chapter.” 


Open access at Springer 

In addition to Springer Nature Link, our comprehensive online delivery platform, all Springer Nature open access books and chapters are listed in the Directory of Open Access Books (DOAB) and, where appropriate, PubMed’s NCBI Bookshelf. We also work with Web of Science, Scopus and Google Scholar. Inclusion on these sites enhances the visibility and discoverability of authors’ work. As a result, open access books on Springer Nature Link receive 10x the downloads, 2.4x the citations, and 10x the online mentions of our non-OA books.  

Our OA books reach readers in 61% more countries globally than our non-OA books, and a majority of these additional countries are low and middle-low income countries. See paper/infographics here. For example, the Future Internet Assembly 2011 has now reached over a million downloads and almost 70 citations via Springer Nature Link.  

According to the download data available from the book’s homepage, this works out at around 1,116,665 downloads of the full book (as of 31 January 2026). Gavras has since published further open access books with Springer for these reasons.


Open access books today

Since its launch fifteen years ago, Springer Nature has published over 4,000 open access books across its Springer, Palgrave and Apress imprints, covering a wide range of disciplines within science, technology, medicine, humanities and social sciences.  The notable open access books list includes author Gerard t’Hooft, winner of the 1999 Nobel Prize in Physics and co-author Sir Timothy Berners-Lee, inventor of the World Wide Web and winner of the 2016 ACM A.M. Turing Award. 

Springer Nature OA books are subject to the same high level peer-review, production and publishing processes followed by traditional Springer Nature books and they are freely and immediately available online for anyone to download. The BPC covers all the costs of commissioning, copyediting, proofreading, production, dissemination and promotion. Readers worldwide can share and reuse books and chapters published open access using the applied Creative Commons License, ensuring maximum reuse as well as enabling authors to retain copyright for their work.
 

Interested in experiencing the benefits of open access publishing? 
Get in touch with a Springer, Palgrave, or Apress publishing editor to find out more.

From silos to systems building interoperable R&D workflows

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Feb 17 2026

Despite rapid digitalisation, research workflows often remain fragmented. Disconnected tools and data create unnecessary friction for labs and teams. In this blog, three data‑driven innovators explore why interoperability matters, the challenges labs face today and what more connected workflows could enable.

Every day, research teams lose valuable time and insights because their systems don’t connect as they should. Data sits in proprietary formats, workflows don’t quite line up, and sharing information across teams is harder than it needs to be. These everyday frictions often go unnoticed, yet they quietly slow down research and innovation. At a time when speed, transparency and reproducibility matter more than ever, such inefficiencies can have real consequences.

This is why interoperable workflows are moving onto the strategic agenda for digital labs. When tools, systems and data are able to work together, organizations can streamline research processes, collaborate more effectively and produce results that are both robust and scalable. To better understand how this shift is taking shape, we spoke with three experts at Springer Nature: Rob Padilla, Product Director, Digital Life Science Solutions; Emma Ganley, Director of Strategic Initiatives at protocols.io; and Prathik Roy, Product Director, Data Solutions & Strategy. They share their perspectives on why interoperability matters, the practical challenges labs face today, and how publishers and technology providers can help build more connected research environments.

Breaking down barriers to release value

As we’ve seen, siloed activity risks slowing the rate of discovery and innovation. This isn’t to say there’s no place left in the lab for modular platforms so long as they’re integrated well to avoid fragmentation. Modularity provides the flexibility to maximise internal efficiency without disrupting the entire system.

Interoperable systems on the other hand extend a platform’s reach seamlessly across tools, systems and organisations. What were once isolated tools are transformed into a connected ecosystem. And the benefits are immense. Digital lab operations are smarter and faster, generating more reproducible results. All of which leads to better collaboration and decision-making, increasing efficiencies and ultimately greater speed to market.

Achieving interoperable workflows is not a straightforward process though, as Rob Padilla points out. “Many big organisations are very complex and could potentially have many different ELNs at different locations, with formats that aren’t interoperable. If you want to export from an ELN to a different company or team, this will really hold you back. And this is an ongoing problem; when applications were originally designed, the main objective was “does it work?”. They were never built with interoperability in mind, but now people want digital product ecosystems.”

Emma Ganley agrees. She points out that tool providers need to bear these developments in mind. “They need a holistic view of what they’re offering, and how all these tools work together.”

Interoperable systems – key elements

Interoperable research environments are built on a small number of core capabilities that allow systems, data and teams to work seamlessly together. These elements provide the technical and organisational foundations for integrated workflows, trusted data use and collaboration at scale. The sections below highlight three key components that support connected digital labs in practice.

1. APIs driving integration across R&D systems

APIs (Application Programming Interfaces) play a central role in the connected lab environment. They act as a communication layer, allowing different systems to talk to each other in a format they can all understand. They’re the glue that holds together all the components of the digital lab, making it a cohesive whole.

“APIs play a crucial role in busting siloes,” says Prathik Roy. “A big pharmaceutical company will have all the major sources of data, but they need to make sense of it all. APIs enable them to integrate content directly into their lab environment, which bypasses the barriers they would otherwise encounter looking for solutions externally.”

This is where publishers play their part in promoting interoperability. “Corporate organisations want content in machine-readable format, and they need the interoperability to ingest the content with their AI systems such as ELNs,” says Prathik. “Springer Nature have created APIs for the integration of their vast collection of healthcare and medicine articles, personalised for the pharma/healthcare space. We enrich the content by annotating it, so relevant information can be easily extracted.”

2. Open data is the power behind connected research ecosystems

Lack of standardization has been a persistent challenge since data sharing began. As recently as 5 to 10 years ago, microscopy image data was notoriously difficult to access due to vendors’ proprietary file types, creating enormous problems for researchers and labs. The advent of open (FAIR) data and open-source tools was a major factor in resolving the issue.

“The concept of FAIR data is really big, and informs the discussion,” says Rob. “It’s a set of principles designed to improve reproducibility, stating that data should be Findable, Accessible, Interoperable, and Reusable.” He adds that FAIR data has lately come to mean Fully AI Ready as well. “Any AI system is only as good as the data going into it. High quality data going in is the foundation for good quality information coming out.”

Prathik adds that Springer Nature’s role is critical to healthcare and medicine. “You could build a drug discovery pipeline built on misinformation. Having access to proper, peer-reviewed data is vital for AI in medicine.”

3. Collaboration is driving speed and scalability in the cloud

These common principles are a foundation for trustworthy, scalable and efficient science. They facilitate collaboration by reducing ambiguity and making it easier for teams across disciplines, institutions or countries to share and integrate their data.

Cloud-based platforms are an essential element of the collaborative digital lab. They accelerate communication by allowing teams to work together seamlessly in real time, no matter where they’re located. Researchers at a global biotech company can simultaneously review experimental data, update project notes and adjust workflows, allowing discoveries and development cycles to progress more quickly and accurately. The result? Faster iteration and speed to market.

Building a future-ready digital lab for scalable innovation

Together, APIs, open data and cloud‑based collaboration provide the foundations for interoperable digital labs. When these elements work in combination, they support workflows that connect systems, enable data reuse and help teams collaborate effectively across platforms and locations. Applying shared standards, including FAIR principles, supports environments that can evolve alongside research needs.

Interoperable and well‑structured data environments contribute to consistency across research processes. Accessible, well‑integrated data supports reproducible results and enables researchers to build on existing work with confidence. This emphasis on reliability underpins scientific progress and supports innovation at scale as research continues to become more data‑driven.

Gain further insights into reproducibility and interoperability

Across research environments, interoperability takes shape through everyday decisions about how systems connect, how data is structured and how teams collaborate. From APIs that link tools and content, to open data practices and cloud‑based platforms, these approaches help research workflows come together in a more coherent way. The result is an environment where data can be reused with confidence, collaboration is woven into day‑to‑day work, and reproducibility remains central across the research lifecycle.

For those interested in exploring these ideas further, the white paper Reproducibility in the Life Sciences looks more closely at how reproducible research practices are developing across the life sciences community. You can also find more information on Springer Nature’s platforms and services, which are designed to support connected workflows and the reliable use of research content within digital lab environments.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts

How China’s regulatory reforms are reshaping global clinical trials and partnerships 

T
The Link
By: undefined, Fri Feb 13 2026

A combination of regulatory reforms and research funding and investment in China has created a situation where a group of Chinese companies have full pipelines, but need partners to market those drugs beyond Greater China. AdisInsight’s recent report, Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers and Shakers, details 10 of these companies and their pipelines, but I wanted to take a more holistic view of how this is playing out, by looking at the forces driving this, some key pipeline highlights, and the opportunities for global pharma companies  

China advances from generics to biotech leadership

How would a country like China transform its pharmaceutical sector from a generics-manufacturing “back office” mainstay to an innovation powerhouse? Starting in 2015, and continuing in 2020, China took active steps to reform its regulatory and clinical trials processes, making them, at a minimum, competitive with the rest of the world. In 2015, China instituted its “Opinions on the Reform of Review and Approval Process for Drugs and Medical Devices,” and took a further step in 2020 with the revision of the “Provisions for Drug Registration.” These introduced expedited pathways for priority review, conditional approvals, and breakthrough therapy designations, and shortened development timelines and reduced regulatory bottlenecks.   

These reforms particularly stimulated development of drugs using newer technologies like monoclonal and bispecific antibodies, chimeric antigen receptor T-cell (CAR-T) approaches, and others, that are showing great promise in dealing with previously intransigent diseases (pancreatic cancer, for example). Moreover, these reforms have given investors increased confidence in China-developed therapies, helping these companies attract and develop global partnerships.  

And while China’s rapidly evolving biotech and pharma sector is having great success with therapeutics, many of these companies lack the global marketing footprint needed to bring these new drugs to the patients around the world who need them. This combination means opportunities for global and US/EU-based companies to partner with Chinese firms to bring these badly needed medicines to the world.   

Combined with investments in research, and in companies commercialising that research, China is now home to a collection of biotech and pharmaceutical companies with portfolios of approved or late-stage therapies for treating life threatening diseases.   

The report, Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers & Shakers, looks at 10 of these firms, highlighting key compounds in their portfolios, along with these companies’ strengths, weaknesses, and opportunities for global pharmaceutical companies. The report profiles the following companies: Akeso, 3SBio, Insilico Medicine, Sinopharm, Innovent Biologics, Legend Biotech, WuXi Biologic, Duality Biologics, Sciwind Biosciences and Lepu Pharma.

Rising successes in China’s late‑stage biologics

Many of the therapeutics in late development or on the market come from advanced biotech categories, especially breakthrough therapies or expedited review. These include monoclonal and bispecific antibodies or other biologics treating cancer, metabolic disorders, or autoimmune disorders, some of the most difficult disease states to treat.

For example, Akeso’s lung cancer bispecific antibody, Ivonescimab, outperformed Merck’s Keytruda for non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC), giving patients more than 11 months without progression, as compared to Keytruda’s 5.8 months. But Keytruda’s first-mover advantage combined with Merck’s global marketing footprint has kept Keytruda as the market leader, despite Ivonescimab better efficacy.

Another example: Sinopharm Group’s explosive growth, moving to the 4th strongest pharmaceutical company (up from 13th) on the strength of its herpes zoster mRNA vaccine, a joint venture with Lonza, and its pivotal role in global COVID-19 vaccine development.

Innovent Biologics has both a GLP-1 compound (mazdutide) already approved, as well as its foothold in oncology with sintillmab.

Other key developments include:

  • 3SBio has signed a landmark licensing deal (up to $6B) with Pfizer for SSGJ‑707 (PD‑1/VEGF bispecific), granting global rights outside China and setting up planned Phase III programs internationally.   
  • Insilico Medicine is pioneering AI‑driven drug discovery that is boosting R&D productivity and feeding assets into global development; the references include recent financing that underpins these programs.   
  • Innovent Biologics has secured China approval for Sycume (teprotumumab biosimilar) in thyroid eye disease; expanded internationally via Roche collaborations and a $1.2B Takeda agreement covering late‑stage oncology assets outside Greater China.   
  • Legend Biotech is advancing innovative CAR-T programs with strategic collaborations (e.g., Janssen, Novartis), drawing strong global investor attention.   
  • WuXi Biologics achieved EMA approval at its Dundalk, Ireland site enabling first commercial launch there, and passed FDA pre‑license inspections across multiple Wuxi facilities, strengthening global dual‑sourcing and trial support.   
  • Duality Biologics (DualityBio) reported Phase III success (with BioNTech’s BNT323) in HER2‑positive breast cancer and licensing (DB‑1418) alongside a successful Hong Kong IPO, evidence of late‑stage momentum with antibody-drug conjugates (ADCs).   
  • Sciwind Biosciences has signed a $70M upfront global licensing (outside China & South Korea) with Verdiva Bio for ecnoglutide and amylin receptor agonists, with up to $2.4B in milestones, positioning metabolic assets for wider trials.   
  • Lepu Biopharma is advancing an ADC pipeline with a major licensing deal for MRG007 and presented preclinical data at AACR 2025; also out‑licensed TOPAbody T‑cell engager assets to Excalipoint with significant milestone potential.

China’s biotech momentum expands global R&D paths

China’s rapid transformation into a global innovation hub offers R&D teams a unique window of opportunity. With regulatory reforms streamlining approvals and enabling faster development cycles, Chinese biopharma companies are now advancing cutting‑edge biologics, AI‑driven discovery programs, and late‑stage oncology and metabolic assets that increasingly match global standards. These shifts are strengthening China’s position as a vital source of inventive pipelines, attracting investment and expanding its contribution to global drug development portfolios. 

For global R&D leaders, this means earlier access to differentiated assets, the potential to accelerate clinical progress through China’s faster and more scalable trial infrastructure, and new avenues for co-development with companies whose scientific capabilities have grown rapidly. At a strategic level, China’s maturing biotech ecosystem signals a shift from viewing the region as a manufacturing base to integrating it as a core component of global innovation planning, portfolio diversification and long-term competitive advantage.

To explore these trends in more depth and understand how China’s evolving biotech landscape could shape your long‑term R&D strategy, dive into the full Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers & Shakers report, where company profiles, pipeline analyses, and market data provide a clearer view of the opportunities ahead.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Exploring the visual side of science storytelling

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Wed Feb 11 2026

In 2025, Samira Hamza was the second recipient of the Springer Nature Fellowship for Advancing Science Journalism in Africa and the Middle East. The fellowship, offered in collaboration with the Knight Science Journalism (KSJ) Program at MIT, honours former Springer Nature colleague and pioneering Egyptian science journalist Mohammed Yahia who passed away in 2023. 

The aim is to help reporters and editors from the region to further develop a successful career in science journalism; reflecting Springer Nature’s commitment to supporting science communication and advancing discovery all around the world.  

Here Samira speaks with Lucie McCormick, a student in MIT’s Graduate Program in Science Writing, about her career so far and her hopes for her time studying at MIT. The interview was first published on the KSJ website while Samira was studying in the US and has been republished here, to mark International Day of Women and Girls in Science 2026, with their permission.  

Samira Hamza almost never stops thinking about her audience. The Egyptian journalist began her career as a translator for a media research institute that analyses how global media talk about the Arab world. She later became a translator and then senior editor for the Egyptian edition of National Geographic Magazine, where one of her favourite responsibilities was deciding which stories from the magazine’s English-language edition would resonate with her Egyptian young-adult readers. In that role, she says, she aimed to do more than just translate stories; she wanted to localise the science - to tie it to familiar cultural identifiers and on-the-ground realities - in order to make the issues relevant and accessible to people in her region. 

Hamza now works as the head of visual research for the online show “Al-Daheeh” which translates, in English, to “The Nerd.” There, she uses visual storytelling to make science accessible to general audiences across the Arab Region. She believes that the show’s viewers deserve accurate portrayals of science-related events, and she spends a lot of time fact-checking and researching the backstory of historic images. 

In 2025, Hamza became the second journalist ever selected for the Knight Science Journalism Program’s Advancing Science Journalism in Africa and the Middle East Fellowship. The one-semester fellowship was formed in partnership with Springer Nature to honour the late Egyptian science journalist Mohammed Yahia, for whom Hamza has expressed great admiration. 

I recently sat down with Hamza on two occasions to discuss her time at MIT, her fascination with transformation, and how she sees her role as a science communicator in the Middle East. Our conversations, below, have been edited for length and clarity. 

Lucie McCormick: You’ve done a semester-long fellowship through KSJ for journalists from the Middle East and Africa. Can you share a little about the work you focused on? 

Samira Hamza: Since I focus on audience psychology, I built a curriculum of courses about cognitive neuroscience and cognition, neurobiology of self, and so on. I also took courses about data and information visualization, computation and expression, and the history of science. 

I care a lot about the audience; I usually picture the viewers and readers that consume my stories as if they are my parents, or my nieces, because my mom and dad are illiterate. So whenever I write something I ask, would my dad read it? Or if I talk to him about it, would he understand? If he wouldn’t, I won’t write it, or I would rephrase it to be accessible to him. That’s why I like the show I’m working at now in Egypt, because it has this wide spectrum of audience. We are trying to simplify, to say something through the storytelling. 

LM: I’m curious how the relationship between data visualisation and cognitive neuroscience unfolds in your work. With your background focusing on audience and visualisation, do you feel like you’re seeing differences in how audiences behave in different parts of the world? 

SH: I always have in my mind that not everything I learn here could apply the same way to my audience. For example, in one class I’m taking, we talked about climate change. Who is the most affected in the category of climate change? Farmers and rural people. 

But we [in the Middle East] are still in the phase of convincing [people] they have a hand in climate change, and a hand in a solution. This is why the visuals have a big role in this. Because whenever you have a story about climate change, you have photos of the glaciers in Antarctica melting, or of a polar bear alone on the side of an iceberg. This is irrelevant for my audience: we are living in a semi-arid region. We don’t want our readers to think “it’s the first world’s problem, not ours.” 

So if you are going to talk about climate change, talk to them about the crops. Talk to them about how coastal cities could drown. You have to talk to them [through] their interests, not just deliver the facts as they are. 

LM: So when you’re doing translational work, you’re not only translating words, you are translating ideas as well. 

SH: I’m localising. I’m trying to localise; even when I translate a whole story from its origin, first I choose a story that’s relevant, and also tell them how it would [show up] in our society. 

In the digital show I work on now, we localise the tone of voice when discussing complex scientific concepts. We do this in various ways, such as having a comedy content writer, because humour is an integral part of our culture. 

LM: How do you see your role as a science journalist communicating to audiences outside your region? 

SH: To challenge prevailing misconceptions and implicit biases about my region by offering accurate, evidence-based, and context-rich reporting. 

LM: I am curious what it’s like to be here in the U.S at this moment? 

SH: I think maybe it’s my destiny to be here in this time to speak up, about my existence, my region, my country, my gender, because even if women are underrepresented all over the world, women from my background are even more marginalised and less visible, and that’s why sharing my voice feels important. 

So yeah, I think it gives me a responsibility to gain as much as I can in only one semester - that’s why I have a bunch of classes - and go back as Samira, who, I don’t want to say is different from the Samira that came, but Samira that has something extra, a wider horizon. So, I’m trying to do my best. 

I started with translation, and I’m trying now to simplify information and visualise everything. When I look at all of these, I think there is something common between them. I like transformation. That’s why I like writing - I transform my thoughts to words. I like translating - I transform words from one language to another. I like simplifying information - that’s totally transformation. And then visualisation is transformation from written to visual. 

I think that what motivated me for all of this is my passion for transformation. I’ve long been captivated by butterflies because they are the symbol of transformation from phase to phase even if their life is very short. My time here with KSJ is short, too, and I want to have a hand in transforming the scene of science journalism in my region. 

LM: What do you think is next for you? 

SH: Next for me is most likely to go back to Egypt and pass on this experience. I don’t want it to be just the few of us science journalists in the region. I want us to have momentum and a wider network that interacts with each other, and inspires each other, so we tell a broader variety of stories. And I think having fresh blood can help. 

Related Tags:

Introducing Nature Progress

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Feb 11 2026

Science and research are always in motion. New and exciting explorations and discoveries shape and reshape our understanding every day, across the globe. To support the advances in dynamic research horizons, Nature Portfolio extends its boundaries with a new series: Nature Progress.  

The new series unites with research communities to foster progress in rapidly advancing fields. What does this mean in practice and how will the series grow to support more diverse audiences globally? Nature Portfolio’s Allison Lang, Vice President Nature Communications Portfolio and Deborah Sweet, Executive Vice President, Journals, Nature Portfolio reveal details about the new series and share their enthusiasm for Nature Progress.  


What is Nature Progress?  

A. Lang: Nature Progress is a new series of fully open access journals in the Nature Portfolio family, covering a wide range of scientific disciplines. Collaborating with research communities in rapidly advancing fields, the new series will guide the progress of these fast growing, vibrant, and dynamic research areas.  

D. Sweet: Nature Progress journals are set up to support and serve research communities through the development of close relationships with them. They will do this while espousing the same values and focus on quality that researchers expect from Nature Portfolio. Journals in the Nature Progress series will enjoy the same editorial oversight, rigorous peer review, and high publication and production standards as any Nature Portfolio journals.  

A. Lang: We are building on Nature Portfolio’s longstanding reputation for rigour and high-quality research publications in creating and developing Nature Progress.  With the new series, we aim to reach a broader, global audience, and we are doing that in tandem with our communities. This is an evolution for the Nature brand. 


What prompted the launch of Nature Progress?  

D. Sweet: We saw the need for a new Nature Portfolio series from the authors who are already submitting to us. Through their publication behaviour as well as surveys we’ve done, our authors have communicated to us that they’d appreciate having another option within the Nature Portfolio journal family.  

Additionally, we noticed that there is growth in some fields that we don’t think we can support effectively within the range of journals that we currently have. The new series, Nature Progress, addresses both these needs. 

A. Lang: Indeed, the inspiration came from our desire and commitment to support our authors and help them find a home for their research.   

D. Sweet: We chose the name Nature Progress for this series because that is exactly what the papers in these journals will describe: progress! It’s also a reference to the focus on fields that are seeing particularly strong growth, and therefore also significant progress. 

“We chose a collaborative editorial model so we could really embed the Nature Progress journals in faster growing and dynamic fields.” 


- Allison Lang, Vice President Nature Communications Portfolio 


Tell us more about the collaboration with research communities in Nature Progress.  

A. Lang: We chose a collaborative editorial model so we could really embed the Nature Progress journals in faster growing and dynamic fields. In practice, it means developing editorial teams that represent the best of both worlds: We pair our in-house expertise with community knowledge by enlisting experts in the field as editorial board members. We already know that this model works extremely well for the Communications series of journals.  

Nature Progress editorial board members will handle manuscripts, and in-house editors will make the final decisions regarding publication. These editorial board members, all experts who are deeply embedded in their research community, will act as advocates for their journal and the Nature Progress series. In their roles in both the research community and the journals, they will directly support authors in their publication journey with us while shaping their discipline.   


What are the benefits of the collaborative editorial model for the Nature Progress series? 

D. Sweet: It’s clear that the time and dedication that professional, in-house editors are able to devote to journals has significant benefit for the journals and for the authors who publish in them, and we hear that all the time in feedback from authors.  

But particularly in fields that are changing quickly, people who are “on the ground” and working directly in relevant topic areas have valuable insights to bring as well. With academic editorial board members, Nature Progress journals will expand the overall editorial team’s topical expertise, and cover more areas directly than we otherwise could with only an in-house team.   

We’re really looking forward to working closely with the academic editors who will join us to collaborate on the Nature Progress series. We will equip this carefully selected group of editors with all the tools and background they need to be able to work effectively as part of the Nature Portfolio editorial team.  

“Open access publishing enables rapid dissemination and collaboration. These are meaningful to any field of research, but definitely so in those dynamic and evolving fields that Nature Progress will serve.” 


- Deborah Sweet, Executive Vice President, Journals, Nature Portfolio 


Nature Progress journals are fully open access. This means every accepted article will become immediately and entirely accessible to anyone, anywhere. Why did you decide to establish Nature Progress as a fully open access series?  

D. Sweet: We think open access is a good fit for the new Nature Progress series because it will help make sure that the papers we choose have wide readership right from the outset and enhance their global reach.   

Open access publishing enables rapid dissemination and collaboration. These are meaningful to any field of research, but definitely so in those dynamic and evolving fields that Nature Progress will serve. 

To enable more authors to publish open access in the Nature Progress journals, regardless of funding, we offer waivers and discounts on article processing charges (APCs). 

A. Lang: There is major support from funders, institutions, and authors for open access publishing. The data shows us there is significant uptake and support for the open access option in many fields.  

Publishing research open access has significant advantages of accessibility and readership to authors. We want the content from the Nature Progress series to be globally accessible and reach the widest possible audience. 


What can we expect to see from Nature Progress and how will it evolve?  

A. Lang: We have chosen two rapidly growing fields to kick off this series. In March 2026, we will launch the first two journals in the series: Nature Progress Oncology and Nature Progress Brain Health.  

Following the launch of our first two journals that cover clinical research, we will introduce additional titles later this year focusing on other areas of research. For every new journal and generally as the series grows, our priority will be to identify rapidly growing research areas in which we can support our authors better in their Nature Portfolio journey. 

D. Sweet: We plan to develop the series and announce new journals in topic areas where feedback from the research community suggests that a journal from the Nature Progress series could help the field grow and move forward.   


What excites you most about Nature Progress?   

D. Sweet: I’m always excited about a new way for us to support the research community, and that is what I see this series doing. We know authors are enthusiastic about publishing with Nature Portfolio, and this new journal series will give us an opportunity to offer that option to more authors, and particularly those working in some of the most exciting and rapidly growing fields.   

A. Lang: I am very enthusiastic about this new project! What excites me the most is bringing the reputation and rigour of the Nature Portfolio to a new series that is developed in response to the needs of research communities.  

I am looking forward to welcoming and working more closely with editorial board members in this context. I know from many previous experiences the wealth of opportunity and expertise that can be harnessed from community engagement, creating more diverse thinking.   


Nature Progress: What you need to know about the new journal series

Submissions  

The first two journals in the new Nature Progress journal series will open for submission on 19 March 2026.  

Scope: 

  • Nature Progress Oncology, publishing high-quality primary research across basic, translational, and clinical oncology 
  • Nature Progress Brain Health, spanning translational neuroscience, neurology, and neuropsychiatry 

Fully open access 

Nature Progress is a fully open access series. Its journals will complement Springer Nature’s existing portfolio of around 700 fully open access journals and build on the more than 240,000 open access articles published each year across Springer Nature’s portfolios.  

The APCs for the new series will be within the range of  EUR 4,390 – 5,090. As a fully open access series, the Nature Progress journals will be supported by Springer Nature’s APC waiver policy

Collaborative editorial model  

Authors publishing in the new series will benefit from the expertise of both specialist in-house Nature Portfolio editors and  external editorial board members from the research community. The in-house editorial team will include a chief editor, a deputy editor, and an associate editor.  Full editorial details and processes will be published when the journals open for submission. 


You can follow our Nature Portfolio LinkedIn page to be the first to hear more about the journals when they open for submissions.

A new chapter for the journal Theoretical and Applied Climatology

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Feb 11 2026

The journal Theoretical and Applied Climatology is entering a new phase as the current Editor-in-Chief Prof. Dr. Christian Bernhofer, hands over the editorship to Dr. Solomon Gebrechorkos. In this conversation, they share insights on the state of climate research, the challenges facing the field, and the future direction for the journal. 

How has the landscape of scientific publishing changed in recent years, particularly for climate science journals?
P_Christian Bernhofer © Springer Nature 2026


Prof Dr Christian Bernhofer: This change has been ongoing for many years but has accelerated in the last decade. It involves the competition between traditional journals and newer models, including also journals with questionable business practices - often described as “predatory journals” as well as “internet only” based journals, often run by science related agencies. The best means to describe the fundamental difference between these various types of journals is to look at how they treat peer reviewing and the distribution of publishing costs. Some journals have been criticized for inadequate peer review; there is little feedback from reviewers and the business model is based on costs for the authors. All journals which take care to conduct a rigorous peer review share one challenge: to find and engage well suited peer reviewers. As the global community of scientists is growing, and a larger and more fair contribution is coming from the global South, there are relatively few “experienced” scientists available globally. This leads to increasing workloads for the reviewers and sometimes frustration on the extended reviewing periods of some manuscripts. 

An additional challenge comes from a growing tendency in some parts of society to treat scientific findings as opinions. Opinions can differ and treating them as an equally important input into decision-making, increases the influence according to economic and technological power. I see this as an enormous risk to a sustainable future, as economic reasoning often prefers short-term profits over long-term benefits. As climatologists, we use facts or reasoning (like models) to learn what is right or wrong. We might fail sometimes, but quality assurance – as peer reviewing in a decent journal – helps to avoid failures. However, I would appreciate a different approach to publishing in academic careers. If we concentrate more on the quality of papers rather than on the quantity, the increase in the number of manuscripts for peer reviewing will slow down a bit. This would help well managed journals like Theoretical and Applied Climatology to improve science output for a better understanding and for better decisions in vital questions like climate analysis and climate change. 

What have been the most pressing challenges in climatology, and how has the journal helped address them?


Prof Dr Christian Bernhofer: There have been various pressing challenges in climatology, and I can only give a very personal selection. In global climate modelling, the integration of the carbon cycle became a must to understand past climate from the very beginning of life on Earth until today. Ocean currents, water budgets, land-use change etc. add to the complexity. Therefore, future earth system models will integrate many additional feedback loops and drivers (like human activities) for a better modelling of the global climate. Next, changes need to be quantified at a resolution in space and time relevant for decisions in climate change adaptation. For this downscaling, we need station data and remote sensing data, which suffer from decline and high initial costs, respectively. Hopefully, new tools (e.g., RADAR, cell phone signal attenuation etc.) and advanced data fusion techniques including AI will be able to solve this observation problem. A very large challenge is climate communication to improve the impact of climate research outcome. In my view, there are two major points to be addressed: First, the inevitable uncertainty in all projections into the future. Second, climate is always about statistics, which often requires special training for proper understanding. These facts are sometimes not properly taken into account when addressing climate related questions. Therefore, we have to make climatology accessible to other disciplines and to the public.  

Theoretical and Applied Climatology published many studies on the regional application of large-scale model output (like CMIP5 or CMIP6) for all kinds of climate change adaptations, from agriculture to water power and water resources management, from urban development to tourism. The journal output shows the need for information at national, regional or global level. In methodology, the rise of AI was clearly visible. A decent handling of AI-generated information is one of the future challenges, I would like to see covered in our journal.

Can you tell us about your research background and what drew you to climatology?
P_Dr-Solomon_140x140 © Springer Nature 2026


Dr Solomon Gebrechorkos: My research background lies at the intersection of climate science, hydrology, and Earth system modeling. I’ve always been fascinated by how changes in the atmosphere translate into tangible impacts on water resources, ecosystems, and human livelihoods — particularly in vulnerable regions such as Africa, where the majority of communities depend on rainfed agriculture. 

I began my academic journey in water and environmental engineering, which naturally led me to study how climate variability and change affect water availability and food security. Over time, I became increasingly interested in hydroclimatic extremes — droughts, floods, and heatwaves — and how these are evolving in response to anthropogenic forcing. My work now focuses on developing high-resolution climate datasets, global hydrological and land–atmosphere models, and integrated frameworks to better understand the physical processes driving these extremes. 

Ultimately, what drew me to climatology is the blend of scientific curiosity and real-world relevance. Climate science not only seeks to understand the Earth system but also informs decisions that can build resilience and sustainability for communities across the globe.

Are there emerging areas in climate research that you’re excited to spotlight through the journal?


Dr Solomon Gebrechorkos: Climate science is evolving rapidly, and several areas hold great promise for advancing both our understanding and our capacity to act. One emerging area is the integration of machine learning and data science with climate modeling — using AI-based emulators and hybrid models to bridge the gap between complex simulations and decision-relevant information.  

I’m also particularly excited about climate–society interactions, including the health and socio-economic impacts of hydroclimatic extremes. Understanding how climate change affects public health, agriculture, and migration patterns is essential for designing effective adaptation strategies. 

Another area gaining momentum is regional downscaling and high-resolution modeling, which is critical for representing local processes and providing actionable insights for communities and policymakers. 

Through the journal, I hope to spotlight research that bridges disciplines — connecting physical climate processes with impacts, adaptation, and solutions. Our goal is to make the journal a platform that not only advances the science but also amplifies work that directly supports resilience and climate-informed decision-making. 

Explore more from Theoretical and Applied Climatology on the journal homepage. You can also view the current and latest issues of the journal through this link.

Open data sharing: What a decade of researcher insights tells us

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon Feb 9 2026

“Where’s the data?” is the official theme of the 2026 Love Data Week, which allows us the space to think about the role of sharing data in the research process. In honour of this important theme, this blog explores what we’ve learned over a decade of asking researchers about open data. Drawing on ten years of the annual State of Open Data survey, the anniversary report offers a unique window into researchers’ attitudes, practices, and experiences with open data sharing.   

Below, we unpack the key findings most relevant to you as a researcher: how the research culture has shifted, what hasn’t changed, and what it all means for your own research data practices (including tips for open data sharing!).

Research data are the files digital or physical outputs generated or analysed in your research, that are needed to understand and interpret your work. They can take many forms such as visualisations, notebooks, code, spreadsheets, and maps, amongst others. When you make your research data open, accessible, and reusable, they become ‘open data’.  

Whether your funder or institution has requested you share your data openly, or you’re preparing a data availability statement, choosing a repository, or wondering how AI fits into your workflow, the topic of open data has become part of the discourse and practice of academic research. 

Capturing researchers’ perspectives on open data, since 2016 
The State of Open Data 2025 © Springer Nature

But data requirements alone don’t tell the whole story. The State of Open Data survey has been running annually since 2016, and has collected over 43,000 responses from more than 200 countries. It is one of the longest running surveys exploring how researchers themselves feel about making their research data open and what challenges they’re experiencing. These experiences reveal the real barriers, motivations, and cultural shifts shaping open science today. 

If you’ve ever wondered whether your peers are struggling with the same challenges, or whether your discipline or region is keeping pace, the State of Open Data 2025: A Decade of Progress and Challenges report offers clarity. 

Main insights from a decade of the State of Open Data survey  

Looking back across a decade of survey data, a few major trends stand out: 

  • Awareness of open science principles has grown dramatically, especially around the FAIR principles (guidelines to improve the Findability, Accessibility, Interoperability, and Reuse of digital assets). 
  • Support for open practices remains high, even as enthusiasm for mandates declines in some regions. 
  • The “credit gap” persists, with most researchers still feeling under-recognised for sharing data. 
  • AI has rapidly entered research workflows, aiding data collection, data processing, and metadata creation. 
  • Disciplinary and regional differences remain significant, shaping how open data is adopted in practice. 

Together, these trends paint a picture of a research ecosystem that is maturing but is still uneven, and still grappling with structural and resources barriers. 

Key findings researchers should know in 2026 

1. Awareness is up but support alone isn’t enough 

One of the most striking long-term shifts is the rise in familiarity with the FAIR principles. When the survey first asked about FAIR in 2018, nearly 60% of researchers had never heard of them. By 2025, that number has dropped to just over 20%. 

This shift is visible across disciplines. Fields that once lagged behind such as Business, Chemistry, and Materials Science have seen some of the biggest gains. Engineering and Biology now report familiarity rates above 40%, signalling a move from passive awareness to active engagement. 

What this means for you: If you haven’t been already, now is the time for you to start exploring the FAIR principles and join your peers in following them. Whether you’re preparing a grant application, depositing data, or collaborating across teams, funders and institutions increasingly expect that you follow the FAIR principles in your research practice.  

2. Mandate fatigue is real 

Open data mandates are a requirement by a national body or research funder for researchers to make their data openly accessible. These mandates are expected to encourage data sharing. But support for national open data mandates has shifted unevenly across the globe. Whilst global support looks stable at first glance, regional patterns tell a more nuanced story. 

The countries with the steepest decline in support for national mandates were Australia (63.2% in 2016, to 27.4% in 2025) and Brazil (64.7% in 2016 and 39% in 2025). Meanwhile, India (59.8% in 2016 and 54.7% in 2025) remained stable. Why the divergence? The report suggests that early enthusiasm for mandates may fade when researchers encounter practical challenges, due to unclear guidance, inconsistent standards, or insufficient institutional support. 

What this means for you: If you feel overwhelmed by policy requirements, you’re not alone. Many researchers support openness in principle but struggle with the realities of compliance. This is a signal to institutions and funders: mandates must be paired with practical and discipline-specific support. 

3. Open practices are popular, but recognition is lagging 

Despite mixed feelings about mandates, researchers remained strongly supportive of open practices in 2025 (n=3,959): 

  • 88% support open access 
  • 81% support open data 
  • 76% support open peer review 
  • 59% support preprinting 

But enthusiasm doesn’t erase the biggest cultural barrier: the lack of recognition for data sharing. 

Since 2020, the survey has consistently shown that most researchers feel they receive too little credit for sharing data. While the gap has narrowed slightly, nearly 70% still said their efforts go unrecognised. 

This disconnect affects behaviour. When data sharing requires significant time, documentation, and expertise but yields little professional reward, it’s no surprise that uptake varies. 

What this means for you: If you’ve ever felt that preparing a dataset to share openly takes more effort than it’s worth, you’re in good company. But the landscape is shifting. More institutions are beginning to recognise datasets as research outputs, and community-driven initiatives are emerging to reward contributions more fairly. 

4. AI is becoming part of the data workflow 

AI adoption is one of the fastest-moving trends in this year’s report. Between 2024 and 2025: 

  • Use of AI for data processing jumped from 22% to 32% 
  • AI use for metadata creation rose from 16% to 25% 
  • AI use for data collection increased from 17% to 24% 

At the same time, the proportion of researchers who were unaware of AI tools dropped sharply. 

AI is becoming a standard part of the research data landscape, but its impact depends on how it is combined with data expertise. When designed with clear intent and informed by disciplinary standards, AI can support FAIR data sharing by automating routine tasks like metadata creation and streamlining data preparation workflows. Rather than replacing expertise, well-designed AI tools embed it, pointing towards a future where data is more FAIR, more reusable, and more efficiently managed. 

What this means for you: AI is quickly becoming part of the standard research toolkit. Using AI can support you to share your data openly and make your data FAIR, by automating tasks like metadata creation and reducing time and effort needed to prepare data for sharing.  

What experts told us: Voices from the community 

Beyond the numbers, the report includes insights from researchers, librarians, and data experts around the world. Their perspectives shared the realities behind the trends. Several themes stand out: 

  • Infrastructure matters but it must be localised 

Experts emphasised that global mandates don’t always translate into local practice. Regions like Africa and Asia are developing their own open infrastructure ecosystems, tailored to cultural and community needs. As Joy Owango, Founding Director of Training Centre in Communication (TCC Africa) states, “It's a good sign. We are now getting sovereignty of our research.” 

  • Data quality is a growing concern 

As Melissa Haendel, PhD, FACMI, Sarah Graham Kenan Distinguished Professor at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, shares, “data dumping grounds” have emerged in response to mandates: “People are sharing their data, but they're not necessarily making it reusable.” 

  • Librarians and data stewards are essential 

Many researchers lack the time or expertise to prepare high-quality datasets. Brian Nosek, Co-founder and Executive Director of the Center for Open Science and Psychology Professor at the University of Virginia, stresses the importance of support: “The support that's really needed is: how does a researcher make it easy for another person to know their data as well as they do?” Librarians and data professionals can bridge this gap, but only if institutions invest in them.  

  • Recognition must evolve 

From nano attributions to open research awards, experts highlighted creative ways to reward data contributions. These initiatives show what is possible when institutions take recognition seriously. However, without broader systemic support, cultural and behavioural change may remain limited. 

Five practical tips to improve your own data sharing 

To make your data more discoverable, reusable, and impactful

  • Cite all data, used or generated, in your research correctly 
  • Identify and share (where possible) the data that underpin your research  
  • Process any sensitive data and share it appropriately 
  • Write a Data Availability Statement  
  • Consider publishing a data article 

Read the full report: The State of Open Data 2025: A Decade of Progress and Challenges


Related content

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest!

Fixing the incentive problem in research assessment - lessons learned from global practice

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Thu Feb 5 2026

What happens when the systems meant to reward research excellence, can be seen as one of the causes of a loss of trust in science? Does an overreliance on publication metrics mean that researchers feel compelled to target these metrics? These questions shaped one of the discussions during COPE's Publication Integrity Week, an annual initiative that brings together the global research publishing community to highlight issues that define good practice.  

As COPE Trustee Board member, I had the pleasure to moderate the session Boosting Incentives for Ethical Conduct. With three fascinating speakers, we asked ourselves: 

Why do incentives matter for trust in science?  

Incentives shape behaviour. When institutions offer cash bonuses or base promotions on the number or prestige of publications, the pressure to publish can lead to shortcuts, and sometimes misconduct. It’s a reality for many researchers today, and my team and I have heard many researchers expressing these pressures during our research integrity investigations.

In the session, our panel of international experts discussed how the current research assessment systems influence behaviour, the unintended consequences of incentives, and the work underway to rethink how we reward researchers.  

What we can learn from the Cobra effect 

Achal Agrawal, founder of India Research Watch offered a striking analogy to the use of publication counts as prerequisites for bonuses or promotions – “the Cobra effect”. In colonial India, a bounty was introduced to reduce venomous cobras. Initially, the program worked to reduce numbers, but soon people began breeding cobras to claim rewards. When the program ended, breeders released their snakes, leaving the region with an even bigger problem. 

This tale mirrors what happens in academia when incentives prioritise quantity over quality. Achal shared examples of universities offering direct payment for papers and patents, alongside punitive measures for those who fail to meet unrealistic research goals. Combined with rankings that heavily weight research output, researchers face immense pressure to publish, sometimes at any cost.

These pressures, he argued, are driving misconduct and inflating retraction rates worldwide.   

 Achal warned: “When you reward papers, people start gaming the system” 

 “Incentives are powerful” he added, “if we don’t monitor and evolve them, they will lead to unintended consequences”.   

Achal’s call to action included:  

  • Better metrics that reward integrity, openness and collaboration  
  • Oversight and transparency in journal practices, clearer retraction notices and audits of COPE compliance  
  • System-level penalties for institutions with repeated misconduct such as a research integrity risk index  

Many of Achal’s recommendations align closely with our work to promote research integrity, transparency and accountability.

Through Springer Nature’s India Research Tour, in collaboration with the Ministry of Education, Government India, we delivered workshops, training across institutions to promote ethical, transparent, inclusive research practices and strengthening research integrity awareness. 

We also collaborate with organisations such as ORCID, DORA, STM and COPE, to develop shared solutions and resources, including guidance for publishers on how to clearly communicate retractions, which are a neutral mechanism to correct the scholarly literature.  These collaborations help create the interconnected systems that are required for incentives which promote integrity and good practice. 

Moving beyond Metrics  

Sanli Faez, national manager of the Dutch Recognition and Rewards programme, challenged the reliance on traditional metrics which tend to focus on counting papers and citations, ignoring the many different contributions that drive discovery and advance knowledge.  

 “What we aim for is concrete benefit to society and reliable science. But that’s not what we’re rewarding”  

Drawing on Bruno Latour’s work, Sanli explained that the day-to-day incentives are social rather than philosophical. "What scientists want is credit - from peers - because credit unlocks resources to keep doing the work.” 

This is the traditional credit cycle, where initial recognition leads to resources, which enable experiments and data collection, which turn into publications, presentations, generating more recognition and resources. However, this model does not reflect the reality of modern science today, with the growth of multi-disciplinary work, and blurred discipline boundaries.  

Sanli introduced a compelling idea, moving away from the traditional credit cycle to a credibility network, a cloud of contributions where value is distributed across people, teams and institutions.   

He added “We now conduct research in a more diverse and generally collaborative way, through countless micro-contributions: datasets, code snippets, preprints, peer reviews, blog posts, mentorship and collaborative discussions”.  

These smaller, interconnected outputs reflect the reality of interdisciplinary research and open science.  However, the current reward systems struggle to aggregate and meaningfully reward these contributions.  

The Netherlands are considering bold steps: removing H-index reporting in grant proposals and attempting to measure the qualities of the types of work in academia, across different disciplines.   Sanli said, “This moves us away from marketing or promoting the individual researcher and towards honouring the collective research output – the cloud of micro-contributions, advancing discovery”. 

At the institutional level, the Dutch Recognitions and Rewards programme is creating room for diverse talent profiles, valuing the contributions of teachers, researchers, managers, data scientists and more, and rewarding team science and cross-disciplinary collaboration. The Dutch Recognitions and Rewards culture barometer give an insight into the success of the programme and how this has been recognised, shared and experienced in the workplace by surveying over 8,000 researchers.  

These approaches resonate with my experiences in integrity and with the position Springer Nature has taken.  As a signatory of the Declaration on Research Assessment (DORA), we have long advocated for a more balanced approach to research assessment, one that rewards integrity, openness and collaboration.  Our recent white paper on the state of research assessment reflects this commitment, drawing on insights from over 6,600 researchers to understand their experiences on how their contributions are evaluated.  

We also continue to support the wider researcher community with free to access, specific training to promote good research practices, from fundamentals on research integrity, to conducting peer review. By working collaboratively across the ecosystem, we aim to shape systems that reflect the realities of modern science and strengthen trust in science.  

Recognising micro-contributions means valuing:  

  • Data sharing and curation that enable reproducibility 
  • Open-source code that accelerates innovation  
  • Peer review and mentoring that strengthen research culture 
  • Collaborative outputs that cross disciplinary boundaries.  

Building systems to capture and credit these contributions is essential. It’s not just about fairness; it’s about creating incentives that align with the realities of modern research.  

Redesigning Academic Rewards:  

Caitlin Schleicher introduced the MA³ Challenge, a $1.5 million initiative to help institutions rethink hiring, promotion and tenure systems, with a goal of rewarding bold strategies to foster a culture of openness, collaboration and transparency. She highlighted Stanford’s School of Medicine as a case study: faculty can now include an optional CV addendum showcasing open practices - data sharing, reproducibility, and more - while impact factors are explicitly excluded.  

“Show us your open data practices, rigor and reproducibility, not your H-index,” Caitlin emphasised. 

Key points of agreement 

All the speakers made compelling cases and, unsurprisingly, converged on some key points:  

  • Metrics aren’t going away but they must evolve. Rankings drive behaviour, so better, more robust measures are essential.  
  • Quality over quantity: Recognise diverse contributions, teaching collaboration and open science.  
  • System-level change matters: Funders, publishers and institutions must align incentives with integrity  
  • Global collaboration is crucial: Solutions must be inclusive, designed to support diverse academic contexts and avoid widening gaps between resource rich universities and those with limited resources.  

What struck me most was the sense of urgency and optimism. Reforming incentives is complex, but the examples our panellists shared show that progress is possible, when institutions, funders, publishers and other stakeholders across the sector work together. To build trust in research, we need systemic reforms that make ethical conduct the rational choice.  At Springer Nature, we are committed to supporting this shift through advocacy, resources and training that empower researchers to conduct research with integrity.  Learn more about our work here.  


Correction: An earlier version of this blog post incorrectly stated Achal Agrawal's affiliation. The correct affiliation is India Research Watch.


The 2025 State of Open Data report: Can technology push openness forward?

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon Feb 2 2026

The State of Open Data survey has been capturing researchers’ attitudes and experiences with open data since 2016. The 2025 report celebrates its tenth year, with more insights and findings. Understanding how researchers feel about data sharing and open data mandates helps institutions design services, training and infrastructure that genuinely match researchers’ needs and behaviours. By grounding policy and support in these insights, institutions can promote stronger adoption and compliance. They can create an environment that empowers, rather than pressures, their researchers. In a special blog contribution, Springer Nature’s Ed Gerstner, Director, Research Environment Alliances, Academic Affairs, shares his thoughts on the 2025 report, and why he is (cautiously) hopeful that technology could push openness forward.

With the 2025 State of Open Data report, titled 'A decade of progress and challenges,' we mark 10 years of tracking how researchers think about and engage with open data. The annual reports on the survey results have become a key reference point for understanding the open data landscape. The 2025 report shows that we’ve come a long way in ten years, but we’ve still got a way to go.

The 10th anniversary report examines the current state of open data as reflected in the 2025 survey results, as well as how attitudes and practices have evolved over the past decade. It provides valuable insight into experiences of researchers with data sharing, their attitudes and practices. You’ll also find input from experts on related topics, from funder mandates to data sharing challenges and from recognition to reproducibility

“Looking back, data sharing is still woefully unrecognised by funders and institutions. Looking forward, technology has finally reached a point where it might be able to help.”

For institutions, this long-term view of researchers’ motivations and the challenges they face offers insights that help them better design the essential services they offer to their researchers. With evidence-based support and advocacy, institutional stakeholders are invaluable partners in fostering open, transparent and reproducible research.

Making data FAIR, without sufficient credit for time and effort

The 2025 State of Open Data report shows that researchers’ familiarity with the idea of FAIR data has dramatically improved (ensuring data are findable, accessible, interoperable, and reusable).

But while the proportion of researchers who are now familiar with the FAIR principles has increased substantially, the 2025 report finds that recognition for researchers who make their data FAIR, or even just open, has not. Two-thirds of respondents told us that they feel researchers still don’t receive sufficient credit for making their research data open. This misalignment between efforts and recognition is one of the most significant barriers to widespread adoption of data sharing.

Date sharing mandates: Compliance burden with no support?

This in itself isn’t news, and has been discussed often, including in previous State of Open Data reports. What is striking to see is the corresponding drop-in net support for national open data mandates.

In the first report in 2016, a clear majority of respondents told us that they strongly supported open data mandates. In 2025, that strong support has fallen to around 40%, and to less than a third in the United States. National or funder mandates can be powerful drivers of data sharing, by setting clear standards of the practice. But without resources, tools, and guidance to researchers, these mandates may be seen as burdening researchers with compliance without enough support.

Even so, support for mandates outweighs opposition when comparing the two groups, which is encouraging to see. Institutional stakeholders, from libraries and research offices to data support units, play a central role in helping researchers understand and meet data sharing mandates. Understanding the challenges researchers face when implementing these mandates enables institutional stakeholders to better support them, design relevant services, and advocate for meaningful institutional change.

The challenges of sharing data and doing it right

But even with the strongest will in the world, researchers have precious little time to share their data (which is why it is so important to understand what drives successful data sharing). Data sharing competes with the need to manage labs, write papers, chase research funds, teach undergrads, and much more besides doing actual research.

What’s more, sharing data on its own is not enough. If research data is released without sufficient metadata, it has little value. Metadata is the information that tells others not just when, where, and by whom it was collected, but what it represents. Without metadata, the potential of shared data to be found and reused (the F and the R in FAIR) is limited.

The curation of data and the creation of metadata that enables it to be FAIR are specialist skills. If we require all researchers to be data scientists, it will cost much more than merely the investment in the construction and maintenance of digital infrastructure. The more time researchers spend making their data open, the less time they will have to spend doing research.

“How do you guide people to structure data in a way that others can use it? There is enormous capability, for example, in the academic librarian community that knows how to do these sorts of things well.” - Brian Nosek, Co-founder and Executive Director of the Center for Open Science and Psychology Professor at the University of Virginia, from the 2025 State of Open Data Report

Institutions can make the difference in supporting researchers with preparing high-quality datasets. The report identifies librarians as enablers of metadata, standards and licensing. Such institutional support can help researchers make their data available and accessible, thus promoting data sharing adoption and compliance.

AI supporting data sharing: The importance of maintaining trust

Recognition of researchers’ efforts to share data would be a first step. The support of data specialists would be even better. Short of both, it seems that technology might soon fill some of the gaps.

In the 2025 State of Open Data survey, a quarter of respondents told us that they were using artificial intelligence to help them create metadata. That’s a promising sign, but with a warning. Although AI can be used to help researchers manage data, it can also help dishonest actors generate fake data. Any incentives to share data need to be developed in a way that they don’t reward bad behaviour.

“AI empowers researchers to make their data FAIR, but it also allows for the generation of fraudulent data. Credit systems should promote the former and deter the latter.”

One of the greatest benefits of open data is the insight that can be gained by combining many datasets together. If the authenticity of any one of these data cannot be trusted, the value of the whole is lost. It’s critical then, that we develop ways to validate trust in the data that are shared.

Explore the full State of Open Data 2025 report to learn more about researchers’ views on data sharing and for expert insights on related topics, from funder mandates to data sharing challenges, and from recognition to reproducibility.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Water Science: An open global home for the next wave of water research

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Jan 29 2026

If you work on water, the world needs your results faster, in front of more practitioners, and framed for real‑world decisions. That’s exactly where Water Science fits in and why it’s a compelling venue for your next submission.

Water Science, published by Springer, occupies a distinctive position within this landscape. Rather than sitting purely within theory or practice, the journal operates at the intersection of hydrology, engineering, environmental science, and socio‑economic analysis, reflecting how water research is increasingly practiced today.

Why this moment in water research demands a different kind of journal

  • Connecting Global Challenges with Regional Insight

    One of the defining strengths of Water Science is its ability to link global water challenges with regionally grounded research.

  • Water stress and extremes are rising

    The UN’s World Water Development Report 2025 underscores intensifying hydrological variability driven by glacier retreat, changing mountain “water towers,” and compounding risks for billions placing new demands on applied, decision‑ready science. 

  • Interdisciplinarity as a Core Identity

    In Water Science, interdisciplinary is a core editorial principle. The journal actively bridges surface and groundwater hydrology, hydraulic engineering, water quality, coastal systems, climate change, and water resource socio‑economics.

  • Methods are transforming

    Machine learning, explainable AI, and remote sensing are redefining how we forecast floods, manage basins, and monitor quality at scale especially in data‑scarce regions. 

  • Public health surveillance has broadened 
    Wastewater based epidemiology (WBE) matured during COVID 19 and continues to evolve as an early warning tool for pathogens and community health. 

  • Nature based solutions (NbS) are mainstreaming and maturing 
    From flood mitigation to stormwater quality, the field is moving from case studies to standardized performance evaluation and multi benefit accounting.

What makes Water Science distinctive

1) Truly open and free of charge 
Publishing in Water Science is open access with no APC (article processing charge), thanks to funding support. So, your work is immediately available to the world without fees to authors. Springer Nature also reports OA articles see higher downloads, citations, and policy/news attention, amplifying your reach. 

2) Anchored in a water‑scarcity epicentre with global reach 
The journal is sponsored and managed by Egypt’s National Water Research Center (NWRC) and partners with the Egyptian Knowledge Bank (EKB), which is a vantage point at the confluence of the Nile Basin, arid and semi‑arid hydrology, coastal deltas, and rapid urbanization. 

3) Scientists as Editorial Board 
Editorial leadership includes Prof. Alaa Abdelmotaleb (Editor‑in‑Chief, NWRC, Cairo) and a board spanning agencies, universities, and development organizations bridging applied and academic perspectives from MENA to North America and Europe. 

4) A home for integrative, basin‑to‑policy work 
From river basin planning and hydraulics to water quality, climate-hydro‑environment interactions, and water socio‑economics, the journal explicitly invites studies that turn process understanding into practical solutions. 

5) A Journal Aligned with the Future of Water Research 
As water research increasingly focuses on resilience, adaptation, and sustainability, Water Science continues to align itself with emerging global priorities 

The author’s experience 

  • Open access, no APC: publish free and maximize visibility. 
  • Clear article types: Original Articles and Reviews. 
  • Creative Commons licensing: CC BY or CC BY‑NC‑ND, with authors retaining copyright. 
  • Interdisciplinary fit: From hydraulics and morphology to socio‑economics and policy. 

What great submissions look like right now

  • Bridges methods to management (e.g., explainable ML models deployed in a river‑basin operations room, not just benchmarked on historical data). 
  • Quantifies uncertainty and transferability (especially for data‑scarce basins using transfer learning or physics‑informed approaches). 
  • Evaluates NbS at scale with standardized metrics and co‑benefits (flood retention, biodiversity, heat mitigation, O&M costs). 
  • Links water quality science to regulation with implementable monitoring/treatment and policy implications. 
  • Shows WBE delivering early warning with validation against clinical or environmental outcomes and practical guidance for utilities. 

Read the full submission guidelines 

Why Water Science

By combining APC‑free open access, a Global‑South–informed vantage, and an editorial community that spans research, agencies, and development practice, Water Science is tuned to the questions funders, utilities, and basin authorities are asking right now especially across arid and semi‑arid regions where solutions must scale under constraint. 

In a world defined by increasing water uncertainty, Water Science invites researchers to submit original research and reviews that offer interdisciplinary insight and real‑world applicability and advance applied and basic water research with clear pathways to practice and policy.

By publishing in Water Science, authors contribute to a global dialogue where science informs solutions and helps shape the future of water research. Ready to shape the field? Submit your manuscript via the journal homepage.

Exploring AI with research librarians at Charleston

T
The Link
By: undefined, Thu Jan 29 2026

Last month, along with several Springer Nature colleagues, I attended the 2025 Charleston Conference, the most anticipated and lively research library conference in the United States. Springer Nature staff included our Chief Publishing Officer, Harsh Jegadeesan, as well as Frank Vranken Peeters, Springer Nature’s CEO, demonstrating just how important the library community is to all of us. It also helps that Charleston is a lovely place to be in mid-Fall, as you can see by this photograph of Frank being interviewed on a gorgeous, sunny Fall Charleston afternoon.

And Harsh did more than merely attend, in fact, he moderated a session on AI in Action. I got to attend the session, and I was personally impressed by how Harsh interacted with the panelists. Here’s my take on how the session went.

AI in action: Perspectives and best practices for libraries’ evolving role

Session - AI in Action © Springer Nature 2026
The session took place on Thursday, November 6th, 2025, at the Gaillard Center. The speakers were:

  • Helen Bischoff, the Coordinator of Liaison Services at the University of Kentucky.
  • Jeehyun Davis, the University Librarian at American University
  • Evan Simpson, the Associate Dean of Experiential Learning & Academic Engagement at Northeastern University

The panel discussed how AI is reshaping research support, the responsibilities of librarians, and the ethical considerations that must guide implementation.

The conversation began with a critical question: What opportunities does AI deliver for libraries? Panelists agreed that AI tools are now embedded in nearly every aspect of research support, offering enormous potential to streamline workflows and improve efficiency. However, successful adoption requires clarity of purpose; institutions have to define specific use cases and align them with stakeholder priorities to ensure meaningful impact.

Speakers highlighted different institutional approaches. For example, the University of Kentucky Libraries adopts AI tools based on faculty needs and feedback, while American University’s Kogod School of Business has taken a pioneering step by integrating AI tools into its curriculum to support experimentation, applied learning and professional readiness. These examples highlight the importance of collaboration between libraries and academic departments in shaping AI strategies.

Helen Bischoff pointed out that ethical considerations have emerged as a central theme. Responsible implementation and clear policies are essential to prevent misuse and maintain academic integrity. The rise in integrity-related questions involving AI misuse has overwhelmed integrity offices, prompting calls for every professor to include an AI policy in their syllabus. 

Harsh's session: AI in action © Springer Nature 2026

Libraries, as trusted knowledge hubs, have a commitment to teach patrons how to use AI ethically and responsibly.

Another essential issue? Bias. The data that AI companies have used to train their systems on aren’t neutral, which can lead to discriminatory outcomes. Panelists stressed that addressing bias is a moral imperative. Libraries need to advocate fairness and inclusiveness in AI adoption.

Ultimately, the discussion emphasized that AI is not a panacea. It is a powerful tool, yet AI’s value depends on how institutions integrate it.

Perspectives on AI in scholarly communications

I’d also note that this session dovetailed nicely with Springer Nature’s recent report, “Perspectives on AI in Scholarly Communications,” which was actually the inspiration for the panel, and as such, covered many of the same topics. This report includes perspectives and case studies from key library staff members from around the world, as well as from Springer Nature experts working on AI. These include: 

  • Keith Webster, Dean of University Libraries and Director of Emerging and Integrative Media Initiatives, Carnegie Mellon University, US
  • Letícia Antunes Nogueira, Head of Section Resources & Digital Services, Norwegian University of Science & Technology Library, Norway
  • Dr. Santhosh KV, Deputy Director Research, Manipal Academy of Higher Education, India
  • Beth Montague-Hellen, Head of Library & Information Services, Francis Crick Institute, UK
  • Heather Devereaux, VP, AI Growth & Partnerships, Springer Nature
  • Chris Graf, Director of Research Integrity, Springer Nature
  • Henning Schoenenberger, VP Content Innovation, Springer Nature
  • Harald Wirsching, Executive VP Data & Analytics Solutions, Springer Nature

The report looks at a range of ways libraries are already dealing with AI and its impact on research, including new AI tools, ethical considerations, the library’s role in developing AI for research, and more.

AI-powered tools driving smarter information discovery

AI is helping with information discovery. Letícia Antunes Nogueira noted that students are already relying on AI for search, and Keith Webster’s team has deployed AI discovery tools like Keenious and Scite. On the Springer Nature side, we’ve developed products like AskAdis, an AI-chatbot enhancement to the AdisInsight drug discovery database, and Methods Muse, a platform that streamlines protocol design, implementation, validation, and optimization.

Proper AI use means putting ethical principles at the core, with both publishers and libraries playing pivotal roles in education and supporting researchers in using these tools. Springer Nature even has formal AI Principles of fairness, transparency, accountability, privacy, and minimizing harm in using AI. Henning Schoenenberger, VP of Content Innovation, says, “As a publisher, we are in a position to provide an infrastructure and services for researchers to create reliable content faster and more efficiently, while also providing guidance for best practice which sustains trust, integrity, and reputation in line with AI safety.”

Key to that, though, is keeping humans in the loop. AI assists humans but should never be used as a replacement for human intelligence.

Building an ethical AI future through library leadership
AI in Action - Event © Springer Nature 2026

“AI doesn’t change the mission of libraries, but it does change the environment where knowledge is produced,” Letícia Antunes Nogueira observes. Collaboration across the research ecosystem will be essential to ensuring that those changes go in the best direction. Stakeholders including research institutions, funders, publishers, and others can work towards common goals. AI can improve accessibility and inclusivity within research, but there’s still work to be done to develop the right tools, and to make sure we use them responsibly. 

So, what are the key takeaways? Responsible implementation is non-negotiable, ethical considerations are critical, and cross-stakeholder collaboration will be especially powerful. Research librarians have a central role to play, leading through experimentation, continuous learning, and effective stakeholder management. The future of libraries in the age of AI will be defined by proactive leadership, ethical stewardship, and a commitment to equity.

These questions, how we implement AI responsibly, how we collaborate effectively, and how libraries lead, are explored in depth in our latest perspectives report. It brings together voices from across the research ecosystem to share insights into what’s next.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

How digital labs enhance reproducibility and accelerate innovation

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Jan 27 2026

Reproducibility is an essential element of progress in life science R&D. When experiments deliver consistent results, research advances faster, resources are used efficiently and innovation thrives. This blog explores how digitalisation and advanced lab technologies are making reproducibility a standard feature of modern research. From structured data capture and electronic lab notebooks to automated workflows, discover how digital labs create reliable processes and accelerate discovery.

Reproducibility is at the heart of good science, but in a 2016 Nature survey, 52% of researchers highlighted a significant reproducibility challenge and over 70% shared experiences of replicating experiments from other teams. Today, reproducibility is still a major challenge and also carries a real environmental cost.

In life science R&D reproducibility is seen as a key advantage. Research that is clear, well-documented and easy to replicate allows teams to collaborate effectively, build on prior work and deliver results that inspire confidence. Practises such as open data, standardised reporting, and detailed methodologies strengthen research integrity while keeping outputs audit-ready and compliant with regulations.

“R&D labs should recognise that investing in dedicated resources and committing to reproducible research isn’t a cost, it’s a strategic choice. Reproducibility isn’t a luxury; it’s a long-term efficiency strategy that drives sustainability, credibility and savings for every lab.” - Emma Ganley, Director Strategic Initiatives, protocols.io

Digital solutions in labs make reproducibility routine

There are many causes for irreproducibility, some of which are cultural or systemic, like the incentive structure in academia. But there are also other issues that negatively impact reproducibility, such as poor or incomplete documentation, human or technical errors, and lack of sufficient control experiments. These can be addressed and solved with the right tools. In response, labs are increasingly turning to digital solutions. 

Technological advances are transforming how labs uphold reproducibility in science and research. Researchers can improve data integrity and accelerate progress in both academic and industrial settings by streamlining workflows and adopting digital tools. For large corporate R&D teams, smaller biotech firms, or any research-driven organisations, these innovations offer an opportunity to make reproducibility part of everyday workflows, making research faster, more scalable and more reliable. Digital lab tools and process standardisation such as structured data capture, electronic lab notebooks and automated workflows are central to the efforts to promote reproducibility.

Digital lab tools: Infrastructure to support reproducibility in R&D

Reliable protocols and standardised processes are essential for reproducible research. Digital labs are leading this transformation by combining advanced technologies with process automation to reduce variability and improve data integrity. They use a range of technologies to digitise, automate and connect lab work. Among the most impactful are structured data capture, electronic lab notebooks (ELNs), and automated workflows, key enablers that make reproducibility part of everyday operations. 

Viewed together, these technologies represent different stages of the digital lab journey. The three examples below illustrate how labs move from creating a reliable data foundation, to managing and enriching that data through ELNs, and finally leveraging it for automation and more advanced applications.

1. Structured data capture

Structured data capture is a key feature of digital labs that supports reproducibility. It is the foundation for all digital lab functionalities, because organised, standardised data is essential for automation and digital integration. Recording data in a standardised format ensures it is comprehensive, consistent, and easy to use. In the age of advanced analytics and AI, insights are only as good as the data that feeds these applications.

Structured data includes metadata, providing all the details needed to accurately reconstruct experiments. This standardisation also enables seamless integration across ELNs, LIMS, and automated workflows, improving traceability and reliability throughout the research process.

2. Digital platforms connecting data and documentation

Working within digital platforms like electronic lab notebooks (ELNs) and laboratory information management systems (LIMS) creates a transparent, organised record of experiments, reducing variability and making replication easier. ELNs allow researchers to log every step of an experiment, from planning and execution to results, in a structured, searchable format. Alongside them, laboratory information management systems (LIMS) help standardise, track, and organise data such as samples and inventory, ensuring accuracy and reliability. These systems reduce error and improve transparency.

Nowadays, many platforms combine the various capabilities and services of ELNs and LIMS, reducing the need for multiple systems, which makes digital lab adoption easier. The additional integration of protocol management and method tracking modules or involving standalone repositories for protocols and methods means that these digital platforms offer a unified approach to standardising, organising and sharing data. This supports collaboration, enhances reproducibility, and makes experiments easier to repeat across the research process.

3. Automated workflows

Automation is a cornerstone of the digital lab, especially in quality control environments where standardised protocols make automation easier and cost-effective. Automated processes streamline workflows, capture data directly and reduce human error such as omissions or transcription mistakes. This promotes consistency and transparency, enabling experiments to be repeated exactly and ensuring standardisation and reliability, even across multiple sites. At the cutting edge, fully automated labs take automation further by integrating robotics, AI, and advanced data systems to design, execute and analyse experiments autonomously, setting the stage for a new era of fully automated research.

“Digital labs are driving innovation today, making reproducibility routine! The value of integrated systems and platforms and how they support experimental reproducibility is already transforming how research is done.” - Robin Padilla, Director of Product Management, Springer Nature

Making reproducibility the foundation for innovation

Digital labs that rely on digital lab tools and standardisation procedures, including structured data capture, ELNs, and automated workflows, have a competitive advantage. With these tools, benefits like time saved on manual data entry, reduced reagent waste, and faster or easier data analyses will become standard, explains Robin Padilla, Director of Product Management at Springer Nature. “But the pace of change must be noted,” he reflects. “This digital transformation is much more evolution than revolution. Research labs are complex and the shift to digital labs is as much cultural as it is technological. Labs will look and operate very differently in the coming years, with far greater reproducibility as their foundation.”

As this evolution continues, the impact of digital labs is becoming increasingly tangible. Lab digitisation is a steady trend, and in corporate R&D, digital labs are already delivering real benefits. Reproducible results make experiments more reliable, reduce wasted resources, and make collaboration easier. With consistent, verifiable data, digital labs also help speed up innovation.

To realise these benefits at scale, organisations need reliable methods and data‑driven insight. Collaborating with Springer Nature can support reproducible and effective R&D. Springer Nature Experiments provides trusted methods and protocols to strengthen research workflows, while text and data mining (TDM) can reveal patterns and connections across large datasets, enabling deeper insights and supporting semantic analysis. More information is available at springernature.com/gp/rd.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts

Twenty years of eBooks: How libraries turned a quiet shift into a global revolution in digital access

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Jan 13 2026

I remember conversations in the early 2000s with librarians who had spent careers honing selection policies, comparing binding quality, and marking up catalog cards with near ritual precision. The move from shelf to screen didn’t feel profound at that moment, it was a new idea which came to fruition slowly. A trial purchase here, a small collection there, a cautious pilot to learn whether digital “books” would really serve students and researchers. Looking back, that idea reshaped access, to the point where eBooks have become foundational to how academic communities learn, teach and advance discovery.  

As we look back on "When the shelf went digital" and twenty years of eBooks collections, it’s worth pausing on what changed, why it worked and how libraries themselves, often unsung, made it possible.

The moment access outpaced inventory 

If you ask librarians what tipped the balance, many will point to a practical reality: students and researchers needed authoritative content faster than physical supply chains could deliver. eBooks changed the pace of access. What once required weeks of interlibrary loan or special ordering became minutes, authenticated, permanent and ready to annotate. The change was not just convenience, it was continuity. Collections could expand without adding shelves, and campus libraries could serve their communities wherever those communities were learning, on campus, on placement or across continents.  

When Springer’s eBook program launched in 2006, librarians began licensing curated collections across subject areas, and archives soon followed, digitizing decades of book content and making foundational texts discoverable at scale. That early curation mattered. For selectors accustomed to title by title scrutiny, collection reliability became the trust bridge. Year after year, comprehensive sets arrived on schedule, coverage deepened and metadata improved, reducing administrative burden while widening access to disciplines, many institutions previously covered only in part. Today, Springer Nature’s portfolio spans 260,000+ eBooks across STM and HSS with thousands added annually.  

The DRM‑free advantage for unlimited library access

A pivotal library benefit, often overlooked by non-librarians, was the shift to DRM-free, multiuser access. In practice, that meant fewer barriers: no simultaneous user caps, no opaque use limits and file formats designed for real research behavior (downloading, excerpting, citing and reading). For librarians, this removed friction from peak demand periods; seminar weeks, exam seasons, lab rotations, when dozens might need the same chapter at the same time.  

The policy was and remains simple: institutional licenses allow unlimited concurrent use, PDFs are DRM-free, and many titles include EPUB for accessible, reflowable reading. For libraries and research offices, that clarity matters as much as the content, because it turns “Will my patrons be blocked?” into “How can we best promote equitable access?” the question that truly drives service design. 

Accessibility as a core of scholarly communication

Accessibility has been a central priority for libraries for many years, and in 2025 it became further enshrined as a legal requirement. Springer Nature has likewise treated accessibility as a core responsibility long before the European Accessibility Act (EAA) came into force, investing in accessible formats, inclusive design, and readerfriendly digital experiences. With the EAA beginning enforcement on June 28, 2025, digital products, including eBooks, must now meet defined accessibility standards. In response, libraries, publishers and digital platforms are aligning with WCAG based practices to ensure that content is fully navigable by screen readers, correctly structured with semantic tagging, and supported by meaningful alternative text for images.  

For academic institutions, this shift affirms something librarians have long advocated: access must serve every reader. EPUB standards, accessible PDFs, and platform improvements are becoming part of baseline expectations, not special projects. That alignment with policy is not just compliance; it’s community stewardship, ensuring that students and researchers with print impairments can participate in scholarship without extraordinary effort or delay.

Editorial expertise and AI protect research integrity

As eBooks scaled, research integrity has remained central. All books, including monographs, reference works and contributed volumes, undergo editorial assessment, peer review and checks for references and originality. Springer Nature has invested in transparency and tooling to support editors and authors, from integrity training to automated checks that flag potential issues early.   

Recent innovations include AI-assisted quality checks that verify ethics statements, data availability and compliance before peer review, streamlining workflows while keeping human editors in control of final decisions. For librarians and research offices, the takeaway is simple: digital scale should not dilute rigor. The systems now embedded in editorial pipelines exist to ensure the content your communities rely on can be trusted.   

What libraries gained and what they taught us

Looking back, a few library-centered lessons stand out:

  • Selection shifted from scarcity to sufficiency: With curated collections, librarians could focus less on gatekeeping individual titles and more on aligning disciplines with curriculum and research priorities, then use usage analytics to refine holdings over time.   
  • Metadata became a service in its own right: MARC records, discoverability improvements, and stable identifiers turned collections into navigable ecosystems rather than static lists. Accessible catalog integration and reliable preservation partnerships are now expected features.  
  • Archives changed pedagogy: Digitizing backlists made “out of print” a historical concept, so faculty could assign seminal chapters, and students could trace ideas across decades without leaving the library platform.  

Perhaps most importantly, libraries modeled cultural change. They helped campuses embrace the idea that a book’s “place” is where the reader needs it, on any device, at any hour and that service quality is measured not by proximity to shelves but by continuity of access.

Why two centuries of scholarly publishing matter

Context helps. Springer’s book publishing heritage dates to 1842, evolving across journals, monographs, and reference works, and eventually to early online platforms like LINK (now Springer Nature Link). That long arc made the eBook transition less of a replacement and more of an integration: the format changed, but the function of scholarly books to connect ideas, synthesize evidence and teach complex concepts remained constant.   

For academic institutions, this continuity explains why books continue to complement articles. Journal literature often advances a single finding with precision; books interpret, frame and teach. eBooks didn’t shrink that role, they expanded their reach. 

The future of customizable scholarly book services

One emerging frontier is reader level customization, not in the sense of fragmenting books, but in aligning navigation and format with research tasks. Imagine assembling a course pack from chapters across multiple titles or enabling students to move seamlessly from summaries to full treatments as their understanding deepens. Many libraries already support this pedagogical flexibility with reserve systems; digital formats open new possibilities for transparent, rights aware compilation. As platforms and licensing mature, expect more options that match how researchers actually learn, while retaining the editorial coherence that gives books their enduring value. Today’s ecosystem already includes subject collections spanning STM and HSS, with interdisciplinary coverage built in.  

We are also in the process of streamlining and improving services for authors, ensuring our systems are integrated and that authors can easily see with one login, where they are in their journey towards book publication. Our goal is to deliver a fully transparent, end-to-end author portal that simplifies the process and makes authors’ lives easier. 

What twenty years of digital books have made possible

If the first decade of eBooks were about proving feasibility, the second was about scaling responsibly. The next will likely be about refinement, ensuring every learner can use content fully, every researcher can trust it and every librarian has the data, tools and terms to steward collections confidently.  

For everyone committed to scholarly communication, the true achievement isn’t the technology, it’s the people and the possibilities it enables. This milestone marks two decades of progress built on trust, accessibility and collaboration. It belongs to everyone who plays a role in the eBook publishing process, researchers, authors, reviewers, editors, librarians and our own teams. Together, we ensure that knowledge completes its journey, circulating from the research community to academic libraries and back again.  

When the Shelf Went Digital not only highlights some of the most memorable moments of the past 20 years, it shows how research has been at the heart of it all. From milestones driven by scientific progress, such as the discovery of a super earth in the habitable zone, to events that like the launch of Twitter (now X), that have reshaped perspectives and opened up new fields of study. Research has been a constant thread and as throughout our 180-year history, our books have documented these advances to aid learning and discovery.  

In 2026, we’ll share with you stories from early-adopter librarians who have been part of this journey, the views of authors whose books captured the events and breakthroughs that shaped recent history and the Springer Nature colleagues who are bringing these milestones to your screens. 

Let us know what you remember from "When the shelf went digital" and what you think will come next for academia and scholarly communication.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Publish your SDG research as a Springer Nature book

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Jan 7 2026

Your research related to the Sustainable Development Goals can impact policy and support efforts to achieve sustainable development. Publishing it as a book is one of the most impactful ways you can disseminate your insights and findings. In this post, Book Editors Sofia Costa and Éva Lőrinczi explain the benefits of publishing an SDG book and the advantages of publishing it open access and share some insight on what you can expect when you publish your SDG book with Springer Nature.

We’re well past the halfway mark toward the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) deadline, yet at the moment the Goals are not on track to be achieved by their 2030 deadline. However, commitment to the Goals remains strong. The 2025 Sustainable Development Report, the global assessment of countries' progress towards achieving the SDGs, reported that 190 out of 193 countries have presented national action plans for advancing sustainable development.  

Springer Nature is committed to supporting the SDGs. The SDGs provide a necessary framework to promote and work together towards sustainable development. And as a global academic publisher, a central contribution we can make is by publishing research related to the SDGs and amplifying it to reach far and wide, and serve to support the Goals and their targets.  

This research is essential to creating change. Reliable evidence is the basis of effective policymaking, and research on the SDGs impacts the Goals.  

Publishing and amplifying research that supports sustainable development

On the Springer Nature Sustainable Development Goals Programme hub you can browse a wealth of publications relating to the SDGs, along with other news and insights. Beyond this dedicated and evolving space, SDG publications are highlighted on Springer Nature’s platforms: from SDG badges for journals publishing extensively on the SDGs to SDG tags on Research Communities’ posts. And on Springer Nature Link, where you can access Springer Nature’s online collection of journals, eBooks, reference works, and protocols across a broad range of disciplines, you will find a dedicated search function for the SDGs, to filter your results by Goals.

Indeed, there are various publication options for SDG research at Springer Nature. Publishing your SDG research as a book is one of the most impactful ways you can disseminate your insights and findings relating to the Goals and their subject matters

"Books are a medium made for the SDGs, contributing to effectively addressing them, and even more so if published open access." 

Christina M. Brian, Vice President Books, and a member of the Springer Nature SDG Steering Group 

Why publish your SDG research as a book?

The SDGs cover an array of interconnected, complex challenges facing humanity. Which is why research on the SDGs can benefit from being published as a book, a medium that has the breadth and scope to cover such topic.

A book has the span to hold the in-depth overview required to holistically address issues relating to the SDGs. It offers the freedom to combine theoretical frameworks with practical insights, creating a resource that can meaningfully impact discourse and practice. 

By offering accessible, in-depth insights and practical guidance, often supported by real-world analyses and examples, books on the SDGs are especially relevant for policymakers and practitioners. This format is often more widely distributed and trusted, and can support policy development over time.

Open access books deliver real impact on the SDGs 

Books covering SDG research and published open access (OA) contribute to effectively addressing the SDGs. OA gives these books enhanced visibility and accessibility, which means that their findings and recommendations can be harnessed for actionable strategies on the SDGs.

OA books have 2.4 times more citations, 10 times more downloads, and 10 times more online mentions than non-OA books on average. They also have a more geographically diverse readership, reaching on average 61% more countries than non-OA books, most of which are underrepresented in global scholarship.

You can find more support for publishing an OA book with the OAPEN Open Access Books Toolkit, which offers a wealth of information to give you clarity and depth on OA books publishing.

“Springer Nature’s Sustainable Development Goals Series has developed into the most comprehensive research library on the SDGs. The inherently transdisciplinary nature of the SDGs is well reflected in the series, with its broad remit and contributions welcome from scientists, academics, policymakers, and researchers.” 

Rachael Ballard, Editorial Director, Palgrave Macmillan and Zachary Romano, Senior Publishing Editor, Springer 

The Sustainable Development Goals Series: A home for your SDG book 

A book series dedicated to the SDGs is a natural home for your SDG book. Springer Nature’s Sustainable Development Goals Series is just that: A series of books focused on interdisciplinary, policy-relevant research related to the SDGs.

When you publish your work in the Sustainable Development Goals Series, it enjoys an exceptionally broad reach to readership interested in the SDGs, well beyond your own discipline. Published alongside SDG-related research in a dedicated series increases its credibility and impact.

Because the Sustainable Development Goals Series intends to share research that is not only academically rigorous but also policy-relevant, your work stands to achieve real-world impact and generate engagement with audiences that can use it and rely on it.

You can choose to publish your book open access in the Sustainable Development Goals Series, which makes perfect sense because this format is made of SDG research. It means that anyone, anywhere can access your book in support of the SDGs.  

Things to consider when planning your SDG book 

Here are some recommendations for things to consider for your SDG book:

  1. Consider your audience and write effectively: Keep in mind the broader audience you want to reach, specifically policymakers and practitioners. Including a summary of key points for practitioners in each chapter or throughout the book could be particularly appealing to these readers.  
  2. Align with the SDG framework: Use or reference the language and indicators used in the SDGs to create affinity and clearly reflect relevance to the Goals.  
  3. Emphasise interconnectedness: Recognise the interaction between the various Goals, as well as potential synergies or incompatibilities when pursuing certain policies.  
  4. Implementation and long-term outlook: Consider strategies for implementation of recommendations or suggestions, possible contextual challenges, and potentially evolving priorities.  
  5. Consider publishing your book open access: Open access can make a huge difference, with 61% more countries reached and a sriking increase in access and visibility. Open access books have 2.4 times more citations, 10 times more downloads, and 10 times more online mentions than non-OA books on average. Funding may be available from your organisation or a government group. Get help with funding. 
  6. Consider publishing in a book series: Being part of a book series from a Springer Nature imprint such as Springer or Palgrave Macmillan gets your book the attention it deserves

For general information on the book publishing process, explore this detailed step-by-step guide.

Learn more about publishing a book with Springer Nature, including a step-by-step guide to walk you through the entire book publication journey. And once you’re ready, share your idea with a publishing editor.

Related content: 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest!

What is a citation diversity statement?

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Thu Dec 18 2025

At Springer Nature, our commitment to excellence in science remains central to all we do. The quality of the science conducted is the most important factor in determining which content we publish.   

Scientific evidence (Yang et al., 2022; Hofstra et al., 2020) demonstrates that research drawing on a broad spectrum of perspectives and experiences is strongly associated with more novel insights, more innovative results and greater impact.  A citation diversity statement encourages authors to do just that – acting as a reminder to look anew at their underlying research and to expand their references rather than relying only on sources with which they are most familiar. We know that when citation practices concentrate on the same authors, institutions and regions, the result is in many instances, a skewed perspective that does not accurately reflect the breadth and state of a field of research.

For this reason, we allow authors to include along with their manuscript a citation diversity statement. This is purely optional and does not affect the evaluation of their research.

A citation diversity statement is a nudge that can help authors capture recent innovations, discoveries and breakthroughs, differing viewpoints and methods, and contributions from varying disciplines and regions. This encourages, though it does not require, authors to broaden the lens through which their research is undertaken. Literature that is more comprehensive and balanced can be of greater usefulness to readers and to science.

Citation diversity statements are not about quotas or identity. Rather, they are focused on helping to ensure a more rigorous scientific method and a more complete scientific record – a fuller picture. When new papers engage with the breadth of scientific understanding, including orthogonal views or contrary findings, everyone benefits. 

Science advances in part due to a researcher’s openness to new information and their engagement with as much relevant research as is available. When research encompasses a fuller scope of available literature, irrespective of what is familiar, scientists build a stronger foundation for future discoveries.


References:

  • Hofstra, B., Kulkarni, V. V., Munoz-Najar Galvez, S., He, B., Jurafsky, D., & McFarland, D. A. (2020). The diversity–innovation paradox in science. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 117(17), 9284–9291. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.191537811
  • Yang, Y., Tian, T. Y., Woodruff, T. K., Jones, B. F., & Uzzi, B. (2022). Gender-diverse teams produce more novel and higher-impact scientific ideas. PNAS Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America, 119(36), 1–8. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.2200841119

Digital twins in R&D: Bridging the GAP between simulation and experimentation

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Dec 16 2025

Over 50 years ago, Apollo 13’s safe return relied on simulators, a precursor to what we now call digital twins. Today, these virtual replicas are transforming R&D by bridging simulation and real-world experimentation. In this post, we explore how digital twins accelerate innovation, improve reproducibility and support decision-making. We’ll hear from Victor Richet, Nuclear Engineer at Assystem, on how this technology is shaping processes in one of the most complex and regulated industries.

The Apollo 13 mission faced a life-threatening crisis when its main engine was damaged. Engineers relied on simulators to model scenarios and guide the astronauts safely back to Earth, a pioneering glimpse into what we now call digital twins. Fast forward to today, and this concept has evolved into a powerful tool reshaping research and development across industries. But what makes digital twins powerful?

Digital twins are virtual representations of physical systems, processes or objects, continuously updated with real-time data. They act as a dynamic bridge between simulation and experimentation, enabling researchers and engineers to predict outcomes, optimise designs, and make informed decisions before committing to costly physical trials. By integrating AI and automation, digital twins create standardised environments that improve reproducibility, accelerate innovation and reduce time-to-market.

Their impact is particularly significant in sectors where precision, safety and compliance are non-negotiable, such as nuclear engineering. Here, the stakes are high, and experimentation is expensive and heavily regulated. Digital twins can help minimize risk, streamline workflows and support compliance with stringent safety standards while improving efficiency.

To understand how this technology is being applied in one of the most challenging engineering environments, we spoke with Victor Richet, Nuclear Engineer and Head of Digital at Assystem. In the conversation that follows, Victor shares how digital twins are transforming R&D in the nuclear industry, the benefits and limitations of this approach, and what the future holds for this technology.

How does Assystem define a digital twin in the context of its work, and what prompted you to adopt this technology?

Digital twins are a model which is fed with data in order to provide added value to processes. Our processes in the nuclear industry aren’t as up-to-date as those in, say, the automotive sector, which has fewer regulatory barriers and faster iteration. Our industry is heavily regulated for reasons of safety, and this makes us less agile in the adoption of new methods. Assystem were one of the industry’s first movers in the digital twin space as we recognised the huge scope this technology has to offer. Our mission is to accelerate the energy transition throughout the world and digital twin technologies play a major part in this, they advance digital transformation by addressing challenges throughout the full life-cycle of complex systems.

Digital twins are often described as the bridge between simulation and experimentation. How do you see that playing out in practice at Assystem?

At Assystem, digital twins aren’t just virtual simulations. They are digital ecosystems that integrate simulation tools, real-world data, and life-cycle management into one collaborative environment. In the specific case of nuclear engineering, the cost of experimenting is huge compared with other industries. Digital twin technologies aren’t a replacement for experiments, but they do reduce trial and error, they’re a way of increasing the likelihood of getting things right the first time.

How do you validate your digital twin models to ensure confidence in their predictions?

We run extensive test case processes to ensure the data provided by digital twin models is relevant and accurate. A good illustration of this is a project we carried out in the South of France to redesign a decommissioned nuclear facility. It involved moving potentially contaminated flows and irradiated materials out of the facility to be treated elsewhere and establishing temporary barriers, all in a seamless process. There are specific regulatory constraints which the safety authority issues for rooms in a nuclear facility, depending on the amount of radioactivity, red, orange or green zones. To complete this project, a 2D digital twin of the facility was built so that we could quickly, efficiently and reliably know where a barrier should be established, and what the radioactive zones of the rooms we then created would be. We validated the digital twin early in its development by comparing its results with the engineers’ calculations.

How do AI and machine learning enhance the predictive power and adaptability of your digital twin models?

The use of AI in the nuclear industry is still limited due to its probabilistic nature, precision and explicability are strict requirements for the safety authorities. Nevertheless, putting safety-related applications aside, there are several ways to use AI within the framework of digital twins. It’s mainly used to generate synthetic datasets and produce expected outputs, these don’t of course constitute proofs, but they are key insights for the early stages of the twin’s development. In a nutshell, we can generate synthetic data for a test case, use AI to simulate a wide range of results, and identify any key flaws in the twin.

When we’re developing and refining our digital twin models, access to trusted research and scientific data is absolutely crucial. The nuclear industry is not the most advanced, so there’s a strong consensus that it would benefit heavily from research conducted in other industries.

What measurable impact have digital twins had on your R&D process?

Digital twins have had a significant impact on our R&D process. They’ve contributed to reduced time to market and improved reproducibility by making processes more consistent and traceable. They’re also enabling us to achieve traceability and improve the quality of our experiments, which are long and extremely expensive.

Can you share an example of how collaboration with academia or industry partners has helped refine your digital twin models?

At Assystem we collaborate a lot with academia. Our partnership with the prestigious French School of Engineering IMT Mines Alès is a good example of this. In 2019 we set up a five-year R&D programme together dedicated to Model-Based Systems Engineering (MBSE), to refine and establish common methodologies (a ‘grammar’) for nuclear modelling systems. This model-based approach facilitates the handling of complex and stringent requirements in critical infrastructure projects, ultimately forming the basis for the use of digital twins industry-wide.

What are the biggest challenges in integrating digital twins in the R&D process, and what have you learned from this?

Surprisingly, the biggest challenges we’ve seen are not related to technology. Regulation, complexity, high cost and long timelines means there aren’t as many projects per year in nuclear as there are in other industries. Change management and the ability to integrate existing engineering processes is therefore the biggest challenge.

Secondly, nuclear is still a heavily siloed industry by discipline. You need seamless access to quality data, but as soon as you bridge silos is where difficulties arise.

There are three things we learned about the successful adoption of digital twins in our processes. Sponsorship and endorsement are critical; you need strong support to navigate the high-level safety requirements and regulatory barriers we face. It’s also crucial to have a clear vision of what you want to achieve, and what this would unlock in quantifiable terms.

Lastly, there’s no magic wand. With digital twins there’s no ‘plug-and-play’. Every project has different requirements, so you need to align your vision, resources (such as data and subject matter experts) and sponsorship, not to mention regulatory pathways and change management plans.

Where do you see digital twin technology heading in the next 3–5 years for R&D?

Digital twins will become more prevalent, regardless of industry. In nuclear the experiments are long, inefficient and expensive, so there will be a gradual increase in their relevance in the design process. For instance, the digital twin for the last generation of Advanced Modular Reactors (AMR) should facilitate the TRL evolution management and the move from First of a kind to Nth of a Kind. On another side, Digital twin will facilitate the simulation acceleration through the concept of PINN Physic Informed Neural Network. In a nutshell, there won’t be a digital twin revolution, this will happen gradually - all journeys start with a single step.

For those looking to adopt digital twin technologies, my advice would be to start small and ensure you have your sponsorship in place, being overly ambitious can increase the risk of failure and lead to significant cost. There are also a wide range of actors involved in the digital twin journey. The most successful projects I’ve seen have resulted from the efficient collaboration of stakeholders all working in their own area of expertise, whether that’s engineers, facility operators, solution providers or tools integrators. Digital twins are like a puzzle, everything and everyone, has to be in the right place.

Digital twins bridging simulation and experimentation

As Victor emphasized, adopting digital twin technology is a progressive journey that thrives on clear objectives, strong sponsorship and collaboration across disciplines. In highly regulated industries such as nuclear engineering, these virtual models can deliver substantial value by helping enhance reproducibility, accelerate design cycles and support informed decision-making.

The benefits for R&D are significant: streamlined timelines, improved traceability, and greater confidence in experimental outcomes. Assystem’s experience shows that success comes from starting with focused goals, aligning resources effectively and building partnerships with academia and industry experts to realise the full potential of this technology.

For those ready to explore digital twins further and strengthen research workflows, access to trusted methods and protocols is essential. Springer Nature Experiments offers a comprehensive portfolio of reliable resources to support innovation and reproducibility. Text and data mining (TDM) can also help by revealing patterns and connections across large research datasets, enabling deeper insights, identifying relationships and supporting semantic analysis. You can also discover more about the rise of digital twins and their growing role in sectors from healthcare to advanced engineering.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts

Are we entering a new renaissance in innovation, one grounded in responsibility and collaboration? Reflections on the 2025 Innovation Tournament

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Thu Dec 11 2025

Discover how Springer Nature’s 2025 Innovation Tournament celebrates curiosity, collaboration, and people-first ideas shaping the future of research.

Springer Nature’s Innovation Tournament is more than an annual initiative; it is a reflection of our culture. Now in its sixth year, it’s an employee-led initiative that invites staff across the globe to showcase their innovations that improve how we work, support researchers, and serve our communities. It offers a moment to step back and consider: What does innovation look like when it is driven by curiosity, collaboration, and the needs of our communities and colleagues?  

At this year’s finals, keynote speaker and guest judge, Jude Pullen1, helped frame the tournament’s broader significance. His talk invited jury members and finalists to consider: Are we living through a new Renaissance? The keynote at finals is designed to spark reflection and connect our innovation efforts to a wider context. Drawing on historical parallels, he reminded us that true innovation stems not just from technology, but from human insight and curiosity - as well as our proximity to other industries which may seem tangential, but in time, unlock new potential. The Renaissance was an era defined by exploration, learning, and cross-disciplinary thinking. Our Innovation Tournament showcases how creativity and collaboration can lead to meaningful change. It’s a reminder that innovation is not just about new tools, but equally about new ways of seeing and solving.   

What began as a small initiative has grown into a global event within Springer Nature for sharing ideas, solving problems, and celebrating creativity. In 2025, we received over 100 entries representing a strong range of ideas: from responsible AI tools that enhance editorial workflows while supporting, not replacing, the expertise of our colleagues and researchers to grassroots initiatives that promote wellbeing, and process improvements that save time and resources. 

Amongst the winners this year were projects that exemplify our people-first approach. One introduced a live chat function via WeChat to support open access authors in China, meeting researchers where they are, on platforms they already use. Another improved accessibility by offering a cleaner, more intuitive reading view. These innovations are practical, people-first solutions developed from a deep understanding of researchers and community needs.   

What continues to stand out is the breadth of ideas; from the bold and transformative to the small but powerful in their impact. That’s why we recently introduced the Little Gem Award, to recognise those clever, often quiet innovations that make a real difference. These are the kinds of ideas that improve workflows, enhance user experience, or help us make better use our content. They might not grab headlines, but they are no less important.  

Innovation, at its core, is about engagement with people, ideas and challenges. It begins with listening to the needs of our communities, users, and colleagues, and responding with solutions that resonate. When we innovate with purpose, we strengthen our role as a trusted source of knowledge and deepen our connection with the communities we serve.   

The Innovation Tournament is more than a showcase, it is a signal that innovation is everyone’s business, and that every contribution counts. It brings Springer Nature’s promise to life: with us, you can develop your curiosity, stretch your horizons, and be yourself. The tournament creates space for experimentation, encourages new thinking, and supports colleagues to grow. And, of course, not every idea can win, and that is okay. Innovation is a process of exploration and learning. 

As the research landscape continues to evolve, so too must the ways in which knowledge is discovered, accessed, used and built upon. Keeping pace with change means thoughtfully exploring new technologies and innovation where they can add value, while staying close to the people we serve and the problems they are trying to solve.  

So, are we in a new Renaissance? The signs are promising and what is clear is that we’re in a moment of opportunity. And if the 2025 Innovation Tournament is any indication, Springer Nature is well-positioned to meet it with creativity, insight, and a shared commitment to advancing discovery and serving our communities.  

--> Check out the highlights from our finals of the Innovation Tournament 2025 here 

Footnotes

1. Jude Pullen is a Creative Technologist and Prototyping Expert. He is a chartered engineer, and a featured inventor on BBC2’s Big Life Fix, is passionate about inclusive design, and helping companies shape their futures through design thinking, and novel use of technologies. His work includes medical, consumer goods, toys, automotive, education. He has worked with NHS, Dyson, Sugru, RS Group, IKEA, NVIDIA, LEGO. For more information visit: https://www.judepullen.com/

Related Tags:

Publishing with purpose: How quartile three and four journals support research in lower- and middle-income countries

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Dec 5 2025

All validated, peer-reviewed research contributes to science even if the journal it appears in “doesn’t rank highly” in citation metrics. This can be especially true when the research comes from, or applies to, situations in lower- and middle-income countries (LMICs). This type of research might not be “buzzy” enough to generate outsized citation counts, but it really matters. That’s where journals — especially open access (OA) ones like BMC’s AIDS Research and Therapy — shine. Journals like these are platforms for the kinds of important, sometimes incremental, research that makes a difference but might not make a flash.

Why citation “rank” does not equal “importance”

A recent Springer Nature white paper, Demonstrating Journal Value Beyond Rankings, looked at the value that journals ranking in the third or fourth quartile (Q3/Q4 journals) by citations bring to the communities they serve. The white paper includes cases studies, and one of those case studies looked at the BMC journal, AIDS Research and Therapy.

To talk about this, and get some more context on that case study, I recently had the chance to catch up with AIDS Research and Therapy’s Editor-in-Chief, Dr. Barbara Castelnuovo, about how her journal does this. Born and trained in Italy, Dr. Castelnuovo now carries out research on AIDS and HIV, and treats patients in Uganda.

AIDS Research and Therapy, by “traditional citation measures,” ranks in the third or fourth quartile. Yet the research it publishes helps save lives on the ground in places like Uganda and other LMICs. For example, over the last two years, the journal has published important work on injectable antiretroviral therapy (ART) in LMICs. Says Dr. Castelnuovo, “[I]njectable ART from LMIC, particularly aimed to address patient preferences… is a very important topic as we advocate for access to injectable drugs.”

Serving research communities — regardless of size

Because a journal like AIDS Research and Therapy focuses on one specific topic, it, almost by definition, can’t earn the same scale of citation numbers that a broader-scope journal (like one publishing research broadly on all pathology-causing viruses) can. And because the work published here — and in journals of similar scope — gets used in the field by practitioners (who don’t in turn publish and cite), looking only at citation rankings can mask these journals’ true importance.

In the case study, Dr. Castelnuovo noted that, “A lot of data that comes out of Africa will be a single case study, with limited population sizes… But when there are 20 published [articles] showing differentiated service delivery is working well, then you can have countries or organisations adopting these practices.”

AIDS Research and Therapy serves a smaller, but critical, community which is itself more concentrated in LMICs. And as part of bigger OA imprint dedicated to serving these communities, a journal like this can offer more waivers so researchers from LMICs can publish OA. Dr. Castelnuovo told me:

I like to think our journal gives an opportunity for studies that cannot be published in journal[s] with very high impact factors but still provide very important information for clinicians and program managers… [S]cientists from LMIC[s] can request waivers for publication fees. This is a service that we provide because they will not otherwise have opportunities to publish their work [OA]… While research from LMICs may not always provide ground-breaking information, it is very relevant for those working in LMIC settings, where [the] majority of people living with HIV live. 

Publishing essential research

AIDS Research and Therapy is just one example of the important service these quartile three/quartile four journals provide to global research. Springer Nature recently published a white paper Demonstrating Journal Value Beyond Rankings, that goes into more depth and looks at journals across disciplines. (Dr. Castelnuovo contributed a case study for this white paper.)

Find out more in the white paper: Demonstrating Journal Value Beyond Rankings.

Related content

On the occasion of Human Rights Day

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Dec 4 2025

There’s a cliché that says: It’s darkest before the dawn. Each year on 10 December, we commemorate the anniversary of the 1948 Universal Declaration of Human Rights. Today, 77 years later, this year’s Human Rights Day theme is, “Our Everyday Essentials.” And Springer Nature, as part of our focus on the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), actively supports researchers working directly on these issues.

The theme of this year’s Human Rights Day shows how human rights shape our daily lives. Human rights are far from abstract ideas but are essential elements of our everyday lives.

The 2025 Human Rights Day

The UN proclaimed the Universal Declaration of Human Rights on December 10th, 1948 — just three years after the end of World War II — and we celebrate Human Rights Day on the anniversary of that day each year. On this 77th anniversary, the theme of “Our Everyday Essentials” spotlights that human rights are positive, essential and attainable. In times of growing conflict and divided societies, “Our Everyday Essentials” seeks to reconnect people with human rights and bridge “the gap between human rights principles and everyday experiences”. The aims of this year’s Human Rights Day are threefold and strive to

  1. Strengthen the understanding of human rights, 
  2. Engage people to advocate for human rights, and
  3. Inspire and encourage individual and collective action.

The Intersection of Human Rights Day and SDG 16: Peace, Justice, and Strong Institutions 

The preamble of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights sets out that “recognition of the inherent dignity and of the equal and inalienable rights of all members of the human family is the foundation of freedom, justice and peace in the world”. This makes promoting human rights an inherent part of the Sustainable Development Goals’ (SDGs’) agenda, especially SDG 16. SDG 16 is dedicated to the promotion of peace, justice, and strong institutions.

Springer Nature’s Human Rights Portfolio

The researchers we work with (from across disciplines), and the work they publish with us, cover the whole range of research into human rights protection, tying directly into Human Rights Day 2025’s themes. Springer Nature’s portfolio reflects the importance and tangible nature of human rights. Some examples of the books we have published — some of which you will also find on this page —include research on (1) contemporary challenges to human rights, (2) foundations of human rights law and theory, (3) human rights in (everyday) practice and (4) regional human rights regimes.

In times of growing conflict and societies marked by divisions, our titles explore solution strategies to these contemporary Challenges to Human Rights from a scientific and often interdisciplinary lens. Titles include: 

Foundations of Human Rights Law and Theory: This theme covers titles that offer foundational texts on human rights. Our titles cover conceptual approaches and philosophical aspects of human rights as well as legal institutions at the international level. Titles include:

Human Rights in (Everyday) Practice: Central to this year’s theme, our titles address human rights in (everyday) practice and spotlight the protection of specific human rights. Our titles span a wide range of human rights, including children’s rights, minority rights, participatory rights, and rights vis-à-vis the environment.

Regional Human Rights Regimes: Protecting human rights requires strong legal institutions. Our titles explore the protection of human rights not only at the international level but also spotlight regional protection regimes. Titles include:

You’ll also find even more essential research in Springer Nature’s ongoing book series, including: 

as well as in the journals we publish, for example:

Add your voice to Springer Nature’s Human Rights programme

The work that human rights researchers publish with Springer Nature are part of the efforts to create a better day. Editors from across Springer Nature have curated human rights-related research on a dedicated hub, which I invite you to explore.

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019
Here you’ll also read about how you can work with our editors to publish your research, too. Partner with a publisher that is committed to amplifying SDG research— we would look forward to working with you.


Explore human rights-related publications and more on our dedicated hub.

Related content: 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source!

Research integrity audits - the routine check-up for journals

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Wed Dec 3 2025

Every year, millions of us take our vehicles for an annual check-up, and that check-up is far more than just a mechanic kicking the tyres and asking us whether we’ve heard any funny noises.  Not only do we not want to break down on a motorway, we want to catch problems early, before they turn into bigger issues (and bigger bills). That requires a comprehensive service that looks at all parts of the machine. And this applies whether we are talking about a racing bike that offers transport to a few, or a mighty double-decker bus that carries thousands every day.     

The same principle of taking a careful look at how things are running is true when it comes to research integrity and our journals.  Last year we established our Assurance team, an audit team within the Springer Nature Research Integrity Group (SN RIG) that reviews how research integrity-related policies and procedures are applied across journals.  SN RIG Assurance audits are independent from the teams being audited, they are modelled on methods used by SN Internal Audit team, and they're designed to provide a strong layer of accountability.  Our audits benchmark against internal policies and industry standards such as COPE.  They assess the submission to publication process, including editorial and collection management, and aim to reduce research integrity risks, identify areas for improvement and share best practice.      

Case Study: Cureus Journal of Medical Science

One of Assurance’s first projects was a four-month audit of the Cureus Journal of Medical Science (Cureus JMS). Springer Nature acquired Cureus in late 2022, recognising its potential to expand open access, peer-reviewed research, in particular clinical case reports, and support improved health outcomes globally. Cureus JMS follows a unique publishing model that helps researchers from underserved communities to publish their findings rapidly in a freely accessible format and allows approved institutions to showcase research through Academic Channels that are fully overseen by Cureus JMS’ independent editors.

As a relatively recent acquisition, we decided that it would be a good place to begin our work. The audit reviewed a representative sample of published Cureus JMS articles from 2023 to 2024, including both Academic Channel and non-Channel content. We examined submission processes, peer review management, editorial oversight and channel management to identify gaps and opportunities for improvement. To ensure that our work was reliable and accurately represented the journal, we used a sample size large enough to provide 95% confidence in our findings, giving us strong evidence to guide recommendations. In agreement with Cureus JMS, we then undertook an audit of an even larger sample to provide us with an 99.9% confidence in our findings, which supported the same findings and recommendations.

Findings and improvements: From Tune-up to Upgrade

The audit confirmed that Cureus JMS operates with robust controls and effectively safeguards research integrity in the vast majority of cases. These controls include: 

  • rigorous single-blind peer review by at least two independent reviewers 
  • strong editorial oversight throughout the publishing process 
  • established systems that effectively mitigate research integrity risks.

However, much like a mechanic's full service, we identified opportunities to fine-tune performace, and Cureus JMS was receptive to our recommendations. 

Clarifying Processes and Strengthening Transparency

The audit highlighted opportunities to make Cureus JMS’ processes clearer for authors, reviewers, and Channel staff—particularly around declarations for ethics, informed consent, and conflict of interest disclosures. While authors were prompted to submit declarations during the submission process, we occasionally found them to be incorrect or missing. Cureus JMS acted quickly by refining author guidelines, improving submission workflows to capture accurate disclosures, and strengthening training for editors and Academic Channel teams.

Addressing Misconceptions

One important finding was that some terminology used by Cureus JMS - in relation to Academic Channels ‘article adviser’ roles - could lead to misconceptions about rigour and bias. Channel processes were found to be robust and, to remove any ambiguity, Cureus JMS publicly clarified:

  • Channel operations:  Each submission is managed by an independent Cureus JMS editor, who oversees peer review using vetted reviewers. Safeguards are in place to prevent Channel members from accessing manuscripts and influencing decisions.
  • Channel roles: Channel Admins manage the channel homepage. Curators, who are specialists in their field, perform an initial screening for scope, language, and formatting before manuscripts enter formal peer review.
  • Adviser roles: Authors can invite peers for feedback while their manuscript undergoes independent peer review. This advisory input is separate from the formal peer review process, which remains managed by Cureus JMS editors and conducted by vetted reviewers.

These refinements, alongside enhanced training, reinforce Cureus JMS’ strong foundation and commitment to transparency.

Strengthening Channel Governance

Academic Channels allow institutions to showcase research with added visibility. All content published through Channels undergoes independent peer review managed by Cureus JMS editors, who retain final publication decisions.

Assurance recommended additional vetting for institutions and Channel staff prior to participation, and committing these checks to written guidance documents, so that vetting would be consistently accurate. Cureus JMS acted promptly and created internal guidance that includes up-to-date integrity checks. Today, all institutions and Channel staff are verified against integrity checks, and Cureus JMS maintains oversight of Channel conduct and content.

Looking Ahead

Research integrity is not a one-time effort — it’s a continuous journey. Like regular check-ups keep vehicles safe, audits help journals run smoothly and reliably. By working collaboratively and transparently, we help journals like Cureus JMS strengthen their processes and continue to uphold high standards. This reflects Springer Nature’s broader approach: investing in technology and expert teams, harnessing new AI and other tools, and continually evolving. At the heart of this is a focus on building and maintaining trust—through openness and working together.

Learn more about our research integrity work here.


Insights from USRAC with David Rosowsky on research and innovation

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Dec 2 2025

As the research ecosystem undergoes rapid transformation, from the rise of AI to the push for open science, institutions and publishers are rethinking how knowledge is created, shared and valued. This blog features insights from David Rosowsky, Senior Advisor to the President at Arizona State University and member of Springer Nature’s US Research Advisory Council (USRAC), as he explores how AI is reshaping scholarly communication, the importance of rebuilding public trust and the role of early career researchers in leading change toward a more inclusive and innovative research future.

The pace of change in the global research landscape is accelerating, driven by technological breakthroughs, shifting funding models and a growing demand for openness and accountability. Against this backdrop, academic institutions and publishers are rethinking their roles in shaping the future of science. At the heart of this transformation is a renewed focus on collaboration, innovation and trust.

Springer Nature’s US Research Advisory Council (USRAC), launched in 2021, was created to foster dialogue between publishers and key stakeholders across the research ecosystem, including funders, institutions, policymakers, scholarly societies, and early career researchers. The council provides a platform to share perspectives on research culture and the societal impact of science, helping Springer Nature align its publishing activities with the evolving priorities of the academic community.

David Rosowsky, Senior Advisor to the President at Arizona State University and a member of USRAC, brings a unique perspective to these challenges. His reflections build on themes explored in recent blogs on The Link, such as the growing role of open science in reshaping research culture and the urgent need to rebuild public trust in science. From transparency in peer review to empowering early career researchers, these blogs have spotlighted how institutions and publishers can work together to foster a more inclusive and impactful research ecosystem. In this interview, Rosowsky adds his voice to that conversation, sharing insights on AI, innovation and the future of scholarly communication.

What’s your role at Arizona State University?

I serve as Senior Advisor to President Michael Crow and as Senior Fellow in the University Design Institute (UDI) at ASU. As senior advisor, I assist the president in visioning and planning for several enterprise-level design and implementation strategies. This is a fascinating role and opportunity for me, at this stage in my career, to be part of a truly remarkable institution. In addition to getting to work with a remarkable university president and his leadership team, helping to vision and build an ever more innovative and impactful “New American University,” I am here at a time of great challenge and change for higher education. In my role at ASU, I am leveraging all of my experience as a faculty member, researcher, department head, dean, provost, and VPR. Being at ASU also provides a unique and powerful platform from which I continue to write and speak about higher U.S. higher education.

What led you to join USRAC, and what’s your experience been like?

I was invited to join and was quickly compelled by the opportunity to join other university leaders in advising and perhaps guiding one of the world’s leading scientific publishers as they, too, evolve vision and strategies for a rapidly changing world. This includes how to work most effectively in partnership with research institutions and researchers, but also how respond responsibly to political and technological shifts affecting both the conduct of research and the dissemination of new knowledge. I am impressed to see Springer-Nature getting out in front of the real challenges that lie ahead for researchers, research institutions, and the broader scientific community. My experience to-date (my first year on the USRAC) has been wonderful. My thinking has evolved, my views have expanded, and my professional network has grown thanks to this opportunity to serve as a member of the USRAC.

The latest USRAC theme explored AI and open science. What impact are you seeing on research practice?

The introduction of AI is a once-in-a-lifetime phenomenon, one that is quickly impacting (and will forever alter) the entire scientific research landscape. Everything from the conduct of research to the dissemination of results to grant-writing to information/data access and even the once human-only endeavors of discovery and innovation are being upended. This is something to celebrate and be excited about, not to be resisted or feared. What an exciting time. Open science is the future, and it’s here. And scientific communication will be radically different in this new world of AI and open science.

What challenges do researchers face today, and how can institutions help?

Researchers are understandably nervous about securing the resources they need, now more than ever. There is considerable uncertainty and angst. Universities will not be able to make up the projected decline in federal support for research. Neither will philanthropy or the private sector (business). Institutions will need to approach the expected new reality from both sides: (1) assist researchers and research teams in identifying sources of support (traditional and new) and putting the best proposals forward, and (2) adjusting performance expectations and Review, Promotion, and Tenure (RPT) requirements to reflect the radically altered federal funding opportunity space. Other policies and practices that may require changes include those around university-industry partnerships, priority placed on (and support for) IP and tech transfer activities, and acknowledging the new vectors for scientific communication beyond the peer-reviewed journal article that can and should be counted in RPT decisions.

What inspires you about the future of research, and how can early career researchers and publishers help shape it?

Everything inspires me! I am a science geek first and foremost. I get excited every time I see a new technology, and new gadget, or a new discovery. And my brain quickly goes to “what does this make it possible to achieve NOW or NEXT?”. But we have serious work to do. First, we need to rebuild some very important relationships with the broader public. Whether it’s science, research, universities, or higher education broadly, all have lost public trust and confidence. So, while we all figure out how to continue to drive research and discovery in a changed world, we also must commit to restoring public trust and public support.

Our newest researchers are the ones who will show their colleagues not only the newest technologies and techniques, but also the newest ways of sharing both excitement and the findings from their work. They are also going to be explorers, pioneers and first-adopters in leveraging new sources of funding and new partnerships to conduct their research.

Great publishers, those that are both forward-looking (seeing changes on the horizon for their industry and for the scientific communities that support them) and genuinely committed to the success of faculty and researchers, can help respond to all the issues I mentioned above. I am honored to be part of the USRAC and, I hope, helping to make these partnerships happen, succeed, and matter.

P_David Rosowsky_140x140 px © Springer Nature 2025
About David Rosowsky

David Rosowsky is Senior Advisor to the President at Arizona State University, Senior Fellow at the University Design Institute, and Foundation Professor in the Ira A. Fulton Schools of Engineering. With over 20 years in senior leadership roles, including Provost at the University of Vermont, Vice President for Research at Kansas State University, and Dean of Engineering at Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, he brings deep expertise in institutional strategy, research innovation, and academic leadership.

As a frequent speaker and writer, Rosowsky focuses on topics such as higher education governance, change management, research strategy, public university transformation and the future of scholarly publishing. His work has been featured in Forbes, The Chronicle of Higher Education, Inside Higher Ed, and AGB Trusteeship magazine.


Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Four Things to Know about Springer Nature's New Preprint Policy

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Nov 28 2025

This article was originally published in 2019 and was last updated in November 2025.

Preprints are known to provide a number of benefits for the research community and that is why their usage and sharing is rapidly growing in the field; from getting community feedback on your work as a researcher, enabling you to claim priority for a discovery to granting you with free and speedy access to research findings.

At Springer Nature we always supported preprint sharing in our imprints, and now we are pushing the envelope even further to make it easier for researchers and the community to use and share preprints by introducing a new unified policy across all Springer Nature journals.

Here are the four essential things to know about our new policy:


You can choose the license you prefer for your preprint: We support all varieties of licenses for preprints including Creative Commons (CC) licenses. The type of CC-license chosen will affect how the preprint may be shared and reused. More information to help guide licensing choices can be found in these resource documents developed by an ASAPbio licensing taskforce.


You should cite preprints as per scholarly norms for citation: Preprints may be cited in the reference list of articles under consideration at Springer Nature journals, as shown here;  Babichev, S. A., Ries, J. & Lvovsky, A. I. Quantum scissors: teleportation of single-mode optical states by means of a nonlocal single photon. Preprint at http://arxiv.org/abs/quant-ph/0208066 (2002).


You can submit your preprint to any legal preprint sharing platform of your choice: Publishing your research manuscript on a preprint server will not affect the way your article is handled when it is submitted: Posting of preprints of research manuscripts is not considered prior publication and will not jeopardize consideration at Springer Nature journals. Furthermore, research manuscripts posted on preprint servers will not be taken into account when determining the advance provided by a research study under consideration at a Springer Nature journal.


You are free to respond or clarify if the media ask you questions about a preprint manuscript: We advise you to be clear with journalists that preprints are not peer reviewed so the claims made in the research manuscript are provisional and may change. Researchers should also be aware that media coverage of preprint material may reduce or pre-empt coverage by other media at the time of publication.


Preprints are a great way to share your research early and get feedback from the community. Start sharing and track your manuscript’s review progress with our In Review service.

Solving complex problems in logistics and transportation with Operations Research

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon Nov 24 2025

Operations Research is a field focused on solving complex, real-world problems using analytical methods. From transportation and logistics to healthcare and supply chains, its applications are wide-ranging and increasingly important. This blog introduces Springer Nature’s new Operations Research eBook collection and explores how it supports teaching, research and professional practice across disciplines.

Operations Research helps industries manage complexity and make smarter decisions. It’s especially valuable in logistics, transportation, supply chains, manufacturing and energy, fields where systems are interconnected and data-driven decisions matter. Also known as Management Science, it uses analytical methods and modelling to solve real-world problems, from pricing and financial planning to healthcare and disaster response. It’s also central to business education: around 30% of Springer Nature’s Operations Research portfolio includes professional books used in MBA case studies, and 11% are textbooks used in core curricula.

As its relevance grows, Operations Research is gaining fresh attention. Springer Nature’s new eBook collection brings together content from business, mathematics, computer science and engineering, making it one of the most interdisciplinary resources available. We spoke with editorial directors William Achauer and Christian Rauscher about the thinking behind the collection and why it’s a timely resource for academic libraries, research offices and corporate teams.

What motivated the launch of the Operations Research eBook collection and who is it for?

Operations Research is a core sub-discipline within Springer Nature’s business and management publishing portfolio. The decision to launch a dedicated eBook collection was driven by the success of the broader business and management collection and the opportunity to serve a growing audience focused on quantitative, data-driven approaches. With contributions from applied mathematics, computer science and engineering, the collection is highly interdisciplinary and reflects the expanding relevance of Operations Research across sectors.

This collection is designed for a wide range of users: researchers in business, logistics, supply chain management, analytics, economics (especially Game Theory), applied mathematics and engineering; professionals working in industries such as healthcare, manufacturing, sports and tourism; and students studying these disciplines. It supports both academic inquiry and practical application, making it a valuable resource for institutions and individuals alike.

Which research areas and expert contributors shape the Operations Research eBook collection?

The Operations Research eBook collection covers a wide range of research areas, including industrial production, logistics, routing and scheduling, supply chain management, multicriteria decision making, game theory and the management of large complex systems. It also explores cutting-edge topics such as artificial intelligence, big data, distributed ledger technology, smart grids, and adaptive systems, reflecting the latest trends in both research and industry.

The collection features contributions from leading experts in the field, including:

  • Frederick Hillier (Stanford), founding editor of the flagship series ISORMS
  • Michel Gendreau (Montreal), current ISORMS editor and top-cited scholar in operations research
  • Grazia Speranza (Brescia), former president of EURO
  • Panos Pardalos (Florida), EURO Gold Medal winner
  • Dmitry Ivanov (Berlin), co-author of Global Supply Chain and Operations Management
  • Gilbert Laporte (Montreal), Order of Canada recipient and one of Canada’s most influential management researchers

Together, these contributors help shape a collection that is both academically rigorous and practically relevant.

Which subject areas are closely related to Operations Research and why do they matter?

Operations Research overlaps significantly with applied mathematics, computer science and engineering, disciplines that provide the analytical and technical foundation for its models and methods. These connections enable the development of tools for optimization, decision-making and systems analysis across industries.

Its interdisciplinary nature also links it to several other subject areas. Research into the fields of production, logistics and supply chain can be expanded by the Springer Nature Business & Management eBook collection, applied science has crossovers with the Mathematics collection, the field of big data analytics is also covered by the Computer Science collection, industrial management is an interdisciplinary field within Mechanical Engineering and game theory, financial management and investment and distributed ledger technology (DLT) are also part of the Economics & Finance collection.

These crossovers make Operations Research a powerful framework for tackling complex challenges across academic and professional domains.

What content will the first books in the Operations Research eBook collection cover?

The initial titles in this new eBook collection bring together core works from the business and management program, alongside key contributions from applied mathematics, computer science and engineering. The content reflects the breadth of the field, with applications in mobility, retail, healthcare management, disaster response and more.

Covering nearly every product category, from SpringerBriefs and Palgrave Pivots to monographs, proceedings and textbooks, the collection supports undergraduate, graduate and advanced learning, as well as professional practice through case studies and applied research. As William Achauer, Editorial Director for eBooks in Operations Research, notes:

“Springer Nature is the leading publisher of Operations Research, both in terms of journals and in books. This eBook collection represents the largest set of contributions of methods, cases, and applications in Operations Research there is on the planet.”

This collection offers a unique opportunity to access high-quality, interdisciplinary content that supports teaching, research and innovation. To explore the full scope of the Operations Research eBook collection or to discuss how it can enhance your library’s offerings, visit the collection or get in touch.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

How SDG research drives policy: A special report

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon Nov 24 2025

The Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) have become a powerful lens through which we understand and address society’s most urgent challenges. SDG research has grown faster than the broader research market, with SDG-related articles currently accounting for almost 25% of all research published. But does SDG research have impact beyond academia?

A new Springer Nature report, titled From publications to policy: the impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals, explores how SDG research is cited in policy. It draws on more than 19 million policy documents, and offers a new perspective on the relationship between science and real-world decision-making.  

The results are encouraging, as Ritu Dhand, Springer Nature’s Chief Scientific Officer, tells us. 

What is the significance of the Sustainable Development Goals and how much published research is related to one of the 17 SDGs?

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019
The SDGs address some of our biggest global societal challenges - these include public health, climate change, renewable energy, environmental protection, economic growth, and societal inequality. All of these were already active areas of academic research long before the introduction of the SDGs in 2015. The Goals provide a common framework for researchers, funders, policymakers, and institutions to measure progress and to demonstrate the real-world impact of research. Nearly one quarter of all published research is related to the SDGs, and this area is expanding at a faster pace than the overall research landscape. Indeed, in 2024 over 1.2M articles contributing to resolving our global societal challenges were published - an increase of ~1000% since 2000.

Is SDG research used and cited more than non-SDG research? 

Yes, our own publishing data, as outlined in the report, shows that SDG-related research is used, cited, and downloaded more, especially when published open access. In other words, SDG research demonstrates higher academic impact. This trend reflects the global relevance and urgency of SDG topics such as health, climate, and social development, which attract significant scholarly engagement and visibility.  

Recent research from Springer Nature has also shown that a majority of researchers would like “public good” to be taken into account in assessments of their research contributions, in terms of the effect of their work on society, the economy, or global challenges more broadly. 

What about the impact of SDG research beyond academia?

When we consider research impact we usually think article citations and journal impact factors, however surely the highest measure of research is when it is seen to have societal impact and lead to new policy measures. The UN’s 2030 Agenda also calls for science to inform policy and deliver societal outcomes, but, until now, there has been limited evidence showing how published research is actually taken up in policy. The report from publications to policy, published in partnership with Overton, is groundbreaking, focusing on how research is being used. 

And the results are encouraging! Academic research is cited in SDG-related policy more often than in wider policy, and we see think tanks, Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs), and Intergovernmental Organisations (IGOs) playing an important role in bridging the gap between research and policy. This is significant, because it can be challenging for research to find its way into policy. In this light, we are more than proud of our SDG journals when >50% of the published articles are directly addressing one or more of the UN Sustainable Development Goals.

"This new report offers a new perspective on the relationship between science and real-world decision-making. The results are encouraging: Academic research is cited in SDG-related policy more often than in wider policy.” 

You mentioned that when SDG research is published open access, it is used, cited, and downloaded more. Can you elaborate on the role of open access with regard to the SDGs?

Publishing open access makes research accessible to anyone, anywhere. Open access supports the UN 2030 Agenda by ensuring that knowledge essential to sustainable development is accessible, reusable, and actionable. It removes barriers to knowledge, increasing visibility.  

The report shows that SDG-related research is more likely to be published open access and that open access articles are more likely to be cited, with a higher average number of policy citations. Our findings indicate that the visibility and reach of SDG research in policy is amplified when published open access. 

Findings from the report show that other editorial models influence SDG policy impact. What’s the story there?

I’ve just touched on the role open access plays, but we see that other factors play a role too. For instance, inclusive journals play a critical role in advancing the Goals. As the report shows, from a sample of 100,000 articles from Springer Nature’s journals, inclusive journal articles received slightly more SDG policy citations than comparative selective journal articles. This is a notable finding, as it suggests that while selective journals are more highly cited in academia than inclusive journals, they are not necessarily more influential in policy. 

We also saw that policy documents cite a high proportion of non-primary research content, including reviews, letters, and news, indicating that summaries and syntheses are valued in policymaking.

The report discusses the underrepresentation of research from the Global South. What is the issue and which factors have contributed to it?

Indeed, a major challenge is the underrepresentation of research from the Global South and low- and middle-income countries (LMICs) in policy, even within their own domestic contexts. Most SDG-related policy documents in these regions rely heavily on research from high-income countries, particularly the US and UK, while South-to-South knowledge exchange remains minimal.  

This imbalance reflects structural barriers such as limited visibility of Southern research, linguistic divides, and systemic inequalities in global publishing systems. As a result, policies often lack contextually relevant evidence, reducing their effectiveness in addressing local priorities and lived realities. 

How can Springer Nature work to strengthen the research-policy connection for the SDGs and address some of the recommendations from the report?

We are actively working to strengthen the research-to-policy connection by expanding open access publishing, supporting inclusive journals, and commissioning content such as reviews that policymakers value.  

We also invest in training, widening geographic representation to amplify research from the Global South, and partnerships with think tanks, NGOs, and IGOs.  

Through initiatives like the Science for a Sustainable Future event series, Springer Nature brings together policymakers and researchers to foster collaboration and ensure that evidence-based science informs decisions aligned with the UN’s 2030 Agenda. 

And from the side of researchers, how can they help their research inform policy decisions? 

Researchers can improve the chances of their work influencing policy by focusing on accessibility, inclusivity, and relevance.  

The report shows that open access significantly accelerates and amplifies policy impact, with open access articles cited in SDG-related policy both sooner and more frequently than non-open access articles. Inclusive journals are cited in policy at similar or even higher rates than selective journals, making them a valuable route for impact.  

Policymakers also favour synthesised and accessible formats, such as reviews, commentaries, and summaries, over lengthy primary research. Finally, building partnerships with knowledge brokers such as think tanks, NGOs, and IGOs can help bridge the gap between research and decision-making, ensuring evidence is translated into actionable policy.

Read the report: From publications to policy: the impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals

Ritu Dhand © springernature 2023
Ritu Dhand, Chief Scientific Officer, Springer Nature

Ritu Dhand is responsible for championing our editors, focusing on promoting and driving external editorial excellence, in partnership with all the journal publishers across Springer and BMC journals.

Before taking on the role of Chief Scientific Officer in January 2022, Ritu served as VP Nature Editorial, overseeing editorial strategy and management of Nature, Nature Communications, and the Nature Research and Review Journals.

Ritu holds a PhD in cancer research from University College, London.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source!

Dos and don’ts of AI for social media

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Nov 20 2025

AI tools make it easy to generate content, and you can use this content to talk about your research on social media. However, the tricky part about using these tools (including ChatGPT, Copilot, Gemini, and others) is that while they offer opportunities, they also have potential pitfalls. They’ll help you say more in less time; but without investing time in checking, editing, and adding your own authentic voice, you won’t get the attention you’re looking for.    

In this blog, we’ll talk about some of the best ways to use AI on social media, including how to make sure you keep that authentic voice, how to avoid posting AI hallucinations, and more. 

Common AI tools 

First, which AI tools are researchers using? As part of an ongoing effort to understand researchers’ needs, Springer Nature recently surveyed researchers on the AI tools that they’re using in their work. Although that survey focused on the tools researchers use in finding and consuming information, you would also use those same tools to create social media content about your work.  

The survey found that the tools researchers use include some of the most known and common ones, including: 

  • ChatGPT (OpenAI)  
  • DeepSeek  
  • Gemini (Google)  
  • Copilot (Microsoft, but which runs on OpenAI’s models)  
  • Perplexity  
  • Claude (Anthropic) 

Most of these are generative, however Perplexity is more of a search engine, and also provides an AI-enhanced web browser. (There are more AI-enhanced browsers coming on the market, but they’re not aimed at generating content.)   

They all generally work in a similar way, with an easy-to-use interface where you can ask the system what you want it to generate for you. These “prompts” can range from the very simple to rather detailed; but the more detailed your prompt, the more likely you are to get the output you’re looking for.   

(It is also worth noting that some social media platforms are building their own AI tools directly on their platforms, as well.)   

The tools listed here are most frequently thought of as generating text, but they can also generate images. And there are some others, not listed here (including Sora), that specialise in generating video. The best practice suggestions we’ll discuss will generally apply across all of them.   

AI best practices   

All of the best practices come down to, and derive from, trust and authenticity. The most important piece is to make sure that what you post is factually true and accurate, talks about your research correctly, avoids bias, and is authentically your voice. Doing this relies both on careful prompting, as well as checking, editing, and revising the output before you post it.   

Even so, these tools will save time and help generate new ideas. You can: Ask AI for inspiration as to what to post; upload your work into tools like Copilot or ChatGPT and ask it to generate draft posts for you; write your thoughts about your work in your own voice, and then upload that, and ask these tools to generate “remixes” to give you more to post. And, you can include character limits in your prompts — so you can tell the AI to keep its outputs to limited character counts, which is helpful when generating material for microblogging sites like BlueSky or Mastodon (these sites similar to platform X).   

One additional note: You should also edit out words that AI commonly uses that could flag your posts as AI — words like, “unlock,” “delve,” “leverage.” You can also keep your eyes open to words you frequently see online from possible AI-generated material, and keep a list of these. You can actually include, in your prompts, instructions that the tool you’re using should avoid those words.  

You can also train some of these tools on your voice so that its initial output sounds more like you, but you should still edit it before you post. And that’s to say nothing about checking it over for accuracy, to make sure you’re not posting inaccurate or misleading AI-generated information, and to follow the guidelines for responsible AI use. (You should also follow some general safety guidelines. These would include prioritizing human well-being and dignity, editing the output for bias, and being accountable for what you post.) But the key step comes after that, and that’s to edit these outputs to add your own individual voice — to make it yours, and to make it have a better chance at standing out.   

How to get started

Of course, the best practices and advice for using social media that we’ve discussed in past blog posts still apply here. Just that using these tools can help give you inspiration, can help you get a volume of material to post with less effort, and can help you get the word out about your research. It’s just one more puzzle piece to getting your work the attention it deserves. 

And remember to check out the previous blogs in this series:    

Related Content

From publications to policy

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Thu Nov 20 2025

This is an extract from Springer Nature's new report: From publications to policy: the impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals. 

Created in partnership in Overton, the study analyses over 12 millon documents to offer the most comprehensive picture yet of how academic research is influencing real-world policy tied to the Goals. 

Here, Ritu Dhand and Nicola Jones from Springer Nature introduce the report and what it set out to achieve. 

The UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) have become a powerful lens through which we understand and address society’s most urgent challenges and they now make up 24% of all published research. The issues they address – public health, climate change, renewable energy, environmental protection, economic growth, and societal inequality – were already active areas of academic research long before the introduction of the SDGs in 2015. Recent research from Springer Nature has also shown that a majority of researchers would like “public good” to be taken into account in assessments of their research contributions, in terms of the effect of their work on society, the economy, or global challenges more broadly.1 The Goals provide a common framework for researchers, funders, policymakers, and institutions to measure progress and to demonstrate the real-world impact of research. 

At Springer Nature, we see this reflected in our own publishing data. SDG research has grown faster than the broader research market and is more likely to be used, cited, and downloaded, especially when published open access (OA). But the real question is, what impact does SDG research have beyond academia? While the UN’s 2030 Agenda calls for science to inform policy and deliver societal outcomes, there has been, until now, a paucity of evidence showing how published research is actually taken up in policy.

That brings us to this latest report, published in partnership with Overton, the world’s largest policy document database. Drawing on more than 12.3 million policy documents published between 2015 and 2025, it explores where, when, and how SDG research is cited in policy, offering a new perspective on the relationship between science and real-world decision-making. This is groundbreaking: while previous studies of the SDGs have considered what an individual research output is about, this study focuses on how research is being used, “on the ground”, to support evidence, justify recommendations, or shape policy directions. 

The results are encouraging: academic research is cited in SDG-related policy more often than in wider policy, and in particular, we can see think tanks, Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs), and Intergovernmental Organizations (IGOs) playing an important role in bridging the gap between research and policy. 

This is significant, because we know that policymakers are not – nor should they be expected to be – research experts. It can, therefore, be challenging for research to find its way into policy.3 By understanding the types of research that policymakers cite, we can begin to understand the role that we as publishers play in facilitating greater knowledge exchange. 

The report also lays out challenges that require our attention. Research from high-income countries in the Global North makes up the majority of worldwide policy citations. Meanwhile, research from low- and middle-income countries (LMICs) in the Global South is less likely to be cited in domestic policy and is also often excluded from the international conversation – aligned with previous findings that development research is dominated by authors from the Global North, even when focused on Global South settings.4 In addition, few countries examined in the Global South cite each other’s research, highlighting a gap in South-to-South knowledge exchange. This gap risks creating an evidence base for global policy that overlooks the knowledge, priorities, and lived realities of the communities most affected by the SDGs. 

As publishers, we have a responsibility to help address this imbalance, collaborating with stakeholders from across the research ecosystem – libraries, institutions, funders, and researchers – to ensure that contextually relevant research is visible, accessible, and actionable. That means supporting journals that value foundational and rigorous science over selectivity (inclusive journals), widening OA options, investing in editor and researcher training to reduce bias, and experimenting with different content formats, as well as working with partners to make research policy-ready so that decision-makers can engage with it effectively. 

This report is both a snapshot of progress and a call to action. With 2030 fast approaching, we must collectively do more to ensure that research not only aligns with the SDGs but also extends beyond research communities, to reach the people and places where it can make a real difference. 

Footnotes

1. Springer Nature. (2025, April). The state of research assessment: Researcher perspectives on evaluation practices. https://stories.springernature.com/state-of-research-assessment/index.html

2. United Nations. (2015). Transforming our world: The 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development. https://sdgs.un.org/2030agenda

3. Pearson, H. (2024, December 4). Science could solve some of the world’s biggest problems. Why aren’t governments using it? Nature, 636, 26–30. https://www.nature.com/articles/d41586-024-03906-0

4. Liverpool, L. (2021, September 17). Researchers from global south under-represented in development research. Naturehttps://www.nature.com/articles/d41586-021-02549-9

Related Tags:

Trust in science and media in the age of AI

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Wed Nov 19 2025

In an era of rapid technological change and information overload, trust in science and media is facing unprecedented challenges. AI brings powerful tools for discovery and communication, but it can also be used by some for distortion. Responsible communication means preserving context, verifying claims before amplification, and being transparent about limitations. It is a shared responsibility across publishers, journalists, and readers.

At this year’s Frankfurt Bookfair, Joyce Lorigan, Group Head of Corporate Affairs at Springer Nature, and Daniel Lingenhoehl, Editor-in-Chief at Spektrum der Wissenschaft, shared their perspectives on combating false narratives and maintaining public trust in the context of science communication. Below is a summary of the key discussion points made during this session.

Thank you both for joining us today. To begin with, can you tell us a bit about how the increase in social media and usage of AI tools has impacted the spread of misinformation over the past few years? 

Joyce: Perhaps for some context: Nearly two-thirds of people worldwide (63%) say they struggle to distinguish trustworthy media from deceptive sources (Edelman Trust Barometer 2025). I also heard earlier this week at the Book Fair that in the US, 60% feel that science is influenced by government, corporates or the self-interest of scientists. We see that trust in the information people are reading is under immense pressure. Deepfakes and misinformation can now circulate at lightning speed, making it harder for people to verify facts. The sheer volume of content and the sophistication of AI-driven tools mean misinformation can look extremely convincing and spread widely before it’s challenged.

Daniel: Fake News isn’t new, but as Joyce pointed out, the scale and speed are. Social media combined with AI has made it a lot easier to spread misinformation. While 60% of Germans think they can spot fake news, 80% don't check whether posts are true. We’ve even seen very sophisticated attacks, such as the “Doppelgänger website”, when whole websites were faked including Spektrum and Spiegel, among others, to spread misinformation. Luckily, it was removed, and the outreach was neglectable, but it is concerning, nonetheless.

This is a fast-paced changing landscape, as you say. So, from your experience, what can media outlets and publishers do to counter misinformation?

Joyce: At Springer Nature, we invest significantly in talented people and sophisticated AI tools to detect and then stop integrity issues in research. Since 2021, we have invested over 650 million euros in various technologies, including those with a focus on research integrity, and with the help of tools like these, we can detect problematic submissions more quickly and accurately. We are committed to ensuring that this statistic stays as low as possible. This is made more difficult by fraudulent actors in the system trying to manipulate research for their own gain. They too have advanced AI tools, and so we always have to stay one step ahead. This means constant investment and also sharing, where we are able, our learnings with or publishing peers such as via our collaborations with the STM Integrity Hub, to address these challenges together. Most recently Springer Nature donated a unique AI tool that identifies problematic text to the publishing community via this collaboration. Beyond safeguarding integrity, we work to make science accessible. We organize policy events such as our event series Science on the Spree, host regular media briefings where researchers can explain findings to policymakers, media and the general public, and work collaboratively with organisations such as the Science Media Centre. These efforts help ensure responsible science communication via clear, transparent engagement.

Daniel: Media education must start in schools. As media, we need to be where readers are, build trust, and explain facts repeatedly: how science works, where uncertainties lie, and why questioning is part of progress. Many people don’t know that scientific questioning of specific aspects of climate change or vaccines does not mean that the general science beyond that has been wrong. Similarly, we have to demystify AI: how it works, its benefits, biases, and risks. Enlightened people are harder to mislead, so constant engagement and transparency are key. 

You touched upon this aspect of incorporating the community, which raises the point around responsible communication, and the role you play in ensuring accuracy. How do you both address this and perhaps engage with your communities when it comes to supporting responsible communication? 

Joyce: As a publisher, we are the digital custodian of scientific research that dates back to the 17th century. We hold a huge library that is constantly being updated to ensure that it reflects the most recent editorial comments. This is a huge responsibility that we don’t take lightly. To keep pace with the continuous growth in articles and to maintain high-quality levels in publishing, the use of AI offers a huge opportunity – to help editors find peer reviewers, for example, streamline workflows, and make research more discoverable. All of this is done with a human at the helm. Our colleagues are highly skilled, highly educated and very passionate, purpose driven individuals – and we are lucky to have them. They are united in the desire to accelerate discovery and help find solutions to the world’s biggest problems. They are also very connected to their communities, and this extends to the online world. We have, for example, over 40 discipline focused Research Communities providing a platform for researchers and research-interested communities around the world to connect, generate discussions and explore research findings that matter to them. Circling back to how AI helps us in our work; we continue to invest in a number of AI tools that help advance discovery and protect the integrity and trust of research, underscoring our commitment to rigour and excellence. We’re also about to pilot AI driven summaries of research that can be added to the top of a piece of research. These are AI generated but signed off by the author and are designed to be easily understood so that the research is more accessible to others.

Daniel: Science journalism continues to be highly trusted, in part because of its close-knit, expert-driven community and the quality of its journalists. One of Spektrum’s unique values is scientists writing about what they know best, reinforcing credibility. Most of our editors have a degree in natural sciences and a profound knowledge of the things they report about, and many Nobel laureates have written for us. On top of that, both Spektrum and Springer Nature are active on social media, a vital tool for engagement and community-building, but one that also requires careful oversight. To build trust among readers Spektrum regularly invites subscribers to come and visit us, so that people can directly talk to editors. We go to events and talk about science, the media and society. And we promote our people with a specific expertise e.g. on climate change, AI or health issues as trusted sources. We are not an anonymous mass, but real people with profound knowledge. At the end of the day, however, we are people and mistakes happen. To build trust, we not only correct these but make the process transparent. At Spektrum we do this through remarks underneath an affected article. Because of the great community we have, readers detect mistakes or misleading interpretations pretty fast, which allows us to react fast too.

Thank you both for your insights - any final thoughts or comments?

Joyce: Transparency is key in science communication in the age of AI across publishers and the media. In today’s fast-moving digital environment, the relationship between science and journalism is more crucial than ever. Essentially, it’s on all of us to collaborate as publishers, journalists, scientists, and readers to maintain a healthy and trustworthy information ecosystem.

Daniel: I couldn’t agree more. I have great faith and hope in the active role of readers and communities. Challenge your reading behaviour, thought produces – check back on trusted sources before commenting, engaging or spreading misinformation. Challenge misinformation when you see it - and always be careful with viral content.

Ensuring this level of transparency, especially when AI tools are involved, remains a central challenge. These important topics of Trust and Science Integrity in the Age of AI were further discussed at Falling Walls by Alice Henchley, Director of Communications, Integrity, Ethics and Editorial Policy at Springer Nature, and Chris Graf, Director of Research Integrity at Springer Nature. Find out more about these panels here: AI Age & Trust: Ethics and Perspectives for Scicomm and Science Integrity in the Age of Artificial Intelligence.



Exploring AI futures in libraries with the Futurescape Workshop community

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Nov 18 2025

Following my reflections from ALA 2025, where the evolving role of librarians in research management took centre stage, I recently had the opportunity to explore another frontier shaping our profession: artificial intelligence. At the Futurescape Libraries AI Workshop hosted by Carnegie Mellon University, librarians from across North America gathered to critically examine how AI might reshape discovery, access and trust in scholarly information. This column builds on the themes of partnership and proactive engagement I discussed previously, turning our attention to how librarians can help steer AI development toward values-driven outcomes.

In September, I attended the Futurescape Libraries AI Workshop under the auspices of the Association of Research Libraries (ARL) and the Coalition for Networked Information (CNI) in Pittsburgh. The workshop was grounded in the newly released toolkit designed to walk librarians through an exploration of the AI scenarios released by ARL and CNI in June 2024. There’s a lot of speculation and debate about AI right now. The workshop offered a welcome chance to dig deeper than the headlines and reconnect with fellow librarians. It gave us space to think critically about the range of possible futures ahead. We also explored what we, as librarians, can do to support each other, our patrons, and our institutions in preparing for those futures, both the promising and the challenging ones.

If you’re not familiar with the scenarios, I encourage you to check them out for yourselves, but I will summarize them briefly here (paraphrasing from the report):

  • Scenario 1: Democratized and Socially Integrated AI, where the key players in government, industry, and education have come together to develop a robust and equitable framework for responsibly integrating the benefits of AI into all aspects of human society;
  • Scenario 2: Consumer-Oriented AI Focused on Education and Entertainment, where large technology companies lead the field of AI development and focus on profitable direct-to-consumer applications;
  • Scenario 3: Laissez-Faire AI, where widespread adoption of AI and an absence of functional regulation result in an erosion of trustworthy information, amplification of bias, and deliberate manipulation by bad actors;
  • Scenario 4: Autonomous AI, where the scarcity and rising cost of human expertise leads key players to focus on developing AI to operate independently from human input, creating a world in which the benefits of AI are realized by ceding human agency.

Exploring the cone of possibilities for AI in libraries

As we were reminded at the beginning of the workshop: the purpose of these scenarios is not to predict which one will become our future reality, but to help us explore the “cone of possibilities” and identify the levers in our current reality that we can push on to try to steer away from the worst outcomes and towards the better ones. 

“For me, this open-ended and values-oriented approach to thinking about AI was a welcome tonic to the frequent hype and presentism that can dominate social media conversations about the wide range of technologies that are shoehorned under the capacious (and sometimes misleading) AI label.” 

And I found that my fellow attendees, who came from a wide range of libraries around North America, had a lot of insight to share about the challenges libraries are already facing as a result of new AI technologies, but also some of the excellent opportunities it offers us.

How AI is reshaping discovery in academic libraries

Interestingly, a lot of the challenges and opportunities AI brings to libraries seem to center around discovery. On the plus side, AI tools are getting really good at describing large digital archive collections. That means researchers, students and the public can access materials that were previously hard to find. Projects like the “Exploring Computational Description” at the Library of Congress and Yale’s “Digital Collections AI” show how fast these human-in-the-loop tools are improving. On the other, AI is being used to generate mediocre and, frequently, misleading content in volumes that threaten to swamp our human capacity for evaluation and curation. 

This use of AI poses a special problem for scholarly publishers as well, and Springer Nature is actively investing in (and sharing with the publishing community) AI tools to help identify and counter the rise of AI-driven misinformation in the scholarly publishing ecosystem.”

In fact, one of my big takeaways from this workshop was that there is already significant agreement between scholarly publishers, libraries and research institutions on the need to bring our shared, human-centered values to guide us towards a responsible use of AI. Transparency, accountability, fairness and dignity, coupled with strong data governance and a concerted effort to prevent harm to society and the environment, these are at the core of Springer Nature’s AI Principles. They align closely to the values expressed in ACRL’s AI Competencies for Academic Library Workers, particularly those expressed in the “Ethical Considerations” section of that document. The ACRL’s AI Competencies highlight the need to understand how different AI tools work and what they’re used for. They also encourage librarians to help patrons figure out when and how to use these tools to meet their information needs.

Strengthening scholarly trust through better AI tools

Clearly generative AI has added to the size of this challenge, and I was pleased to see attendees of the workshop lean into thinking about ways to address it. Ultimately, if researchers, librarians and academic publishers want to strengthen trust with the broader public, we need to rethink how we use AI. That means finding ways to give users better access to reliable information. Our discovery tools should meet people where they are.

“Everyone of us attending the workshop was under no illusions about the scope of the challenges academic libraries face right now and how to increase trust in scholarly sources of information is one of the greatest.”

At the same time, discovery tools need to do more than just deliver information. They should encourage users to think critically. That means prompting them to look at key sections of source texts and compare different perspectives. In other words, we need to support critical information literacy, so users can judge the quality and accuracy of what they find. This means being innovative in the interfaces we design while ensuring that the underlying architecture is solid, and that the technical and descriptive metadata we generate is robust and standards-compliant to support interoperability.

It’s a big challenge, but the good news is that several initiatives are already underway. Groups like STM, COUNTER, and NISO are working on the technical details, while keeping shared values front and center. And while many librarians harbor some skepticism about AI, it's important to note that being able to ask tough questions about how we can harness AI well is actually a strength. You’re already practicing one of the ACRL’s AI competencies: critical engagement!  So I encourage you to learn more about these efforts. Your constructive engagement will help make the solutions we build even stronger.

If you're interested in how the broader scholarly ecosystem is responding to AI, I encourage you to explore Perspectives on AI in scholarly communications, a report that brings together voices from several library leaders and Springer Nature experts reflecting on the opportunities and challenges ahead.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Putting Integrity at the Heart of Springer Nature

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Mon Nov 17 2025

It’s becoming increasingly common to stumble upon news stories reporting on bad science – papermills, manipulative scientists, flawed data.  However, these narratives only give us a narrow insight into the world of research, focusing on individual stories. They are just a tiny fraction of the robust published research that’s changing the world, reflecting the actions of a very small minority in a vast community of committed researchers.  Yet efforts to subvert the publication process do to persist and evolve, and we are committed to preventing them

Why Integrity Matters

Addressing the world’s most urgent challenges—from global health to food security—requires research that is trustworthy and ethically conducted.  Research integrity means using honest and verifiable methods in proposing, performing, and evaluating research, and reporting results in line with established guidelines. It is grounded in professional norms and codes developed by the research community itself, ensuring that findings can be trusted and built upon. 

Trust is the foundation of this process, and it is the most important commodity we have. That is why Springer Nature is committed to remaining the trusted home for ethically undertaken and reported research. By protecting the integrity of the scholarly record, we safeguard not only research itself but also public confidence in science, so that research can inform policy, guide responsible innovation, and contribute meaningfully to society. 

We approach this responsibility with a focus on continuous assessment and improvement, and are grateful to those across the research ecosystem whose invaluable support reflects a shared commitment to this stewardship. 

We believe in transparency and accountability.  In 2024, we received over 2.3million submissions and published over 482,000 articles (translating to an acceptance rate of 21%), reflecting the scrutiny we – and our editors – apply through our editorial and publishing processes.  

And we retracted 2,923 publications — these retractions representing just 0.6% of our 2024 published content (but covering publications from multiple years). We’re proud to be the first publisher to publicly release our retraction data, reinforcing our commitment to accountability.   

A Shared Responsibility Across Springer Nature 

This is why we have embedded integrity throughout our organisation. From editorial and production to technology and legal teams, we’ve woven integrity into every workflow, and into the support we provide our global network of 180,000 editors, all working together to uphold rigorous standards. 

Our teams conduct technical checks to ensure submissions meet high standards. Our technology teams develop tools to screen content at scale. And our Research Integrity Group (SN RIG)—a dedicated team of over 55 experts—leads integrity tool and pattern development, investigations, training, audit, and policy development to safeguard the quality of our publications. The teams produce important results.  As an example, our Prevention team has identified over 83,000 paper mill papers in the last two years alone, using a combination of integrity tools and pattern detection initiatives. 

Investing in Integrity 

We’ve tripled our investment in research integrity over three years, and our commitment to investing in this important area won’t change. Since 2021, we’ve invested over €650 million in technology, including €177 million in 2024 alone. A significant proportion of this funding supports the development of AI-powered toolssubmission screening systems, and training platforms that help us detect and prevent fraudulent content.  We continue to develop our AI-powered tools to help detect manipulated text, images, and references. Designed with human oversight, these tools uphold research integrity while streamlining editorial workflows. We use AI and other technology to verify author and reviewer identities, detect image manipulation, and flag citation issues—ensuring that only high-quality, credible research is published. 

Training and Empowerment 

Integrity is not just about technology, it’s about people. We offer a comprehensive training platform with over 20 courses, and many additional resources, supporting more than 31,000 registered editors and other key users. Topics range from peer review fundamentals to plagiarism and citation manipulation, as well as many other topics. We also train our internal staff in these key topics, and in 2024 alone our internal staff completed over 1,300 courses. 

We also work to reach the wider research community through specific, freely accessible, training, most notably through Nature Masterclasses and recent initiatives in India.  We have developed a free, self-paced Nature Masterclasses course on publication ethics, delivering around 8 hours of learning through modular components and, over the past three years, have promoted research integrity in India through nationwide outreach—delivering workshops, roadshows, and training across institutions to champion ethical, transparent, and inclusive research practices

Additionally, we provide targeted support for editors in vulnerable disciplines, equipping them with the skills to identify and respond to integrity concerns and auditing to find areas where improvements can be made.  

Collaboration  

Ensuring research integrity is a community-wide challenge and addressing it requires collective action and shared solutions. That’s why we collaborate with organizations such as COPEDORAORCID, and STM. We also work closely with national bodies like UKCORI and ISTIC and contribute to global initiatives, including United2Act, to combat paper mills and misinformation. 

Notable examples of our work include chairing the governance board of the STM Integrity Hub, actively participating in its working groups and sharing one of our AI tools to support the development of shared technology and intelligence.  

The “sleuth” community—independent researchers who identify indicators of problematic content—plays an important role in spotting trends. We value their contributions and collaborate with them on investigations. 

Looking Ahead 

Ensuring integrity is a long-term commitment. As the research landscape evolves, so do the threats to integrity. At Springer Nature, we remain vigilant, proactive, and committed to continuous improvement. By placing integrity at the heart of our business, we protect the scientific record, support our communities, and ensure that the research we publish can be confidently built upon.  We invite institutions, funders, and all stakeholders across the research ecosystem to work together—not only to address underlying root causes of misconduct but to foster a culture of transparency and deter unethical behaviour. Through collaboration, we can create an environment where ethical research thrives and trust in science endures. 

More about our work in research integrity can be found here.  

Opening doors to discovery

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Mon Nov 17 2025

The Springer Nature Opening Doors internship is a paid opportunity for students and recent graduates to gain experience in research, education and science news publishing in our journals, books or magazines.

Many group perspectives are currently underrepresented in the publishing industry. We believe that diverse perspectives drive progress, which is why we created this internship. We welcome applicants from all backgrounds and particularly encourage candidates from groups historically underrepresented in publishing to apply.

Since its inception, the programme has welcomed interns in the UK, US, Germany, China and the Netherlands, with the successful applicants gaining the chance to learn more about the publishing industry and its different career pathways.

To celebrate Work in Publishing week 2025, we asked Prerna Shetty, Editorial Data Analyst intern based in London, to talk us through the highlights of her placement with Springer Nature.

Over the past five months, I have had the privilege of working as an Editorial Data Analyst Intern with Nature Portfolio as part of Springer Nature’s Opening Doors internship scheme. I was immediately drawn to the programme and its purpose when I first came across it. Having completed my Masters in Business Analytics, where my dissertation examined how socio-economic inequities shape access to healthcare through data-driven methods, I was eager to apply those skills in a setting where data could make a broader social and structural impact and Springer Nature’s mission to make research useful for and usable by all reflected that.

During my internship, I worked on a couple of projects that looked at the intersection of data, inclusion and publishing practice. One of them was the Early Career Researcher (ECR) Co-review Programme, an initiative giving early-career researchers hands-on peer review experience under the guidance of senior reviewers. It supports professional growth and helps build a more inclusive, sustainable reviewer community.

My work focused on analysing how participation in the programme varies by career stage, gender, country, and discipline, using editorial and reviewer data. The findings were both encouraging and illuminating. We found that the programme, in addition to training ECRs, has helped close gender gaps in peer review, including in fields where participation is currently uneven. It also revealed how research communities differ across countries and disciplines, showing the importance of local context. What stood out to me was that involving ECRs didn’t affect the efficiency of the review process, showing that inclusion and performance can go hand in hand.

Presenting these findings to my team has been one of the most rewarding moments of my internship. Seeing how results from the analysis shaped discussions about the programme’s impact and future direction made me realise that the work I was doing could directly inform how Springer Nature supports research communities. It was fulfilling to know that my analysis could highlight the value of initiatives like the ECR Co-review Programme across Nature Portfolio journals.

Personally, what I’ve loved about working at Springer Nature is how open and supportive everyone is. From the start, I felt comfortable asking questions, sharing ideas, and learning by doing. The editors, data analysts, and mentors I worked with were generous with their time and genuinely cared about helping me grow. Being in that kind of environment made learning new things easy and the experience deeply rewarding.

As my internship comes to an end, I find myself reflecting on how much this experience has shaped me. It has strengthened my interest in using data to inform inclusion, policy, and accessibility within research. I’ve always loved analytics as a discipline, but I’ve realised that I find it most meaningful when it helps create more equitable systems.

I’m really grateful to my manager, Nathalie Le Bot, and my mentor, Anna Patterson, for believing in me from the start and supporting me throughout the internship. Their guidance and encouragement made all the difference. I also want to thank Joshua Nwaogu, my employee network buddy, who was such a great support to have outside the teams I worked with and was always a kind ear beyond work. And a big thanks to Sonja Schmid, Riikka Jokinen, Sowmya Swaminathan, and Niki Scaplehorn for being so generous with their time and making learning such a positive experience.

To anyone considering applying to Opening Doors, I’d say absolutely go for it. You’ll gain first-hand insight into how academic publishing works in practice. It’s a community that values curiosity, collaboration, and compassion, which makes the experience both inspiring and rewarding. It’s shown me that inclusion and innovation go hand in hand, and that when publishers make space for a wide range of perspectives and experiences, the entire research ecosystem becomes stronger and more impactful.

Related Tags:

Why the Social Sciences matter now more than ever

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Nov 14 2025

Since its inception in 2015, the blog Social Science Matters has grown into a dynamic platform for interdisciplinary dialogue, global collaboration, and public engagement – amplifying the voices of scholars tackling the world’s most urgent challenges. 

In celebration of the tenth anniversary of the blog, ten authors reflect on why social science research matters more than ever in light of current issues society faces.

Imagining a Better Future

9781137463449
Social science matters because it helps us make sense of the complex, interdependent, and uncertain world we live in, and because it offers resources for imagining and enacting better futures. Social science research illuminates the social conditions that make such creativity possible: how agency is exercised, how traditions are transformed, how people engage with one another and their environments to create change. Without these insights, we risk reproducing myths that disempower people and ignore their potential to shape society. 

By rethinking creativity socioculturally, we gain a deeper appreciation of everyday human agency and a clearer vision of how collective imagination and action can address the pressing challenges of our time. Read the blog 
 
Vlad Glăveanu, Professor of Psychology and Director of the DCU Centre for Possibility Studies, Dublin City University, Ireland

Exploring the ‘Why’ Behind Statistics

9783030042486
As a college student, I loved statistics. I liked the way hard numbers told a story. I could use statistics to inform people about the ways that societal ills plagued various communities. Right now, statistics are being used to deny opportunities to people who desperately want them. Political commentators cite statistics as weapons to identify people who should not be allowed to pursue the American Dream.

Hard data is not enough to help us understand the ways in which human communities unfold. Humans are complex and societies are layered with human error and achievement. The American story reflects complications and setbacks that can be explained through the study of social behavior.  Social science teaches us to explore the “why” behind the statistic. It explains the ways that societies work and do not work. Social science contributes to a thriving society. Read the blog 

Hope C. Rias, Bridgewater College, VA, USA

Opposing the Erosion of Democracy

9783030004972
In an increasing number of countries, we observe the political phenomenon known as backsliding, whereby the bases of democratic polity are being eroded through the actions of democratically-elected far-right politicians. 

Social sciences disciplines have been a kind of collateral damage in this far-rightward drift, as a growing number of universities around the world eliminate social sciences degree programmes and even entire departments and faculties. Meanwhile, far-right politicians have shown a propensity to pursue and attack social scientists, not least by denigrating their work and/or by cutting funding for their research.  

In such a climate, we need the social sciences more than ever because without them, we descend onto a dystopian world with no oppositional force to contest the forward thrust of far-right ideology and political action. Read the blog 

David Block, Honorary Professor of Sociolinguistics, Universitat Pompeu Fabra, Barcelona, Spain

Seeing Past the Headlines

14670
Social science research matters profoundly for understanding immigration policy because it helps us see past headlines and grasp how narratives are constructed.

The current controversy over “asylum seekers in hotels” illustrates the point. At first glance it appears to be about numbers and costs. But research shows the real driver is media amplification: a handful of cues (crisis, cost, control) reverberate between digital platforms, print, and broadcast outlets, hardening into the “common sense” of the moment. This dynamic burdens vulnerable people with responsibility for systemic policy failure. Social science provides evidence for rebalancing attention: amplifying first person voices, investing in better decision making, and creating safe and legal routes. With it, we gain the tools to design policies that are just, sustainable, and informed by context rather than spectacle. Read the blog 

Nasar Meer, Professor of Social and Political Science, University of Glasgow, UK

Dismantling Inequalities

9783030048525
In 2019, I wrote about an “activism of inclusion”, arguing that universities must dismantle systemic inequities. Six years on, the urgency of that claim has only intensified. In higher education, women represent the majority of staff but only 20% of full professors in the UK. Recent research demonstrates that even in institutions with gender equity awards, women experience silencing, disproportionate “academic housework” and inconsistent policy implementation, while gender‐washing creates the illusion of equality and fuels backlash from colleagues who perceive themselves as disadvantaged.     

Social science research matters now more than ever because it unmasks these contradictions, documents the lived effects of gendered regimes, and offers pathways for collective disruption. Without this work, universities risk reproducing the very inequalities they claim to dismantle. Read the blog  

Gail Crimmins, Associate Professor of Communication, University of the Sunshine Coast, Maroochydore, Australia

Promoting Education about Diversity

9781137400338
As researchers and educators who have been inhabiting contested terrain throughout our careers, we are not surprised when education becomes politicised. But we are surprised by the intensity and spread of the current attacks on social sciences and sexuality.

Neither social sciences nor sexuality education can hope to combat these attacks using logic and rationality because such debates are, at their heart, highly affective, transactional and political. Despite the attacks, sexuality education and social sciences continue. Governments desire to control them, to defund them, to ban them and remove academics and students who defend their disciplines. But sexuality and the social sciences are rhizomic, undisciplined and reliably ungovernable. While governments declare that there are only two genders, scientists, social media platforms, people of all ages and diverse embodiments across species and time tell us otherwise. Read the blog  

Mary Lou Rasmussen, Professor of Sociology, The Australian National University and Louisa Allen, Professor of Critical Studies in Education, University of Auckland, New Zealand

Acting as Lighthouses in Difficult Times

9783319419749
Social Scientists are in a unique position to speak truth to power both within and outside academia. The study of LGBTQIA+ rights, experiences, and identities represents a case in point to this regard. Social Scientists and activists have helped us to understand the social, political, and legal struggles of LGBTQIA+ persons, affording scholarly and cultural dignity to this heterogeneous constellation of groups and individuals.  

Social Scientists can act as ‘lighthouses’ of knowledge in sombre times: shedding light on the pressing global issues of our societies and building the collective confidence to challenge them both in our personal and public lives. Read the blog 

Francesca Romana Ammaturo, Senior Lecturer in Sociology and International Relations, London Metropolitan University, UK

Understanding Healthy Relationships with Technology

9783319567174
The rapid development of digital and mobile technologies means we need social sciences now more than ever to understand the impact of technological advances on our lives, relationships and personal wellbeing.

The social scientific notion of ‘affordances’ recognises that technology does not determine behaviour but affords certain possibilities that are taken up in different ways across communities. For example, messaging apps afford immediate and intimate communication between individuals who are physically apart, akin to chatting privately to a loved one in the same room. These design decisions tap into social pressures to be constantly available to friends and family – or ‘always on’. It is only through social science research that we can understand how people maintain healthy relationships and attend to their own wellbeing in a technologically advanced society, and design and deliver the necessary policy and support. Read the blog 

Caroline Tagg, Senior Lecturer in Applied Linguistics, The Open University, UK

Offering Foresight in Climate Change and Environmental Debt 

9783030533250
Natural science has definitively documented that contemporary climate change is caused by human activities, especially those based on fossil fuels.  Social science also matters to understand even a biophysical problem like climate change as well as possible solutions.    

Fossil fuel producing companies and countries are using their massive resources to drill, pump and frack, thereby transferring carbon from the ground where nature had safely stored it to the sky where it results in greenhouse gases and global warming.  Social scientists won a Nobel Prize for proposing a polluter-pays solution, namely pricing carbon pollution so that an environmental debt does not accumulate.  Pay more now upfront in gas prices, plane and cruise tickets, etc., for the pollution fossil fuels cause to avoid paying much more debt over the next century for the wildfires, floods, insurance premiums, etc., they also cause.  Without foresight, the choice is to discount danger, defer payment, prioritize short-term over long-term affordability and support short-sighted leaders. Read the blog 

Raymond Murphy, Emeritus Professor, School of Sociology and Anthropology, University of Ottawa, Canada

Fostering Critical Thinking and Freedom of Expression

9783030037031
We live in an increasingly complex, interconnected—yet divisive—world. Researchers face intense political and financial pressures from multiple directions: policy narratives, government initiatives, funders and funding availability, the rapid emergence of artificial intelligence, and the ongoing neoliberalisation of academic work. These forces wield considerable influence and, arguably, determine who gets to conduct research, what topics are explored, and for what purpose. This increasingly restricts individual autonomy, critical thinking, and freedom of expression. 

On one hand, social science research has been co-opted by big business and transformed into a competitive tool for shaping how we understand the world. It has the power to generate both innovative ideas and significant profits. On the other hand, it can become a mechanism of “cancel culture,” fostering self-censorship, silence, intolerance, and fear of dissent. Our challenge as social science researchers is to continue listening—and to ensure our voices are heard authentically. Read the blog 

Geetha Marcus, Senior Lecturer in Teacher Education, The University of Edinburgh, UK

Blog: Social Science Matters

9781137269928
Launched with the publication of the first edition of Why the Social Sciences Matter in 2015, the blog Social Science Matters marks Palgrave Macmillan’s commitment to championing original and authoritative research within the Social Sciences. 

It provides a platform for our researchers, commissioning editors and practitioners to discuss developments in the social science community and to promote research impact.

If you’d like to contribute, or suggest new topics, please get in touch

Take a closer look at these – and other – articles published on Social Science Matters and don’t miss the 2025 Palgrave Annual Lecture Series.

Related Content

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source!

How libraries and publishers are shaping the future of AI in research

T
The Link
By: undefined, Thu Nov 13 2025

Artificial intelligence (AI) is already transforming the way research is conducted, published, and discovered. Once seen as futuristic, it is now a driving force in scholarly communication. In a new report from Springer Nature, Perspectives on AI in scholarly communications: A discussion with libraries and publishing professionals, library leaders and publishing professionals share how AI is being used across the research ecosystem, what ethical considerations are emerging, and how collaboration can help ensure responsible implementation.

This blog summarises key insights from the report, offering reflections and examples from those working at the intersection of research, publishing and library services.

What can library perspectives tell us about AI?

Library professionals are uniquely positioned to reflect on the impact of AI within an academic setting, as they are not only experts in information discovery, but also increasingly guiding researchers in effective and ethical use of AI tools.

While quantitative data, such as usage statistics and survey results, can reveal broad trends in AI adoption, hearing directly from librarians brings greater depth and nuance to our understanding. These conversations offer a human lens on how AI is being experienced and implemented by those working on the front lines of scholarly communication and reveal learnings and considerations to support others within the community.

Our thanks go to the library staff who were interviewed for this report:

  • Letícia Antunes Nogueira, Head of Section Resources & Digital Service, Norwegian University of Science & Technology Library, Norway
  • Dr Santhosh KV, Deputy Director Research, Manipal Academy of Higher Education, India
  • Beth Montague-Hellen, Head of Library & Information Services, Francis Crick Institute, United Kingdom
  • Keith Webster, Dean of University Libraries and Director of Emerging and Integrative Media Initiatives, Carnegie Mellon University, United States of America

Researchers are already using AI and libraries and publishers are responding

AI tools are becoming embedded in the research lifecycle. A Springer Nature survey of over 2,000 researchers found that more than half have used AI to read or write research papers, and the vast majority (80%) plan to continue doing so. Across the interviews, three core areas emerged where AI is already delivering value.

  1. Enhancing information discovery: AI is transforming how researchers find and engage with scholarly content, through tools which help researchers find relevant literature faster and more intuitively. Libraries are seeing growing demand for platforms that offer summarisation, synthesis, and recommendation features. Letícia Antunes Nogueira noted that students increasingly expect AI-powered search tools: “We are seeing now, especially with students who are coming from high school, they have been used to searching using AI systems […] so these tools become ever more ubiquitous in making recommendations and finding literature.” Springer Nature is also investing in AI-driven discovery solutions to help researchers find the content they need, faster.
  2. Streamlining manual processes: AI is helping researchers and librarians save time on repetitive tasks, with a wide range use-cases including literature reviews, grant applications, data analysis, and coding support. In publishing, Springer Nature’s peer review platform Snapp uses AI to streamline manual processes such as finding a suitable journal to submit a paper, and matching manuscripts with suitable reviewers, improving the overall submission experience.
  3. Supporting research integrity: AI can also help safeguard the scholarly record. Chris Graf, Springer Nature’s Director of Research Integrity, described how large language models are being used to detect fake articles generated by paper mills and other types of suspicious submissions such AI-generated nonsense text, irrelevant references, and problematic images, but always with human oversight.

Ethical implementation: A shared responsibility

Whilst AI offers clear benefits, its implementation must be grounded in ethics, transparency, and collaboration. Interviewees highlighted several areas where librarians and publishers can lead the way.

  • Educating researchers: With AI tools becoming ubiquitous, libraries are playing a critical role in educating researchers about responsible use. Training programmes are evolving to include guidance on AI tools, helping users understand both their potential and their limitations. Santhosh KV stressed the importance of awareness: “Good or bad, [AI has] already penetrated in a large sense. So now the only thing is educating and creating awareness of what are the good things in terms of AI, what are the do-nots.” Publishers also have a role to play in educating researchers about their own AI guidelines and policies. Springer Nature’s AI Principles, fairness, transparency, accountability, privacy and minimising harm, offer a framework for ethical development and use, and can serve as a reference point for institutional policies.
  • Keeping humans in the loop: AI should augment human intelligence, not replace it. Across the board, contributors emphasised the importance of maintaining human oversight in research and publishing workflows. Critical thinking, judgement, and accountability remain essential, even as AI takes on more administrative tasks.
  • Ensuring data quality: The effectiveness of AI tools depends on the quality of the data they are trained on. Libraries and publishers alike are working to ensure that datasets are diverse, representative, and ethically sourced. Poor data leads to poor outcomes, and both sectors recognise the need for robust data governance.
  • Collaboration is key: Realising the full potential of AI requires collaboration across stakeholder groups. Publishers, libraries, and researchers each bring unique perspectives and when these are aligned, the results can be transformative. Libraries are engaging with researchers to understand their needs and working with publishers to co-create tools that serve the community. Keith Webster summarised: “Being able to represent some of the researcher needs we hope can help product development more broadly.”
  • AI for equity and accessibility: Interviewees all noted that AI has potential to democratise access to knowledge - for example, helping non-native English speakers write and consume research, and making research content more accessible to non-specialist audiences. However, this is only possible if AI tools are developed and reviewed responsibly, and all the considerations above are taken into account.

Beth Montague-Hellen noted: “I had quite a lot of hopes that it would help level the playing field […]” however that has not necessarily been the case.”

Libraries at the centre of AI innovation

AI is transforming scholarly communications, and libraries and publishers are central to ensuring it is done ethically, responsibly, and collaboratively. From improving discovery to safeguarding integrity, libraries have a unique opportunity to lead in this space.

As AI tools continue to evolve, the role of the library will evolve with them – not as passive adopters, but as active partners in innovation to shape the future of research. As Letícia Antunes Nogueira summed up: “AI doesn’t change the mission of libraries, but it does change the environment where knowledge is produced. That also gives us the opportunity to renew our role as a library in the university system.”

To read further insights from librarians and publishing professionals, including their visions and hopes for the future, read the full report, Perspectives on AI in scholarly communications.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Rethinking research assessment: Why null results matter

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Nov 11 2025

Researchers tell us they want credit for more of the work they do. In 2025, we published the results from two large-scale surveys on research assessment and the sharing of null results (where research outcomes did not confirm the desired hypothesis). Both white papers signpost what is holding back – or might drive forward – open science. Here, we show why updating research assessment is essential if we want more researchers to share rigorously conducted null results.

Open science practices are on the rise

The research landscape looks markedly different to a decade ago: research output is on the rise leading to many more articles being published each year; our author base is more diverse; and open science is gaining momentum. In 2024, 50% of Springer Nature’s primary research was published open access, with signs that open sharing is nearing a global tipping point

So, what drives open sharing? Over several years, our State of Open Data survey, conducted in partnership with Figshare and Digital Science, has pointed to lack of credit as an ongoing blocker. As Figshare’s founder, Mark Hahnel, explained in his blog, we need to be able to measure the impact of open data sharing, and we need to reward researchers for doing so. The same applies beyond data to methods, code, protocols, and null results. If we want researchers to share more of their outputs, we need to make it fit naturally with their existing workflows, in ways that can be measured and credited.

Measuring and rewarding open science 

Research assessment is an important incentive for open practices. Our State of Research Assessment survey found that researchers worldwide want to be evaluated against a wider range of contributions that are more reflective of the work that they do. They also want research evaluation to consider the impact that they make beyond metrics, taking into account interdisciplinarity, impact on society, internationality, and openness, for example. Yet 55% of respondents stated that their work was evaluated entirely or mostly using metrics, of which publication metrics, such as citations or article-level metrics, were most common.

This focus on traditional metrics – based on the research article – makes it harder to credit the contributions that underpin rigorous, reproducible science. These reward systems are too narrow, and an emphasis on high impact research with high numbers of citations inevitably means that there is less incentive to share outputs that don’t align with this metric. This includes null results.

Why null results matter 

Sharing all outcomes of research, including null results, is a core tenet of open science. Sharing null results increases transparency, improve rigour, and reduces the significant wastage of research budgets. In our State of Null Results white paper, nearly all researchers recognised the benefits of sharing null results: 72% reported positive outcomes from publishing a null result, and 68% had used null results shared by others to refine their own work. They told us that sharing null results can help lead to better hypotheses, more rigorous methods, and new inspiration for their research. Sharing these results also helps to advance science, saving researchers from spending time or resources on paths that have already been explored.

Researchers who published null results in a journal shared examples of ways they had benefitted.

Challenging the status quo and opening new directions: 

  • In medicine, one early career researcher commented how their publication “changed the false information held for many decades.”  
  • A biologist in Canada found that sharing nulls led to collaborations and “three back-to-back papers… the publication transformed null results into positive results.” 

Supporting methodological rigour: 

  • For another biologist, null results “helped other groups adjust their hypothesis and experimental approach,” and in another case, “opened a new research field.” 

Saved time and money: 

  • A Swiss team’s paper was “widely cited,” saving others “from spending time on unproductive methodologies.”  
  • An engineering researcher in Finland commented that a peer “cancelled a planned study” after reading their results.  

Benefits to research careers: 

  • 20% reported a positive career impact and 20% a reputation boost. 
  • 18% gained new collaborations with other research groups. 
  • 17% saw others attempt replication. 

Despite these positive benefits, only 68% of those who have generated null results have shared them in some form. Only 30% submitted them to a journal, despite this being seen as the most useful way to share them.

The perception-reality gap 

For many, our survey showed that fear of rejection was a major factor holding researchers back from submitting to journals, along with low familiarity with journals that proactively accept this type of paper (like the Discover journals). Fear of negative consequences and low awareness of institutional or funder support are other factors.

There is a real gap here between perception and behaviour. Sharing null results is seen as highly beneficial, but researchers are not being incentivised to do so. Assessment reform can narrow these gaps.

Reforming research assessment is key to supporting null results 

The focus on traditional article or journal-level metrics is a key factor in the low sharing of null results in journals. When promotion, hiring and funding all reward high-impact positive advances, there is a lack of incentive to document or share foundational or incremental findings. Yet null results are essential in an inclusive and rigorous research culture. Broadening out evaluation criteria to consider null results is key to delivering open science, enabling all rigorous research, regardless of outcome, to be shared. 

A reform of research assessment could help to reward all rigorous work, including null results. Publishing these in peer-reviewed journals offers the most optimal way to globally share, evaluate, and reward these findings. 

What research assessments could recognise 

Open science practices advance rigorous, trustworthy science. If we continue to only recognise and reward novelty and citation, researchers will continue to deprioritise null results, even when they acknowledge the value in sharing them. A reform of research assessment could help to reward all rigorous work, including null results. Publishing these in peer-reviewed journals offers the most optimal way to globally share, evaluate, and reward these findings.  

For a deeper dive into the full analysis and recommendations, we invite you to read the white papers The State of Null Results and The State of Research Assessment

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source!

Reflections on 25 Years in Open Access: From niche model to publishing standard

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Mon Nov 10 2025

This piece was originally published by Research Information on 24th October 2025. Syndicated here with permission

When I first stepped into the world of open access (OA) publishing the landscape looked very different.  I was one of the early employees at the new ‘startup’ BioMed Central (BMC) (the first commercial OA publisher) in the early 2000’s, and at that time, OA was very much a fringe concept. Whilst OA has a longer history than 25 years – the first major OA repository for preprints was launched in 1991 (arXiv) – in the early 2000’s OA was still a model very much in its infancy and we spent a lot of time explaining what it was, advocating for its value, and building awareness. Whilst people ‘got’ the ethos of OA and the benefits for researchers/ research, it was met with scepticism. Was it vanity publishing? Could OA be scalable, could it be trusted?

I still remember to this day the whiteboard we had in the office where we would track article submissions – reaching 30 felt like such a milestone! The growth in OA and awareness started to change in the early 2000s with initiatives such as The Budapest Open Access Initiative (BOAI) which formally defined OA and called for global action and The Bethesda Statement and Berlin Declaration which further solidified OA principles and in 2005 when the Wellcome Trust introduced its OA policy with funding.Support for the new model still took a while. In 2004, globally the percentage of OA articles was under 4% (31,486 OA articles) of research output for that year, and now the market is at around 50% (48.1%) with around 1.4million+ OA papers published in 2024 [1]  — a milestone that reflects not just a shift in publishing models, but a transformation in how the world values and shares research. For me, this isn’t just a statistic. It’s a moment to reflect on the journey, the progress we’ve made – as a community - and the work still ahead.


A Snapshot of Progress

Today, OA is no longer a niche initiative — it’s the dominant publishing model. It is no longer a fringe concept it is a reality and the future of publishing. It is also not just about access to articles. It’s part of a broader shift toward open science: making all parts of the research lifecycle — from data to methods to peer review — more transparent, reusable, and impactful.

The 50% OA milestone in the market, is a powerful signal of this transformation. It shows that a sustainable and effective OA transition is possible — but it also reminds us that there’s no single path to get there. Instead, it takes a combination of levers, collaboration, and adaptability.

Our latest OA report offers a compelling view of the momentum behind OA. Articles published in fully OA journals at Springer Nature receive an average of 6.3 citations—higher than those from mixed-model or other pure OA publishers. Downloads of OA book and journal content rose by over 31% in 2024, reflecting growing engagement across disciplines and regions.

What’s particularly encouraging is the global reach. Downloads of OA content increased by 21% in lower-middle-income countries and 14% in low-income countries. These figures highlight the expanding accessibility of research and the growing participation of researchers worldwide in the OA ecosystem.

The growth of our OA portfolio has also been significant. Sixty-eight new fully OA journals were launched last year, and our full OA portfolio now accounts for 73% of our OA primary research output. We saw a 31% increase in OA articles published, with particularly strong growth in India—a sign of the increasing demand for open publishing options in emerging research economies.


Scaling through collaboration

Transformative agreements (TAs) have been one of the most effective tools for scaling OA. They provide a structured, scalable way to support researchers and institutions in making the transition.

We have seen great growth in TAs over the last ten years, starting within Europe, but quickly expanding globally - our signed agreements including US, Mexico, Colombia, South Africa, Egypt, Portugal, Greece, Japan and Australia.

As our latest OA report has shown, 82% of OA articles in our hybrid journals were published via TAs in 2024, with some countries seeing up to 70% OA uptake in the first year of their agreements. In South Africa and Slovenia, OA publishing in the humanities and social sciences increased by over 600% in the first year of their agreements — a powerful example of how TAs can support OA publishing across disciplines.

While TAs have no doubt accelerated the shift to OA, they do come with challenges. The global transition does remains uneven, ensuring equity is critical—particularly for researchers in underfunded regions—and disciplinary imbalances can limit impact. TAs should not be seen as a one size fits all approach, they need to be tailored to reflect local contexts and funding structures and ensure that they support that region with the pace and scale of a transition that works for them.

In Japan, our TA expanded from 10 to 60 universities in just two years, resulting in over 2,400 OA articles. In the US, new partnerships are helping to accelerate uptake. These kinds of results show what’s possible when adaptation is put front and centre and when funders, institutions, and publishers work together.


Equity remains a key focus

Despite great progress within OA, it would amiss to not note that disparities in funding, infrastructure, and support still persist. These all have an impact on the equity of OA and are a longer thread to address. Whilst strong steps have been taken in terms of waivers, adaptation of models such as TAs and experimentation with regional pricing models. And the growth of OA globally demonstrates this is having some positive impact, they’re not enough on their own

A truly equitable OA future will require ongoing collaboration across the research ecosystem — publishers, funders, institutions, and researchers — to ensure that all voices can be heard and all research can be shared.


Infrastructure and the ecosystem  

OA continues to evolve, and with it, the infrastructure that supports scholarly publishing must evolve too. Technology and innovation are a critical part of this next phase.

At Springer Nature, we’re investing heavily in technology—over €470 million since 2021—to deliver faster, smarter, and more integrated experiences for researchers, reviewers, and editors. From launching Snapp, our peer review platform, to acquiring protocols.io and expanding early sharing tools, we continue to invest in and develop a support system for authors to support, and scale up, for the growth in OA publishing.

Innovation, however, must go hand in hand with trust and always with a human at the centre. OA must also mean open, reliable, and high-quality research. That includes investing in research integrity, peer review, transparency and AI-powered tools that support authors and reviewers alike– as maintaining trust in science has never been more important.


The work ahead – collaboration is key

Reaching over 50% OA across the sector is a milestone—but it’s not the finish line. The path to the next 50% will be faster, not just because of the infrastructure we’ve built, but because of the collective experience we’ve gained. Yet, ensuring the path to OA is sustainable and scalable for everyone, requires more than infrastructure—it demands genuine collaboration and adaptability.

Every country, institution, and community has its own pace, priorities, and challenges. It is not about a top-down approach and expecting everyone to join that same path, it is about working with our customers, with our communities, with regional funders and institutions and ensuring that what is put in place is right for them.

We are all working towards the same goal, but growth in OA is about recognising that each region is on a different journey to that same destination.


Final thoughts

OA has been part of my (and Springer Nature’s) DNA for over 20 years. When BMC was acquired by Springer Nature it felt like a great validation for what we were doing - OA was something worth investing in and was going to be viable and scalable. Moving into Springer Nature and being part of some of the great OA milestones we have had - flipping Nature Communications to OA, signing the first ever TA in 2015, reaching our 50% of primary research articles published OA  - we’ve consistently pushed boundaries and worked with our community to ensure that all those who want to publish OA and benefit from the reach and engagement it brings, can do so. These milestones weren’t just strategic—they were driven by a belief in the power of openness to accelerate discovery and solve global challenges.

After more than two decades in this space, I’m more convinced than ever that OA is not just the future of publishing — it’s the foundation for a more connected, collaborative, and impactful research ecosystem. Research has a pivotal role to play in addressing the most pressing issues facing society—from climate change to public health to social equity. Ensuring that research is accessible, reusable, and built upon is essential to getting it into the hands of those who can act on it.

The journey to increased OA share across the market, has shown that transformation is possible when we work together, stay flexible, and keep equity at the centre. As the theme of this year’s B17 conference reminded us, transformation rests on the shoulders of many — not the few.


[1] This data has been pulled from Web of Science InCites and reflects both article and reviews across fully OA and hybrid OA journals.

Palgrave Macmillan Celebrates 25 Years: The Story of Why Social Science Matters

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon Nov 10 2025

Palgrave Editors Beth Farrow and Clelia Petracca join host Milana Vernikova to discuss Palgrave’s Social Science Matters campaign    

Since its inception in 2015, Social Science Matters has grown into a dynamic platform for interdisciplinary dialogue, global collaboration, and public engagement. As the campaign marks its 10th anniversary—and Palgrave celebrates 25 years—this interview retraces its evolution, from its roots in Palgrave’s mission to support critical, evidence-based research, to its role today in amplifying the voices of scholars tackling the world’s most urgent challenges. 

Looking back to the beginning of the Social Science Matters campaign and blog, what can you tell us about the original vision for the campaign and how it aligned with Palgrave’s broader mission at the time?

The Social Science Matters campaign was launched in 2015, alongside the publication of Why the Social Sciences Matter—a book produced in collaboration with the UK’s Academy of Social Sciences. The campaign was rooted in the belief that the social sciences are essential to understanding and addressing the world’s most complex challenges. From the outset, it deliberately sought to foster dialogue between and beyond social science disciplines, challenging the notion that the social sciences and STEM sciences are in opposition and highlighting how they are crucially dependent on one another.

How have global, social, and political shifts over the past decade shaped the trajectory of the campaign and the editorial vision within Palgrave?

Over the past decade, the campaign has evolved in response to major global shifts—from the rise of populism and the climate crisis to the COVID-19 pandemic and movements for racial and social justice. Social Science Matters has become a space where authors and editors engage with timely issues, connecting academic research with real-world challenges.   

The articles, talks, Q&As, and podcasts featured in the campaign not only reflect these broader changes but have, in some cases, actively informed our publishing strategy. Eleni Kakoullis and Kelley Johnson’s article advocating for inclusive research practices that centre the voices of people with intellectual disabilities highlights an approach that has directly shaped our new publishing efforts in this field. Other contributions have similarly inspired our editorial thinking, leading to the launch of dedicated book lists in gender studies, migration studies, science and technology studies, and disability studies—areas where scholarly momentum and insights from the campaign have driven our response.  

The campaign plays a key role in keeping our publishing rooted in the latest developments and concerns of research communities that we serve. Some timely recent examples include articles on educating in the age of misinformation, the challenges and opportunities of digital transformation for developing countries, and the impact of funding cuts to Tribal colleges.

The campaign aims to break down disciplinary and geographic silos and speak to the complex challenges societies face—what is an example of cross-collaboration fostered through Social Science Matters?

A key example of cross-collaboration fostered through Social Science Matters is its long-standing partnership with organisations such as the Economic and Social Research Council (ESRC) and the Academy of Social Sciences, including their Campaign for Social Science. These collaborations have brought together researchers, policymakers, and institutions across disciplines and borders to spotlight the role of the social sciences in addressing global challenges—from inequality and climate change to public health and digital transformation.

Can you share any memorable milestones from the early days of the campaign that still resonate today?

One key milestone was our first event for the Festival of Social Science back in 2017. In collaboration with the Economic and Social Research Council we put together a panel and reception at the Royal Society in London hosted by BBC Radio presenter Laurie Taylor. This event helped establish Social Science Matters as a platform for public engagement and interdisciplinary exchange.  

Another foundational milestone was the author and reader survey conducted in the early stages of the campaign, which gathered insights from over 500 social scientists. This consultative approach—combined with feedback collected via postcards at conferences—helped shape the campaign’s direction. The survey revealed a strong appetite for interdisciplinary dialogue, a desire for greater visibility of social science research, and a need to better articulate the real-world impact of the field. These findings directly informed the campaign’s shift from asking why social science matters to showing how it does—through storytelling, impact case studies, and timely commentary.  

Since then, we’ve sought to expand the campaign’s international reach. Today, we’re proud that readers in India and Singapore are among the top five readers of the article hub, alongside the US, UK, and Australia—evidence of the campaign’s growing global resonance.  

A lasting example of this impact is the enduring popularity of a 2015 article by Gino d’Oca, then editor of Palgrave’s first open-access journal, Palgrave Communications. His piece remains one of the most-read on the platform and reflects the campaign’s role in surfacing emerging research trends. Gino’s progression to Editor-in-Chief of Humanities and Social Sciences Communications at Nature also highlights the importance of editorial leadership in building trusted scholarly communities.

What does the next decade and beyond of Social Science Matters look like? How can it continue to support and amplify transformative research?

As the social sciences face mounting political and institutional challenges, the next phase will focus on strengthening its role as a bridge between scholarship, policy, and public discourse. It will continue to champion interdisciplinary, inclusive, and policy-relevant research—while expanding its reach through new formats, international partnerships, and a focus on underrepresented voices and emerging fields. At a time when trust in science is in jeopardy, the campaign marks our ongoing commitment to rigorous research and acknowledges our role as a publisher in making evidence-based insights accessible to the wider public.   

The recent publication of Why the Social Sciences Matter: More than Ever is a defining moment in the campaign’s evolution. While the first edition responded to the aftermath of the 2008 financial crisis and the Arab Spring, the new edition reflects a dramatically changed world—one shaped by the COVID-19 pandemic, climate breakdown, racial justice movements, and the rise of AI. It also features contributions from a new generation of scholars alongside established voices, signalling a broader, more globally engaged and future-facing vision for the social sciences.

As we reflect on 25 years of Palgrave and mark the publication of the new edition, we invite you to join the conversation by signing up for the 2025 Palgrave Annual Lecture series, a space that convenes thought leaders and emerging voices to share fresh perspectives on these issues and much more

Related Content

Why librarians should champion null results in research publishing

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon Nov 10 2025

Librarians are well placed to lead the way in promoting transparency and advancing robust research practices. Findings that are null, inconclusive or unexpected can be an essential step on the path to knowledge. Researchers benefit from sharing these outcomes, and institutions gain from supporting open and responsible reporting. Springer Nature’s new white paper, The state of null results (2025), reveals what researchers think, what influences their publishing decisions, and where libraries can make the biggest difference. This post distils key insights and turns them into practical actions you can take on your campus.

The value of null results in advancing research

One thing I try to emphasise in our Nature Masterclasses workshops is that null results aren’t bad results; bad results come from poor design, inappropriate methods or uncalibrated equipment. In other words, they are not valid, trustworthy or reproducible. As long as trained researchers are using the right study design with the appropriate techniques being done under the right conditions on calibrated equipment, all the results are good. Some will be positive, and others will be null, but they are all valid, trustworthy and reproducible.

Furthermore, null results reduce research waste. If researchers know that a certain experiment will not work because it has been shared, then they will not waste their time, money and resources attempting to do it. And if researchers know what doesn’t work, it can inspire new innovative approaches to address that problem, null results can stimulate new ideas and hypotheses.

Another important role for null results not discussed in the white paper is their value in systematic reviews. Systematic reviews, which are common in medicine and some disciplines in social sciences, aim to synthesise all the results related to a specific research question, for example, the efficacy of a new treatment for a disease. But if those conducting systematic reviews can only find positive results, because the null results are not shared, that can significantly skew the conclusion of the article and possibly have a negative impact on public health.

Because these are all core values in responsible research communication, it is not surprising that in Springer Nature’s global survey (11,000+ researchers across 166 countries), 53% reported generating null results and 98% recognised their value. Among those who published null results, common benefits included inspiring new hypotheses or methods, identifying methodological issues and preventing duplication.

However, there’s a clear intent–action gap: 85% believe sharing null results is important, but only 68% of those who generated them shared them in any form, and just 30% submitted to a journal. Experiences were largely positive (reported by 72% of those who published), though a minority (20%) faced negative consequences. These realities underscore why proactive library support can change behaviours and outcomes.

How librarians help overcome researcher hesitation

The white paper identifies four consistent barriers that limit the sharing of null results. Understanding these challenges can help librarians tailor support and outreach more effectively:

  • Concerns about bias and reputational impact
  • Uncertainty around where and how to submit
  • Doubts about journal acceptance
  • A broader lack of institutional support and incentives

Awareness is particularly low: only 15% of respondents knew of journals that actively encourage null-result submissions. These concerns are echoed by participants in our Nature Masterclasses workshops as well. Notably, willingness to publish null results is similar across career stages and fields, though it can vary by region. For example, while 75% of researchers in the UK were likely to share null results, this drops to 35% amongst researchers in China. These differences can be useful information when tailoring outreach.

Another concern for many researchers are the metrics that institutions use to evaluate research performance (either for hiring or promotions). As these metrics are often influenced more by positive results rather than null results in publications (in terms of citations), again researchers feel pressured to prioritize their positive results. As mentioned in a post on metrics literacy, while metrics can provide a quantitative evaluation, they miss the broader contribution to the field or society. Therefore, institutions may also consider using a qualitative approach in research assessment to evaluate this broader contribution (“prevention of research waste”, for example).

How librarians support transparent publishing

The barriers to publishing null results are clear, but so are the opportunities for librarians to make a difference. From language choices to publishing guidance, here are four practical ways to support researchers and promote more transparent research practices:

  • Use inclusive language: We recommend that librarians adopt terminology like “null, negative or inconclusive results” to help normalize these outcomes and reduce stigma. Avoid framing them as ‘bad results’, instead highlight their value in reducing research waste, generating new hypotheses and improving reproducibility. In workshops and guidance materials, mirror this language and lead with benefits. Openly sharing such findings also helps build trust in the research community, which can foster new collaborative opportunities.
  • Clarify publishing pathways: Many researchers are unsure where to submit their null findings. Librarians can help by curating a concise “venues & formats” resource that lists article types, such as Registered Reports, Data Notes and Methods/Protocol papers and journals that explicitly welcome null results. Sharing methods and protocols separately from full articles can be especially impactful. As highlighted in an article on open method sharing, one researcher noted that while their protocol was cited 200 times in academic literature, the same protocol shared on protocols.io has been accessed over 30,000 times.
  • Demystify journal options: Springer Nature publishes inclusive journals that welcome all in-scope, technically sound research following rigorous peer review. These are ideal venues for null results and descriptive or data-centric studies. Examples include Scientific Reports, BMC Research Notes, the Discover series, and Cureus. Including these in librarian guidance can help researchers feel more confident about where to publish.
  • Connect to research assessment reform: Researchers often worry that publishing null results won’t be recognized or rewarded. Librarians can use their channels to amplify conversations around responsible metrics and open science and point to institutional policies that support transparency. Currently, only 38% of researchers are aware of such support, whether in the form of guidelines, policies, or access to repositories, so signposting these resources can make a real difference.

Five ways librarians promote null result sharing

Librarians can play a key role in shifting researcher culture around null results. Whether through training, guidance or recognition, these activities help normalize transparency and make it easier for researchers to share all outcomes:

  1. Run a seminar on the importance of null results: These can be institution-wide or targeted to departments with low sharing rates and should address common concerns researchers have.
  2. Publish a short campus guide: Show where and how to submit null results, including suitable article types and inclusive journal options with librarian contact for advice.
  3. Create a recognition pathway: If appropriate, map how null-result outputs can ‘count’ in internal evaluations or open science recognition.
  4. Offer rapid “submission triage” clinics: 15-minute librarian consults to check journal fit, article type, data citation, and transparency statements.
  5. Track and showcase impact: Curate local case studies where sharing null results improved methods, prevented duplication or sparked collaborations.

Shifting the culture around null results doesn’t happen overnight, but it starts with clear and practical steps. When librarians create space for open conversations, offer targeted support and make publishing pathways visible, they help embed transparency into the everyday rhythm of research. The insights from The state of null results: Insights from 11,000 researchers on negative or inconclusive results offer a strong foundation for this work. We thank the authors and all the researchers who contributed their perspectives to this important conversation.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

India’s global research impact: What editors and publishers need to know

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Nov 5 2025

India is emerging as a key contributor in volume and quality to global research and publishing. In the second report of the Global Research Pulse series, we explore India’s maturing and increasingly influential research environment and offer insights to editors on how to better assess this research. Get a taste of what’s in the report, from research publication data to insights on how to identify research excellence.

A_what-editors-and-publishers-need-to-know-india_600x340px © Springernature 2025

The globalisation of research is accelerating. In Springer Nature’s Global Research Pulse series, we share insights and tools to support editors in this rapidly evolving and diverse landscape. The second report in the series focuses on India’s journey to attain high quality global research impact with a detailed assessment of sub-disciplinary research quality.  

It explores the strategic investments, institutional reforms, and international collaborations India has undertaken that have enabled it to achieve this status. To support editors in navigating India’s large and diverse research landscape, in the report we also share sources for identifying research excellence in India.  

This report on India joins the first report in the series which analyses China’s steady improvement in research quality and offers insights on effective engagement with it. We believe that it is best practice for academic publishing to reflect the evolving global research landscape, and aim to empower editors and publishers to engage with emerging and influential research systems across the globe. 

India’s growth in publication volume as well as quality and impact  

Research from India is the second-largest source of submissions to Springer Nature journals, and globally, India is the third-highest contributor to research. Looking at total article count, India is the second-fastest-growing nation, having increased its research output almost six-fold over the last decade and a half. 

In the report, we show that this growth is not limited to publication volume. The impact and quality of India’s research are steadily increasing, and India has strong representation in internationally respected journals. It is the third-highest contributor to the top 10% highly cited articles, and ranks among the top three nations for high-impact research in applied, physical, and life sciences. Indeed, nearly 70% of all articles are published in the top 50% of journals across all subject areas. 

Facilitating the growth of Indian research publications: Exploring strategies and policies 

India is emerging as a global research player, exhibiting growth in volume and quality of research output. In the report, we discuss the strategies and policies that facilitate this growth: 

  • Investments into research and development (R&D) While India has been increasing its R&D spending over the past three decades, it remains low overall compared to the size of its economy. But its relatively low private sector involvement in this spending suggests that there is room for further quality growth as R&D expands. 
  • Strengthening international collaboration International collaboration is increasing, with the highest number of papers co-authored with researchers from the United States, Saudi Arabia, United Kingdon, China, and South Korea, and are seen to be delivering impact.  
  • Supporting higher education Higher education development strategies and policies encourage science and technology education, from school level and beyond, and support the higher education ecosystem long term. 
  • National commitment to open access India's One Nation One Subscription (ONOS) initiative provides Indian researchers access to academic publications and enables them to benefit from publishing their work open access. 
  • Upholding research integrity A national focus on research excellence and policies aligned with international norms have meant that India’s significant growth in research volume has not been matched by major research integrity concerns. 

Navigating the Indian research landscape: How editors can identify research excellence  

With a large and diverse research landscape, identifying research excellence can be challenging to editors. In the report, we share sources that editors can use to identify research excellence across India, to support them in engaging with this important contributor to research.  

We introduce formal rankings and explain how they can be useful in comparing institutions internationally. Because institutions in India often have a disciplinary specialty, we cover also rankings for individual disciplines, as well as other publishing tools to explore institutions by specific disciplines.  

Empowering editors to promote diversity and quality 

Equipped with data and tools, editors and publishers can be a driving force in making the publishing landscape inclusive and representative of the communities it serves.  

In the second Global Research Pulse report, we show India’s growing and diverse research landscape, which contributes valuable research across disciplines. The information and insights we share in the report serve to empower editors to engage with it.  

By understanding the Indian research landscape and its growth, and knowing how to tap into quality research emerging from India, editors can diversify their content while maintaining high standards. This can encourage collaboration and knowledge exchange, which ultimately benefits the global research ecosystem. 

Read the full report Global Research Pulse: India to learn more about India’s research landscape and how you can best engage with it.


Related Content 

Why are proceedings so important in computer science?

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Nov 4 2025

Understanding how conference proceedings are selected and published offers helpful context for anyone working in computer science research, publishing or library services. Ronan Nugent is the Editorial Director for Computer Science Proceedings at Springer Nature, where he oversees one of the most active proceedings programs in the field. His team publishes around 1000 volumes each year, including the well-known Lecture Notes in Computer Science (LNCS) series. Ronan collaborates closely with conference organizers, editorial boards, and partner societies to ensure each volume meets high standards of quality, visibility and impact. He also contributes to broader publishing strategies that support the evolving needs of the global computer science community.

Editor’s note: Originally published in March 2020, this foundational piece remains one of our most-read articles as we continue to explore the evolving role of scholarly content in computer science. We’ve refreshed it slightly and added new perspectives from Ronan Nugent, Springer Nature’s Editorial Director for Computer Science Proceedings. Ronan succeeds Aliaksandr Birukou, who previously led the program and is now Vice-President Journals at Springer Nature.

In this post, we explore why conference proceedings are increasingly important in disciplines such as computer science, and how they continue to play a critical role in supporting researchers and advancing the field.

What are conference proceedings exactly?

Conference proceedings play a central role in computer science publishing. They typically include original research papers, either full or short, that have been peer reviewed by the conference’s program committee. Most use single- or double-blind review, though some communities are beginning to explore open or transparent peer review, which is still relatively new.

Proceedings are valued for their speed and visibility. They allow researchers to share their findings quickly, which is especially important in fast-moving areas like AI and cybersecurity. In fact, in many subfields, top-tier proceedings are considered just as prestigious and just as citable as journals.

Most conferences aim to publish their proceedings before the event, so the research is available and citable right away. Others may publish afterward, giving authors a chance to revise their work based on feedback from the conference itself.

"In some areas of computer science, top conference proceedings carry more prestige than journals." - Ronan Nugent, Editorial Director for Computer Science Proceedings at Springer Nature

Springer Nature’s dedicated publishing editors work closely with conference scientific committees and trusted partner societies to select conferences for publication. We look at the conference’s scope, the people involved, its history and the quality of its peer review process.

Why are proceedings so important in computer science?

In a field where innovation moves quickly, conference proceedings help researchers keep pace. They provide a platform for sharing new ideas early, often ahead of journal publication timelines. This makes them especially valuable for fast-evolving areas like machine learning, cybersecurity, and data science.

Proceedings also offer something journals often don’t: immediate peer feedback and community exposure. Presenting at a conference gives researchers the chance to refine their work through discussion and collaboration.

And importantly, proceedings are indexed and widely cited, making them a lasting and visible part of the scholarly record. For many computer scientists, proceedings are a preferred and respected destination for publishing impactful research.

How do proceedings compare to journals? To better understand their role, here’s a quick comparison of proceedings and journals in the context of computer science:

Feature

Proceedings

Journals

Speed

Fast publication, often pre-conference

Slower, with multiple review rounds

Peer Review

Yes (single/double-blind; some exploring open)

Yes (often more extensive and iterative)

Prestige (in CS)

High in many subfields

Varies by journal and discipline

Accessibility

Conference-based; sometimes bundled with registration

Subscription-based or open access

Format

Full or short papers; often limited to 6–12 pages

Typically, longer, more detailed studies

Revision Cycles

Limited or post-conference updates

Multiple rounds of revision and resubmission

Audience

Conference attendees, researchers, and increasingly practitioners, fast-moving fields

Also, broad academic and institutional readership

Indexing & Citations

Indexed in major databases; widely cited in CS

Indexed; citation impact varies by journal

Networking Value

High when linked to live presentations and discussions

Lower, publication is separate from events

This comparison highlights why proceedings are so central to the discipline, they combine speed, rigor and visibility, making them a powerful tool for researchers and institutions alike.

"Conference proceedings are where the pulse of computer science is most visible. They capture the energy of live discussion, the speed of innovation and the depth of peer-reviewed research, all in one place." Ronan Nugent, Editorial Director for Computer Science Proceedings at Springer Nature

In which disciplines do researchers publish in conference proceedings?

Conference proceedings play a major role in several research fields, especially those where timely dissemination and community feedback are essential. To understand where proceedings are most widely used, we can look at data from two sources: Scopus and Springer Nature’s own platform, Springer Nature Link.

Scopus provides extensive coverage of conference literature, including proceedings published within journals or edited volumes. The following figures show how many conference papers were indexed across key disciplines in 2024:

  • Computer Science: 341,020
  • Engineering: 275,806
  • Physics and Astronomy: 136,179
  • Mathematics: 155,171
  • Materials Science: 55,964

Note: Scopus often assigns a single paper to multiple subject areas. For example, many computer science papers are also categorized under engineering or mathematics.

Here’s the distribution of proceedings research papers published in 2025 in Springer Nature Link according to eBook package:

  • Computer Science: 28,440
  • Intelligent Technologies, 18,167
  • Engineering: 17,627
  • Mechanical Engineering, 4,261
  • Artificial Intelligence 2,698
  • Earth and Environmental Science: 2,186
  • Mathematics and Statistics: 2,114

Across both datasets, computer science and engineering consistently lead in conference proceedings volume, with mathematics, physics and emerging fields like intelligent technologies and artificial intelligence also making significant contributions. This reinforces the idea that proceedings are especially important in fields where research moves quickly, and where conferences serve as key venues for sharing new ideas.

Why do conference proceedings matter so much in computer science?

Unlike many other fields where journals are the primary outlet, computer science researchers often prefer conferences because they allow for faster dissemination and more immediate engagement with the global research community. An analysis of Scopus data from 2012 to 2016 showed that 63% of original research in computer science was published in conference proceedings, while only 37% appeared in journals.

This tradition has historical roots. As Lance Fortnow noted in a Communications of the ACM article, computer science developed as a new discipline in the 1950s, and its publishing practices evolved independently. Conferences quickly became the main venue for presenting new work, offering fast peer review and opportunities for in-person discussion. Over time, publishers and societies began formally publishing these proceedings, recognizing their value. For example, the ACM Distinguished Service Award in 2013 honored the founding editors of the Lecture Notes in Computer Science (LNCS) series for their contributions to this model.

Participating in conferences, whether by presenting, reviewing, or serving on committees, can also support career development. In recognition of the importance of proceedings, Crossref and DataCite launched a Working Group in 2018 to improve how conference outputs are tracked and cited, including the use of Persistent Conference IDs and CrossMark.

Here are some notable conference series in computer science, covering areas such as medical imaging, cryptology, data mining, and computer vision:

What does this mean for librarians?

For librarians working with computer science communities, conference proceedings represent a valuable and strategic resource. Their role in scholarly communication continues to grow, offering unique benefits that complement traditional journal literature.

  • Including proceedings in computer science collections ensures researchers have access to timely, peer-reviewed work from leading conferences where the most current ideas are first presented.
  • Usage and citation data can help demonstrate the impact of proceedings, supporting informed decisions around acquisition and collection development.
  • With a clear understanding of how proceedings function, especially their speed, visibility, and prestige, librarians are well-positioned to guide researchers and students in discovering relevant content and choosing appropriate publication venues.

As research workflows evolve, librarians play a key role in ensuring that proceedings remain accessible, discoverable and aligned with the needs of their academic communities.

"Proceedings are where computer science research often begins. For librarians, recognizing their value means ensuring researchers have access to the ideas shaping the field in real time." - Ronan Nugent, Editorial Director for Computer Science Proceedings at Springer Nature

Proceedings are a cornerstone of Springer Nature’s Computer Science eBook Collection, offering fast, high-quality access to the latest research from leading conferences around the world. They play a vital role in how researchers stay current, particularly in fast-moving fields, and are especially valuable for early-career researchers looking to build visibility and connections. As open access continues to evolve in computer science, proceedings also offer flexible publishing options that support broader dissemination.

You can learn more about how researchers use conference content, the evolving role of open access in the field, and how we support early-career researchers. Visit the eBook Collections page for more information about the different subject collections.

About Ronan Nugent
P_Ronan Nugent 140x140 © Springer Nature 2025

Ronan Nugent is the Editorial Director for Computer Science Proceedings at Springer Nature. Based in Heidelberg, he leads the development and management of the key conference series Lecture Notes in Computer Science (LNCS) and plays a central role in the rapid dissemination of research across the computer science community.

Ronan works closely with conference organizers, editors and researchers to uphold high editorial standards and ensure timely publication. His efforts support the visibility and impact of conference-based research in areas such as AI, data science, cybersecurity, and software engineering. He also contributes to initiatives to develop integrity processes suitable for the paradigm.

Related content

OA agreement stories: University Lumière Lyon 2, France

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon Nov 3 2025

What does the day-to-day management of an open access (OA) agreement look like from a librarian’s perspective? This blog series introduces you to librarians and those in charge of implementing Springer Nature OA agreements from various research institutions. They share their experiences and offer insights into how OA agreements affect their work, the library, and the researchers they serve. 

In this edition of the series, an E-resource manager at the University Lumière Lyon 2, part of the Couperin-Springer transformative agreement (TA) in France, shares their insights into working with this partial coverage agreement. 

What is a partial coverage transformative agreement?   

The Couperin-Springer TA is one of many partial coverage TAs at Springer Nature. It offers researchers in 49 academic institutions in France full access to the Springer portfolio of journals, as well as enabling them to publish OA in Springer, Palgrave, and Adis hybrid journals.    

Partial coverage means that the allocation of articles within the TA only covers part of the expected publishing volume from participating institutions. This model helps librarians and their institutions to support the growth of OA through a TA, but can provide some obstacles in determining which articles will get the financial support available. This decision often sits with Approval Managers within the institutions or the consortia as a whole.    

Thanks for coming on the blog! Can you tell us a bit about yourself and your role in the library?  

I work at Lyon 2 Lumière University Libraries in France as an E-resource manager. I live in Lyon, and I love cycling, hiking, and listening to independent rock.  

I started out as a library technician in cataloguing, then went on to train students in information skills. I then joined the library's IT department and became administrator of the Koha ILS. Since 2022, wishing to return to more library-oriented missions, I have been in charge of electronic documentation for the university's libraries. 

“Since the university joined the Couperin-Springer TA, I have more interaction with the research department, the open science service, and the teaching researchers, who need to be kept informed of their opportunities to publish OA under the agreements.” 

What does a typical workday look like for you? 

I always start and end my days checking the calendar and reading emails, and saying “hello” in the morning and “bye bye” at the end.😉 

My job is a cross-disciplinary one, and I work with a lot of people from different departments within the library and the university. The team to which I belong is made up of around ten people, but I work a lot with two of them.   

On any given day, I help researchers in their search for documentation, and support them by resolving problems and questions regarding online access. This is what I most enjoy about my work.   

Another part of my work includes collecting statistics, prospecting for new resources, and managing the budget, administrative, and legal aspects for the institution. 

What kind of interactions and inquiries do you have related to the agreement, and how do you stay informed to be able to provide support to your researchers on this?   

Since the university joined the Couperin-Springer TA, I have more interaction with the research department, the open science service, and the teaching researchers, who need to be kept informed of their opportunities to publish OA under the read-and-publish agreements.  

The most frequently asked question by researchers on publishing OA is ‘which publishers does our institution have agreements with?’ 

To educate researchers on OA agreements and publishing OA, we produce flyers, publish a web page to support our work, and speak to research committees and laboratory documentation referents. To stay up to date myself on OA agreements, I rely on webinars as well as editors and consortia websites.    

What was the primary reason for the University Lumière Lyon 2 becoming part of the Couperin-Springer TA, in your opinion? 

We entered into the agreement (in January 2025) for the reading component, especially for access to the Palgrave Macmillan journals, and to increase the momentum initiated on the publishing component after the first agreements signed with Cambridge and Elsevier. We think it's a good thing that the range of publishers involved in our reading and publishing agreements is growing.  

“The agreements are signed by the establishment to help control costs and enable better budget management, while widely disseminating scientific knowledge and contributing to the visibility of the research carried out by our establishments.” 

Tell us about your work within the Couperin agreement when it started. What has changed in your daily workflows or practices? 

The university wanted to conclude a public contract and it was very complicated. The user license negotiated with the Couperin consortium was not legally sufficient for the university's legal department and we needed to make it fit for purpose for us to meet our internal standards before we could start.  

With the agreement, it is clearer for researchers that they can publish OA for free in certain Springer journals. However, as the number of publications included in the agreement is insufficient, things may get more complicated and we’ll have to explain to researchers why they cannot publish with fees covered once the number of publications has exceeded.   

Now that it is underway, the agreement has meant that I have more interaction with other departments and teacher-researchers, and I do more communication and teaching. To me, these closer links with research are the biggest advantage of being part of an OA agreement.  

What advice would you have for other institutions or consortia looking to transition to OA, and in particular, become part of an OA agreement?    

OA agreements are a collaboration between publishers, librarians, and scientific research on cost control. But it is definitely a myth that OA agreements mean that publishing is now free; it is not free but included in the price of the agreement.  

Reading and publication agreements are signed by the establishment to help control costs and enable better budget management, while widely disseminating scientific knowledge and contributing to the visibility of the research carried out by our establishments.  

To those considering joining an agreement I would say that the first agreements are not always fully satisfactory, but they can be improved over time. 

Check out the previous blogs in the OA agreement stories series:  

Look out for more blogs in this series, featuring OA librarians from different institutions across the globe. Meanwhile, visit the OA agreements website, where you can find more information and resources.   

Related content 

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

The guest editors shaping collections

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Oct 28 2025

Guest editing isn’t just about selecting papers—it’s about shaping conversations. At Springer Nature, our guest editors, help define the scope, invite relevant contributors, and promote collection content across their networks. Yet their work often happens behind the scenes.

We want to change that. In our new video series, we pull back the curtain to showcase guest editor voices, stories, and the value they bring—not just to the collection, but to the wider research community.

In the first episode, two early career researchers and guest editors, Carlton J. Fong and Christopher S. Rozek, share the story behind their collection—from the initial spark of an idea to the challenges they overcame, and the impact their collection will have on the field.

Whether you're an author, a potential guest editor, or simply curious about how article collections are made, this series is for you.

In this video interview, Fong and Rozek reflect on the highs and the hurdles they experienced when curating their collection: Perspectives on Current and Future Directions in School Belonging Research, from the hybrid Springer journal, Educational Psychology Review.

Curating collections that advance scholarship and nurture a sense of community

Both guest editors, Fong and Rozek, are early career researchers. Fong is an Associate Professor at the College of Education at Texas State University, while Rozek serves as an Assistant Professor in the Department of Education at Washington University in St. Louis.

Motivated by a bold and inclusive vision, Fong and Rozek set out to create a welcoming hub where diverse voices and ideas on school belonging could converge. Their commitment to this field—which explores how students experience acceptance, respect, inclusion, and support—demonstrates the powerful role guest editors and contributors can play in shaping the future of educational research.

By prioritizing collaboration and inclusivity, they have developed a resource that not only advances academic scholarship but also nurtures a sense of community among researchers and educators.

Their pioneering collection brings together fresh research on school belonging across educational stages, from primary to post-secondary. It draws on insights from educational, developmental, and cultural psychology, as well as other disciplines.

Through this rich tapestry of perspectives, Fong and Rozek have created a truly inclusive resource—one that deepens understanding in the field and encourages others to innovate and collaborate across boundaries.

What you’ll learn from the video interview

In this first episode, our guest editors reflect on:

  • The aims and scope of their collection and why the topic is timely
  • The challenges they faced launching their collection
  • How they developed the theme and curated contributions
  • What they enjoy most about being a guest editor
  • Their insights offer a rare glimpse into the editorial journey and show just how much care and expertise goes into every collection we publish

Ready to explore more? Visit our new Springer Nature collections hub to learn more and discover how you can get involved.

Related Content

From open access to open research: Celebrating 25 Years of BMC’s publishing innovation

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Thu Oct 23 2025

Twenty-five years ago, BioMed Central (now BMC) launched with a bold mission: to broaden the reach, accessibility, and use of high-quality research. As the first commercial open access (OA) publisher, BMC helped lay the foundation for many of the OA policies and principles we see today.

Today, OA is a publishing norm, and has evolved to embrace open data, early sharing, and transparent methods. Supporting this broader vision of open science is central to BMC and to Springer Nature, of which BMC is a part.

To mark BMC’s 25th anniversary we spoke with Katie Ridd and Selene Carey, both Publishing Directors with BMC, to learn more about  the role that BMC has, and continues to play, in OA and open science.

Katie,Selene, thanks for joining us. 25 years is a key milestone for BMC – so let’s go back to the start. What role did BMC play in that early OA space?

This was a time when OA wasn’t considered a publishing norm, it was an outlier. Awareness around the role, value, and impact of OA was still being raised. BMC played a pioneering role in that, helping to outline sustainable approaches to OA publication, raising awareness around the value of open standards across all research outputs, and ultimately taking innovative approaches to change the world of academic publishing. We supported authors in sharing, accessing, using, and re-using their work in a sustainable way.

We were also the first publisher to have a dedicated research integrity team -demonstrating our commitment to ensuring high quality trusted research, regardless of publishing model.

BMC was acquired by Springer in 2008 and this was a key moment, not only for us, but for OA, as it marked a clear moment of investment, commitment and understanding that OA was viable and was the way forward for research. Today, our legacy of innovation and quality continues, as we, across the company, continue to play an active part in ensuing OA is a viable option for all researchers.

Our journal portfolio continues to grow, supporting both groundbreaking studies and research serving more niche communities. Our inclusive science practices aim to offer a home to all robust research supporting equity across the research landscape. The next 25 years of BMC are going to be exciting and interesting as we continue to see OA expand globally, and we remain focused on working with our communities to ensure we are serving them with the resources they need.


You have already hinted at the broader discussion around open research. What measures has BMC adopted to better enable researchers to practice open research?

Making all aspects of research open benefits not only individual authors but the entire scholarly community. At BMC, we’re committed to supporting researchers in adopting open practices sustainably, seamlessly, and as an integral part of the publishing workflow. We also work to remove barriers to participation by reflecting the geographic diversity of our global authorship across all aspects of our publishing operations. This includes investing in diverse editorial teams and ensuring our editorial boards represent the communities we serve.

Open research practice

Our journals offer a wide range of article types—including research notes, data notes, study protocols, and registered reports—that promote reproducibility, encourage data reuse, and reduce research waste. Transparency has always been a core value at BMC. We were among the first publishers to introduce open peer review in 1999, and also champion transparent peer review, which helps shed light on the conversation between authors and reviewers and demonstrate how a paper has improved throughout the process. In addition, we provide space for publishing negative results and study designs, regardless of outcome or perceived impact. This supports reproducibility and reduces publication bias, ensuring that valuable insights are not lost.

Open research principles

Beyond article formats, our commitment to open research extends to the adoption of industry-wide principles and policies. We support the FAIR principles—Findable, Accessible, Interoperable, and Reusable—and encourage authors to deposit datasets in public repositories. We have been a strong advocate of data availability statements in the past and now, using Snapp (Springer Nature’s peer review platform), we collect data availability information at submission, enabling editors and reviewers to access supporting data during peer review. This strengthens research integrity, aligns with funder mandates, and meets community expectations—while remaining sensitive to infrastructure disparities across regions.


Looking ahead, what’s next for BMC?

BMC has always adopted a human-centric, community-focused approach to publishing. We recognise the importance of the voice of our community and work collaboratively with our editors when shaping the vision of new journals and suggesting topics for collections. At the heart of all of this is our commitment to providing a publishing experience and workflow that is efficient, reliable, and valued by authors.

As the publishing landscape continues to evolve, we remain committed to working closely with our community, supporting researchers with the tools, policies, and platforms they need. This includes investing in tools that streamline the publishing process, enhance research quality, and improve accessibility for authors and readers alike. It also includes exploring how we can leverage technological advances, such as AI, to adapt our ethical and research integrity practices enabling us to identify duplicated and AI-generated text and retracted references, thus detecting fraudulent research. This ensures BMC continues to publish trusted and high-quality articles in the modern publishing world.

Over six million users visit BMC’s websites each month, a testament to the trust and value of the research we publish. We remain focused on delivering for them as we continue to embody our pioneering spirit of 25 years ago, building a more connected and researcher-driven open research ecosystem. We are proud of our legacy and excited about the future. Together with Springer Nature, BMC will continue to lead in shaping open research and open access, but always with researchers at the centre of everything we do.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YOmzY9m_vBI

Advancing knowledge: How open access is changing research

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Oct 23 2025

Open Access Week is a chance to ask a simple but powerful question: who gets to own, access, and benefit from knowledge? At Springer Nature, we believe the answer should be: everyone. In this blog, we will explore the impact of open access and Springer Nature’s commitment to making research more open and accessible to the global community.

Open Access Week 2025 © Springer Nature 2025

Why open access matters

Open access (OA) isn’t just about removing paywalls. It’s about removing barriers to discovery, to collaboration, and to progress. When research is freely available, it reaches educators, clinicians, policymakers, and communities and helps solve problems faster and more efficiently.

That’s why Springer Nature supports gold OA—where articles are immediately and permanently accessible. It’s the most complete and sustainable way to make open science a reality, and it’s how we ensure that research reaches the people who need it most.

By allowing knowledge to flow freely and widely, OA helps level the playing field, removing steep barriers faced by researchers in low and middle-income countries, independent scholars, and practitioners outside academia.

Leading the transition to open science

Springer Nature has been publishing OA for over 20 years. Today, we offer OA options across all our journals and disciplines, enabling researchers everywhere to share their work openly.

This year, we’re marking two major milestones:

  • 25 years of BMC
    • Our pioneering OA imprint, first established in 1999 as BioMed Central. 
  • 10 years of transformative agreements (TAs)
    • We established the first TA with VSNU in 2015. Today, we have 80+ TAs globally, supporting researchers from over 3,700 institutions to publish OA with fees covered.

What transformative agreements make possible

Transformative agreements are reshaping the publishing landscape by enabling researchers to publish OA at scale. These agreements are driving OA uptake across regions and disciplines, delivering tangible benefits to authors. More than just funding mechanisms, they empower choice, reduce barriers, and make OA the default option. They also reflect a broader commitment to transparency and accountability in supporting the research community, both now and in the future.

Dr Ruiz Serrano, whose research was published OA under the Hong Kong JULAC TA, shared:

“OA amplifies the reach and influence of my work, reaching scholars, practitioners, and policymakers who might otherwise face financial barriers to accessing critical information.”

At Hospices Civils de Lyon in France, researchers are using OA to improve public health outcomes.

“With gold OA, our results may gain greater visibility, allowing others to discuss, criticise, reproduce, or comment on our data.”

These stories show how OA isn’t just a publishing model—it makes a tangible difference to the world we live in. It’s helping researchers connect with audiences they might never have reached otherwise, accelerating the pace of knowledge-sharing across borders.

The impact of transformative agreements is clear—OA uptake is accelerating across regions and disciplines. Here’s a snapshot of how we at Springer Nature are helping drive this global transition:

  • In countries/regions where new national TAs went live in 2024, such as Hong Kong, Israel and Romania, OA uptake reached at least 50% in the first year. This represents at least a 7x increase in OA uptake.
  • Established agreements continue to see strong growth of OA share into the second year of their TAs with uptake increasing by at least 15% for countries such as Denmark, Slovakia, Slovenia and South Africa.
  • Long-standing TAs in Norway, Switzerland and Finland saw around 90% OA uptake across all disciplines in 2024.
  • The US also saw strong growth with OA uptake reaching 29% in 2024.

Open Access Publications proportion of Springer Hybrid © Springer Nature 2025

A commitment to equity

Springer Nature’s commitment to OA is rooted in our values: Partnership, Integrity, Drive and Responsibility. We believe that everyone should benefit from the OA transition—and that means ensuring it’s fair and equitable.

Our work to enable OA for all is part of a broader mission to promote diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) in scholarly publishing. We’re focused on removing barriers, supporting underrepresented voices, and building systems that serve the whole research community.

Equity in OA also means recognising the different needs of researchers. Whether it’s navigating article processing charges (APCs), understanding licensing options, or accessing publishing support, we’re working to make the OA journey more transparent and more inclusive.

OA is also part of a broader shift toward open science—a movement that includes open data, open peer review, and open collaboration. These changes are reshaping how research is done, shared, and used, and they’re helping build a more transparent and trustworthy research ecosystem.

OA’s global impact

One of the most powerful aspects of OA is its ability to support researchers and communities in places where access to subscription-based journals is limited or non-existent. In many parts of the world, OA is not just a preference, it’s a necessity.

By making research freely available, OA helps bridge gaps and supports evidence-based decision-making in healthcare, education, and policy. It empowers local researchers to contribute to global conversations and ensures that solutions are informed by diverse perspectives.

Springer Nature’s OA publishing model is designed to be inclusive and ensures that knowledge is not locked behind paywalls.

Looking ahead

The theme of OA Week 2025—Who Owns Our Knowledge? invites us to think critically about access, ownership, and equity. At Springer Nature, we believe that knowledge should be shared, which in turn drives progress.

We’re proud to be part of this transition, and we’re committed to making it work for everyone. That means continuing to invest in OA infrastructure, listening to our authors, and collaborating with institutions and funders to build a more open and equitable publishing ecosystem.

Learn more

Curious about how OA works and how to navigate APCs? Explore our open access APC guide to learn more.


- Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Source Monthly Digest! -

Building better research support through community insight

T
The Link
By: undefined, Thu Oct 23 2025

A post on The Source explored how surveys help us understand researchers, their publishing habits, communication preferences and the challenges they face in sharing their work. These insights are vital, but they only tell one side of the story. The other side belongs to the people who make research possible: librarians, faculty, research office staff and R&D professionals. These roles are deeply embedded in the research process, yet their perspectives are often less visible. When we talk about understanding the research community, we need to include not just those who produce research, but also those who enable it.

Listening to the people behind the research

The roles of librarians, research managers and R&D professionals continue to expand in scope and impact. These are no longer roles defined solely by access or administration; they are central to shaping research strategy, advocating for open science and building partnerships across disciplines and sectors.

Each of these roles brings a distinct perspective to the research ecosystem. And each offers valuable insight into how research is supported, communicated and applied. When we invite you to participate in surveys, we’re opening a dialogue, one that helps us understand how our tools and services fit into your workflows and how they can evolve to meet your needs.

How survey feedback improves research support tools

Taking part in our surveys may seem like a small action, but the impact is far-reaching. Participating in a survey helps us understand how our services are used in practice, where they can improve and how they can better support your organization’s goals. The feedback we receive from librarians, research offices and R&D teams has already led to meaningful developments across our services. For example:

  • Nature Masterclasses has evolved into a more flexible, scalable training resource, thanks to community input now available through on-demand modules that fit seamlessly into researcher development programmes.
  • Research Data Services have been enhanced to better support data sharing, citation, and preservation, aligning with both institutional policies and day-to-day research practices.
  • Licensing and usage dashboards now offer clearer insights, helping libraries demonstrate the value of their collections and communicate impact to stakeholders more effectively.
  • Corporate access models have been tailored to meet the needs of applied research teams working across diverse sectors.
  • Open access workflows are becoming more transparent and easier to navigate, following feedback given by research offices around APC processes.

These examples reflect the value of ongoing dialogue. And it also gives you a voice, an opportunity to advocate for your team, your researchers and your broader community.

Community perspectives powering research strategy

The insights we gather through surveys do more than shape individual tools, they also help us understand how the research landscape is evolving. By analyzing responses from across the global research community, we identify patterns, priorities and opportunities that inform strategic thinking and spark new conversations. These findings are shared through our white papers and reports, offering a broader view of how research is supported, assessed and shared. For example:

Each publication is rooted in community input, ensuring that the voices of those who support research are part of the larger conversation.

Building better research support through community feedback

To continue this dialogue, we invite you to join our online insight panel a space for those who support research to share their experiences, ideas and perspectives. As a member, you’ll have the opportunity to take part in occasional surveys, feedback sessions and early-stage testing of new resources. Your contributions will help ensure that future developments reflect the realities of your work and the communities you serve. Whether you’re advising researchers, managing institutional strategy or driving innovation in industry, your voice helps strengthen the research ecosystem.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts today!

Strengthening global health with advanced nursing resources

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Oct 21 2025

As healthcare needs grow and evolve, Nurse Practitioners and Advanced Practice Nurses (APN) are stepping up in big ways*, taking on leadership roles, shaping policy and improving care across the board. To support this shift, Springer Nature has created a Nursing eBook collection that’s tailored to today’s education and practice needs. It’s a focused resource that helps nursing schools and libraries offer content that’s relevant, high-level, and ready to empower the next generation of nurse leaders.

For the past nine years, Springer Nature has partnered with leading organizations such as the International Council of Nurses (ICN), the European Specialist Nurses Organisation and other nursing societies. To meet the needs of nursing students and educators, we are offering a focused and relevant nursing collection without the overflow from general medical material. As such the new Nursing eBook collection will support academic institutions and nursing schools with master level curricula tailored to the evolving needs of the profession. We spoke to executive editor Nathalie L’horset-Poulain and editor Marie Come-Garry about the highlights of this collection.

“The new nursing collection doesn’t just inform nurses; it aims at empowering them.  It equips nurses to lead, innovate and advocate in a rapidly evolving healthcare landscape” 

- Nathalie L’horset-Poulain, Executive Editor for eBooks, clinical medicine, Europe at Springer Nature.

How has nursing education changed over the years?

Nursing education has undergone a big transformation over the years, evolving from a focus on bedside care and basic clinical skills to a high level and interdisciplinary curriculum that prepares nurses to lead in complex healthcare environments. This includes clinical judgment & decision-making (training nurses to assess, diagnose, and intervene), simulation-based learning, telehealth & digital health (nurses learn to conduct virtual consultations), social determinants of health (understanding how socioeconomic, cultural and environmental factors affect patient outcomes).

“Interprofessional Collaboration Education” now includes working closely with physicians to deliver team-based care. Health Equity Programs also teach nurses to recognize and address disparities in care, especially in underserved populations.

Importantly, “Leadership & Policy Advocacy Nurses” are a key new trend. Nurses are trained to influence healthcare policy, lead quality improvement initiatives and manage teams. With AI and digital health, nurses are learning to interpret data and engage with AI tools in clinical settings.

What topics are covered in Springer Nature’s Nursing eBook collection?

The Nursing eBook collection launches with a curated selection of 25 titles, with plans to expand overtime. At the heart of the collection is the Advanced Practice Nursing Series, developed in alignment with strategies from the International Council of Nurses (ICN) and the World Health Organization (WHO). This series supports global efforts to strengthen nursing education, workforce development, leadership and service delivery, helping nurses contribute meaningfully to universal health coverage and broader public health goals.

The collection focuses on both foundational and emerging areas in nursing education and practice, including:

  • Advanced practice nursing
  • Nursing specialties
  • Leadership and research
  • Policy-making roles
  • Mental health and well-being of nurses
  • Holistic and preventive care
  • Artificial intelligence in nursing
  • Telehealth and virtual nursing
  • Disaster and crisis preparedness

The Nursing eBook collection offers libraries and educators a forward-looking foundation to support the next generation of nurse leaders, equipping them with the knowledge and skills needed to thrive in today’s complex healthcare environments.

Are there any known players in the field that will contribute to this collection?

The Nursing eBook collection features contributions from globally recognized leaders in nursing education, policy, and practice, bringing deep expertise and real-world impact to its content.

  • Madrean Schober is a nurse practitioner, educator and international consultant whose work has shaped advanced practice nursing roles in over 20 countries. Her expertise in healthcare policy, curriculum design, and program development has been instrumental in supporting global nursing initiatives. As a leader in the ICN NP/APN Network and contributor to WHO’s Eastern Mediterranean Region, she brings a strong global perspective. Schober is also the lead author of the ICN Guidelines on Advanced Practice Nursing and recipient of the FAANP’s Loretta C. Ford Award for advancing the NP role.
  • Susan Hassmiller, Senior Adviser for Nursing at the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation, has held influential roles including Senior Scholar-in-Residence at the National Academy of Medicine and adviser to President Obama. A fellow of the American Academy of Nursing and holder of its Living Legend status, Hassmiller’s work spans nursing leadership, disaster recovery, and health equity. Her recognition includes the International Florence Nightingale Medal, the highest honor awarded by the International Committee of the Red Cross.
  • Brendan McCormack, Head of The Susan Wakil School of Nursing and Midwifery & Dean, Faculty of Medicine and Health at The University of Sydney, is a leading voice in person-centered care and nursing research. With over 520 publications and an h-index of 65, his work has been widely cited and recognized globally. McCormack was ranked among the world’s top 3,000 researchers by Thomson Reuters and named one of We Nurses’ #100 Outstanding Nurses.

Helping libraries & educators lead the way in nursing

As roles expand and expectations rise, educators and librarians need tools that reflect the complexity and leadership potential of today’s nursing professionals. With expert voices shaping its content and a curriculum aligned to global healthcare priorities, the Nursing eBook collection is a response to the evolving demands of nursing education. It brings together high-level content designed to reflect the complexity and diversity of today’s nursing roles, helping institutions prepare professionals who are ready to lead, innovate and advocate in modern healthcare environments.

Explore Springer Nature’s Nursing eBook collection. Interested in adding dedicated nursing content to your library? Contact us for more information.


* According to ICN, due to existing nursing shortages, the ageing of the nursing workforce and the growing COVID-19 effect, ICN estimates up to 13 million of nurses will be needed to fill the global nurse shortage gap in the future.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

The SDG Book Series: Interdisciplinary, policy-relevant research

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Oct 21 2025

This article was originally published in 2024 and was updated in October 2025.

How can research make a meaningful contribution towards the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs)? Interdisciplinary, policy-relevant research, especially when published open access, is crucial to achieving the SDGs. This is the kind of research published in Springer Nature’s Sustainable Development Goals Series.

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019

The global community aims to meet the SDGs by 2030, but there are concerns that this will not be achievable. The 17 global objectives address the most critical challenges facing humanity, including poverty, health, inequality, climate change, and more. Research is essential for the SDGs, for understanding the issues, addressing them, and evaluating solutions. Springer Nature’s Sustainable Development Goals Series comprehensively brings together interdisciplinary research across all 17 SDGs.

Why is interdisciplinarity important to tackling the SDGs?

The SDGs are not theoretical contemplations; They are real-world issues, and as such, they do not neatly fall into disciplinary compartments with clear boundaries. The complexity of the issues represented in the SDGs and their interconnectedness mean that no one discipline or profession can effectively tackle them. 

Interdisciplinarity and transdisciplinarity are essential in the efforts to address sustainable development and achieve the SDGs. Developing effective solutions to climate change, resilience and adaptation to natural hazards and disasters, energy and food security, and many more, require a holistic approach. 

Scientific, technical, and engineering expertise can only go so far, and must be integrated with social, psychological, and political perspectives to understand implementation and human reactions and behaviour. This integration of social, natural, and physical sciences will produce viable, long-term solutions. 

Publishing in the Sustainable Development Goals Series is an ideal fit for my research due to its comprehensive and interdisciplinary approach. The interconnected nature of the SDGs necessitates insights from various disciplines, which this series expertly integrates, fostering a holistic understanding and innovative solutions.
Rana Nabil Geith, co-editor of The Role of Design, Construction, and Real Estate in Advancing the Sustainable Development Goals

Making SDG research impactful: Springer Nature’s Sustainable Development Goals Book Series 
15486

Springer Nature’s Sustainable Development Goals Series has developed into the most comprehensive research library on the SDGs. The inherently transdisciplinary nature of the SDGs is well reflected in the series, with its broad remit and contributions welcome from scientists, academics, policymakers, and researchers working in fields related to any of the goals.

To handle the interconnectedness and complexity of the SDGs, the series publishes both STEM (science, technology, engineering, and mathematics) and HSS (humanities and social sciences) research, across the Springer and Palgrave Macmillan imprints. The complementary focus of the imprints ensures comprehensive coverage across all 17 SDGs. 

Publishing your work in the SDG Book Series means that it will enjoy an exceptionally broad reach to readership interested in the SDGs, well beyond your own discipline. Your work’s contextualisation alongside SDG-related research increases its credibility and impact. The overall, shared intent to present policy-relevant research and achieve real-world impact, in addition to academic excellence, fosters engagement in relevant discourses.

Publishing in the Sustainable Development Goals Book Series meant that our analysis was not only closely fitting with the series, but also reached a very wide academic and practitioner audience, who are also interested in the SDGs, and more broadly in research with a positive impact on society.
Sotiria Grek, co-author of Governing the Sustainable Development Goals: Quantification in Global Public Policy

What are some other unique benefits of publishing your SDG research in the Sustainable Development Goals Book Series?

  • Escape the disciplinary silo: When published in the series, your work will be exposed to readers outside your discipline and its immediate periphery. It could reach a broader readership with an interest in the SDGs, that would not likely explore your work if not published under the series.  
  • Indexed in Scopus database: The series has been accepted for indexing in Scopus, which means enhanced visibility and credibility for your work when published in the series, and a boost to your academic profile. 
  • Distinct visual identity: Series books are printed in a large format with double columns on high-quality paper. This distinct visual identity increases the visibility and recognition of the series, and naturally reflects also on your own work as a part of it.

We chose to publish Global Health Essentials with Springer Nature as part of the SDG Book Series to align our work with the global commitment to achieving the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). By joining the SDG Book Series, we aim to amplify the importance of global health equity and sustainability.
Mario Raviglione and Fabrizio Tediosi, co-editors of Global Health Essentials

The SDG framework provides a comprehensive approach with clear goals and targets to address a wide range of global challenges in the short and long term. Aligning and publishing our research within the SDG framework provides more visibility and recognition of key topics, helps to reach a broader audience with the potential to influence policy and create collaborations.
Natasha Tang Kai & Larry Swatuk, Authors of Prioritizing the Environment in Urban Sustainability Planning: Policies and Practices of Canadian Cities

For maximum impact, open access makes the difference

You can choose to publish your book open access (OA) in the Sustainable Development Goals Book Series. In fact, 10% of titles in the series have been published OA, with growing interest in this format specifically for this series. And this makes perfect sense because OA books are a format made for SDG research

The nature of the SDGs necessitates a holistic, interdisciplinary approach, but it also implies that knowledge should be made available, without discrimination, to as many people as possible. This means publishing OA. 

OA books have 2.4 times more citations, 10 times more downloads, and 10 times more online mentions than non-OA books on average. These increased impact and visibility foster global collaboration and engagement on issues relating to the SDGs.

When research on the SDGs is published OA, it promotes equity, as research outputs are available to all. It is not surprising that OA books have a more geographically diverse readership: They reach on average a whopping 61% more countries than non-OA books, most of which are underrepresented in global scholarship.

The Sustainable Development Goals Book Series provided an excellent space to publish our edited book. It aligns perfectly with the framework of the series, which is organised around the SDGs. The series also permitted our contributing authors to be sure that their work would be well-accessed by a large audience interested in the SDGs.
Sherif Goubran, co-editor of The Role of Design, Construction, and Real Estate in Advancing the Sustainable Development Goals

Looking to 2030 and beyond: Research with impact

With impactful and timely contributions from many authors across (and between) many disciplines, and a strong commitment to supporting the SDGs, the Sustainable Development Goals Series has grown at an exponential rate. From publishing two books in 2018, it has now reached over 200 volumes form both the Springer and Palgrave Macmillan imprints.

I was keen to publish my book as part of this series because it aligns with my aims as an author: informing effective policies, guiding future research, and supporting educators, ultimately fostering a more informed and proactive approach to addressing the pressing issues of our time.
R. Sooryamoorthy, author of Independent Africa, Dependent Science: Scientific Research in Africa

The series offers authors a fantastic platform to publish work that is aligned with the SDGs from two (!) imprints. And indeed, working on this cross-imprint series with different colleagues from these imprints and across Springer Nature, and seeing it flourish in a fairly short space of time, has been very rewarding and a huge achievement. The success of this series has also led to the launch of a German-language SDG Series, which really serves to cement our commitment to publishing research with impact. 

The deadline to achieving the SDGs, 2030, is a few years away, but there remains much ground to cover across the Sustainable Development Goals Book Series. If we are to realise the aims of the SDGs, this will require more solutions-oriented, interdisciplinary research capable of bridging traditional divides between disciplines, combining research excellence with impact. You’ll find this research in Springer Nature’s Sustainable Development Goals Series. Might your work be another building block in this important project?

Discover the broad range of books published in the Sustainable Development Goals Series, and learn how you can publish your work here as well. And for more on the SDGs, visit Springer Nature’s SDG Programme

Writing your SDG research in German? Explore Springer Nature’s German-language sister series, titled SDG – Forschung, Konzepte, Lösungsansätze zur Nachhaltigkeit.

Related content: 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest!

By the book: measuring inclusive practices in book publishing

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Mon Oct 20 2025

This opinion piece first appeared in Book Brunch during the Frankfurt Book Fair 2025 and has been republished here with permission.

Books are a fundamental part of the academic landscape. They’re also the first point of interaction that many customers, readers and learners have with the research publishing industry. Books shape disciplines, conversations and knowledge, so they should reflect the world we live in.  

For so many of us attending the Fair this year, who we publish matters just as much as what we publish. For Springer Nature, the world’s largest publisher of scholarly books, we take that responsibility seriously. Data helps us to do so; it helps us to understand where we are, so we can get to where we want to be.  

A few days ago, we published a new report using inferred gender analysis to understand gender representation in book publishing, using data from across our business. It’s the first of its kind, spearheaded by a cross-business taskforce focused on our books publishing activity and we’re sharing it exclusively with Book Brunch readers at Frankfurt Book Fair.  

It includes data on lead authors, volume editors, and series editors and shows women are underrepresented across all roles. 29% of lead authors and editors are women, and only 24% of book series editors—those with long-term influence over publishing direction—are women. 

The report also reveals disparities across disciplines. In the humanities and social sciences, women are well represented, comprising over 70% of authors and editors. But in medicine and life sciences, only 26% of lead authors and editors are women, despite women making up nearly half of researchers in those fields. In computer science, the figure is just 30%.  

Even more telling is the breakdown by book type. While contributed volumes are often edited by women (33%), only 18–19% of textbooks (typically authored by senior academics) are led by women.   

The data might be from our books business, but it reflects what most of us already know to be true more broadly - author and editor demographics don’t yet reflect the global research community. This is something that all of us in the academic publishing space in particular can work towards, together.  

It is important in the first instance that we have a baseline view of gender representation, so we can properly assess our current situation – and how to address it. What gets measured; gets managed. This is something our reporting has consistently shown us – data collection can propel you forward, it gives you a clear view of what is going on so you can design publishing strategies and action plans that are bespoke, targeted and effective. 

It’s also shown us that data collection across a large, multidisciplinary publisher is a complex and challenging exercise. Our recommendation to those looking to do the same is to break the challenge down into manageable parts, focusing your data collection efforts first on what is practical, and where you might be able to make a crucial difference.  

Looking ahead, we will continue our data-driven approach to support inclusion. Data collection is a necessary tool, not an end in itself. We need to understand where we are in order to assess progress and the effect of measures taken. Having this information not only informs our data-driven approach to measuring change, but inspires action – among our colleagues, our peers and our communities. 

Related Tags:

Open access books: Making SDG research impactful

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon Oct 20 2025

This article was originally published in 2024 and was updated in October 2025.

To support the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), research is needed on the root causes of the challenges, interventions to address them, and measuring progress. Partnering with a publisher that is committed to sustainability and dedicated to amplifying SDG research will boost your work’s real-world impact. Read on to find out more, including firsthand accounts from authors and editors who published their SDG research as an OA book with Springer Nature.

At Springer Nature we are committed to sustainability both in our business strategy and in the content we publish. Having worked in various editorial roles over the past two decades, books are particularly close to my heart, and it is exciting to see how they have evolved over the years. What role then do books play in our commitment to the SDGs?

The SDGs: A global framework for sustainability

Established by the United Nations in 2015, the SDGs are a set of 17 interconnected and interdependent objectives that address the most pressing challenges of our time, specifying targets and indicators for their achievement by 2030. Each of the Goals focuses on different aspects relating to sustainable development, spanning social, economic, and environmental dimensions, from poverty and hunger, though health, education, and gender equality, to clean water, affordable energy, and peace. 

2023 marked the halfway point to the 2030 deadline for achieving the SDGs. Unfortunately, the world is not nearly on track to meeting the targets of the SDGs by 2030. But this does not mean that we should halt our efforts to advance and promote the SDGs. If anything, we should double our engagement!

Asserting our commitment to supporting the SDGs
SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019

Springer Nature continues to support the SDGs as a framework that fosters collaboration and enables alignment of efforts by governments, organisations, researchers, and communities across the globe. 

Our greatest contribution to supporting the SDGs is the research we publish. Research structures our understanding of the SDGs; it establishes the measurements to evaluate them; it informs policies and practices that address them. We continuously develop diverse publication routes for SDG research (in journals, books, and collections), which is showcased in our SDG Programme. 

Since 2015, Springer Nature’s SDG-related content has been cited more than 17 million times, and in 2024 alone, we registered 530 million downloads of our SDG-related articles. When this research is open, it can reach wider audience and make a greater impact towards the SDGs.  

John A. Burt, editor of the 2024 OA book A Natural History of the Emirates, explains how the accessibility of the OA publishing format impacts engagement and how essential this is for the SDGs: "In just a year, our open access publication has garnered over 400,000 accesses. This not only increases public engagement, but supports wider recognition of the importance of international SDGs at local scales."

Open access for maximum visibility 

What’s better than publishing on the SDGs? Publishing OA on the SDGs!

I believe that books are a medium made for the SDGs. They contribute to effectively addressing the SDGs, and even more so if they are published OA.

Publishing OA removes barriers to knowledge transfer and promotes equity in the dissemination of information. It creates a more inclusive and sustainable research environment where research outputs are easily available to all.

OA books have 2.4 times more citations, 10 times more downloads, and 10 times more online mentions than non-OA books on average. Importantly, we have found that our OA books also have a more geographically diverse readership, reaching on average 61% more countries than non-OA books, most of which are underrepresented in global scholarship.

Findings © Springer Nature

Reproduced from the infographic summary of the White Paper Diversifying Readership Through Open Access: A Usage Analysis for OA Books.

Wider reach and impact are particularly important for SDG research because accessibility is key to fostering and sustaining global collaboration and discourse. That’s why publishing OA is central to our commitment to the SDGs.

Patricia Solis, PhD is co-editor of the multi-disciplinary book Open Mapping towards Sustainable Development Goals. She has seen firsthand how OA enables access for those who otherwise wouldn’t have it: “Some of my 62 co-authors of the edited book would not even have been able to afford purchasing their own contributions were it not for open access. And with more than a quarter million downloads in less than 18 months, it is very validating to know that the world is listening.”

Books: Creating impact on sustainable development  

I believe that books are a medium made for the SDGs. They contribute to effectively addressing the SDGs, and even more so if they are published OA. 

William J. Nuttall, is the editor of two books that were published OA in 2025: Insights into the New Hydrogen Economy and Perspectives on Engineering Uncertainty. He explains the value of making books available to all: “Researchers and students in all countries rightly want to know more about current issues and opportunities in energy technology and policy. Open access publishing gives readers everywhere access to the latest ideas and insights.  As digital communication expands, so does the global reach of the open access approach. I am pleased to have been a small part of the move towards open access scholarly book publishing.” 

Books enable the in-depth investigations required to understand the intricacy and interconnectedness of complex issues. Their scope allows bringing together theoretical frameworks with extensive research and case study analyses and weaving them into a cohesive resource. 

Books can become authoritative resources for researchers, practitioners, policy makers, educators, and anyone who is working towards sustainable development. They inform strategies and shape interventions towards the SDG targets. 

Alessandro Pelizzon published his OA book Ecological Jurisprudence: The Law of Nature and the Nature of Law in 2025, with the clear intention of making it available to anyone to use: "I wanted to offer the scholarly and activist communities something they could use both in their theory and their practice... I felt it was imperative that all scholars and activists located in more economically disadvantaged areas could access the book, at least digitally, without having to pay what would be a significant amount of money for them." 

Publishing across the SDGs: Comprehensive and interdisciplinary

Each of the SDGs has technical and material as well as social, cultural, and ethical dimensions. That’s why we at Springer Nature publish SDG research across the full disciplinary range of STM (science, technology, and medicine) and HSS (humanities and social sciences). 

We have both the possibility and the responsibility to publish on sustainability across – and between – all disciplines, covering the multifaceted nature of sustainable development. Solving problems like climate change, hunger, inequality, and injustice requires a good mix of STM and HSS. 

Springer Nature’s Sustainable Development Goals Series is indexed in Scopus and brings together the strengths of our imprints with different disciplinary emphases. The series’ publishing editors, Rachael Ballard of Palgrave Macmillan and Zach Romano of Springer, note that developing a cross-imprint series addresses the SDGs more effectively “by bridging the gap between the natural and social sciences. With increased discoverability, there is the added benefit of exposing academics and practitioners to content they might not have encountered if they remained in their disciplinary silos. The complementary focus of the imprints ensures comprehensive coverage across the 17 SDGs.” 

At Springer Nature, we want to provide a home for impactful SDG-related knowledge. And when it is an OA book, research can be discovered, shared, used, and reused, and it can make a positive difference for people and the planet. 

See what book authors and editors are saying about publishing open access and learn more about publishing your SDG research as an open access book with Springer Nature for maximum impact.

Related Content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest!

Infographic: The benefits of publishing your null results with Discover

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Oct 17 2025

You’ve spent months designing and conducting your research. The results come in, and they don’t support your hypothesis. Now what? In a scholarly landscape that often celebrates only “positive” findings, it’s easy to feel disheartened. But here’s the truth: null, negative, and inconclusive results are essential steps in the scientific process.

At Discover, we believe that every valid result deserves to be shared, and we’re committed to making that possible. In our new infographic we distil insights from the recent survey, and the top five benefits they experienced after sharing their null results. We also highlight how Discover are leading the way in inclusive publishing by welcoming all valid research, regardless of outcome.

Based on findings from The State of Null Results white paper from Springer Nature, our infographic is designed to help researchers understand the real-world benefits of sharing all outcomes, not just the positive ones.

The problem: Null results still go unpublished

Despite the growing recognition of their importance, null results remain underreported. In Springer Nature’s global survey of over 11,000 researchers, 98% of respondents acknowledged the value of sharing null results — yet many still hesitate to publish them. Why?
The reasons are complex. Some researchers fear rejection from journals; others worry about reputational damage or lack of recognition. Early-career researchers, in particular, face pressure to publish only “impactful” findings, which are often equated with positive results. This bias not only distorts the scientific record but also contributes to research waste, as others unknowingly repeat experiments that have already been conducted.

The solution: Share all outcomes, especially the null ones

Publishing null results is about contributing to a more complete, transparent, and reproducible scientific record. When researchers share all outcomes, they:

  • Prevent duplication of effort by helping others avoid unproductive paths.
  • Stimulate new research by challenging assumptions and inspiring fresh hypotheses.
  • Improve research quality by encouraging more rigorous methods and critical thinking.
  • Build trust in science by showing that integrity matters as much as discovery.

“All valid research has a contribution to make – you never know what insight each article might lead to later down the line. We want to help provide the most robust scientific record possible.”

Dylan Parker, Publishing Director, Discover Journals at Springer Nature

The top five benefits of publishing null results

As our infographic shows, researchers who have published null results report a range of personal and professional benefits. The top five reported benefits were as follows:

  1. Contributing to scientific transparency
  2. Stimulating new research questions
  3. Supporting open science practices
  4. Enhancing personal credibility
  5. Receiving constructive peer feedback

Read the infographic to uncover more insights on publishing null results with Discover.

Why publish null, negative, or inconclusive results with Discover?
Discover logo © Springer Nature 2024

Born with community needs in mind, we are outspoken about the importance of publishing null results. A family of inclusive, open access (OA) journals, we don’t just tolerate the existence of null, inconclusive, and negative results in research, we explicitly fight for their inclusion. 
Explore our infographic to see the top four reasons to publish negative results with Discover.

Let’s normalise null results

The scientific process is iterative. It’s built on trial, error, and refinement. By publishing all outcomes, including those that don’t confirm our hypotheses, we create a more honest, efficient, and inclusive research culture. Our new infographic is a visual reminder of this message. It captures the top five benefits of publishing null results, based on real experiences from researchers around the world. 

Ready to share your findings?

If you’ve ever hesitated to publish a null result, now’s the time to reconsider. Discover offer a welcoming home for your research, whatever the outcome. By contributing to a more open and reliable scientific record, you’re not just advancing your own work. You’re helping to build a better future for research.

We invite you to download the infographic and share with your network, or if you’re ready to start your Discover journey, explore all of our journals.

Related content

Improving research reproducibility with open method sharing

T
The Link
By: undefined, Thu Oct 16 2025

Open science is all about making research more transparent and accessible, but one key piece is often missing: the methods behind the work. While open access (OA) and data sharing are now widely embraced, detailed protocols still tend to stay behind closed doors. In the webinar, Transforming Research: The Benefits of Methods Sharing in Open Science, speakers from across the research community shared how platforms like protocols.io are helping change that. This blog pulls together the main takeaways, showing how open method sharing can boost reproducibility, spark collaboration and make research more impactful.

OA is now standard in many regions and open data continues to gain momentum. But for research to be truly open, sharing detailed methods is essential. As Beth Montague-Hellen, Head of Library and Information Services at The Francis Crick Institute, put it: "If you share your data but nobody can really see how you created that data, is that really open? Is that really usable by people?" Her question gets to the heart of reproducibility and trust in science. When methods are condensed into brief sections in publications, important details can be lost, slowing down progress and making it harder for others to replicate the work.

Digital tools that drive reproducibility and collaboration

Beth Montague-Hellen’s call for transparency highlights a growing need across the research community: making methods openly available and usable. Jacob Corn, Professor of Genome Biology at ETH Zürich, offered a compelling example of how digital tools are helping meet that need. In the fast-moving field of CRISPR-Cas genome editing, his lab has published protocols that have been accessed tens of thousands of times, one over 33,000 times, another close to 30,000. This level of engagement highlights a key challenge: how to share complex, reproducible methods efficiently with a global research community.

Traditional papers often outline methods in broad strokes, which can make replication difficult, especially when interest scales. Answering individual requests becomes unsustainable. That’s where protocols.io offers a solution. By uploading detailed, step-by-step protocols, Corn’s team shares their methods transparently and at scale. Some protocols have gone through up to 17 versions, reflecting ongoing improvements. With features like versioning and forking, researchers can trace changes, adopt updates, and tailor protocols to their own systems, supporting reproducibility, innovation and collaboration across labs.

Corn also shared a compelling comparison: while one of his protocols was cited around 200 times in academic literature, the same protocol on protocols.io had been accessed over 30,000 times. This contrast reveals a broader kind of impact, one that goes beyond citations and reflects real-world use. And that visibility has practical value. 

For researchers applying for grants or fellowships, linking to a well-documented, widely used protocol with a DOI can strengthen their case. As Corn explained, “Scientists like to know and like to understand how people are interfacing with their work. And ideally, when what they’re doing has impact…” protocols.io makes that impact visible, helping researchers see how their work is being picked up, adapted and applied. Corn emphasized the dual benefit of the platform: it streamlines communication for protocol authors and empowers users. His team regularly draws on public protocols and uses the platform to manage private ones internally. The ability to track, adapt and stay current makes protocols.io an essential tool in modern research.

Open method sharing builds trust and impact

This kind of visibility and usability, where methods are actively shared, used and adapted, signals a broader evolution in research practice. It reflects a growing commitment to openness, where transparency becomes a catalyst for collaboration and impact. The webinar speakers expanded on this idea, emphasizing that open method sharing is not just a technical enhancement, it’s a foundation for building trust, credibility and meaningful scientific progress.

Montague-Hellen observed: “If we want people to trust us, if we want people to trust our science, if we want people to build on our science... sharing your methods is the same as all these other bits of open research, in that it opens it all up. It makes it transparent; it makes it reusable.” Her point reinforces the idea that open methods are central to reproducibility and trust.

Emma Ganley, Director Strategic Initiatives at protocols.io, added: “The purpose of research is to find knowledge and advance knowledge, and that knowledge will only be believed if you can actually support it with evidence.” This highlights how detailed protocols strengthen the credibility and usability of research outputs.

What protocols.io brings to open science

As the webinar highlighted, platforms like protocols.io are transforming how research methods are shared, credited and reused. Protocols.io offers a dual-purpose solution:

  1. A collaborative workspace for teams to privately develop and refine protocols, and
  2. An open repository of over 23,000 public protocols available under CC-BY licensing

This approach to “modular publishing” recognizes that research outputs go beyond traditional papers. By assigning DOIs to protocols, protocols.io enables proper citation and visibility for method development, often giving well-deserved credit to technicians and junior researchers whose contributions are essential but frequently overlooked.

Importantly, the platform also supports broader efforts to recognize the full spectrum of research contributors. As Montague-Hellen noted, protocols.io aligns closely with the UK’s Technician Commitment, which advocates for:

  • Attribution of technical expertise
  • Visibility for often-hidden methodological work
  • Career development for technical staff
  • Knowledge sustainability when experts move on

By making protocols traceable, reusable and citable, protocols.io helps ensure that vital expertise doesn’t disappear and that those behind the methods receive the recognition they deserve. It addresses a long-standing challenge in research culture: giving due credit to all contributors, not just principal investigators or first authors.

To dive deeper into the benefits of open method sharing, watch the full webinar. As one attendee put it: “I got a very clear explanation on what transparency in science is and on the basis of sharing protocols.”

Related content 

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

The value of SDG research for journals, and strategies for editors to attract it

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Oct 16 2025

Publishing research on the UN Sustainable Development Goals is vital for advancing the Goals and promoting evidence-based solutions to global challenges. And if that’s not reason enough for journal editors to prioritise SDG-related work, these publications also contribute positively to traditional journal success metrics. 

Let’s dive deeper into why SDG research is important to ensuring a sustainable future, as well as how publishing SDG research benefits journals, and how you as an editor can attract more SDG-related content to your journal.

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019

The 17 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) were adopted by the United Nations in 2015. The Goals cover environmental, social, economic, and health aspects that together set a blueprint for a sustainable future on earth. 

At this point in time, the Goals are not on track to be achieved by their 2030 deadline. But we refuse to let this discourage efforts to reach a sustainable future.  

Understanding the challenges we face, designing solutions, and testing them all require evidence-based, peer-reviewed research. That’s why the research published by Springer Nature is essential in supporting the SDGs.  

If this isn’t reason enough to pursue SDG content for your journal, we also know that articles on the SDGs have a positive impact on the journals that publish them, bringing growth, citations, and readership.

How can you publish more research related to sustainable development goals? Identify natural alignment with the Goals within your journal scope and highlight them through special issues, keyword, or an editorial. And encourage authors to reflect on societal impact.
Marco Cordani, Complutense University of Madrid, Associate Editor, Cell Communication and Signaling

SDG publications’ performance: Important topics, enhanced metrics

Research related to the SDGs represents a rapidly growing area of high impact articles. By many of the metrics of journal success, SDG articles perform better than non-SDG articles.

SDG articles account for approximately 24% of all articles published in 2024 across all publishers, but they’ve been growing much more rapidly than articles not related to the SDGs (average growth of 11% year on year since the SDGs were adopted, compared with 4% for non-SDG articles in the same time period).  

With their higher citations, higher altmetric scores, and higher average downloads than non-SDG articles, publishing SDG-related content is definitely a good idea: for supporting sustainable development as well as for the development of your journal. 

P_SDG articles - Citation and downloads © Springer Nature 2025

Fig.1. SDG articles have higher average citations, altmetrics scores and downloads than non-SDG articles 

Because research on the SDGs is most impactful when visible, content related to the Goals is highlighted in various ways across Springer Nature. Features like SDG badges for journals and SDG filters for content searches make SDG research visible, accessible, and available. 

Identify the SDGs relevant to your journal and its scope

When examining how the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) intersect with various academic disciplines, we see that many different subject areas publish work that connects with the Goals. Whether in engineering, economics, history, or philosophy, research aligned with any of the 17 SDGs can contribute to advancing these global objectives.  

Identifying which SDGs connect with the research interests of your journal’s community is the first step in trying to attract such publications. But how can you identify these SDGs?  

An analysis of the content published in your journal will enable you to find the issues that can bring SDG-related research into your journal. Use the new SDG filters on Springer Nature Link to get an initial overview of SDG content you’ve already been publishing. The filters use Dimensions’ SDG classifier, a guided machine learning-based algorithm created by Digital Science, which relates content to one or more of the Goals. 

Consider which disciplines and research areas covered in your journal are relevant to which of the SDGs. Reflect on the topics addressed in the various SDGs to identify those that you and others in your research networks are especially interested in and align with your research and publications. 

With the understanding of which SDGs are most relevant to your journal, you can seek out content directly related to those Goals and increase your journal’s publication of SDG content.

Practical tips to attracting SDG content to your journal

Once you know which of the SDGs most naturally align with your journal and your community, here are some practical tips for attracting content related to those Goals: 

1. Indicate your interest in SDG-related content 

Make it clear to your audience that SDG-related content is welcome in your journal by expressing this interest in an editorial and specifying the SDGs that relate to the scope of your journal.  
It is also useful to mention relevant SDGs in the journal’s Aims and Scope, which can also increase the chance of your journal appearing in the results when potential authors search for content on specific SDGs.  

2. Find the right people 

Invite researchers working on SDG research related to your journal’s scope to author content for the journal. 
Search across your network and expand beyond it to identify individuals who can support your efforts to increase SDG content in your journal. You can do this by…  

  • finding presentations on SDG or sustainability research in the conferences that your community attends 
  • conducting data analysis using the SDG filters in the main publication databases  
  • exploring authors at competitor journals, relevant research centres, and in funding databases 
  • connecting with people over shared research interests through social media.  

3. Create opportunities for engagement  

Once your journal’s interest in publishing SDG-related content is clearly stated and you’ve identified individuals to source such content from, you can generate opportunities to attract and showcase this content. Consider for instance...  

Speak to your publisher about the Springer Nature SDG Talks series, a forum for the discussion of issues, progress, and opportunities relating to research in support of the SDGs. Webinars offer a great opportunity to highlight how your journal, efforts, and work are very much in line with some of the most pressing topics of the day.
Joshua Bayliss, Senior Publisher, Springer Nature

Watch the webinar to learn more: Spotlight On… Attracting SDG research to your journal 

You can find a wealth of resources for editors that support you in your work, covering topics from open access publishing to research integrity and offering courses and tools. But if you’d like to hear more about why you should attract more SDG-related research to your journal, and how you can accomplish this, watch the webinar Spotlight On… Attracting SDG research to your journal.

In the webinar you’ll find more detailed information on attracting SDG research to your journal, including a heat map illustrating where different fields of research align with the 17 SDGs, detailed tips on how to identify potential authors to submit SDG research, and more.  

You’ll also hear the first-hand experience of two journals and how strategies and tips provided to successfully attract SDG research worked for them: Associate Editor of Cell Communication and Signaling, Marco Cordani from Complutense University of Madrid, Spain, discusses driving sustainability through editorial leadership, and Springer Nature Senior Publisher Joshua Bayliss shares tips and tricks for using webinars to boost journals. 

Watch now: Spotlight On… Attracting SDG research to your journal. 

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest!

How we work to promote inclusive practices in book publishing

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Oct 15 2025

We recently published a report that explores our efforts to build inclusive publishing practices in Springer Nature's book publishing programmes. In it, we present data on gender diversity among book authors and editors, exposing a persistent gender gap.  

In this post, we share insights from the report and discuss our efforts to further global inclusion in book publishing.

At  Springer Nature, our mission is to be part of progress, and that begins with inclusion: of people, perspectives, and ideas. We believe that diverse perspectives drive progress, and we are committed to creating an environment where people and ideas can flourish. To be able to represent this diversity in scholarly publishing, we work toward an inclusive publishing landscape.  

In the publishing process, we work with a broad global network of researchers serving as authors, editors, and reviewers. This collaboration gives us both the opportunity and the responsibility to promote unbiased practices and better reflect the evolving demographics of the research community.  

We rely on data to identify gaps, develop approaches, and monitor their impact, in support of our decision making and strategic planning. In the recently published report, titled Inclusive book publishing at Springer Nature, we present findings on gender representation among Springer Nature book authors and editors to illustrate how we are using data-informed insights, and reflect on approaches to improve inclusivity in publishing. 

“I’m proud to see the Books group engaging with and making progress on global inclusion in our publishing activities.”

- Niels Thomas, Executive VP, Books
 

Gender distribution of book authors and editors

We present a first-ever snapshot view of the inferred gender diversity of lead authors and editors and book series editors in Springer Nature. Ultimately, we would like to understand demographics across a broader range of variables. Geographical representation, for instance, is another example in which researcher demographics is undergoing transformation (the rising volume and impact of research from China is an example of this). But gender is a good starting point, especially because we can also compare our findings with gender representation in the research community.  

The snapshot, covering a five-year period (2019-2024), shows that women are underrepresented as authors and editors at Springer Nature: Women represent 29% of lead authors and editors of books, and 24% of book series editors.


Books-DEI-report © Springer Nature


The distribution of book authors and editors varies by discipline and largely tracks with trends on gender representation within the research community. The proportion of women authors also varies by book type, which is also seen in career-stage data of women in academia. 

The pattern of underrepresentation of women in scholarly book publishing corresponds to what we see in editor diversity at Springer Nature journals and what other publishers have reported. Given that women make up 30-50% of researchers globally, these percentages of women researchers as authors and editors in publishing does not reflect the gender representation in the global research community.


Data is essential to identifying disparities and addressing them. We collect information and make it available so that it can empower efforts to understand, recognise, and address challenges of global inclusion.

- Sowmya Swaminathan, Director, DEI, Research Publishing


Building inclusive practices in book publishing

We are working to integrate inclusive practices into our publishing programmes at Springer Nature. The starting point is making sure that knowledge about bias is available, as well as resources and opportunities to support people in turning this knowledge into practice.  

Some of these efforts include: 


  • Peer-to-peer workshops for editors that provide a space to discuss topics related to bias and diversity and to formulate plans to improve diversity of both authors and publications.  
  • Springer Nature’s Intentional Content Strategy that encourages editors to commission work that contributes to the scholarly discourse on topics such as diversity, equity, and inclusion. 
  • Integrating accessibility best practices to ensure our digital products, such as eBooks, meet the needs of all users.

Achieving representation and inclusion in our book publishing programme and beyond requires sustained efforts. Data informs our efforts, measures our progress, and enables us to plan strategically for new initiatives to confront disparities.

To learn more, read the full report: Inclusive book publishing at Springer Nature.

Case study: How one collection led to real-world policy impact and academic recognition

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Oct 14 2025

Early career researchers (ECRs) face a fundamental challenge: how do you transform promising research into real-world impact so it can make a meaningful difference? Springer Nature collections are designed to help ECRs overcome these barriers, offering a platform where research is published, actively promoted, cited, and applied.

This Springer Nature collection case study will guide you through the journey of an article collection that achieved genuine policy influence and academic recognition. You’ll gain behind-the-scenes insights into the editorial process, learn about the impactful research included, and see the real-world results—such as citations in major policy documents and adoption by practitioners. You’ll also find practical guidance on preparing and submitting your own work to collections, with advice from Guest Editors and published collection authors.

The Health System in sub-Saharan Africa collection success story

44250
The Health Systems in Sub-Saharan Africa collection, published in the open-access Discover Health Systems journal, is a compelling example of how Springer Nature collections can help ECRs achieve real-world impact.

From innovative research to global policy, the Health Systems in Sub-Saharan Africa collection demonstrates that early-career researchers can see their work transition from publication to real-world impact, including being cited by the World Health Organization. It’s the kind of influence every ECR aspires to achieve.

Proving that a single collection can have a big impact

  • Cited by the World Health Organization   
  • Published 25 papers  
  • Covered diverse topics from maternal health to chronic disease  
  • Showcased the work of 100+ researchers   
  • Connected authors from 17 countries across 4 continents

P_collections case study number 1 © Springer Nature 2025

A platform for diverse, high-impact research

Launched in August 2023, the Health Systems in Sub-Saharan Africa collection currently comprises 25 papers that examine the challenges and opportunities facing health systems in this region.

Topics include maternal and child health, community health work, substance misuse, chronic disease management, socio-cultural factors affecting healthcare access, and many more.

The collection is intentionally multidisciplinary, welcoming theoretical and empirical work, and open to various methodologies and perspectives. It demonstrates how academic research translates into practical solutions that truly matter.

From research to real-world change: the bridge that works

The Health System in sub-Saharan Africa collection’s impact is tangible and far-reaching:

  • Policy influence

One paper has already been cited in the World Health Organization’s (WHOs) 2024 World Malaria Report, providing clear evidence that the collection's research is taken into account when it comes to global health policy.

  • Practical application

Many of the papers published in the collection offer actionable insights that have already been applied by policymakers and healthcare providers, thereby bridging the gap between academic research and frontline practice.

  • Academic recognition

The collection has sparked significant interest and engagement within the scholarly community, with multiple papers cited in other research and a growing network of reviewers and collaborators.

Showcasing the potential for the practical application of published research

The Health Systems in Sub-Saharan Africa collection is more than an academic showcase; it catalyses real-world change. Three recent papers exemplify how research from this collection can shape policy and improve practice:

1. The safety, quality evaluation, and lot release of COVID-19 vaccines imported and used in Nigeria from March 2021 to March 2022

In this research article, the authors presented one of the first detailed models of its kind from sub-Saharan Africa. Based at the National Agency for Food and Drug Administration and Control (NAFDAC) in Nigeria and the Department of Pharmaceutical Sciences at the University of Michigan, USA, the authors documented Nigeria’s quality assurance process for imported COVID-19 vaccines.

By detailing the rigorous quality control processes in ISO-accredited laboratories, the paper provided a practical model of regulatory requirements for other low- and middle-income countries. The study highlights how robust testing, transparency, and adherence to international standards can strengthen regulatory systems, build public trust, and combat vaccine hesitancy.

2. Pay for a free service, access to cesarean section in the slums of Dakar

Researchers from Kenya, Senegal, and Burkina Faso investigated access to emergency caesarean sections for women in Dakar's slums. The research revealed that significant out-of-pocket costs persist despite a policy guaranteeing free caesarean services in government-run health facilities. 

These costs contribute to further impoverishment of women and undermine the intent of free care policies. By identifying the disconnect between policy and practice, the paper provides a foundation for policymakers to reform financial management and ensure equitable access to lifesaving maternal health services.

3, Cost efficiency of primary health care facilities in Ghana: stochastic frontier analysis

A research team based in Ghana evaluated the cost efficiency of Ghana's primary healthcare facilities using robust statistical methods. The study revealed notable efficiency differences between facility types and identified factors that affect operational performance. The authors proposed adopting telehealth and telemedicine to improve access to and resilience of the health system, especially during health emergencies.

What the Guest Editors had to say about the collection

The collection’s Guest Editors highlighted the valuable contributions of early-career researchers (ECRs) and their fresh insights and innovative approaches.

Our experience with the Health Systems in Sub-Saharan Africa collection revealed a vibrant and growing community of early-career researchers who are driving meaningful policy change through evidence-based research. Their fresh insights and inventive solutions are addressing real-world health system challenges, contributing to scientific progress and impact—from healthcare financing and product quality assurance to modern delivery technologies and global health reports. Supporting these researchers to surface and share their work is not only an investment in future leadership, but also a step toward building resilient, equitable, and sustainable health systems across Sub-Saharan Africa and beyond. Seeing our own paper cited by the WHO and applied by policymakers is the ultimate reward.”

— Guest Editors of the Health Systems in Sub-Saharan Africa collection

Discover logo © Springer Nature 2024
Discover collections: Modern publishing for modern challenges

Discover breaks free from traditional publishing constraints that often limit the impact of early-career researchers. Unlike conventional journals that may prioritise established researchers or have narrow scopes, Discover welcomes diverse methodologies, emerging researchers, and locally grounded perspectives that traditional publications might overlook.

The benefits of publishing to a Discover collection

  • Inclusive publishing 

Discover actively seek contributions from researchers, utilizing targeted outreach and a diverse reviewer pool to ensure representation and maintain high-quality standards.

  • Multi-disciplinary scope 

Discover fosters collaboration and innovation across disciplines by covering everything from policy and governance to clinical practice, opening possibilities for researchers in different relevant disciplines.

  • Open access advantage

With Discover, every article is freely accessible worldwide, maximising your research's reach and citation potential. This isn't just about numbers; it's about ensuring your work reaches the practitioners, policymakers, and communities who can apply your findings.

  • Community-driven support

Guest Editors and the Editorial team provide dedicated support throughout the publishing process. Coordinated marketing campaigns across social media platforms, professional networks, and academic channels ensure your research is published and promoted.

  • Enhanced visibility and networking

Connect with Guest Editors, fellow contributors, and the broader research community. These contacts often lead to future collaborations, conference invitations, and career opportunities that strengthen grant applications and career prospects.

Why early career researchers choose Discover

  • Representative: Your research finds its home

Discovers inclusive approach means targeted outreach through academic networks, regional connections, and professional social platforms, ensuring ECR research from across the continents finds its platform. This representative approach drives innovation and diversity, advancing discovery by welcoming all validated research regardless of origin.

  • Rigorous: The quality that opens doors

Every submission undergoes robust peer review with a carefully curated reviewer pool spanning multiple disciplines. This rigorous process does not slow down ECRs; it accelerates their credibility. When your research appears in a Discover collection, it carries the trusted reputation that policymakers and senior researchers recognise.

  • Rapid: Published at the pace of progress

Discover collections prioritise speed without compromising quality. The streamlined submission process and efficient editorial workflow mean ECRs see their work published quickly, which is crucial when research addresses urgent global health challenges.

  • Reach: Finding the community that matters

The multidisciplinary scope of Discover’s journal collections creates unprecedented networking opportunities, bringing together leading experts, emerging researchers, and innovators from across diverse fields.

  • Why publish to a Discover collection?

The Health Systems in sub-Saharan Africa collection demonstrates that Discover not only publishes research but also helps careers develop. That’s precisely why Discover is trusted by researchers for their values and impact.

As the youngest imprint from Springer Nature, Discover provides ECRs with everything needed to transform promising research into global impact by combining open access publishing, rigorous peer review, and community-driven support. 

Furthermore, whether your research addresses health systems challenges in Africa or elsewhere, Discover offers the platform, support, and reach to ensure your work makes the difference you intended.

What the collection authors had to say

Addressing malaria incidence in Africa through health care expenditure and access to basic sanitation services

Dr Alfred Eboh, a medical sociologist at Kogi State University, and Aderonke Omotayo Adebayo of the University of Ibadan, published an article demonstrating how improvements to healthcare expenditure and access to basic sanitation can reduce malaria cases and deaths. 

By choosing to publish in a Discover collection, Eboh and Adebayo made their work visible and accessible, leading to enhanced impact. In under 18 months, the article attracted five citations and 3500 accesses, underscoring the impact and relevance of publishing open access in a targeted collection.

“Importantly, the WHO’s World malaria report 2024 referenced our study’s insights on the importance of external funding and sanitation in reducing case numbers. This was incredibly gratifying: Seeing our work inform a flagship policy document underscores that rigorous, data‑driven research can, and does, shape global strategies. [...] Ultimately, the impact of these publications and their endorsement in academia and also policy affirm that scholarly work can move beyond citation counts to influence budgets, programmes, and — most importantly — health outcomes on the ground.”

- Dr Alfred Eboh, a medical sociologist at Kogi State University, Nigeria

Read Dr Eboh’s full interview here.

Using economic analysis to inform health resource allocation: lessons from Malawi

Early-career researcher Megha Rao and her co-authors sought to publish their research so that it would reach the very people who could implement their findings and suggestions, thereby making the maximum real-world impact.

Since publication, Rao and her team have received subsequent inquiries from policymakers about adapting and implementing her work across Africa. She says, “Publishing in the collection has given this research significantly greater visibility, particularly because it showcases its real-world application in Malawi. This has acted as a powerful proof-of-concept.”

Moreover, Rao highlights the value of publishing in a collection for early-career researchers. She adds, "For an ECR, the immediate value comes from the credibility it provides. Being included in a curated collection by established editors acts as a 'stamp of approval' and effectively positions my work within the most relevant community of experts and policymakers.”

We've had tangible interest from researchers and health ministries in several other African countries. These aren't just academic inquiries; they are concrete conversations about how to adapt and implement these tools to fit their national contexts, which is exactly the outcome we hoped for.” 

- Megha Rao, Research Fellow for the Thanzi Labwino (Better Health) project at the University of York

Ready to make the wise choice for your research impact? Visit Springer Nature collections to explore open call for papers and discover which collection aligns with your research goals and career ambitions. At Springer Nature, your work will be published, promoted, protected, and positioned for real-world change.

Related content

Shining a light on SDG 3 research: How you can get involved

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Oct 14 2025

Progress on United Nations Sustainable Development Goal 3 'Good Health & Well-being' (SDG 3) takes more than research — it also requires getting that research to the people on the ground, and the people making policy, including both governments and non-governmental organisations (NGOs). Actively helping get this work into the right hands is why Springer Nature has set up SDG hubs and newsletters, including for SDG 3. The hub for SDG 3 covers research spanning four main themes: reproductive, maternal, newborn, and child health; infectious diseases; non-communicable diseases; and health systems and funding. It also looks at improving mental health and minimising environmental health risks. 

SDG 3 at Springer Nature 
SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019

Helping researchers publish — and publicise — their work in these fields is one of the key parts of my job at Springer Nature. By publicise, I mean that staff at Springer Nature devote time and effort into hubs, newsletters, awareness days, webinars, and more, to support SDG-related research.

The SDG Working Group at Springer Nature that I'm involved in focuses on SDG 3. For SDG 3-related work, we not only support these activities, but we highlight them in a bi-monthly SDG 3 newsletter. We publish this newsletter on the Research Communities, where it raises awareness of initiatives that relate to the SDG3 targets. 

SDG 3 Newsletter 

Each newsletter focuses in depth on a broad theme related to the SDG 3 targets. The SDG 3 Newsletter offers a concise overview of recent Springer Nature articles, books, collections, webinars, and relevant conferences. The newsletter also highlights current developments, assessing progress toward SDG 3 targets and sharing ways readers can get involved. 

Boosting SDG 3 research 

We publish this newsletter for you — for researchers working in SDG 3, to showcase and emphasise your work. This is a chance for you to have your work spotlighted for a broader SDG 3-interested audience.  

My team can work with you to create a blog about your research paper, your career, and/or an important event in your research field. These blogs are accessible to everyone, and readers include researchers, policymakers, and industry professionals actively working on SDG 3. The SDG 3 Newsletters earn thousands of views and are a wonderful way of promoting your recent article or shining a light on your research. 

The Springer Nature SDG 3 Working Group members have worked with researchers from a variety of fields including clinical medicine, public health, and social sciences. Read the newsletters to discover researcher Q&As, podcasts, and ‘behind the paper’ blogs.  

What does this look like in practice? You can see that by reading the most recent SDG 3 Newsletters: 

To get involved, please contact me - and follow me on the Research Communities to be alerted when an SDG 3 Newsletter is published

Related content: 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Source Monthly Digest!

Discover journals: Open access funding options for our authors

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Oct 10 2025

Are you an early-career researcher eager to get your work noticed? Publishing open access (OA) is one of the best ways to make sure your research is read, cited, and used around the world. But getting started with OA publishing can feel confusing, especially if you’re new to it.

This blog will guide you through the basics of OA publishing and show how Discover journals make the process straightforward and supportive, especially for new researchers. We’ll explain the benefits for your career and how you can take advantage of open access agreements to make publishing easier and more affordable.

Increase your reach

When you publish openly under an OA license, your article is free for anyone to read right away—no paywalls or subscriptions. This means your work can reach researchers anywhere in the world, including researchers in lower-middle-income countries whose institutions may have to be highly selective with the journal subscriptions they sign up for. OA helps create a fairer research community where everyone has access to the latest science, including researchers, policymakers, practitioners, and the general public.

OA publishing increases the reach of your research. Readers can easily discover and immediately access OA articles, without hitting paywalls or institutional login pages. This results in more impact. Many studies have shown that publishing OA positively influences the number of readers and citations your research receives. Moreover, data from a 2024 report showed that articles in Springer Nature’s fully OA journals were downloaded up to five times more often and received higher citation rates than those in other publishers’ comparable journals. 

This extra attention can lead to new collaborations, a stronger CV, and a faster start to your research career—all especially important if you’re just starting out.

“Discover journals are built to encourage inclusivity, rapid, rigorous review, and global reach. Our publishing models are designed to match that ambition, making it easier than ever for authors to publish open access without compromise. Discover journals reflect the future of publishing: rigorous, fast, fair, and open to all.” 

- Dylan Parker, Publishing Director, Discover at Springer Nature

A journal portfolio built around inclusivity
Discover logo © Springer Nature 2024

Discover is Springer Nature’s newest imprint, breaking with many publishing traditions. Our portfolio of fully OA journals spans a wide range of disciplines, from the hard sciences and medicine to the social sciences and humanities.

Our primary goal is to be inclusive of all research communities and types of research. In some disciplines, up to half of all research findings don’t get published. At Discover, we welcome all valid research, including negative findings and case reports.

Since all articles are available OA from day one, readers can easily access Discover journals and use their content, regardless of where they are in the world.

Our inclusive portfolio has been designed to facilitate multidisciplinary research, so the journals can easily align with the challenges outlined by the United Nation’s Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). Every new journal in the Discover portfolio considers how journal content will contribute to progressing SDGs relevant to the subject matter. In fact, across the Discover portfolio, SDG-related content consistently receives stronger engagement than non-SDG content, with on average 53.9% higher Altmetric scores and 12.6% more citations (Dimensions), highlighting their academic influence. 

We know that you care about getting your results out into the world quickly. The average time between manuscript submission and first decision ranges from one to four weeks. You can easily check this metric for each Discover journal as the median value is listed on its home page, so our authors know what to expect. At the same time, we don’t compromise on quality. All Discover journals follow the ethical standards for research and publication defined by the Committee on Publication Ethics (COPE), so you can trust our rigorous and robust peer-review process. 

“Early-career researchers often face the steepest barriers to publishing. Our goal is to remove those barriers—whether financial, procedural, or institutional—so they can focus on building their careers and contributing to global knowledge. That’s why we’ve designed our OA agreements with all researchers, including early-career researchers, in mind. From fee coverage to simplified workflows, we’re here to support the next generation of scholars.” 

- Caroline Nevison, Director of OA Agreements at Springer Nature

Publishing made simple for early-career researchers

Publishing your first paper can feel overwhelming. There’s a lot to learn—like how to submit, what peer review means, and how to pay for publication. Discover journals are set up to make these steps as simple as possible, so you can focus on sharing your research.

Here’s how Discover journals support early-career researchers from the start:

  • Rigorous peer review underpinned by COPE ethics
  • Rapid decisions for real-time impact 
  • An inclusive scope that welcomes diverse article types and multidisciplinary research 
  • Global reach and impact via OA publications 
  • Straightforward OA agreements with institutions

Our open access agreements make it easy to opt for OA

When publishing OA, authors are typically required to pay an article processing fee (APC) to cover the costs of the editorial process. Many institutions offer financial support to help cover these costs. One way is through OA agreements with publishers—either individually or through a consortium agreement among multiple institutions. 

Your institution’s OA agreement with Springer Nature may provide:  

  • Full APC coverage – 100% of the APC is paid by the institution
  • A percentage discount – e.g. 10% off the list price APC
  • Fixed price coverage – e.g. up to €1,000 paid by the institution.

Our OA agreements with participating institutions worldwide are designed to help reduce both the financial and administrative burdens for authors.

If your institution has such an agreement in place, your OA fees might be covered for the journals included.  

Authors whose institutions are not yet part of an open-access agreement can still benefit from Springer Nature’s OA funding resources, which help locate institutional funds, charitable grants, or waiver programs for researchers in lower-income countries.

Find out if your publishing fee can be covered by an OA agreement

Step 1: Visit the homepage of the Discover journal you want to publish in via Springer Nature Link. Click on “Explore open access funding” underneath the “Submit your manuscript” button. 

P_Discover 01 © Springer Nature 2025

Step 2: Your institution is automatically selected through your IP address, but you can update this to reflect your best fit, or that of your co-authors.

P_Discover 02 © Springer Nature 2025

Step 3: If your university or institution has an agreement with Springer Nature, the eligibility checker will inform you of the available funding options.

P_Discover 03 © Springer Nature 2025

Step 4: If you’re not covered by an OA agreement then explore whether your funder or institution supports APC costs through other routes. Visit Springer Nature’s open access funding & support services for information about research funders and institutions that provide funding for APCs.

Ready to publish OA in a Discover journal?

Our support service team is available to assist you at every step of the submission, review, and publication process. 

Submission

You can submit your manuscript through a journal’s online submission system. Detailed guidelines help you meet the journal’s formatting and content requirements.

Peer review

Once submitted, the manuscript undergoes rigorous peer review. Reviewers assess the validity, originality and significance of your research. Authors may be required to make revisions based on the feedback from reviewers.

Acceptance and publication

Upon acceptance, your manuscript is prepared for publication. This includes formatting, proofreading, and the addition of metadata to enhance discoverability. Your final article is then published online and made freely accessible.

Post-publication

After publication, you can track the impact of your work through metrics such as download counts, citations, and social media mentions.

Make your research count with Discover’s OA journals

Publishing open access doesn’t have to be complicated, and with Discover journals, it’s designed to be empowering. Whether you're an early-career researcher looking to build visibility or simply want your work to reach the widest possible audience, Discover offers a fast, inclusive, and impactful publishing experience. From rigorous peer review to global discoverability and simplified funding through OA agreements, we’re here to support you every step of the way.

Ready to take the next step? Explore our OA funding options for Discover journals and make your research count.

Related content

How research access drives public health innovation

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon Oct 6 2025

In the race to develop life-saving vaccines and diagnostics, access to the right scientific knowledge at the right time can make all the difference. For public health institutions like Bio-Manguinhos, Brazil’s leading producer of immunobiologicals, bridging the gap between global research and local innovation is not just a strategic priority; it’s a public mandate.

For many public health institutions, navigating the vast and fragmented landscape of scientific literature can be a significant barrier. Researchers and technical teams often face delays in accessing peer-reviewed studies, struggle with siloed information systems, or lack the tools to efficiently integrate new findings into their workflows. These challenges can slow down R&D, complicate regulatory submissions, and ultimately delay the delivery of critical health solutions to the populations that need them most.

Like many public health institutions, Bio-Manguinhos, a key player in Brazil’s public health ecosystem, faced these barriers head-on. By rethinking how teams' access and apply scientific research, the organisation not only accelerated innovation but also created a scalable model for others navigating similar challenges. The experience of Bio-Manguinhos offers practical insights for organisations facing similar challenges.

Turning information overload into actionable insight

Public health organizations working at the intersection of science, policy and service delivery face increasing pressure to stay current with global research across diverse disciplines, from virology and immunology to manufacturing and regulatory science. Operating under tight timelines and limited resources, these institutions rely on timely, relevant scientific literature to inform decision-making and drive innovation.

Yet many teams still depend on fragmented systems for research discovery, open-access sources, institutional repositories, and informal sharing networks. This patchwork approach is often time-consuming and inconsistent, making it difficult to integrate new findings into workflows efficiently. The result is slower R&D cycles, challenges in regulatory documentation and delays in delivering health solutions to the populations that need them most.

To overcome these barriers, Bio-Manguinhos implemented a more connected approach to research access. By leveraging curated databases such as AdisInsight, the organisation enabled reliable, immediate access to the latest global research, supporting innovation in vaccines, diagnostics and biopharmaceuticals.

"COVID-19 showed the world that we need to collaborate in different networks that are somehow interconnected. However, most data was still proprietary, and we needed a new paradigm to work around that, so we could move even faster, as much as possible, on a safe ground.” - Beatriz Fialho, Head of Competitive Intelligence at Bio-Manguinhos

This shift allows teams to:

  • Rapidly validate hypotheses with current findings
  • Avoid duplication by building on existing studies
  • Strengthen the scientific foundation of regulatory submissions
  • Foster collaboration across R&D, quality and compliance functions

As one project lead at Bio-Manguinhos described it: “We’re no longer starting from scratch; we’re building on the shoulders of global science.” This was particularly evident in the development of new diagnostic kits, where faster access to studies on viral mutations and detection methods enabled quicker iteration, confident validation and faster time to market.

From faster insights to broader impact

While R&D teams often see the most immediate gains, the ripple effects are felt organization wide. Regulatory affairs teams can support submissions with up-to-date citations. Quality assurance teams reference the latest methodologies. Even onboarding and training improved, as new staff gain easier access to foundational and current literature. As one stakeholder put it, “It’s not just the researchers who benefit regulatory, quality and even training teams now have the resources they need at their fingertips.”

What makes this approach particularly relevant for mission-driven organizations is its scalability and adaptability. Whether a national vaccine producer, a diagnostics lab, or a public research institute, the ability to connect teams with trusted, timely research is a foundational enabler of innovation. And it doesn’t require a complete overhaul of systems. Often, it’s about removing friction, making it easier for people to find what they need, when they need it and use it effectively. That might mean integrating access into existing workflows, offering training on discovery tools or ensuring that licensing models reflect the realities of public sector work.

Ultimately, it’s about amplifying impact. When institutions can move faster, collaborate smarter, and innovate with confidence, the effects extend far beyond the lab. They reach communities, strengthen health systems and accelerate progress toward global health goals.

Lessons for the future of public health innovation

As public health challenges grow more complex, the need for agile, evidence-based innovation will only intensify. Institutions that invest in research connectivity today are better positioned to respond to tomorrow’s crises and to lead in shaping a healthier future. The experience of Bio-Manguinhos offers several practical insights for organizations considering a similar shift:

  • Start with the user: Understand how teams currently access and use research and identify the biggest friction points in their workflows.
  • Think beyond content: Access is essential, but so is usability. Tools should be intuitive, integrated and aligned with how people actually work.
  • Measure what matters: Go beyond usage metrics. Track how improved access accelerates projects, enhances quality or supports strategic goals.
  • Build for the long term: Choose solutions that can evolve with the organization and adapt to changing research needs and institutional priorities.

In the race to develop life-saving vaccines and diagnostics, timely access to the right scientific knowledge can be the difference between delay and delivery. For public health institutions worldwide, bridging global research with local innovation is increasingly essential. Take a closer look at the full case study for more detailed view of how Bio-Manguinhos approached this transformation and how similar strategies can help other public health institutions strengthen research access, accelerate innovation and deliver greater impact across their communities.

Related Content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts today!

Giving great research the attention it deserves

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Thu Oct 2 2025

It’s the start of October, and for those of us in and around the research community that means it’s time to get excited about learning who, and what, will be selected for the Nobel prize this year. 

The Nobel prizes are truly unique in their global recognition and reach.  The research-oriented prizes are a once-a-year celebration of the value and impact of groundbreaking fundamental research, and the vital role it plays in moving us and our planet forward.  Countries around the world are justifiably proud of the number of winners they can claim as their own, either through origin or through adopted home.  The city where I live, Boston (USA), even has a display celebrating local winners adorning one terminal of its main airport.  

At Nature Portfolio, we too are proud of the part that we have played in this history.  Each year when the Nobel prize announcements come out, we celebrate the winners and their contributions by highlighting the articles they have chosen to publish with us (see for example the 2024 Nobel Prize in Chemistry). Looking back over time, we are grateful that 75% of the researchers who have received scientific Nobel prizes (Physiology or Medicine, Chemistry, Physics) in the past 50 years have chosen to publish at least some of their work in Nature and Nature Portfolio journals.   

Publication is an important part of the overall research process, and our journals have stood the test of time.  For over 150 years, Nature and the Nature Portfolio of journals have focused on giving important research advances a platform that brings them to the research community and beyond.  Much has changed about the publishing process in that time – including distribution mechanisms, approaches to peer review, introduction of open access models, and community expectations around reporting and sharing to ensure rigor and reproducibility, and Nature Portfolio journals have often played a leading role in moving the community forward.  But what has not changed is the value that authors, reviewers, and readers place on journals that bring together important advances across fields and highlight them to the world. 

As a member of the Nature Portfolio team, I get to work every day with a talented team of scientific editors who are focused on bringing that value to life.   Across our Nature-branded research journals we currently employ over 450 full-time professional editors for research manuscripts. They all have advanced domain expertise that helps them not only evaluate the evidence and conclusions reached in each paper, but also to select the most important and rigorous work for publication. For Nature itself, this means that each editor carefully evaluates 12 papers to find one that the community would expect to see in the journal. At other Nature Portfolio research journals this ratio can be a little higher or a little lower.   

As part of this evaluation process, our editors use their expertise to identify a curated set of specialist reviewers who make an in-depth assessment of the work and ensure that the results fully support the conclusions.  They also work with authors to guide them in revising and developing their paper, including making sure that they meet our high standards for research integrity and reproducibility, and that their methods, data, and code are documented and available, through a constructive and interactive dialogue approach that sets our journals apart.  It’s no coincidence that in post-publication surveys 90% of Nature Portfolio authors agree that “the advice and comments from manuscript editors helped to improve their paper”, and as one recent author said “I would like to sincerely thank you for the quality of the editorial process. It was highly professional at every stage, with solid reviewers who provided insightful comments, and an editorial team that combined scientific rigor with a flexible and open attitude. It has truly been a pleasure to work with you.” 

All of that care is manifest in the value we give authors in terms of the recognition and visibility of their work. As an illustration, research articles in Nature-branded journals published in 2024 have each been cited on average 21.7 times per year, 8 times more than articles published in an average Springer Nature journal, which are cited 2.8 times on average, and downloaded over 12,000 times per year, compared to just over 900 times at an average journal—an impressive 13 times more. To complement the research articles we publish, we also commission commentaries to highlight and interpret research findings, and our press team work in collaboration with researchers and media organizations to ensure that important research advances have wider reach.  Nature itself also has an award-winning magazine news and comment team, reporting on research advances and other issues relevant to the research community.   

Maintaining these high standards, along with the infrastructure and technology needed to support them, does come at a cost, covered through journal subscriptions or open access publishing fees. In keeping with community expectations, our research journals all now offer an open access APC-based publishing option, either exclusively (Nature Communications) or as a choice for authors, and the APC levels associated with our journals reflect the investment we put in.  It’s worth highlighting, though, that while our APCs are 2-4x higher than average, if compared to receiving 8 or 13 times more citations and downloads, respectively, the “return on investment” for researchers of publishing in Nature Portfolio journals in terms of quality, visibility and reach remains high.  We estimate that historically only around 1% of the grant funding awarded by agencies such as the NIH or the EU has gone towards the cost of publication, which we view as helping to unlock the value of the remaining 99% for researchers, institutions, industry and the public. 

We think of ourselves as partners for the research community.  All of the credit for the research ideas and the effort involved in testing them of course goes to the researchers themselves.  Our role is to help make sure that reporting of that research meets the highest standards of rigor, transparency, and reproducibility, and that other people can see what the researchers have learned, will trust, understand, and appreciate it, and can then build on and apply it.  With our support as a high-quality global publisher, the researchers who did the work get the platform and recognition they deserve, and readers around the world can use the new insights to guide their own future journey. 

Related Tags:

Bringing SDG research to the forefront: A look at the Research Communities

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Oct 1 2025

The Research Communities help bridge the gap between research and global impact by spotlighting work aligned with the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). Through features like SDG badges and curated content, these digital communities make it easier for researchers to discover, share, and amplify SDG-focused research.

I spoke with Yuanxin Zhang to learn more about the SDG-focused content being published on the Research Communities and how researchers can get involved to increase the visibility of their own work.

Springer Nature Research Communities © Springer Nature 2025

Tell me a little about the Research Communities

The Research Communities are vibrant digital communities which connect researchers and research-interested audiences around the world. By fostering connections on a global scale, the Communities help researchers expand their networks, discover new findings and hear directly from those at the cutting edge of research.  

In the Communities, researchers can explore the latest research findings, generate discussions with peers and dive into relevant news and opinions from leaders in the field. Whichever Community they join, all are united under the same goal – to provide them with access to the latest information and foster informed discussions to aid collaboration and drive the advancement of science and discovery by connecting the research community on a global scale. 

A new feature: the SDG badges. How do these work?

Content in the Research Communities that is especially relevant to one or more of the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) is now marked with an SDG badge.  

P_RCSDGbadges © Springer Nature 2025

The aim is to increase the visibility of SDG-relevant work and help researchers better understand how their contributions connect to global sustainability challenges.  

These badges, added by the Communities team or the authors themselves, make it easier to identify, explore, and showcase SDG-related research. Researchers can filter content by SDG badge, see the badge displayed on individual posts, and browse SDG-specific pages (e.g. SDG 3) that bring together all related content in one place. 

Do you see a lot of SDG-relevant content being published on the Research Communities?

Yes – SDG-relevant content appears widely across the Research Communities, with contributions reflecting the many ways research from across disciplines supports the UN goals. 

Sustainability Springer Nature Research Community © Springer Nature 2025

The Sustainability Community in particular provides a strong focus, bringing together research on a wide spectrum of topics – from eco-friendly recycling for retired wind blades (SDG 12), urban walkability and climate adaptation (SDG 11 & 13), and wave energy technologies (SDG 7), to sustainable agriculture and food security (SDG 2), climate-related health and economic impacts (SDG 3), and social equity, institutional change, and community resilience (SDG 10 & 16). This diversity shows how SDG discussions cut across life sciences, social sciences, and applied sciences.

Across all Communities, content also appears in multiple channels – from Behind the Paper stories and editorial insights in the From the Editors category, to News & Opinion pieces, Events, and Opportunities – making it easy for researchers to discover and engage with work that supports sustainable development.

What is the top SDG-related content you’ve seen published in the last few months?

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019
In the past few months, several blog posts focused on SDGs have stood out for their strong engagement. These include awareness day reflections linking research to global challenges, SDG Talks seminars that spark live discussion, curated SDG Newsletters highlighting recent research and news for specific SDG, behind-the-scenes research stories contributing to sustainable development, as well as call for paper posts to journals or Collections addressing SDG themes.

Recent popular SDG-related blog posts include:

How can someone start their journey on the Research Communities?

It’s easy to get started – simply register to join the Research Communities. Once registered, researchers can easily stay up to date by following Communities and Topics that match their interests, as well as other members across the network. Their personalised Activity Feed then provides a curated stream of the latest content and interactions, while ‘Digest’ emails highlight newly tagged content directly in their inbox. Following ensures they never miss important developments and helps them stay engaged with the wider research conversation. 

Authors from across Springer Nature’s Journals and Books are invited to contribute a Behind the Paper post on their recently published work – or to share their perspectives through other types of blog posts such as Life in Research or News and Opinion

For more tips, a quick guide to navigating the Research Communities introduces these and other useful features. 

Take a closer look at the Research Communities to expand your network and discover the latest research findings. 

P_056Q3_SDG-2025-6th_Yuanxin-Z_140x140px © SpringerNature2025


Yuanxin Zhang, Manager - Research Communities, Springer Nature

Yuanxin Zhang works with the Researcher Engagement team at Springer Nature, based in Beijing, China, supporting the Humanities and Social Sciences research areas across the Research Communities. Passionate about sustainability, she helps to promote SDG-relevant content through curated highlights and cross-disciplinary engagement. She also contributes blog posts and community updates that share exciting research, highlight new initiatives, and connect researchers with conversations on global challenges.


Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Source Monthly Digest!

Reproducibility as a competitive advantage in life science R&D

T
The Link
By: undefined, Thu Sep 25 2025

Reproducibility is receiving a lot more attention in life science research and for good reason. It’s becoming a key factor in how companies manage risk, speed up innovation and build trust in their results. This blog looks at how reproducibility is evolving beyond academia and why it matters for corporate R&D teams, biotech firms and research-driven businesses. It also explores practical ways to make reproducibility part of everyday workflows, so research can move faster, scale better and deliver more value.

Reproducibility is becoming a real advantage in corporate research. When research is well-documented and easy to repeat, teams can build on previous work more smoothly, collaborate more easily and deliver results that others can rely on with confidence. It’s about making methods clear, accessible and useful so that research can move faster, scale better and support broader impact. For corporate R&D teams, reproducibility ensures that research outputs are audit-ready, traceable, and reliable across global teams and external partners. It supports data integrity, simplifies review processes and builds confidence in results.

The business value of reproducible research

Reproducibility plays a central role in meeting regulatory expectations and strengthening research integrity. Clear, consistent practices such as detailed methods, open data and standardized reporting are increasingly supported by both publishers and regulators. Tools like reproducibility checklists and transparent documentation are becoming standard across the publishing and compliance landscape, aligning with frameworks like Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and Good Clinical Practice (GCP).

Beyond compliance, reproducibility also enables more effective collaboration. When research is well-documented and openly shared, it becomes easier for teams across industry, academia and government to align goals and build on each other’s work. Structured reporting and open data practices help make research outputs easier to interpret, replicate and integrate into new projects supporting smoother technology transfer, more productive partnerships and stronger outcomes in joint initiatives.

As Dr. Ruth Timme, GenomeTrakr Program Lead at the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, highlighted in a recent webinar, reproducibility starts early in the research process. Sharing methods before discoveries are finalized can have a profound effect from enabling PhD students to contribute novel techniques to helping public health teams respond to emerging threats. This proactive approach helps create a research culture built on clarity, openness and collaboration.

A 2021 study in BMC Research Notes found that researchers who adopt reproducible practices tend to produce work that is more widely reused and cited. For companies, this translates into greater visibility, stronger influence and higher returns on research investment. Reputation grows, innovation scales and competitiveness strengthens when organizations embed reproducibility into their strategic approach, turning research investment into visible, influential returns.

Strategies that scale reproducible research

Forward-thinking companies are already taking action to adopt reproducibility as a core part of their research culture. Common strategies include:

  • Standardizing protocols and data formats to ensure consistency across teams and locations.
  • Investing in digital infrastructure that supports FAIR data principles, making research outputs findable, accessible, interoperable and reusable.
  • Incentivizing transparent practices by aligning KPIs and performance metrics with reproducibility goals.
  • Providing training and tools that help teams adopt reproducible workflows and use AI responsibly to support documentation and data quality.

As research teams grow and projects become more complex, reproducibility becomes essential to scaling effectively. Technology is playing a key role in making this possible. Digital tools and AI-powered platforms are helping teams document experiments automatically, standardize metadata and manage version control ensuring that research remains consistent and traceable, even as it expands across departments, locations, and collaborators. Structured reporting formats and digital lab notebooks make it easier to replicate and build on results, reducing friction in handovers and accelerating project timelines. Tools like protocols.io and Springer Nature Experiments support this by enabling researchers to share and adapt methods across teams and disciplines.

Turning reproducibility into a strategic advantage

Reproducibility is emerging as a strategic advantage in life science R&D, one that supports compliance, strengthens collaboration and drives long-term innovation. By embedding reproducible practices into everyday workflows, research teams can deliver results that are more transparent, scalable and ready for downstream application. Whether it’s aligning with regulatory frameworks, enabling cross-functional teamwork or increasing the visibility and impact of research outputs, reproducibility is helping organizations move faster and with greater confidence.

If you’d like to explore practical ways to support reproducibility in your research workflows, tools like protocols.io and Springer Nature Experiments are a great place to start. These platforms make it easier to share, adapt and compare experimental methods, helping teams document their work clearly, replicate results confidently and build on existing research with ease.

Related Content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts today!

Guest Editor Q&A: Becoming a Springer Nature Guest Editor

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Sep 25 2025

Behind every Springer Nature Collection are guest editors whose expertise and dedication transform ideas into impactful academic resources. In this blog, we go behind the scenes and ask two early career researchers, Carlton J. Fong and Christopher S. Rozek, what it takes to guest edit a Springer Nature Collection.

From recruiting diverse voices to navigating peer review and promoting the final work, Carlton J. Fong and Christopher S. Rozek share what it really means to be a guest editor. They reflect on the challenges, the rewards, and the career-shaping impact of curating a Collection that spans educational, developmental, and cultural psychology. 

Whether you're an early career researcher or a seasoned academic, their insights offer a valuable look into the editorial journey and might just inspire your own. 

Fong and Rozek came together through their shared passion for school belonging—a field that focuses on how accepted, respected, included, and supported students feel in educational settings.  

Fong is an associate professor of post-secondary student success in the College of Education at Texas State University. And Rozek is an assistant professor in the Department of Education at Washington University in St. Louis.  

10648
Driven by a bold vision to create a one-stop hub for diverse perspectives, Fong and Rosek guest edited the pioneering Collection: Perspectives on Current and Future Directions in School Belonging Research, from the hybrid Springer journal, Educational Psychology Review.  

The Collection brings together new literature on primary through to post-secondary level school belonging, and includes perspectives from educational, developmental and cultural psychology, and beyond.  

We spoke to Fong and Rozek to learn more about their guest editor journeys and to ask what advice they had for other early career researchers who share the ambition to create a Collection in their own areas of expertise. 

What did the guest editor role entail day-to-day? 

Fong: There were a lot of moving pieces throughout the process. Some of the more practical things were guiding the authors, keeping them engaged, and making sure they were following through with their revisions and their timelines. We also worked closely with peer reviewers; they played a huge role. As guest editors we recruited the reviewers, answered their questions, and had them provide critiques and constructive feedback for authors. A special part of the role was taking all the reviewer comments, reading and evaluating the manuscripts, and synthesising all the feedback into actionable steps for the authors on how to improve their work. 

Rozek: There were different phases. At the beginning, we were doing the recruiting and planning; we were doing the intentional thinking about what we wanted the Collection to be and what kind of impact we wanted it to have. We were very conscious about inviting people who would cover a wide variety of topics; we also had an open call for papers. Once we started getting the papers in, we were in the editorial phase. We had very specific ideas about topics we wanted covered and perspectives we wanted included. We worked closely with our author teams to ensure that the papers they were contributing would relate to those topics and perspectives. Another part was promotion. As guest editors, we wanted to get the word out; we wanted people to know we were building a resource where they could find all these different perspectives and great theories about school belonging. 

Has the role influenced your career goals?  

Fong: It’s impacted my personal goals on multiple levels. I want to become an expert in this area and what better way to achieve that goal than by being an editor? You’re reviewing so much of the literature, so many ideas. You’re thinking critically about the topic over long periods of time, you’re working with authors and their ideas. It’s really sharpened my thinking and deepened my expertise. A secondary goal has been to network—to connect with scholars that I might not otherwise have had the opportunity to work with. 

Rozek: It’s been very rewarding for me and my career goals. I’ve been an author and a reviewer, and I’ve been on editorial boards, but this was my first big editorial experience. It’s been great to see what it’s like to be a journal editor, to really understand what the process is like. Another nice part—as an early career researcher—is that it increases your visibility in the field; it’s an opportunity to work with big-name scholars. 

What did you learn from this experience that you didn’t expect when going into it?

Fong: We had a diverse set of peer reviewers, and I was surprised to see how these scholars had different perspectives when they were reviewing the work; how they had disagreements about certain things. It was a good learning experience—peer reviewers bring different perspectives to the table and that enriches scholarly discussion. 

Rozek: Perhaps the most surprising thing I learned was just how big a project it was—it’s something that you’re committing to for a long time. Carlton and I came up with this idea back in 2023, and we wanted to play a role in helping to shape some of the papers in our Collection. That’s been a big but very rewarding commitment 

What did you enjoy most about the role and how did it fit with your other research and professional commitments?  

Fong: I beam with joy when I see the final articles—in print or online—in their final form; see the growth from the original submissions; see how the papers have evolved by integrating and taking on different comments and perspectives. Truly, feedback does make something much better. 

Rozek: The best way to balance the commitment is to ensure that the topic is something that is intertwined with your research. When your research has connections to, and overlaps with, the Collection topic, it makes that commitment a lot easier.

What advice would you give early career researchers who are interested in becoming guest editors? 

Fong: Have a bold and clear vision. That guided us through every step of developing our Collection. We wanted it to be a one-stop-shop for current and future belonging researchers; we had that vision and we stuck to it. That helped us through what can be a long process. 

Rozek: Reach out to people who’ve done it before, it’ll help demystify the process. I didn’t know much about doing this beforehand, but I have learned a lot and feel much more confident about being able to do it again. Also, make sure that it’s something that you’re really interested in and passionate about, something you’re very knowledgeable about. 

And finally, would you take on the role again? 

Fong: I would do it again in a heartbeat. There are just so many benefits. I recommend it to all scholars. We become scholars because we want to generate and curate knowledge. There’s no better way—in my mind—to deepen your knowledge and share knowledge with others than to edit a Collection. 

Rozek: It would need to be the right topic, but it has been an extremely rewarding process, and I would be really excited about doing it again. 

If you are interested in becoming a guest editor or publishing your research in a Springer Nature Collection visit our new Collections hub to find out more.

Related Content

How eTextbooks empower modern learning: Insights for librarians

T
The Link
By: undefined, Thu Sep 18 2025

As digital learning continues to grow, librarians are in a strong position to support students and faculty in navigating new educational technologies. One of the most impactful tools in this space is the eTextbook. These resources go beyond digital convenience, offering flexible, interactive and inclusive ways to learn. Drawing on insights from educators and authors, this blog highlights how eTextbooks are enhancing learning and how librarians are helping make that happen.

Personalized learning that adapts to students

Personalization is shaping how students engage with academic content. Modern eTextbooks are designed to support individual learning styles and are often integrated with adaptive platforms that tailor the experience to each learner’s pace, preferences, and progress. These platforms offer:

  • Reading paths that adjust to student performance and interests
  • Built-in quizzes and feedback to reinforce understanding
  • Difficulty levels that adapt to support continued growth

“Students can engage with the material at their own pace; revisit concepts as needed and test their understanding through interactive features. It’s a much more flexible and supportive environment than traditional textbooks.” Daniela Witten, Professor of Statistics & Biostatistics, Dorothy Gilford Endowed Chair at University of Washington

For librarians, this opens opportunities to recommend resources that align with diverse learning styles. Whether supporting first-year students building foundational knowledge or advanced learners exploring complex topics, personalized eTextbooks help meet students where they are. Librarians can also collaborate with faculty to integrate these tools into course design, ensuring that students benefit from adaptive learning from day one.

Supporting microlearning with modular design

The modular structure of many eTextbooks is ideal for microlearning, an approach that breaks content into smaller, focused segments. This format works especially well for students who are balancing coursework with jobs, internships and other responsibilities. Modular eTextbooks allow students to:

  • Access specific topics quickly, supporting just-in-time learning.
  • Review key concepts in manageable chunks, improving retention.
  • Fit study sessions into busy schedules, promoting consistent engagement.

“Students today are looking for ways to learn efficiently. Modular content allows them to dive into specific topics when they need them, without having to wade through entire chapters.” Steven Skiena, Professor of Computer Science at Stony Brook University

Librarians can use this format to create targeted resource guides; support flipped classroom models and offer curated reading lists aligned with course objectives. Modular content also supports lifelong learning, making it easier for alumni and professionals to revisit material as their careers evolve.

Encouraging engagement through interactivity

Engagement plays a vital role in effective learning, and today’s eTextbooks are designed to encourage active participation. Far from static content, these digital resources offer dynamic features that help students connect with material in meaningful ways. Common elements include:

  • Videos and simulations that bring complex concepts to life
  • Gamified features like badges, progress tracking and leaderboards that motivate learners
  • Interactive exercises that promote exploration, experimentation and self-assessment

“Interactivity is no longer a bonus, it’s an expectation. Students respond positively to content that challenges them, rewards progress and mirrors the digital environments they’re accustomed to.” Dr. Loretta Bartolini, Editor Mathematics at Springer Nature

Librarians can play a key role in helping students discover and use these features, whether through orientation sessions, digital literacy workshops or one-on-one consultations. Interactive eTextbooks open the door to deeper engagement and collaborative learning. With features that encourage exploration and teamwork, students can connect with content more actively, share ideas and build understanding together, strengthening the sense of community in digital learning environments.

Promoting accessibility and inclusivity

Accessibility is a core value in libraries and eTextbooks are helping extend that commitment in meaningful ways. Designed to support a wide range of learners, today’s digital textbooks include features such as:

  • Text-to-speech options for auditory learning and visual support
  • Adjustable fonts, contrast settings and layouts to enhance readability
  • Multilingual support that empowers non-native speakers to engage confidently with content

“Digital formats allow us to reach students who might otherwise struggle with traditional materials. Whether it’s through screen readers, language options, or customizable interfaces, eTextbooks are making learning more inclusive.” Dr. N.S Punekar, professor at Indian Institute of Technology Bombay

Inclusive learning thrives when students have access to tools that meet a variety of needs and librarians are instrumental in making that possible. Through collaboration with faculty, campus services and technology teams, librarians help ensure that eTextbooks offer meaningful accessibility features. Their advocacy for equitable licensing and inclusive platform standards further strengthens institutional efforts to support all learners.

Librarians as digital learning partners

As higher education continues to embrace digital tools, librarians are leading the way in integrating eTextbooks into academic life. Their expertise in resource evaluation, licensing, metadata and user education positions them as key contributors to meaningful and effective digital transformation. Key contributions include:

  • Evaluating platforms for usability, accessibility and learning value
  • Collaborating with faculty to align resources with curriculum goals
  • Educating students on how to use interactive and adaptive features
  • Advocating licensing models that support broad and inclusive access

“Librarians are the bridge between technology and pedagogy. Their expertise ensures that digital tools are not just available but effectively used.” Dr. Loretta Bartolini, Editor Mathematics at Springer Nature

Librarians continue to expand the impact of eTextbooks, supporting student success, enhancing teaching and shaping the future of academic resource delivery.

Shaping the future of learning

eTextbooks are reshaping how students connect with academic content. With features that support personalized learning, modular design, interactive engagement and inclusive access, they offer a flexible and forward-thinking approach to education.

For librarians, this shift presents a valuable opportunity to lead in digital innovation, ensuring that students and faculty benefit from tools that enhance learning and teaching. As education continues to evolve, libraries remain essential hubs of knowledge, technology and collaboration. Through the thoughtful integration of eTextbooks, librarians are expanding their impact, championing inclusive learning, advancing equity and helping shape a more connected and engaging academic future.

To learn more about Springer Nature’s textbook formats and how they support modern learning, visit the textbook information page. Explore the voices and ideas that inspired this article through these interviews and case studies:

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Peer review in the age of AI: the good, the bad and ugly

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Tue Sep 16 2025

Observations on AI and peer review from the 10th International Congress on Peer Review and Scientific Publication 

Earlier this month I had the pleasure to attend the 10th Peer Review Congress in beautiful Chicago. The Peer Review Congress brings together editors, meta-researchers, publishers and technologists from across the world, and, like previous editions, this year was packed with excellent presentations on scholarly publishing. That inevitably meant that a big part of the program was dedicated to research integrity. And of course, like every conference in the last two years, AI was a major theme, similar to this year's Peer Review Week, Rethinking Peer Review in the AI Era. 

Several presentations at the Peer Review Congress were about studies on the use of AI by researchers or on how AI use was declared and acknowledged, and mirrored the feedback we have received as well.  A sizeable survey presented by the editorial team at The BMJ found that for authors who had disclosed the use of AI, 87% of them stated that they had used AI to improve the quality of writing, and a study by editors at JAMA reported something similar. Another similar survey involving Chinese medical researchers found that many researchers were hesitant to use AI or to self-report it on submission, noting a lack of consistent AI usage guidelines, with many different journals applying various levels of permitted usage and disclosure requirements. This hesitancy was echoed in a recent Nature survey of over 5,000 researchers, which found that although 65% considered it ethically acceptable to use AI to generate text, only 8% had done so to draft a manuscript—and most chose not to disclose it. These findings underscore a growing disconnect between ethical acceptance and actual practice, reinforcing the need for clearer, harmonised guidance across the publishing ecosystem. Publishers, including Springer Nature, are currently working together on precisely this through STM, who have released for feedback a draft report detailing a clear framework to help publishers define, evaluate, and guide the transparent use of AI in manuscript preparation. 

The same concerns apply to the use of AI in peer review. We’re already seeing some instances of AI being used in the peer review process in problematic ways: it can lead to sloppy and lazy peer review, with reviewers simply letting ChatGPT to do the work.   However, we shouldn’t think it’s not all be bad.  One relatively small-scale study by the BMJ indicates that peer review reports by LLMs 'matched or exceeded human reviewers on a few key dimensions of review quality’. These indicators included identifying strengths and weaknesses, as well as providing useful comments on the writing or the article and the organisation and presentation of the data.

Still, I believe that, fundamentally, peer review must ultimately remain a human endeavour. At its heart, peer review should be a fair and critical evaluation of a manuscript by the authors’ peers, with the ultimate goal to improve the quality of the article. Looking at it like that, simply putting papers into ChatGPT means something is lost. It’s not only about human accountability, there are other aspects that only humans can add:  

  • Contextual understanding: AI may struggle to grasp the nuances of interdisciplinary research, emerging methodologies, or the significance of a study within its field. As the old adage goes, there’s no substitute for experience. 
  • Ethical judgment: Machines can flag inconsistencies, but they cannot weigh the moral implications of a study’s design or its societal impact. 
  • Empathy and tone: Constructive feedback is about guiding authors toward improvement as well as pointing out flaws. This requires emotional intelligence and cultural sensitivity. 

We shouldn't discount the numerous ways AI could support peer reviewers, as long as clear ethical boundaries are set and technologies used responsibly. This is something many of my colleagues are working on and some elements are already in testing.  

Integrity is at the core of how we view scholarly publishing. As AI itself is evolving, researchers’ and reviewers’ usage of and attitude towards the use of AI is also changing, and we need to reflect that, whilst centring our responsible AI policy and focus on integrity. This means that we continue to: 

  • Evolve and communicate our policies on AI use in authorship and review  
  • Support researchers with training and guidance on responsible AI use  
  • Invest in tools that detect manipulation without compromising fairness 

And throughout this ongoing time of change, we must ensure that human insight, compassion, and accountability remain at the heart of the process.